1 |
Rita Rogers |
REACHING FOR THE CHILDREN |
|
The amazing autobiography of a
Romany medium who has brought comfort to hundreds of bereaved parents.
Gifted with the Romany psychic powers, Rita Rogers struggled for a long
time to avoid the knowledge it brought – until she encountered the first
of many bereaved parents. It was then that her true vocation revealed
itself, and she dedicated herself to helping to heal their grief by
specialising in "spirit children”. |
|
First edition 1990 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
2 |
Rita Rogers |
FROM ONE WORLD TO ANOTHER |
|
Understanding the extraordinary
gifts and life work of one of Britain's most respected mediums. This
book explores the strands of Rita Rogers’s extraordinary life and her
own philosophy of the spirit world, with first-hand accounts of
remarkable encounters. Many of these are deeply moving, although Rita’s
inimitable personality also brings more than a touch of humour to some
of these most astonishing true-life experiences. |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
3 |
Stephen O’Brien |
VISIONS OF ANOTHER WORLD |
|
Phantom heads hammering on a
door in the dead of night: "The Spirit World was calling" and Stephen
O'Brien had to accept the remarkable powers which brought him Visions of
Another World. An autobiography of one of Britain's most famous
mediums. |
|
First edition 1989 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
4 |
Stephen O'Brien |
VOICES FROM HEAVEN |
|
Stephen shares more of his
incredible adventures and psychic experiences. Reunions for the
bereaved. Startling messages from famous deceased such as Marilyn Monroe
and Lord Olivier. Transported back in time and given glimpses of the
future. Plus fascinating accounts of his many journeys into the spirit
world itself. |
|
First edition 1991 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
5 |
Stephen O'Brien |
IN TOUCH WITH ETERNITY |
|
A book packed with information,
comfort and joy he brings to thousands of followers on his nationwide
tours and media appearances. Through his acclaimed psychic powers and
out-of-body experiences he answers many questions and reveals what life
is really like on the other side. |
|
First edition 1992 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
6 |
Stephen O'Brien |
ANGELS BY MY SIDE |
|
Stephen O'Brien provides
impressive evidence of the survival of the soul beyond death. He also
shares with us timeless wisdom from the "silent sentinels" who watch
over us and unveils fascinating glimpses into mankind's future. |
|
First edition 1994 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
7 |
Stephen O'Brien |
A GIFT OF GOLDEN LIGHT |
|
Stephen recalls his exciting
psychic apprenticeship. He strives to perfect his extraordinary
spiritual skills that leads him to bring happiness, comfort and hope to
millions of people. |
|
First edition 1995 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
8 |
Jess Stearn |
EDGAR CAYCE THE SLEEPING PROPHET |
|
The Edgar Cayce story is one of
the most compelling in inspirational literature. For more than forty
years the "Sleeping Prophet" closed his eyes, entered an altered state
of consciousness and spoke to the very heart and spirit of mankind on
subjects such as health, healing, dreams, meditation and reincarnation. |
|
First edition 1967 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
9 |
Mary Ellen Carter |
EDGAR CAYCE ON PROPHESY |
|
This remarkable book includes
hundreds of predictions on domestic, international, psychological and
scientific affairs. Told mainly in Cayce's own words this is an
informative and illuminating guide which every student of world affairs,
science and parapsychology will want to read. |
|
First edition 1972 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
10 |
Robert C Smith |
EDGAR CAYCE ON REMEMBERING YOUR PAST LIVES |
|
A new breakthrough work which
will help you get in touch with, and benefit from, your former lifetimes
and gain important insights into who you truly are today. |
|
First edition 1989 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
11 |
Dr Harmon H Bro |
EDGAR CAYCE ON DREAMS |
|
This books reveals Cayce's revolutionary psychic perceptions on what dreams mean and how to interpret them. |
|
First edition 1989 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
12 |
Doris Agee |
EDGAR CAYCE ON ESP |
|
This book opens up a
bewildering area of human "extrasensory perception" capacities. The
remarkable topics covered include out-of-body travel, clairvoyance,
auras, telepathy, precognition, dreams and personal psychic development. |
|
First edition 1989 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
13 |
Howard Murphet |
SAI BABA - MAN OF MIRACLES |
|
The story of India's God Man
who has raised a great deal of interest the world over. This book deals
mainly with Sai Baba's background - his birth, childhood and early life.
The response to this book was staggering. |
|
First edition 1978 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
14 |
Howard Murphet |
SAI BABA - AVATAR |
|
Continuing on from "Man of
Miracles" this book seeks to explain the profound subject of Sai Baba,
his path and the spiritual truths that he manifests. It also gives
accounts of the personal experiences of many who have benefited from his
spiritual strength. |
|
First edition 1978 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
15 |
Peggy Mason Ron Laing |
SATHYA SAI BABA - THE EMBODIMENT OF LOVE |
|
The authors were asked to
gather together under one cover the various articles written and
published by them in connection with their love and experience of Sai
Baba including their pilgrimage to India in 1980 which proved to be the
most inspiring and overwhelming event of their lives. |
|
First edition 1982 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
16 |
D M A Leggett M G Payne |
A FORGOTTEN TRUTH |
|
With calm appraisal the authors
- two eminent academics - consider the fact of man's material existence
being subordinate to his spiritual. The forgotten truth which they seek
to uncover is that of serial existence - reincarnation in its
little-understood form. |
|
First edition 1986 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
17 |
M W Tester |
HOW TO BE HEALTHY, WEALTHY AND WISE |
|
A "do-it-yourself" manual to
life, written in a simple, easy to read style. This book shows you how
to get and keep healthy, demonstrates how to become successful and
wealthy and gives practical advice that can be applied to every problem
every day. A book that will surprise. |
|
First edition 1972 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
18 |
Elsie H Salmon |
NEW KEY TO HEALING |
|
A handbook written by world-renowned healer Mrs Salmon, after her healing tour of the British Isles in 1953. |
|
First edition 1954 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
19 |
Peter Spink |
BEYOND BELIEF |
|
Beyond Belief is for everyone
who is seeking a God they can know and experience directly. Written in
the form of a journey, this book directs you towards a dimension within
yourself where such a God is to be found. Meditation techniques and
practical advice is given to awaken and cultivate mystical
consciousness. |
|
First edition 1996 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
20 |
Ronald Alford |
JOYOUS INHERITANCE |
|
Beyond Belief is for everyone
who is seeking a God they can know and experience directly. Written in
the form of a journey, this book directs you towards a dimension within
yourself where such a God is to be found. Meditation techniques and
practical advice is given to awaken and cultivate mystical
consciousness. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
21 |
Sir Oliver Lodge Transcribed by Raymond Smith |
NOBODY WANTS TO LISTEN - AND YET |
|
The unique mind of Sir Oliver
Lodge born in 1851, famous scientist and a psychical researcher reaches
back from the world beyond through the transcribed trance sittings of
medium Raymond Smith "proving" for those prepared to listen that life
does indeed go on. |
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
22 |
Raymond Van de Weyer |
THE CALL TO HERESY |
|
"The call to Heresy" offers a
radical new reading of Christian history, and of the Christian faith
itself. Only by rediscovering the subversive elements in our faith shall
we learn how to live and preach the Christian gospel to the modern
world. |
|
First edition 1989 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
23 |
Billy Roberts |
BENEATH THE WINGS OF ANGELS |
|
This book is a down to earth
and often humorous account of Billy's life. Born into a psychic
Liverpool family his encounters with the spirit world started at a very
early age, guiding him through his earlier age as a rock musician and
helping him to emerge from drug addiction. Eventually he accepted the
gifts that have made him one of the most remarkable and unconventional
mediums in Britain. |
|
First edition 1995 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
24 |
Gena Brealey |
THE TWO WORLDS OF HELEN DUNCAN |
|
The last person to be convicted
under the inquitous Witchcraft Act. This story of Helen Duncan is told
by her daughter Gena. She tells the whole story of her mother's
mediumship, her early life, and the deterioration in her health and her
ultimate passing, due to, in no small measure, the stress endured as a
result of police prosecution and imprisonment. |
|
First edition 1985 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
25 |
Margaret Lillian Hamilton |
IS SURVIVAL A FACT? |
|
"Studies of deep-trance
automatic scripts and the bearing of intentional actions by the trance
personalities on the questions of human survival."
This book is a study of trance seances under strictly controlled
scientific conditions. Forward by Maurice Barbanell.
|
|
First edition 1969 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
26 |
Barbara Garwell |
DREAMS THAT COME TRUE |
|
Premonitions have been part of
Barbara's life for as long as she can remember. A seventh child of a
seventh child. She has had dreams about many of the world's major events
before they actually happened. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
27 |
Paulo Coelho |
THE ALCHEMIST |
|
A remarkable tale about the
most magical of all journeys: the quest to fulfil one's destiny. The
story of Santiago the shepherd boy's search for a worldly treasure as
extravagant as any ever found. From his home in Spain to the markets of
Tangiers into the Egyptian desert and so to the awaiting Alchemist. |
|
First edition 1988 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
28 |
Maurice Barbanell |
POWER OF THE SPIRIT |
|
There can be few within the
Spiritualist movement who have not heard of the name of Maurice
Barbanell. In 1932 he founded the weekly newspaper "Psychic News" which
still promotes knowledge of Spiritualism, spirit healing and survival
after death. This book was written when he had 30 years experience in
psychic phenomena and tells of some of the highlights of his psychic
quest. |
|
First edition 1949 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
29 |
Paul Miller |
CAVALCADE OF SPIRIT |
|
Since the advent of modern
Spiritualism in far-off 1848 some truly astonishing cases of spirit
returns and psychic phenomena have come to the fore. This book is a
compilation of psychic stories which make exciting reading. A unique
collection of fascinating and evidential accounts for the sceptic and
believer alike. |
|
First edition 1943 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
30 |
T Glen Hamilton |
INTENTION AND SURVIVAL |
|
This book is a report of the
highlights of nearly fourteen years of intensive research and study of
various kinds of psychic phenomena - telekinesis, deep trance, automatic
writings and materialised forms. |
|
First edition 1942 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
31 |
Kate Thomas |
SIGNALS FROM ETERNITY |
|
The autobiography of a 20th
Century Mystic. "Is mankind an unfinished evolutionary project with
latent faculties ripe for development?" Kate Thomas asserts that he is
and that her own spontaneous experiences of seership and expanded states
of awareness make her no more than a racial forerunner. |
|
First edition 1984 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
32 |
Sally Jane Danter with Joy Cooke |
GUARDIAN ANGELS AROUND MY BED |
|
An autobiography of a brave
medium. Sally is in continual acute pain from spinal deformity, by the
age of 43 she had undergone 24 major operations and is confined to a
wheelchair. Far from wallowing in self-pity she has gone on to give
hope, help and survival evidence to people all over the world. A
remarkable book about a remarkable medium. |
|
First edition 1992 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
33 |
Peter Green |
FOR THE LOVE OF PEGGY |
|
Peggy and Peter Green had what
can only be described as an idyllic marriage. In this volume Peter tells
the moving story of their marriage and Peggy's fight against cancer. It
is guaranteed to make you laugh and cry. In Peter's words "There is no
death. Deep within I know one day Peggy and I will be joyously reunited
beyond the veil". |
|
First edition 1985 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
34 |
Henry Thomas Hamblin |
LIFE WITHOUT STRAIN |
|
This book consists of a revised
reproduction of a series of articles which appeared in "The Science of
Thought Review" 1939, 1940 under the caption of Editor's Notes. These
lessons or articles, each one forming a link in a chain, were written,
therefore under the stress of war, yet, strangely enough they speak of a
way of life that is free from all strain and striving, and which might
be described as a return to the Edenic Way of life from which man has
departed. |
|
First edition 1941 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
35 |
Linda Metcalf |
WIDENING TRAILS |
|
A story of enemy fighter pilots doing battle over the skies of Germany, and then ... |
|
First edition 1954 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
36 |
Hope Price |
ANGELS |
|
Do angels really exist or are
they just a myth? The author has gathered together the testimonies of
hundreds of rational people to whom angels have miraculously appeared. |
|
First edition 1993 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
37 |
Reginald Omez |
PHYSICAL PHENOMENA |
|
A very detailed book on the
study of Physical Phenomena. This book has been translated from the
French by Renee Haynes and is Volume 36 of the "Twentieth Century
Encyclopedia of Catholicism" under section III The Nature of Man. |
|
First edition 1958 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
38 |
Gertrude Clendenning |
THE SEARCH |
|
The writer has a moving and
graphic story to relate of the psychic and spiritual quest on which she
and her husband embarked. The results were startling, because of the
communications they received in their home circle. They began with a
ouija board but the process of communication developed until the
blindfolded sensitive, in semi-trance, was describing remarkable
clairvoyant visions and repeating long messages, often profound in
nature, which appeared on a screen visible only to him. |
|
First edition 1968 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
39 |
Winifred Graham |
MORE LETTERS FROM HEAVEN |
|
Messages from the unseen world
given in automatic writing to Winifred Graham by her father Robert
George Graham. Her previous book "Letters from Heaven" was published in
1923. |
|
First edition 1943 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
40 |
Doris Collins |
A WOMAN OF SPIRIT |
|
Doris Collins is one of the
most gifted healers and clairvoyants of our time, and in this
extraordinary autobiography she provides overwhelming evidence of the
power of psychic phenomena. |
|
First edition 1983 |
Hardback: K - P’back: C |
———————————————————————————— |
41 |
Doris Collins |
THE POWER WITHIN |
|
The success of her first book A
Woman of Spirit resulted in her being asked to demonstrate clarvoyance
and healing throughout Britain, and also in Australia. Never before has a
psychic made such extensive personal appearances, and tape-recordings
were made of nearly all her meetings. The evidence of the tapes is
remarkable. Doris Collins is an ordinary woman with an astonishing gift
that she feels compelled to share with the world. |
|
First edition 1986 |
Hardback: J - P’back: C |
———————————————————————————— |
42 |
Doris Collins |
POSITIVE FORCES |
|
Think positive! That's Doris
Collins' philosophy of life, whether working or playing. And this book
proves it. Packed with personal insights and accounts of the paranormal,
Positive Forces is sure to astonish, intrigue and - ultimately - to
open your minds. |
|
First edition 1990 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
43 |
Anthony Borgia |
LIFE IN THE WORLD UNSEEN |
|
This book gives one of the most
comprehensive accounts ever of what follows physical death. Received
through the clairaudient mediumship of Anthony Borgia, the communicator
was an old friend, Monsignor Robert Hugh Benson, son of a former
Archbishop of Canterbury. In this volume he covers such subjects as
Homes of Rest, Halls of Learning, spirit world flowers and soil,
recreation, the children's sphere and occupations along with a host of
other vital topics. This book is recommended as the first one to read in
the series. |
|
First edition 1954 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
44 |
Anthony Borgia |
FACTS |
|
Continuing the theological
theme, this volume examines such issues as prayer, spirit guides and
justice. "Man upon earth" says the communicator, "was never meant to be
cut off from the spirit world. If the whole of the earth world were to
become psychically developed, the earth-plane would become a very
different place". |
|
First edition 1946 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
45 |
Anthony Borgia |
MORE LIGHT |
|
In More Light the scripts take a
theological theme with especial references to the creeds and so called
miracles. "Death" says Monsignor Benson, "is not an opponent or an
energy; it is a natural process, the operation of a natural law. The
physical body is the only part of man that is perishable". |
|
First edition 1947 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
46 |
Anthony Borgia |
HEAVEN AND EARTH |
|
"The realms of light teem with
colour ... The trees, the flowers, the grass, the very soil in which
these grow and thrive, the water, whether it be of sea, river or lake,
are revelations of colour in every shade, blend and tint. The water is
sparkling clear, the light is bright and beautiful. The clothes we wear
feel exquisite to the touch." |
|
First edition 1948 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
47 |
Jenny Cockell |
YESTERDAY'S CHILDREN |
|
For as long as she can
remember, Jenny Cockell has known that she has lived before. She has
memories of living as Mary, a young Irish woman, who died over 20 years
before Jenny was born. Her constant dream-memory is of Mary dying, alone
and desperately worried at the thought of leaving her children behind.
When Jenny's own children are born she goes in search of her lost
family. |
|
First edition 1993 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
48 |
Jenny Cockell |
PAST LIVES, FUTURE LIVES |
|
In Jenny's latest book, she
shares with us some of her past lives and her experience and
understanding of the period between lives. She has also been able to see
herself in future lifetimes and has researched the probability of these
experiences. |
|
First edition 1996 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
49 |
Lawrence Temple |
THE SHINING BROTHER |
|
A new classic work which
describes a series of communications from St Francis of Assisi to the
author. Of the original edition, Psychic News reported: "The evidence is
interwoven with such skill and wisdom that together it makes the book
one of the best in all the great literature of Spiritualism". |
|
First edition 1941 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
50 |
Stewart Edward White |
THE BETTY BOOK |
|
In the author's own words "This
book is the record, condensed, of the excursions of `Betty', a psychic
intimately known to me and of absolute integrity, into the world of
`other-consciousness' and of communications received by her from forces
which I have ventured to call `the invisibles'. These trance excursions
began in 1919 until 1936. |
|
First edition 1937 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
51 |
William Blackwell |
BEYOND THE PHYSICAL HORIZON |
|
A book which follows the
author's earlier, well received book At my Side. It is a book written in
the immediate after years of World War II. |
|
First edition 1947 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
52 |
Charles Graves |
THE LEGEND OF LINDA MARTELL |
|
It is a fact that in Guernsey, a
child called Linda Martell was almost unknown to the general public,
"curing" many hundreds of people some of whom were regarded by the
medical profession as incurable. Nearly 1000 people attended her funeral
in 1961 when she died whilst barely 5 years old. What is the true story
of this phenomenal child? |
|
First edition 1968 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
53 |
Louise L Hay |
YOU CAN HEAL YOUR LIFE |
|
Louise Hay offers practical
steps for dissolving both the fears and causations of diseases and
shares her first hand experiences about healing - including how she
cured herself after having been diagnosed as being terminally ill with
cancer. "An excellent book for restructuring one's life and finding
self-esteem and self-love." |
|
First edition 1984 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
54 |
R K Posthumus |
RETURN TO SIMPLICITY |
|
The book urges the elimination
of superstition and a return to the simple truths. It is known that man
will accept superstition in preference to truth, but there are those who
have a desire to be free; those who wish to follow a life based on
common sense, reason and fact. The seeker is advised to resort to
self-analysis, which will make it possible for him to seek his true self
and to clarify his relationship to the whole. |
|
First edition 1986 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
55 |
John H Remmers |
THE GREAT REALITY |
|
When John Remmers' young son
died, the world collapsed around him. He and his wife Emily suffered the
deep anguish which only bereaved parents can know. But their "dead" boy
was determined to make himself known from his new environment, to prove
he was still very much alive. |
|
First edition 1967 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
56 |
H R Plastow |
THE UNFINISHED STORY |
|
Astounding encounters with the
supernatural which started when the author was ten years old, and
spanning 50 years, including meeting a humorous spirit, healing and
apparitions. |
|
First edition 1985 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
57 |
His Divine Grace A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupa |
THE SCIENCE OF SELF-REALIZATION |
|
This book opens up the secret
of the self within, nature and the universe, and the Supreme Self within
and without. Here the world's most distinguished teacher of the science
of self-realization talks about meditating and practising yoga in the
modern age, gaining liberation from the law of Karma, achieving super
consciousness, and much more. |
|
First edition 1977 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
58 |
Winifred Moyes |
QUESTIONS YOU MAY BE ASKED |
|
People in many parts of the
world have read the addresses by Zodiac ever since The Greater World was
founded in 1928, and in Great Britain nearly 600 friends received them
in typewritten form for years before the paper was started. Many have
expressed the hope that a summary of the teaching embodied in the
addresses might be published. This task was undertaken by Winifred
Moyes. |
|
First edition 1946 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
59 |
Ursula Roberts |
HINTS ON MEDIUMISTIC DEVELOPMENT |
|
An invaluable early book by
Ursula Roberts on developing mediumship. "People who feel they have some
potential mediumship will wish to know how to set about training and
strengthening their powers. It is to such people I am offering simple
advice in this booklet which is the result of a life-time spent in
studying mediumship." |
|
First edition Twelfth reprint |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
60 |
Ursula Roberts |
WISDOM OF RAMADAHN |
|
In this thought-provoking
volume appear the answers to countless questions put to a spirit sage
regarding the mysteries of life both here and in the spirit world. The
spirit guide is called Ramadahn who has claimed incarnations in both
Egypt and India, who speaks through his entranced medium Ursula Roberts. |
|
First edition 1985 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
61 |
Burning Sand through Mrs Louie Hill |
MANS DESIRES AND FULFILMENTS |
|
An early spiritual book of the
teachings given by Burning Sand, a great Spiritual Being, through his
medium Mrs Louie Hill. "Read and read again and yet again what is
written herein; - and read to understand with your true, inner being the
tremendous message which it has been our high privilege to transmit as
instruments of the Spirit" - as said in the introduction by Charles W
Rafferty. |
|
First edition 1948 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
62 |
Estelle Roberts |
FIFTY YEARS A MEDIUM |
|
Spiritualism owes much to
Estelle Roberts. She has long been remembered as the most versatile
medium of her time. A medium who could fill the Royal Albert Hall by
providing astounding survival evidence. This book is her amazing
autobiography. |
|
First edition 1959 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
63 |
A.W. Austin |
HOME CIRCLE |
|
The happenings at Hannen
Swaffer's home circle have been reported in the Spiritualist and secular
press all over the world. It was described as the most famous of all
home circles in Spiritualism. This circle was started in the years
between the two Great Wars, and this book describes some of its
happenings. |
|
First edition 1940 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
64 |
Victoria Stevenson |
LOVE AFTER DEATH |
|
When her husband Bob died,
suddenly and tragically, Victoria Stevenson was stricken with grief. But
then she found she was able to communicate with Bob -and he with her -
and she learnt that her grief had prevented his early attempts at
communication being successful. |
|
First edition 1980 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
65 |
Rosalind Cattanach |
NAN MACKENZIE - HEALER AND MEDIUM |
|
A few weeks before her 96th
birthday, Maurice Barbanell, founder Editor of Psychic News wrote in the
forward to this book, "In the Spiritualist firmament, Nan Mackenzie is
one of its brightest stars". She has had a life dedicated to healing
both professionally and spiritually. Through her spirit guide Running
Water she achieves successes after the best medical skills have failed. |
|
First edition 1978 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
66 |
Leslie Flint |
VOICES IN THE DARK |
|
"I think I can safely say I am
the most tested medium this country has ever produced ... I have been
boxed up, tied up, sealed up, gagged, bound and held, and still the
voices have come to speak their message of life eternal." So says medium
Leslie Flint in this compelling autobiography which tells of his
astonishing independent direct voice gift, a gift which has brought him
not only fame and acclaim, but occasionally heartache and hardship.
(see also 780)
|
|
First edition 1971 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
67 |
David Serlin |
HIGHWAY TO HEALING |
|
This book is the remarkable but
true story of how one man Leonard Serlin became a healer and how his
life and the lives of those around him were transformed by this
extraordinary gift. Illustrated by many dramatic and moving case
histories we follow Leonard's 'journey of healing' from its earliest
beginnings to the present day. We meet some of the people who have been
healed and share their remarkable experiences. |
|
First edition 1992 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
68 |
Andrew Mackenzie |
RIDDLE OF THE FUTURE |
|
Andrew Mackenzie has made a
careful collection of spontaneous cases of precognition ranging in scale
from events in personal life such as foreknowledge of injury to a
child, the reappearance after many years of an old friend, or the death
of a relative, to premonitions of national disaster such as the sinking
of the Titanic and the Aberfan tragedy. These cases form an impressive
body of evidence that paranormal precognition does occur and call into
question the generally held theory of linear time with its strict
divisions into past, present and future. |
|
First edition 1974 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
69 |
Bob Sachs |
THE COMPLETE GUIDE TO NINE STAR KI |
|
Nine Star Ki is a
straighforward yet profound astrological system for understanding
ourselves and our relationships with others, as well as for defining our
strengths and weaknesses in all areas of life. Although ancient in
origin, Nine Star Ki is a system which is exceptionally well suited for
use in the modern world. |
|
First edition 1992 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
70 |
Deepak Chopra MD |
AGELESS BODY, TIMELESS MIND |
|
Contrary to our traditional
notions of ageing, we can learn to direct the way our bodies metabolize
time. Deepak Chopra combines mind/body medicine with current antiaging
research to show why and how the effects of aging are largely
preventable. He gives the reader tools to create new perceptions of
aging, techniques for harnessing the power of awareness and practical
steps to experience timelessness. In these ways we can take control of
the way we age and fulfill the promise of Ageless Body, Timeless Mind. |
|
First edition 1993 |
N |
———————————————————————————— |
71 |
Michael Bentine |
DOORS OF THE MIND |
|
"The doors of the many mansions
of the mind open both ways. They can let you enter other states of
consciousness - or they can allow something or someone to enter yours.
You should open these doors with care and caution - but, first, you must
know which doors should be left unopened." - Michael Bentine |
|
First edition 1984 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
72 |
Iris Thomas |
MY SON LIVES |
|
This book is a true story
written by a mother about the passing of her son. It is a story
providing hope for the future. From the depths of grief and despair it
tells how the family came to know without a doubt that there is life
after death. |
|
First edition 1996 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
73 |
Ra Bonewitz |
THE COSMIC CRYSTAL SPIRAL |
|
Combining his knowledge as a
professional geologist with his gifts as a mystic, Ra Bonewitz takes us
on a cosmic journey from the beginnings of the Universe and life on
Earth to our own genesis and ultimate destiny. He explains how the
energy system which is the human body contains all the characteristics
of the Universe itself and shows how man and the Cosmos are following a
common evolutionary path. |
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
74 |
Roger Whitby |
GATEWAY |
|
Roger Whitby, an intelligent
'all rounder' and lover of the English Lake District, died in 1963 aged
22 years. "Many feel for a while the invisible presence of those they
have lost. To others it is an impossible fantasy, to be dismissed by the
rational mind. Roger's mother, over a course of years, found this sense
of presence developing into a telepathic rapport which enabled her to
record many vivid impressions of his continuing feelings and thoughts"
so wrote Paul Beard author of Survival of Death in the forward to this
remarkable question and answer book between mother and son. |
|
First edition 1979 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
75 |
Margery Eyre |
THE RAINBOW OF LIFE |
|
In these lessons, which she
received by inner attunement, Margery's teacher is Altmar, a high
priest. Readers of her earlier books will know that Margery had regular
communication with discarnate friends throughout the greater part of her
life. Altmar introduced himself towards the end. His teaching on the
true significance of the human aura, and her capacity to apply it, may
be accounted the culmination of an arduous lifelong training in
serving-by-being. |
|
First edition 1982 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
76 |
Arthur Ford - in collaboration with Margueritte |
NOTHING SO STRANGE |
|
The autobiography of Arthur
Ford. A man whose psychic gifts have taken him into many countries among
people of all walks of life - scientists and churchmen, royalty and
ordinary men and women. He tells why he believes everybody has psychic
endowment and how they can learn to use it. |
|
First edition 1966 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
77 |
Ian Wilson |
LIFE AFTER DEATH |
|
An intelligent and fascinating
study of the greatest mystery of them all. Ian Wilson has assembled all
the hard evidence for a revelatory, informed and persuasive argument for
life after death. His fascinating study begins with a history of
attitudes to death and presents an overview of the various phenomena
which suggest the survival of something after death - near death
experiences, ghosts, premonitions of intimates' deaths - linking these
for a truly fresh insight into the mystery of life after death. |
|
First edition 1977 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
78 |
Smith and Taylor |
LIGHT IN OUR DARKNESS |
|
An early written book on Spirit
communications given through the mediumship of Mrs Osborne Leonard in
trance to W.S. Montgomery Smith and by Ouija board writings jointly
received by Mrs Ellinor M. Taylor and W.S. Montgomery Smith. The forward
has been written by Barbara McKenzie - Hon. President, British College
of Psychic Science. |
|
First edition 1936 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
79 |
Carl Wickland |
THIRTY YEARS AMONG THE DEAD |
|
In this early, in-depth book
Carl Wickland wrote in his introduction:
"In offering this volume to the public, there is no desire to promulgate
any ism or cult, but to present the records and deductions of thirty
years experimental research in the science of normal and abnormal
psychology, as the same pertains to the obscure problems of a life
hereafter and its relation to human affairs, which all thinking minds
must recognize as being of utmost importance." |
|
First edition 1924 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
80 |
George Chapman as told to Roy Stemman |
SURGEON FROM ANOTHER WORLD |
|
This book tells of the
remarkable partnership between the eminent surgeon William Lang, who
died in 1937, and the trance medium George Chapman, through which Dr
Lang has continued to heal the sick for over 40 years. A highly
recommended enthralling read. |
|
First edition 1978 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
81 |
Matthew Manning |
THE LINK |
|
The book tells of the
extraordinary gifts of a teenage psychic. Matthew describes his first
psychic experience, the development of his powers and the discovery and
use of automatic writing to channel his energies to more creative work. |
|
First edition 1974 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
82 |
Major Ripley Webb MC |
A MEANING TO LIFE |
|
A gem of a spiritual book,
written in 1944. A thought provoking book full of spiritual philosophy
and teachings for a world tormented by war. |
|
First edition 1946 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
83 |
Joseph Wylder |
PSYCHIC PETS |
|
Joseph Wylder (a nom-de-plume
for a well known scientist) has studied the sixth sense of animals for
two decades, collecting an astounding dossier of extraordinary
incidents, e.g. the goose who warned of an air raid, Thomas Hardy's
terrier who predicted the death of a well-loved friend, Strongheart, the
famous sheepdog, who forecast impending disaster and Lucy, the canary,
who knew that a tragic telegram was on the way. |
|
First edition 1980 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
84 |
Hilda M Davison |
COMMUNICATION KEYS |
|
An encyclopaedia of spiritual
knowledge which makes an easy reference source for all those questions
that investigators raise, ranging from survival evidence to esoteric,
scientific and psychological reasoning. |
|
First edition No date |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
85 |
Elizabeth Baxandall and Doris Illingworth |
ELLIE AND THE SPIRIT CHILDREN |
|
This is the second book
published containing scripts received by "controlled writing" which is
when the pen and the hand of the person in this world are taken over by
souls (spirits) who write in their own style of handwriting, that which
they wish to convey. A fuller explanation is in their first book Out of
the Blue (book 86). Ellie (Eliveras) is a great soul whose mission is
to find and care for children as they pass from this world and in the
book she gives a vivid detailed account of her work in both worlds. The
children all eagerly volunteered to tell their stories - including, in
some cases, pre-birth as well as life, death and after death. They
wanted to make known the continuity of life so as to comfort many
bereaved parents. They are of various nationalities and religions but
worked hard to write understandably. (see also 515) |
|
First edition No date |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
86 |
Elizabeth Baxandall and Doris Illingworth |
OUT OF THE BLUE |
|
When Elizabeth Baxandall was
chosen by those in the Spirit World to receive automatic writing, almost
the first instruction was to 'Think Blue', to make it easier for Spirit
to approach. Out of the blue came information and instruction with a
request to publish their words in a book. Here in this book are excerpts
compiled from their early writings. The Authors are Spirits - Keith,
who patiently opened the channel and practised to make perfect, giving
an account of his passing in the Indian Mutiny - David, who is more
advanced and was able to bring through much that Mankind should learn
about, and Ewen, who went to the trouble of having a re-run of his
lives, from 2000 B.C. to World War II, so that an authentic illustration
of the fact of re-birth could be put at the disposal of Earth Souls.
Their words were faithfully recorded through the hand of Elizabeth
Baxandall and carefully edited by Doris Illingworth, who sat with
Elizabeth throughout. Together they present this booklet to the public
for the benefit of enquiring minds everywhere. |
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
87 |
William T Stead through Madame Hyver |
COMMUNICATION WITH THE NEXT WORLD |
|
Helpful information on
communicating with the next world. A no nonsense book explaining the
right and wrong methods. Packed with guidance for mediums and
communicators, this book was transcribed through a French medium from
William.T.Stead two years after he perished on the Titanic. |
|
First edition No date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
88 |
Robert Cull |
MORE TO LIFE THAN THIS |
|
Jean Cull's psychic gifts have
already astonished thousands of people. She has experienced paranormal
phenomena since the age of eleven, when a next door neighbour, who had
committed suicide a few days earlier, appeared at the foot of her bed.
Her powers lay dormant for many years, until reawakened by an emotional
family crisis. This is the extraordinary story of that reawakening as
told by her husband Bob - at first highly sceptical, now her staunchest
supporter. |
|
First edition 1987 |
Hardback: H - P/back: C |
———————————————————————————— |
89 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE PROPHET |
|
The work of Kahlil Gibran, poet
and philosopher, has been translated into more than twenty languages
and his drawings and paintings have been exhibited in the great capitals
of the world. The Prophet is his most magical work, illustrated with
his own drawings that are both enchanting and haunting. |
|
First edition 1926 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
90 |
Dion Fortune |
THROUGH THE GATES OF DEATH |
|
This book, first written in
1930, explains the stages in the natural process of dying that every
departing soul passes through from this world to the next. This handbook
has proved to be an invaluable aid and comfort to all confronted with
bereavement, whatever their situation; whether seeking to do what is
best for a departed loved one or to widen their own perception to bridge
the mysteries between life and death. |
|
First edition 1930 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
91 |
Dion Fortune |
PSYCHIC SELF DEFENCE |
|
For the first time a professed
Occultist explains how to detect psychic attacks and provides detailed
instructions for defence against them. |
|
First edition 1957 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
92 |
Doris Stokes |
VOICES IN MY EAR |
|
The autobiography of Doris
Stokes. It tells the story of how she came to realise her amazing gifts.
As a child she often saw things others couldn't. During the War she was
officially informed her husband had been killed. At the height of her
grief she was visited by her long-dead father and told her husband was
alive and would return. But joy turned to grief when her father
reappeared to warn of the impending death of her healthy baby son. Both
predictions came true. |
|
First edition 1980 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
93 |
Doris Stokes |
MORE VOICES IN MY EAR |
|
After the first book of Voices
in my Ear, Doris Stokes writes again of her psychic powers as a medium.
She tells how she helped the family of one of the Yorkshire Ripper
victims, enabled the late actor Peter Finch to communicate with his
wife, and brought hope to the parents of young children who have
disappeared in strange circumstances all over the world. She also writes
of her experiences in Ireland, Canada, America, Australia and New
Zealand. |
|
First edition 1981 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
94 |
Doris Stokes |
INNOCENT VOICES IN MY EAR |
|
In Innocent Voices in my Ear,
Doris tells of her special relationship with children and her psychic
communications with children of every age; from the heroic young men of
the Falklands War to the 16 year old hostage of a ruthless gunman and
the tragic stars who died too young: John Lennon, Marc Bolan and Richard
Beckinsale. |
|
First edition 1983 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
95 |
Doris Stokes |
A HOST OF VOICES |
|
In 1980 the first part of Doris
Stokes' autobiography was published and became a best seller. Her
success and popularity has grown as a medium. So now in A Host of Voices
she offers us a share in her hectic demanding lifestyle, including how
she often rubs shoulders and shares her stage with celebrities such as
Henry Kelly and Danny La Rue; how she set aside her preconceptions to
visit Ronnie Kray in Broadmoor and bring him encouragement through
contact with his beloved mother. |
|
First edition 1984 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
96 |
Doris Stokes |
WHISPERING VOICES |
|
In Whispering Voices, Doris
Stokes' fifth book, she tells us of the extraordinary, sometimes amusing
and often moving situations she has found herself in; of how her gift
has brought her into contact with household names such as Princess Anne,
Freddie Starr and the late Alan Lake; of how she made contact with
tragic Moors murder victim, Lesley Ann Downey, through her mother; of
her involvement in the making of a TV documentary; and, most
importantly, of the people she meets and helps daily. |
|
First edition 1985 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
97 |
Doris Stokes |
VOICES OF LOVE |
|
Voices of Love continues her
remarkable story. Now a well-known medium and media figure. In this book
she tells how she helped stars like Elvis Presley and actor Gary Holton
from Auf Wiedersehen Pet who died so tragically. We also learn of her
close friendship with Coronation Street star Julie Goodyear. |
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
98 |
Doris Stokes |
JOYFUL VOICES |
|
In Joyful Voices, her seventh
book which she completed before passing over, we follow her progress
from one packed theatre to another. We learn of the comfort she gave to
the families of the Zeebrugge ferry disaster, of her conversations with
Pat Phoenix the day after she died, and of the private sittings she gave
to ordinary people when she herself was not well, and share in the
happiness caused by her messages from the other side. |
|
First edition 1987 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
99 |
Linda Dearsley |
A TRIBUTE TO DORIS STOKES |
|
Doris Stokes was probably the
world's most famous medium. She brought comfort and joy to millions of
people. This book is a collection of tributes from some of her countless
fans. Also included in this moving book are many previously untold
stories of Doris and her extraordinary gift, as a complete picture
emerges of 'the lady with voices in her ear'. This is a tribute to Doris
Stokes - a special mark of respect for a special person. |
|
First edition 1988 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
100 |
Doris Stokes |
VOICES |
|
This unique collection includes
two best selling books: Voices in my Ear and More Voices in my Ear, in
which Doris Stokes shared her remarkable experiences with readers
throughout the world. She was one of the world's most celebrated mediums
and during her lifetime she brought joy, comfort and fascination to
thousands of people. |
|
First edition 1998 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
101 |
Julie Chimes |
A STRANGER IN PARADISE |
|
One cold March morning a young
woman lay dying of multiple stab-wounds on her own driveway. She came
through the nightmare that followed, laughing. This book describes what
happened in graphic and mesmerising detail, and with startling clarity.
This is a multi-faceted real-life drama: a story of crime due to mental
illness: a story of survival; the battle to regain physical and mental
well-being. Unforgettably she describes what it feels like to die, and
then, unforeseeably, to live to tell the tale. It is, ultimately, the
story of a spiritual awakening. * This book contains strong language. |
|
First edition 1995 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
102 |
Alan H House |
SIXTY YEARS A SPIRITUALIST |
|
A fascinating account of the
author's experience with many aspects of spiritualism including
spiritual rescue work, out-of-body experiences, received teachings,
healing, psychic art, apports and many other phenomena. |
|
First edition 1995 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
103 |
Jean Bassett |
100 YEARS OF NATIONAL SPIRITUALISM |
|
What is the Spiritualist
National Union? How and why was it formed? Who were the pioneers? The
struggle to come together as a National Organisation is described simply
and graphically in this book. The 'Union' is entering a second century
of existence; this is the first book devoted to the history of the
'First Hundred Years' wonderfully put together by Jean Bassett in 1989. |
|
First edition 1990 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
104 |
Harry Edwards |
THE SCIENCE OF SPIRIT HEALING |
|
An 'early' spiritual book by
Harry Edwards. "Here for the first time is given an explanation of the
manner of the performance of spirit healing and of the forces and
agencies employed. The scope of the survey embraces the whole realm of
unorthodox healing. From this survey emerge definite conclusions which
form the basis for the explanations. |
|
First edition No date |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
105 |
Harry Edwards |
A GUIDE FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF MEDIUMSHIP |
|
A lovely little early spiritual booklet by Harry Edwards sharing his experience and wisdom on the development of mediumship. |
|
First edition No date |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
106 |
Harry Edwards |
A GUIDE TO SPIRIT HEALING |
|
It was Maurice Barbanell who
once said of Harry Edwards that he was the greatest healer the world has
seen since the time of Christ, and most certainly with a distinguished
healing career spanning over 40 years, no other healer did more to
further the cause of spiritual healing than Harry Edwards. In this
masterly book all aspects of spiritual healing are covered. |
|
First edition 1950 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
107 |
Margaret Hansford |
IT MAKES YOU THINK |
|
Margaret Hansford wrote this
inspired book after being in the Spiritual movement for over thirty
years. All her experience and wisdom come together in one glorious book
which quite simply 'makes you think'. |
|
First edition No Date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
108 |
Harvey Day |
INTO THE UNKNOWN |
|
The author has for many years
been a student of and a writer about the occult. During this time he has
collected together a great number of authenticated happenings that do
not conform to rational explanation. This book contains a selection of
these. Such problems as what is time, seeing into the past, the sixth
sense, second sight and telepathy. These problems have perplexed mankind
from the time he started thinking. This collection provides an
absorbing and stimulating book. |
|
First edition No Date |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
109 |
Alan Ross |
THE GENUINE JESUS |
|
"The story of Jesus' life from
his birth and formative years to his ministry, death and resurrection.
Told by Jesus himself in the first person, the story follows the
chronology of the Gospels of the New Testament. This book was received
through automatic writing in order to reinterpret the Bible and to
reveal how the spirit world fits into God's plan of justice for our
salvation and happiness." |
|
First edition 1998 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
110 |
Melvin Moore with Paul Perry |
CLOSER TO THE LIGHT |
|
A beautiful book dealing with
testimonies from children who have had near-death experiences.
Presenting astonishing scientific proof from the acknowledged leader in
the field of near-death research which may change your views about death
and dying for ever. |
|
First edition 1991 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
111 |
Jonathan Cott |
THE SEARCH FOR OMM SETY |
|
A compelling story of
reincarnation. One woman's 3000-year love affair with an Egyptian
Pharaoh. Dorothy Eady was born in Blackheath in 1904. What were
conventional Edwardian parents to make of a little child who threw
herself at the feet of mummies in the British Museum or who recognised
the temple of Abydos in the Children's Encyclopedia and insisted that
'this' was her home? "A haunting, beautifully written, and very
convincing account" - Raymond Moody Jr. |
|
First edition 1987 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
112 |
Betty J Eadie |
EMBRACED BY THE LIGHT |
|
Betty Eadie died after an
operation, but was later to recover. It was during the intervening
period of a few hours that she had what has been described as "the most
profound and complete near-death experience ever". Her description of
her experience in this astonishing book is one of the most convincing
arguments for the existence of life after death. |
|
First edition 1992 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
113 |
Betty J Eadie |
THE AWAKENING HEART |
|
The Awakening Heart reveals how
she has learned to live with the lessons from her near-death
experience, expanding on the invaluable knowledge she has received. She
addresses many of the concerns that affect us most, by showing us how
she has transformed her own life and describing the inspiring
revelations and uplifting experiences of the people she has met on her
journeys. |
|
First edition 1996 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
114 |
Trixie Allingham |
THE RELUCTANT MEDIUM |
|
Since she was four years of age
Trixie Allingham remembers seeing people who were invisible to others,
and often had premonitions that events and things would happen when she
was in her teens. She refused however to acknowledge that she could see
and hear people from the other side of life until after the death of her
dearly loved husband when so much phenomena occurred at her home that
she was compelled to seek guidance and direction as to what to do from a
well-known medium. |
|
First edition 1970 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
115 |
Malcolm S Southwood |
THE HEALING EXPERIENCE |
|
Malcolm Southwood describes his
commonsense approach to spiritual healing and explains why it works. He
uses dozens of successful cases from his own practice to illustrate his
ideas and cut through the dogma and superstition that surrounds most of
the healing world. |
|
First edition 1995 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
116 |
Douglas Arnold and Ronald Wright |
PRINCE HAFED'S A NEW SET OF VALUES |
|
"This book has to be the most
important communication to come from the spirit world since the days of
the Old Testament, and was dictated by Hafed, leader of the Three Wise
Men who paid homage to the Christ child in Bethlehem two thousand years
ago." A new set of values - Extinction or Survival in the 21st Century? |
|
First edition 1998 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
117 |
Dorothy Kerin |
FULFILLING |
|
In her former book The Living
Touch, Dorothy Kerin has set forth the astonishing story of her own
healing, which she believes took place by the direct act of God, working
through Jesus Christ. In Fulfilling she tells not only of herself as
healed, but as a healer. Through the same power that healed her, she has
been enabled to heal others. Since 1930 she has been at the service of
all who sought her aid. She has established nursing homes, organised the
staff and collected funds to start and maintain them. |
|
First edition 1952 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
118 |
Grace Cooke |
THE NEW MEDIUMSHIP |
|
Grace Cooke was one of the
foremost 'sensitives' of her time, well known as the instrument for the
beloved teacher White Eagle and as the founder and leader of the White
Eagle Lodge. In this course of a very long life of service to the spirit
world she has experienced nearly every type of psychic phenomenon. She
was therefore well qualified to write about mediumship and does so
simply and warmly. She draws from her own experience and gives sound
advice for those who would develop their psychic powers wisely and
safely. |
|
First edition 1965 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
119 |
Grace Cooke |
SUN MEN OF THE AMERICAS |
|
"Try to forget" says White
Eagle in this book, "all you have read about savage Indians ... Our
ancient Indian brethren were simple at heart, loving and gentle ... men
of character and strength of purpose possessing great courage and
endurance". This account of the beliefs of the American Indians, which
had their origin in ancient wisdom brought to humanity by God-men or
Sun-men, includes White Eagle's teaching on living a life in harmony
with nature and spirit. |
|
First edition 1975 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
120 |
Jenny Dent |
A QUIET MIND COMPANION |
|
Jenny Dent is the
grand-daughter of Grace Cooke. Her previous book The Quiet Mind is a
little book of sayings which have quietly enabled thousands of people to
touch their own wisdom and be 'strong in spirit'. In the present book
Jenny shares her own experience in using The Quiet Mind and tells how
doing so has enabled her to face life-challenges and use them for her
own growth. There are many stories from others about how White Eagle's
words have helped and healed in difficult situations. |
|
First edition 1993 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
121 |
White Eagle |
MORNING LIGHT |
|
This book describes the purpose
of life on earth - how man descended from higher realms into the
confined life of incarnation on earth to obtain experience and to
achieve in the end, far greater being. The search for the Light, the
miracles performed by the great initiates, the secret of health and
radiant being, the way of service and brotherhood, the continuation of
life in the hereafter, are also dealt with. |
|
First edition 1957 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
122 |
White Eagle |
SUNRISE |
|
Sunrise is a book of comfort
through knowledge for the bereaved and all who fear death and
separation. White Eagle speaking from the world of spirit, describes
what happens after death and how we can be reunited in true communion
with those who have made the great transition from earthly to spiritual
life. |
|
First edition 1958 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
123 |
White Eagle |
THE WAY OF THE SUN |
|
One of the features of White
Eagle's teaching is the sense he gives us of our life ever unfolding and
developing, just as the natural world is an expression of the perpetual
creation of God. Here, White Eagle's words have been collected around
the model of a complete cycle of the sun, a year. He also explains for
us how the great religious festivals enact this natural pattern. |
|
First edition 1982 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
124 |
White Eagle |
THE PATH OF THE SOUL |
|
Each human soul is given the
opportunity of following a path of spiritual progression and unfoldment
and making ready for its journey to happier climes. This journey is
called 'The Path', which it should begin to follow in life here and now.
It does not begin with incarnation nor end with physical death, but
continues onward into the unknown. |
|
First edition 1959 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
125 |
Ralph Waldo Trine |
IN TUNE WITH THE INFINITE |
|
An early spiritual book first
written in 1897. "Within yourself lies the cause of whatever enters into
your life. To come into the full realization of your own awakened
interior powers, is to be able to condition your life in exact accord
with what you would have it." |
|
First edition 1897 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
126 |
Brother Mandus |
THE WONDROUS WAY OF LIFE |
|
Another early written spiritual
book full of inspiration teachings written by Brother Mandus who had a
World Healing Crusade Sanctuary in Blackpool. |
|
First edition 1956 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
127 |
James Davidson Ross |
DOROTHY |
|
Dorothy is a story of miracles -
miracles which beyond question have happened in our day and time, and
the first was to Dorothy Kerin herself. Doctors had given the girl a
matter of hours to live, when suddenly and completely she was restored
to health. In a vision it was revealed to Dorothy that God had chosen
her to be an instrument of healing which led her to open her first Home
of Healing where religion and medicine work hand-in-hand. The Bishop of
Coventry described Burrswood as "one of the most astonishing places in
this country, a modern Cana of Galilee". |
|
First edition 1958 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
128 |
Dr Robert Crookall |
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN YOU DIE? |
|
Dr Robert Crookall has, over
the years with such classic works as The Supreme Adventure,
Out-of-the-body Experiences and The Techniques of Astral Projection,
presented the public with hundreds of testimonies from people of all
walks of life who have experiences which have convinced them of personal
survival after bodily death. Through the many test case accounts in
this book, Dr Crookall decribed in far greater detail what actually
happens at death: the evidence is not only from the still living, but
also from the dead through mediumistic communication. |
|
First edition 1978 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
129 |
Allan Barham |
STRANGE TO RELATE |
|
Allan Barham is a Church of
England clergyman. It is important to remember this when reading the
remarkable account of his long and thorough investigation of psychic
phenomena and other esoteric subjects. His approach and method of
investigation show him to be an open-minded, but far from gullible,
researcher. What makes this work particularly attractive is that the
author puts into words and into perspective so many explanations and
logical conclusions which have so often come to mind, but were rarely
expressed in such an articulate and readable style. |
|
First edition 1980 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
130 |
Allan Barham |
LIFE UNLIMITED |
|
The chief subject of this book
is the possible nature of life beyond death, as suggested by the
evidence of psychical experience. The attitude of the Christian Church
towards such evidence is also discussed, and one chapter is devoted to
the question of whether in fact church teaching reflects what Jesus
himself taught. The final chapter is concerned with non-medical healing.
A good deal of the book involves the personal experiences of the
author, who has spent more than twenty five years in psychical study. |
|
First edition 1982 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
131 |
Levi |
THE AQUARIAN GOSPEL OF JESUS THE CHRIST |
|
This is a unique book,
practically a complete record of the words and works of Jesus of
Nazareth, from his birth in Bethleham to his ascension from the Mount of
Olives some 33 years later. It includes the 18 years not recorded in
the new Testament, when Jesus travelled in Tibet, Egypt, India, Persia
and Greece, talking with monks and wise men. |
|
First edition 1964 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
132 |
Helen Steiner Rice |
SOMEBODY LOVES YOU |
|
Somebody Loves You has been a
bestseller all over the world since its first publication in 1978. This
glowing collection of verse captures all the eloquence and compassionate
spirit of the poet herself, carrying the reader along into the deepest
recesses of the author's unquenchable faith.
"Somebody loves you more than you know ... And will always be with you
wherever you go!"
|
|
First edition 1978 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
133 |
Shirley Maclaine |
OUT ON A LIMB |
|
In this remarkable and moving
story we are invited to accompany world-famous actress Shirley MacLaine
on a unique journey - to Stockholm, where she meets a trance channeler
whose unusual gift opens the door to her past; to Europe and Hawaii,
where a secret (and perhaps fated) affair of the heart unfolds; and
finally to Peru, where high in the mountains she has a startling
out-of-body experience that clarifies for her the extent of human
potential and the understanding that the soul lives forever. |
|
First edition 1983 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
134 |
Dr Paul Brunton |
A SEARCH IN SECRET INDIA |
|
"I have titled this book Secret
India because it tells of an India which has been hidden from prying
eyes for thousands of years, which has kept itself so exclusive that
today only its rapidly disappearing remnants are left." So wrote Paul
Brunton of the India seen through his eyes in 1934, after years of
studying its mystics and mysteries. |
|
First edition 1934 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
135 |
Dr Paul Brunton |
A SEARCH IN SECRET EGYPT |
|
Dr Brunton's profound
experience and insight into the spiritual mysteries of the East have
produced a book which is unique. Its principal fascination revolves
around the mysteries of the pyramids; he supports a theory that they
were created by emigrant colonists from Atlantis who had command of the
elemental spirits. |
|
First edition 1935 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
136 |
Dr Paul Brunton |
THE HIDDEN TEACHING BEYOND YOGA |
|
One of the late Dr Paul
Brunton's last books in which he suggests that there is a mystic
teaching underlying all forms of yoga, and far more profound than any of
them. The author explains that there has been in existence in Asia, for
many thousands of years, a hidden doctrine which was originally
intended for an intellectual elite but for which the world is now ready.
In this book Dr Brunton begins the process of revealing this teaching
which harmonizes the mysticism of yoga with the deepest insights of
modern science. |
|
First edition 1941 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
137 |
John Dickinson Carr |
THE LIFE OF SIR ARTHUR CONAN DOYLE |
|
(the man who was Sherlock Holmes) Many fans in many generations have believed that Sherlock Holmes must have really existed. Indeed he did - but his real name was Arthur Conan Doyle, and in appearance he was Dr Watson. When young Dr Conan Doyle sat down to write a detective story, he put his own mind into his detective and lent his body to his narrator. The author, one of our major detective novelists, working with the Conan Doyle family, has here recreated in all its romantic detail the exciting true story of the man who was Sherlock Holmes. |
|
First edition 1949 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
138 |
Alma Daniel, Timothy Wyllie and Andrew Ramer |
ASK YOUR ANGELS |
|
Angels have been with us in
every age and culture, and in many religions. This enthralling book
vividly chronicles how angels are currently reaching out to every one of
us in a totally new way. From historical writings and widespread
contemporary experience, the authors show us how we can draw on the pure
spiritual power of angels to reconnect with our lost inner selves and
to achieve our goals, whether they be better relationships, healing an
illness or addiction, or for specific guidance in life.
|
|
First edition 1992 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
139 |
Ric A Weinman |
HOW TO CHANNEL HEALING ENERGY |
|
Because everything in the
universe is made up of energy, healing energy can have a profound
effect. The channelling of healing energy takes place when we allow
ourselves to become a vehicle, or channel, through which the energy can
flow. This energy can cure physical diseases by releasing the stress and
long-held emotional traumas that are the root cause of disease. This
book is a practical, accessible workbook of creative exercises guiding
the reader through three distinct methods of channelling. |
|
First edition 1988 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
140 |
Colin Wilson |
THE GIANT BOOK OF THE SUPERNATURAL |
|
From ghosts, poltergeists and
precognition to psychic detection, reincarnation, Factor X, alternative
earth history and expanded consciousness, this extraordinary collection
will give you the full stories from the entire spectrum of the
paranormal. Real-life vampires, doppelgangers, elemental theory,
witchcraft, magicians and Odic forces are described, analysed and
explained, alongside the mysteries of Atlantis, ley lines, standing
stones and voodoo curses. |
|
First edition 1991 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
141 |
Alex Tanous with Harvey Ardman |
BEYOND COINCIDENCE |
|
Before he was born, even before
his parents met, it was foreseen that he would have psychic powers. As a
national celebrity, Dr Tanous has made hundreds of predictions, both
personal and private, on the radio and television, as well as in the
newspapers - all documented and corroborated - and in this book he tells
how it all came about - and how 'you' might learn to duplicate some of
his extraordinary feats. |
|
First edition 1976 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
142 |
Peter Travis |
IN SEARCH OF THE SUPERNATURAL |
|
The author, a Congregational
minister, has collected these unusual and meticulously investigated
stories of hauntings both from his own researches and from those of
friends and acquaintances. A delightful story-teller, he discusses the
supernatural in much greater depth than is usual in recent ghost books,
and with complete objectivity. Entertaining and absorbing, this is a
collection to intrigue believers and sceptics alike. |
|
First edition 1975 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
143 |
V Boveington and A.G.P.Taylor |
A PSYCHIC IN THE HOUSE |
|
"Psychic phenomena, by its very
nature, lends itself so easily to deception and fraud that there is
really only one way to be certain of the genuineness of clairvoyance and
telekinesis, and that is to attempt to 'do it yourself'". So it was
that towards the end of 1949 a small group of deeply interested but open
minded people, well known to each other did just that over a number of
years with well rewarding and amazing results. These results are
transcribed in detail in this book. |
|
First edition 1967 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
144 |
Bill Schul |
THE PSYCHIC FRONTIERS OF MEDICINE |
|
This book deals with the
astonishing success of psychic healing. Modern medicine is undergoing a
striking revolution. From Acupuncture and biofeedback to psychic healing
and Kirlian photography, new methods of treating the sick are
astounding medical experts throughout the world. |
|
First edition 1977 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
145 |
James Hillman |
THE SOUL'S CODE |
|
Highly accessible and
imaginative, The Soul's Code offers a liberating vision of childhood
troubles and an exciting approach to themes such as fate and fatalism,
character and desire, family influence and freedom, and, most of all,
calling - that invisible mystery at the centre of every life that voices
the fundamental question, "What is it, in my heart, that I must do, be,
and have? And why?" In this brilliant, absorbing work Hillman dares us
to believe that we are each meant to be here and that we are needed by
the world around us." Publishers Weekly |
|
First edition 1996 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
146 |
Rumy Dastoor |
LIFE AND HEREAFTER |
|
"For sane reading in this
insane world." "Spiritualism - the study of life hereafter might,
according to some, be a bogie of a sick mind. People have spoken thus
because of misinformation and lack of understanding. But it is mainly a
study of knowing oneself and hence, is considered as the highest
philosophy. Philosophy which is always trying to release the soul from
the limitations of the body is, in effect, the study of so-called death
which is a journey from the mortal to the divine and immutable" - so
begins Rumy's amazing maiden book, sent from India. |
|
First edition 1996 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
147 |
Rochelle M Gibler |
THE POWER OF MIRACLES |
|
The Power of Miracles examines
the truth behind spiritual healing. Do miracles really happen? And if
they do, is there undeniable proof? This book sets out to answer both
these questions with a definite 'yes'. It profiles many top miracle
workers, exploring their philosophies and approach, and details dozens
of case histories from around the world, supported by first-hand
interviews, of people who are alive today in defiance of medical
science. |
|
First edition 1998 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
148 |
Ruth White |
WORKING WITH YOUR CHAKRAS |
|
Working with your Chakras is a
highly practical and approachable guide to the chakras. Clearly written
and easy to use, it brings esoteric chakra knowledge into a Western
perspective. It shows how connecting with your chakras enables growth,
healing and balance to take place in all areas of your being - physical,
mental, emotional and spiritual. |
|
First edition 1993 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
149 |
Cassandra Easom |
A COMPLETE GUIDE TO PSYCHIC DEVELOPMENT |
|
Over 35 ways to tap into your
psychic development. Psychic powers are natural and intuitive. Everyone
can develop their psychic potential to help achieve greater awareness
and control over their destiny. This book is packed with practical
exercises and suggestions. Cassandra Easom is a best selling author and
psychic and in this book she leads you simply and safely through a
variety of techniques which will literally open up a new dimension for
you. |
|
First edition 1997 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
150 |
Dr Brian Weiss |
MANY LIVES, MANY MASTERS |
|
Psychiatrist Dr Brian Weiss had
been working with Catherine, a young patient, for eighteen months. She
was suffering from recurring nightmares and chronic anxiety attacks.
When his traditional methods of therapy failed, Dr Weiss turned to
hypnosis and was astonished and sceptical when Catherine began recalling
past-life traumas which seemed to hold the key to her problems. His
scepticism was eroded when Catherine began to channel messages from "the
space between lives", which contained remarkable revelations about his
own life. |
|
First edition 1988 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
151 |
Dr Brian Weiss |
THROUGH TIME INTO HEALING |
|
This book sheds new light on
the extraordinary healing potential of past life therapy. Based on his
extensive clinical experience, Brian Weiss reveals how he uses
regression to past lifetimes to provide the necessary breakthrough to
healing mind, body and soul. Using vivid past life case studies he shows
how regression therapy can: heal the body by healing the mind, help to
overcome problems, bring comfort to the grieving, uncover hidden
talents, open the mind to mystical experience. The book shows us how to
help ourselves to lead healthy, productive lives, secure in the
knowledge that death is not the final word and that the doors to healing
and wholeness are inside each one of us. |
|
First edition 1992 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
152 |
Myrna Loftus |
A SPIRITUAL APPROACH TO ASTROLOGY |
|
Drawing upon the universal
teaching of reincarnation, especially as expressed in Edgar Cayce's
work, Myrna Loftus illuminates the karmic patterns reflected in the
birth chart. This comprehensive text places astrology within a spiritual
context and makes it accessible to beginning students with no prior
knowledge of astrology, and to the more advanced student who wants a
more specialized work, on the subtler implications of astrological
configurations. This book includes a 130-page section on the karmic
meaning of planetary aspects. |
|
First edition 1983 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
153 |
Shakti Gawain with Laurel King |
LIVING IN THE LIGHT |
|
Living in the Light shows us a
new way of life - becoming "a channel for the creative power of the
universe". The key is in learning to listen to your intuition, and to
act on it at all times, even at the risk of going against old patterns,
expectations and belief systems". The rewards are personal fulfilment,
aliveness, and creativity, as well as complete transformation of the
world around us. This book offers a unique and expansive perspective on
what we are and what we have the potential to become. |
|
First edition 1986 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
154 |
G. Abbott |
MYSTERIES OF THE TOWER OF LONDON |
|
The Tower of London's past is
punctuated by question marks, its history inextricably and, in most
cases, inexplicably, intertwined with mystery. Not only does buried
treasure await discovery and skeletons plead for identification, but the
spirits of the hapless prisoners who died by bullet or blade,
suffocation or poison, all cry out for the truth to be revealed, their
killers named, the reasons for their cruel deaths exposed. This
wonderfully written and well-researched book gives a new dimension to
the Tower of London. |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
155 |
J.A. Brooks |
GHOSTS AND WITCHES OF THE COTSWOLDS |
|
A beautifully illustrated, well
researched book depicting well-known, and some not so well-known, ghost
stories of the Cotswolds. |
|
First edition 1986 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
156 |
Wally Barnes |
GHOSTS, MYSTERIES AND LEGENDS OF OLD WARRINGTON |
|
As a small boy in the 1930s,
Wally Barnes began to learn about the long history and folk lore of
Warrington by listening to old folk in front of their blazing firesides
on winter's evenings. In this Book 2, Wally has compiled over forty more
fascinating tales of ghosts and mysteries of the town's past as well as
glimpses of many of the real characters of Old Warrington |
|
First edition 1990 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
157 |
Jean M. Lee |
THE ETERNAL JOURNEY |
|
Traveller: Think of your few
short years of life on earth and try to imagine Eternity; then go within
yourself and try to imagine what you think is the reason for your life
and where you are going. This book is written to make you sit up and
take notice - to imagine (if you like) what the Cosmos is all about!
During your imaginings you may find that another being will aid you and
put thoughts into your mind! For we are all receiving stations! Good and
bad thoughts can be received according to our evolution (or wavelength)
so surely it is better to understand and be prepared. We alone are
personally responsible for our evolution in eternity! |
|
First edition 1995 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
158 |
Ena Twigg with Ruth Hagy Brod |
ENA TWIGG: MEDIUM |
|
What lies beyond the grave? For
years Ena Twigg has brought her sitters into contact with people long
dead. Ena Twigg: Medium is the amazing account of her life, outstanding
powers, and numerous encounters with 'the other side'. It was conceived
in the response to the many thousands of requests from sitters, would-be
sitters and the distressed or simply curious. Her predictions and
psychic gifts form a chronicle of psychic experiences which is a
landmark in the literature of the occult. |
|
First edition 1973 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
159 |
Ken Akehurst through G.M. Roberts |
EVERYONE'S GUIDE TO THE HEREAFTER |
|
When the time comes for us to
pass over, one of several things happen. You are either met by someone
known to you, assuming your passing is normal, or, if not, then by
someone who is appointed to do so. Do not worry about this for,
whichever way it happens, it will seem perfectly all right at the time.
Thus opens the simple, sincere and direct book given to G.M. Roberts
through automatic writing from Ken Akehurst, the blind medium who passed
to the Higher Life on 28 July 1978. |
|
First edition 1985 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
160 |
Paul Beard |
SURVIVAL OF DEATH |
|
Many psychical researchers
consider that severe difficulties exist in obtaining conclusive evidence
of our continuing existence after death. But when this book was first
published in 1966 Paul Beard was accorded high praise for the analytical
detachment with which he discussed the evidence for and against. Such a
careful and honest assessment presented many problems especially as the
same evidence must be viewed, considered and weighed so differently
from the two sides. With great clarity the author indicates the way by
which the reader can make his own decision. |
|
First edition 1966 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
161 |
James Byrne and John Sutton |
THE PSYCHIC WORLD OF JAMES BYRNE |
|
This book tells the amazing
story of this international medium, whose astounding gifts have brought
him major success. Born into a nightmare world ruled by his drunken,
violent father, James Byrne endured years of cruelty and suffering. But
when his father passed on, he returned to spirit to seek the forgiveness
of his teenage son. From that day forth, James began to recognize and
develop his psychic powers, eventually becoming one of the youngest ever
demonstrators within the Spiritualist Church. |
|
First edition 1993 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
162 |
Sylvia Barbanell |
WHEN A CHILD DIES |
|
" ... in God's great Kingdom
there is no death and all continue to live in far better conditions in a
world which is richer and sweeter than anything you have ever dreamed.
Do not sorrow for the child. Know that an all-loving God has given
angels to protect her or him and the child will, in fullness of time, be
reunited with you" - Silver Birch. This book presents evidence for
survival after death including communications from children who have
passed to the spirit world. A great comfort for bereaved parents. |
|
First edition 1942 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
163 |
Jacob Boehme translated by John Sparrow |
MYSTERIUM MAGNUM - Volume 1 |
|
or an Exposition of the First
Book of Moses called Genesis concerning: The Manifestation or Revelation
of The Divine Word through the Three Principles of the Divine Essence;
also of the Original of the World and the Creation. Wherein the Kingdom
of Nature and the Kingdom of Grace are Expounded. For the better
understanding of the Old and New Testament, and what Adam and Christ
are, also how Man should consider and may know himself in the Light of
Nature, and what he is, and wherein his Temporal, and Eternal Life,
consist. |
|
First edition 1623 |
Q |
———————————————————————————— |
164 |
Carol Gino |
THEN AN ANGEL CAME |
|
They were a three-generation
Italian-American family steeped in traditional values. Carol Gino's
old-world father was a stern disciplinarian who loved opera and polka;
her mother, a shy housewife who lived for her family; while Carol
herself had made a spiritual journey away from her Catholic roots. But
nothing in the Gino family's past could ever have prepared them for the
tragedy that would change all their lives forever. This is a family's
true story of loss and renewal. |
|
First edition 1997 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
165 |
Robert Almeder |
DEATH AND PERSONAL SURVIVAL |
|
Robert Almeder presents the
evidence for Life after Death. An excellent, well written, well
researched book. "A thoughtful and informed response to the usual
superficial dismissals of the evidence within the academic community ...
Almeder understands the issues and has studied the evidence closely" -
Stephen E. Braude, University of Maryland, Baltimore County. |
|
First edition 1992 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
166 |
Professor Robert Kasterbaum |
IS THERE LIFE AFTER DEATH? |
|
One of America's most
distinguished clinical psychologists Robert Kasterbaum has spent years
working in the field of death and bereavement. Both eminently qualified
and personally motivated, his experiences have increasingly drawn him to
this most timeless of questions. In a fascinating examination of both
classic cases and all the latest evidence, he casts the reader in the
role of juror as he alternately adopts the stance of advocate and then
critic to assess the case for and against an afterlife. |
|
First edition 1984 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
167 |
Adriana Rocha and Kristi Jorde |
A CHILD OF ETERNITY |
|
A gripping, powerfully told
story of a very special child trapped inside a body she cannot always
control. When she was four years old, Adri was diagnosed as being
autistic. This book tells the story of how, suddenly, Adri starts to
communicate with her mother, using a breakthrough technique called
Facilitated Communication. An extraordinary dialogue follows. Adri, wise
beyond her years, reveals to her amazed mother her knowledge of past
lives, spiritual masters and divine love. Against impossible odds, this
girl brings us a message from God, a message the world desperately needs
to hear. |
|
First edition 1995 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
168 |
W. Alexander Wheeler |
THE PROPHETIC REVELATIONS OF PAUL SOLOMON |
|
Paul Solomon could see into the
future, and he came to sound a warning that the time for change in
human conduct is at hand. This book reveals the profound spiritual
meaning of these 'last times' in which we live. The message of his
prophesies is clear - unless we dedicate ourselves to a new age of
global unity, devastating events foreseen by the 'Source' will come to
pass. |
|
First edition 1994 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
169 |
Robert Scutch |
JOURNEY WITHOUT DISTANCE |
|
This is the long awaited book
that recounts the inspirational story of how A Course in Miracles came
to be. A Course in Miracles is a three-volume set of books, a
self-study course designed to help change one's perceptions. It was
taken down over a seven-year period by Dr Helen Schucman, a highly
respected psychologist, who heard a 'voice' dictating the material to
her. This is a book that will be eagerly read not only by those who are
familiar with the Course, but by all who are fascinated by an
extra-ordinary true story.
[See also book no. 230
|
|
First edition 1984 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
170 |
Rut Bjorkman |
SPIRITUAL EVOLUTION |
|
The purpose of creation is the
radiation of the Divine Power from which it is made. We are alive
because in the creaturely world we are subject to this emanation of
Eternal Life, and because we participate in God by way of the constant
inflowing of His Power into all of surrounding life. We breathe in this
Power and we touch it in living things. We partake of this Divine Power
in our food, and are thus in God and He in us - but we do not recognise
that. We seek God outside His creation and do not find him. We fail to
become impelled and swept off our feet by the Divinity of this creation
... |
|
First edition 1988 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
171 |
Ch'an Master Sheng- yen |
COMPLETE ENLIGHTENMENT |
|
Complete Enlightenment is the
first authorative translation and commentary on The Sutra of Complete
Enlightenment, a central text that shaped the development of East Asian
Buddhism and Ch'an (Z'en). Thich Nhat Hanh explains in his Foreword that
The Sutra of Complete Enlightenment is considered to be a transcription
of actual discussions between the Buddha and twelve enlightened beings
(bodhisattuas). These bodhisattuas questioned the Buddha on all aspects
of living spiritual practice thus becoming our representatives in that
great assembly, so that the readers can experience first-hand these
engaging dialogues. |
|
First edition 1997 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
172 |
Sylvia Browne |
ADVENTURES OF A PSYCHIC |
|
The fascinating and inspiring
true-life story of one of America's most successful clairvoyants. Sylvia
recounts her captivating life as a clairvoyant, telling of her earliest
readings as a young child in Kansas City, and of her first contact with
'Francine' her spirit guide. In engrossing detail, Sylvia tells how her
gift has assisted police departments in their search for missing
children and dangerous criminals - and how her predictions of deaths,
plane crashes and momentous world events were sometimes heeded -or
tragically ignored. |
|
First edition 1990 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
173 |
David Darling |
AFTER LIFE |
|
In search of Cosmic
Consciousness. Does human consciousness survive death? Can the universe
itself be said to have a 'soul'? In seeking answers to these profound
questions which have preoccupied philosophers and scientists for so many
centuries, David Darling treads an exhilarating path through a great
diversity of disciplines and world-views. Quantum mechanics, cosmology,
anthropology and the latest developments in neurology are all important
threads drawn into the weave of this most eloquent and inspiring
exploration of the mind. |
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
174 |
Aiko Gibo |
FINDING YOUR GUARDIAN SPIRIT |
|
Now revealed for the first time
to the Western world: the secrets of life after death according to
Japan's most popular psychic, Aiko Gibo. Mrs Gibo's remarkable ability
to communicate with the spirits of the dead has made her a revered
figure to an ever-growing number of Japanese who feel a spiritual vacuum
in their lives. Her message is simple and universal: we must never
underestimate the importance of maintaining human relationships, even
with those who have passed on into the afterlife. |
|
First edition 1992 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
175 |
Annie Kirkwood |
MARY'S MESSAGE TO THE WORLD |
|
In 1987, an extraordinary thing
happened to Annie Kirkwood, a retired nurse living quietly in a Dallas
suburb. In her mind she began to sense the presence of the Virgin Mary,
entrusting to her messages of vital importance to the world. Annie
Kirkwood protested that she was not the right choice, but Mary insisted
that she had chosen Annie deliberately; as a sincere seeker of spiritual
truth who could be trusted to transmit her teaching in plain language
to ordinary people. |
|
First edition 1991 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
176 |
Joseph Gallenberger Phd |
BROTHERS FOREVER |
|
When his beloved elder brother
Peter committed suicide, the author, a psychotherapist, was forced to
deal with his overwhelming grief and guilt over this family tragedy.
Although able to relieve his emotional trauma, Dr Gallenberger could not
answer the ultimate questions that arise from the death of a loved one.
Thus began his search for an after life where his brother continued to
exist. A profound and moving account of love and life that survives
death. |
|
First edition 1996 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
177 |
Tress Connor and Alan Connor |
STEP INTO MY WORLD |
|
Step into my world is an open
and honest account of the well known medium Tress Connor. You will learn
how Tress developed her gifts as a psychic and explore her wondrous
world of experiences and stories. You can also share her innermost
emotions, joyous, sad and occasionally hilarious. In the pages of this
book you will find beautiful poetry, given by spirit, and self
development exercises to help you change your life. |
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
178 |
Cherie Sutherland PhD |
REBORN IN THE LIGHT |
|
Recent best sellers such as
Embraced by the Light have conclusively documented the reality of
near-death experiences. Now this astonishing and revealing book takes us
one step further by examining the profound after effects of the
near-death phenomenon and what survivors have to teach us about life.
Sociologist, Cherie Sutherland, whose own near-death experience led her
to three years of in-depth study, has collected the testimony of dozens
of people from all walks of life who have died and been 'reborn'. These
new pioneers speak of enhanced self-esteem, a renewed sense of purpose,
and a deepening compassion that has changed their lives. |
|
First edition 1992 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
179 |
Ann Walker |
HEAVEN CAN COME LATER |
|
The autobiography of Britain's
most remarkable medium. It tells the moving story of a young girl born
to a violent alcholic father who abused both her and her mother. She
became addicted to tranquillizers and it seemed her life was on an
irreversible slide, then when she was at her lowest, her most suicidal,
she began to hear voices. Though she didn't realise it immediately these
were her first encounters with her friend in the spirit world, White
Arrow, who from then on would guide her through her darkest hours to a
greater understanding of spiritual reality and to happiness. |
|
First edition 1989 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
180 |
Ann Walker |
LITTLE ONE |
|
Twelve years ago her spirit
guide, White Arrow, showed her seven very simple symbols. He directed
her to send these childlike drawings to spiritual elders from a native
American tribe in Montana. In 1991, at the invitation of these Indians,
she embarked on a journey that was to see her participation in
ceremonies that no other white person has ever witnessed, and to have
her recognised by the Indians as a medicine woman. The elders of the
tribe went on to reveal to her the meaning of the symbols and to over
turn her beliefs about life and the planet. |
|
First edition 1994 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
181 |
Richard craze |
ASTRAL PROJECTION |
|
For thousands of years people
have wondered if it is possible for the soul or spirit to leave the body
at will - so-called 'astral projection'. In this beginner's guide,
Richard Craze describes the traditional techniques used to achieve
astral projection in a way that is simple and practical, so that
everyone can try them. He also explores out-of-the-body experiences
(OOBEs) and near-death experiences (NDEs) and looks at the history of
astral projection and its cultural significance. |
|
First edition 1996 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
182 |
Richard Bach |
RUNNING FROM SAFETY |
|
Fifty years ago, Richard Bach
made a promise to himself to one day come back through time and teach
himself everything he had learned from life. This pledge is forgotten
until the day when, mid air in his paraglider, Richard suddenly meets
nine-year-old Dickie Bach, who expects the promise to be kept. In this
intimate adventure of mind and heart, Richard sets out to show Dickie
the things that matter and finds his teaching doesn't go as planned.
This is a book that supplies surprising answers to old questions: Who
are we? What do we want to do with our lives? And why aren't we doing
it? Must we be the victim of circumstance instead of its master? How do
we learn to love! |
|
First edition 1994 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
183 |
M Scott Peck |
IN SEARCH OF STONES |
|
On the surface this is the
story of a three-week trip through the British countryside that Dr Peck
took with his wife Lily - looking for the megalithic stones that became
an obsession for them. But the search for stones is a search for meaning
and romance and, ultimately, an exploration of our own life journey. In
search of stones is a beautiful book of spirituality and quest, faith
and mystery, and the most intimate book to come from one of our most
distinguished thinkers. Dr Peck said of this book that it is "the
closest thing to an autobiography I will ever write". |
|
First edition 1993 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
184 |
Alan E Crossley |
A JOURNEY OF PSYCHIC DISCOVERY |
|
One man's unparalleled 50-year
exploration of Spiritualism and psychic phenomena. A Journey of Psychic
Discovery is a fascinating illustrated book which includes details of
physical phenomena, spiritual healing and various other aspects of
psychic activity taken from a private publication by the author written
in 1974 entitled The Enigma of Psychic Phenomena. |
|
First edition 1983 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
185 |
Dolores Ashcroft-Nowicki |
THE NEW BOOK OF THE DEAD |
|
The Tibetan Book of the Dead
and The Egyptian Book of the Dead have fascinated and inspired
generations of Westerners looking for sense and significance in the
mysteries of life and death. These ancient scriptures laid out elaborate
rituals and explanations of death, often exotic, but sometimes alien to
our own experience. The New Book of the Dead is a modern version of
this ancient wisdom, written specifically for Westerners. It is a
detailed, fully illustrated guide for dealing with death and
bereavement. It describes rites of preparation - such as the ritual
cutting of the silver cord, instructions for the preparation of the
body, saying goodbye and letting go of the physical realm. |
|
First edition 1992 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
186 |
Sanaya Roman |
SPIRITUAL GROWTH |
|
Spiritual Growth teaches you
how to 'be' your Higher Self in your everyday life, create a vision of
your higher purpose, and manifest what you want rapidly and easily. You
will learn to work with light for healing and growth, to connect with
the Universal Mind for enhanced creativity, and to link with the Higher
Will to carry out your higher purpose. These easy-to-learn processes and
meditation exercises taught by Orin, a wise and gentle spirit teacher,
have helped thousands to take a quantum leap, accelerate their spiritual
growth, and live their lives with more joy, harmony, peace and love. |
|
First edition 1989 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
187 |
Rama - Dr Frederick Lenz |
SURFING THE HIMALAYAS |
|
Often the strangest adventures
are true. When a snowboarder arrives in Nepal, his bizarre encounter
with an elderly Tibetan Buddhist monk is destined to alter the course of
his life. High on a Himalayan mountainside he is drawn to the wisdom of
the charismatic monk's words. It is the first of many meetings which
will initiate him into the innermost secrets of enlightenment. His
teacher is the master - Fwap Sam-Dup, whose meeting with the Westerner
was long-ago foretold by his own master. The revelations which follow
will change his life forever. |
|
First edition 1995 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
188 |
Filippo Liverziani |
LIFE, DEATH AND CONSCIOUSNESS |
|
Out-of-body experiences enable
us to discover our soul and to assert its autonomy from the physical
body. This makes it possible to pursue a new experimental approach to
the issue of life after death, which up to now Western philosophy has
confronted in too abstract a manner. A step forward has been made by the
pre-death experiences of people who have reached the threshold of death
yet returned, and are able to tell us what they have experienced and
seen: one could define it as a glimpse of another dimension. |
|
First edition 1991 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
189 |
Hugh Lynn Cayce |
VENTURE INWARD |
|
For those who desire a safe
pathway into their inner selves, this classic book abut psychic
development is required reading. Written by the late Hugh Lynn Cayce,
elder son of psychic Edgar Cayce, this book begins with the story of the
'sleeping prophet' and his clairvoyant gift, which helped so many
people. In later sections Hugh Lynn delves into different doorways to
the unconscious, including mediumship and hypnosis, among many others. |
|
First edition 1964 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
190 |
Peter F. Baker |
VALLEY OF THE SHADOW |
|
"This is the true summary of a
period in our lives between 1968 to 1991 when my wife and I were engaged
in the rescue of lost souls on an unprecedented scale and method. In
the conventional method lost souls are brought to a circle comprising of
one or two mediums and after instruction as to their state are
hopefully sent on their way to enlightenment. In our situation my wife
travelled astrally while in trance, left her body and personally
contacted those that were in need of help." So writes Peter Baker in
this amazing book of his family's rescue work with earth-bound spirits. |
|
First edition 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
191 |
Silver Birch Edited by Anne Dooley |
GUIDANCE FROM SILVER BIRCH |
|
More words of wisdom from
Silver Birch, the Indian guide of Maurice Barbanell - the first editor
of Psychic News. "In presenting to readers old and new this further
selection of Silver Birch teachings, which are contained in the pages
that follow, may I express the modest hope that no single one of you
will close its pages without some solace or food for fruitful reflection
in your own pilgramage along the roadway of life." |
|
First edition 1966 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
192 |
Betty Shine |
MIND TO MIND |
|
Betty Shine tells her story. It
is cheerful, down-to-earth and full of humour. It reveals how she
became aware of her gifts and how she has used her experiences of mind
and energy to help others. Illustrated with a wide variety of examples
and case histories, this is a uniquely helpful and practical book by a
woman whose powers have been a comfort and an inspiration to countless
numbers of people. |
|
First edition 1989 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
193 |
Betty Shine |
MIND MAGIC |
|
Since her first book Mind to
Mind was published and her reputation has grown, it has become
impossible for Betty to treat personally the thousands of people who
look to her for help. So it is as a natural extension to her talks,
lectures and private consultations that she has written Mind Magic, a
self-help guide that will enable everyone to experience the benefits of
mind energy and healing - for themselves and for the good of others. At
the core of Mind Magic is a series of exercises and projects devised,
tried and tested by Betty herself. |
|
First edition 1991 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
194 |
Betty Shine |
MIND WAVES |
|
In Mind Waves, the third and
final Mind book, Betty explores the waves which we all project and which
invade everything around us. By providing simple, practical exercises,
and by sharing with us personal anecdotes, experiences and feelings, she
helps us gain the awareness needed to utilize mind waves in a positive
manner. From that point, with a truer understanding of our fears and
emotions, we can enhance our own lives and the lives of those about us. |
|
First edition 1993 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
195 |
Betty Shine |
MY LIFE AS A MEDIUM |
|
Betty Shine has been a world
famous medium for over twenty years and is highly respected for her
remarkable powers and healing skills. Her extraordinary gifts have
touched many hearts and inspired the lives of thousands of people from
all walks of life. Yet, in spite of being guided by spirit voices from
the age of two, Betty Shine admits she was initially reluctant to accept
her personal destiny. During a life that has included a career as an
opera singer, she has experienced astral travel, a wide range of
phenomena, and gained deep insight into the near-death experience. This
is her compelling story. (Audio Tape - D) |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
196 |
A. Reader Edited by Lee W. Bailey and Jenny Yates |
THE NEAR DEATH EXPERIENCE |
|
This is the most up-to-date and
comprehensive survey of near-death studies. It gathers together
remarkable representative cases of near-death experiences, and surveys
the lively interdisciplinary research debating ways to interpret this
challenging phenomenon from biological, psychological, philosophical,
and religious viewpoints. |
|
First edition 1996 |
N |
———————————————————————————— |
197 |
Paco Rabanne |
HAS THE COUNTDOWN BEGUN? |
|
Paco Rabanne, the world-famous
couturier, is also a visionary who has come in his latest incarnation to
warn us of our impending fate and remind us of the doom that was
foretold by Ezekiel and St John of the Apocalypse, by Nostradamus,
Mother Shipton and many others. All speak of a reign of terror, of
plague, fire and a rain of blood, of the human race bringing upon itself
the final judgement for its excesses, its selfishness and evil ways.
"My aim", says the author, "is not to inspire terror, but to reveal the
dangers that threaten our future ... what we must do is to restore the
balance between materialism and spirituality, between the body and
soul". In this book he shows us the way. |
|
First edition 1993 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
198 |
Paco Rabanne |
JOURNEY |
|
Paco Rabanne is an
internationally renowned master of style and fashion. His designs and
fragrances have kept him at the forefront of fashion for many years. Yet
even within the hustle and bustle of a world in which people are only
as good as their last collection, he has found time to stop and think
and question his reasons for working and living. It will appeal to those
intrigued and fascinated by how a master of fashion creates, as well as
those seeking a deeper meaning to life. |
|
First edition 1997 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
199 |
Jostein Gaardner |
THE SOLITAIRE MYSTERY |
|
A boy and his father on a
journey from Norway to Greece, in search of the boy's mother. A dwarf
who gives the boy a magnifying glass, and a baker who gives him a bun. A
miniature book that tells the story of a sailor shipwrecked on a desert
island in the year 1790. A pack of playing cards with a life of their
own. A Joker, who looks too deeply and too much. These are the
ingredients in this fascinating story-within-a-story, in which fantasy
and reality, the present and past, are brilliantly mixed. Structured in
52 chapters like a pack of cards that are shuffled together and fall
into place at the very end, it is a rich, teasing book that throws up
endless questions about the way the world works and why we are here. |
|
First edition 1990 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
200 |
Shepherd Hoodwin |
THE JOURNEY OF YOUR SOUL |
|
Shepherd Hoodwin has given us
one of the best books to date about the phenomenon of channeling. In
particular, he has given us a meticulous presentation of the information
channeled from the source known as Michael, which is especially
interesting. As with the Edgar Cayce and Seth material before it, a
whole subculture has grown up around Michael and their teachings in the
last 13 years, represented by at least a dozen books on the subject,
which tells us how did you become who you are? Why are you here? Where
are you going? Discover the big picture of your life through the Michael
teachings. |
|
First edition 1995 |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
201 |
David Icke |
THE ROBOTS REBELLION |
|
We live in a world which is
increasingly dominated by revolutionary new technology but, according to
author and lecturer, David Icke, it is we who are the robots. In his
strongest book to date, Icke reveals the alarming extent to which people
of all nations have allowed themselves to be programmed by the ideas
fed to them by those in power. Fearlessly, he tears down the veils of
hypocrisy, built up for generations by the corrupt forces of Church,
State, science and commerce - and reveals the true pathos of the human
condition beneath. The world's unwilling robots have it within
themselves to rise up -and take control of their own exciting destiny. |
|
First edition 1994 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
202 |
Franchezzo transcribed by A. Farnese |
A WANDERER IN THE SPIRIT LANDS |
|
This classic was given to the
author by a spirit author, who was one of the several spirits who
inspired him to write down for them their experiences in the spirit
world. |
|
First edition 1896 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
203 |
Anthony Duncan |
THE SWORD IN THE SUN |
|
Here is the record of a
remarkable conversation between an angel and a rather surprised
Christian priest. This wise and often humorous dialogue is notable for
its insight into several esoteric subjects including the Qabalistic Tree
of Life, the inner order of angels and elementals, reincarnation and
the evolution of consciousness. It is above all a book about the power
of Divine Love - the great unifying energy in the universe - that joins
us in brotherhood with angels, elementals and indeed all the living
orders of Creation under the Resurrected and Ascended Christ. |
|
First edition 1997 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
204 |
Mary Summer Rain |
DREAMWALKER |
|
What is a Dreamwalker? They are
the rare few who, as Mary Summer describes them, are "led by the
spirit", have "shed the yoke of desire and self want", and have
discarded the need for material gain and all evidence of negative
thought. Without any personal goals, they travel the path of knowledge
and go where the spirit of truth leads them. |
|
First edition 1988 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
205 |
Laurie Nadel with Judy Haims and Robert Stempson |
SIXTH SENSE |
|
Do you ever get that gut
feeling that something isn't right and later have your fears confirmed?
Or find yourself thinking about someone just before they give you a
call? If so, you may be more in touch with your intuition than you
realise. But are you making full use of your intuitive powers? This book
will show you how to identify, value and trust your intuition in order
to revolutionise every aspect of your life. Sixth sense is written by
eminent journalist Laurie Nadel and two pioneers in the field of
whole-brain research and creativity training. |
|
First edition 1990 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
206 |
Brother Mandus |
THE DIVINE AWAKENING |
|
This remarkable book comes from
the pen of a man who suddenly paused in life and accepted the Divine
Plan. In a moment of Divine Awakening, he severed his ties with the
material world and offered himself to the Lord come what may. In this
new book, Brother Mandus tells of his fascinating adventures round the
world, of the physical and spiritual healings he witnessed among those
he met and of his healing sanctuary in Blackpool. |
|
First edition 1961 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
207 |
Pat Rodegast and Judith Stanton |
EMMANUEL'S BOOK |
|
A manual for living comfortably
in the cosmos. Here is the revealing underground classic, a work that
stands beside the 'Seth' books as a delighted and invaluable guide to
our inner spirit and our outer world. Emmanuel speaks to us through Pat
Rodegast and shares his wisdom and insights on all aspects of life.
Beautifully written and illustrated, Emmanuel's Book is to be treasured,
enjoyed and passed on to a friend. |
|
First edition 1985 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
208 |
Ray Stanford |
FATIMA PROPHECY |
|
Fatima, Portugal 1917: A
luminous Apparition of the Virgin Mary appeared to three peasant
children and delivered a prophecy that would change the world. The
Divine Lady's message of warning for mankind was entrusted to the simple
peasant girl Lucia, who delivered the prophecy to the Church's
hierarchy. Millions have waited half a century to hear the prophecies
which were not divulged when the College of Cardinals convened in 1960.
Years later across the ocean, a small group met in prayerful devotion to
the Fatima miracle - and the results were astonishing. A psychic in
their midst, Ray Stanford, channeled a series of revelations so alarming
that the group understood the Church's secretive desperation. |
|
First edition 1987 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
209 |
Lobsang Rampa |
THE THIRD EYE |
|
The autobiography of a Tibetan
lama. Lobsang Rampa is just seven years old when the oracles prophesy a
monastic life ahead. And so he leaves home to enter Chakpori Lamasery,
an order as yet untouched by the Chinese invasion. There, under the
great masters, he learns the mystic arts of the centuries. Above all, he
experiences the highest honour of a Tibetan's life, the opening of the
third eye, and so enables us to share his clairvoyant vision of a
magical world. |
|
First edition 1956 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
210 |
Lobsang Rampa |
WISDOM OF THE ANCIENTS |
|
Wisdom of the Ancients is
indeed a suitable title for this fascinating book. The larger part of it
consists of a Dictionary of the Occult, and Dr Rampa has called upon
his great knowledge and experience to explain fully and very
comprehensibly many of the mysteries of the hidden world. Following the
dictionary are four supplements on: Breathing, Stones, Foodstuffs and
Exercises. |
|
First edition 1965 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
211 |
Lobsang Rampa |
THE HERMIT |
|
A young monk had come to the
cave of the old, blind hermit to learn something of his wisdom. "When I
was young", the hermit told him, "I had many painful experiences. I left
our great city of Lhasa and wandered blind in the wilderness. Starving,
ill and unconscious, I was taken I know not where and instructed in
preparation for this day. When my knowledge has passed to you my life's
work is ended and I can go in peace to the Heavenly Fields." An hour
later the young man was sitting before the elder, listening to a story
that was as enthralling as it was strange ... |
|
First edition 1971 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
212 |
Joel Martin and Patricia Romanowski |
WE DON'T DIE - GEORGE ANDERSON'S CONVERSATIONS WIT |
|
The author of this book was
once a sceptic. By 1980 popular late-night radio personality Joel Martin
had made headlines by exposing several psychic hoaxes. So when Patty, a
young production assistant on his show, begged him to meet the renowned
channeller, George Anderson, Martin warned her "I'll expose him as a
phony in a minute". "Just see him once" Patty pleaded. And Martin did.
And that was just the beginning ... |
|
First edition 1988 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
213 |
His Divine Grace A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupada |
THE PATH OF PERFECTION |
|
The Path of Perfection explains
the highest standard for human beings, the practice of the science of
self-realization. The author has been acclaimed by scholars as the
greatest exponent of the Indian spiritual tradition. This book probes
deeply the nature of consciousness, meditation, karma, death and
reincarnation. He prescribes a simple process to purify the mind and
elevate the consciousness, which not only assures readers inner peace,
but the power to change the chaotic trend of modern society. |
|
First edition 1979 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
214 |
Neale Donald Walsch |
CONVERSATIONS WITH GOD - BOOK 1 |
|
Suppose you could ask God the
most puzzling questions about existence - questions about love and
faith, life and death, good and evil. Suppose God provided clear,
understandable answers. It happened to Neale Donald Walsch. Walsch was
experiencing a low point in his life when he decided to write a letter
to God, venting his frustrations. What he did not expect was a response.
As he finished his letter, he was moved to continue writing - and out
came these extraordinary answers to his questions. |
|
First edition 1995 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
215 |
Philippe Labro |
DARK TUNNEL, WHITE LIGHT |
|
Philippe Labro, a successful
middle-aged writer, lies in a Paris hospital suffering from a mysterious
ailment that is slowly strangling him. Visitors file into his room and
stand in a line against the white wall in front of his bed. With eager
faces and open smiles, they look down at him tethered to his respirator.
He sees his aged father, his first lover, a close friend - without
exception they are the faces of all those he has loved deeply. But they
are dead now. A voice out of nowhere invites him to enter the long dark
tunnel now before him. He is overcome with longing. |
|
First edition 1997 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
216 |
Peter Fenwick and Elizabeth Fenwick |
THE TRUTH IN THE LIGHT |
|
Dr Fenwick is Britain's leading clinical authority on the near-death
experience and President of The International Association for Near-Death
Studies in the UK. With access to an unparalleled database of over 300
first hand accounts, scientist and neuropsychiatrist Dr Peter Fenwick,
working in association with his wife Elizabeth, provides the most
informed and compelling analysis yet written of the near-death
experience and shows that at the heart of this phenomenon there lies a
tantalising and inexplicable core.
|
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
217 |
Janet Lee Mitchell Ph.D |
CONSCIOUS EVOLUTION |
|
We are now faced with
environmental, social and economic demands beyond anything human beings
have ever experienced in the past. But a revolution in thought is
occurring. Humankind is now on the brink of an evolutionary leap in
consciousness that will change the way we think, the way we act towards
each other and the very fabric of life as we know it. Once we can accept
the spiritual dimension of our existence and explore the treasures of
our inner space, Janet Lee Mitchell shows us how we will be able to
release the vast potential inherent in all of us, and regain our human
spirit and greatness. |
|
First edition 1989 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
218 |
Elsa Barker |
LETTERS FROM A LIVING DEAD MAN |
|
An illuminating early spiritual
book describing life in the spirit world. This very detailed
information was given to a well known author whilst in Paris from a
lawyer acquaintance who had very recently 'died' in America. His initial
contact to her was made through automatic writings which started days
before she officially learnt of his death by letter. |
|
First edition 1914 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
219 |
Sylvia Barbanell |
WHEN YOUR ANIMAL DIES |
|
Do animals live after death?
This question, which has been asked thousands of times by people who
were devoted to their animal friends, is answered in this book. Here you
will find conclusive evidence that the pet you loved still lives. Read
how these creatures have returned after death and given proof of their
identity to the owners they worshipped. |
|
First edition 1940 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
220 |
Mark L Prophet and Elizabeth Close Prophet |
THE LOST TEACHING S OF JESUS – 1 |
|
These authors prove that many
of Jesus' original teachings on Karma and Reincarnation are missing.
They show that the New Testament records only a fragment of what Jesus
taught. And that what was written down was tampered with by numerous
editors. Or suppressed by 'guardians of the faith'. The Prophets fill in
the gaps with a bold reconstruction of the essence of Jesus' message.
They unfold the lost teachings Jesus gave in public to the multitudes
and in secret to his closest disciples. And they answer questions that
have puzzled readers of the Bible for centuries. |
|
First edition 1986 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
221 |
Mark L Prophet and Elizabeth Clare Prophet |
THE LOST TEACHINGS OF JESUS – 2 |
|
In Book 1 of The Lost Teachings
of Jesus the authors demonstrate that many of Jesus' original teachings
were lost. In Book 2 they go one step further. They show how early
churchmen - aided and abetted by the Roman emperors Constantine and
Justinian - distorted Jesus' true teachings. And robbed you of what he
wanted you to know about the power of your own inner Christ. this book
recaptures the heart of his message - that you, like Jesus, can
reconnect with your Divine Source to realize your full potential. |
|
First edition 1986 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
222 |
Mark L Prophet and Elizabeth Clare Prophet |
THE LOST TEACHINGS OF JESUS – 3 |
|
In Book 3, the Prophets reveal
Jesus' lost teaching on how you can move beyond yesterday's awareness
and achievements - and take control of the circumstances of your life -
by realizing more of your higher self every day. And they tell the
stories of seven saints and mystics who not only reached for but
accomplished the goal of self-transcendence. By exploring their unique
paths to spiritual mastery, you will find comfort, inspiration and
invaluable keys for your own walk with God. |
|
First edition 1988 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
223 |
Mark L Prophet and Elizabeth Clare Prophet |
THE LOST TEACHINGS OF JESUS – 4 |
|
How to contact your inner
source and access your unlimited potential and find the God within. In
this fourth volume of their landmark series, the Prophets show you how
to put the teachings of Jesus into action to meet the challenges of life
in the 1990s and beyond. And they share effective techniques you can
use to access the creative power of your Real Self. |
|
First edition 1986 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
224 |
Ann Petrie |
YOUR PSYCHIC WORLD A-Z |
|
Everyone is psychic. Everyone
has the ability to develop extra sensory perception, but few know what
to do with it. Taking examples from everyday life, this book looks at
the efficiency of your energy and your love, and presents a whole new
perspective on the psychic world. It explains 'why' certain unusual or
uncanny situations occur and how to handle them in ways most beneficial
to you and those around you. |
|
First edition 1984 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
225 |
Raymond Moody MD with Paul Perry |
REUNIONS |
|
Dr Raymond Moody was the first
medical doctor to investigate the near-death experience and establish
its scientific legitimacy. Now, twenty years after the publication of
his ground-breaking classic Life After Life, Dr Moody presents the fruit
of his latest research into the fascinating field of living people's
contacts with apparitions of the dead. Whether a projection of the
subconscious mind or a proof of life after death, Dr Moody's stunning
findings promise to launch an entire field of research and offer comfort
to bereaved people all over the world. |
|
First edition 1993 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
226 |
Richard Lazarus |
THE CASE AGAINST DEATH |
|
Do you believe in ghosts? If
your answer is no, perhaps you should ask another question: Do you
believe in other people? For it is largely through the testimonies of
those who claim to have been reincarnated, had out-of-body experiences,
visions, spiritual contact, been possessed or housed a poltergeist that
we must form an opinion of whether or not we believe in immortality. The
author guarantees that after reading this book you will never think the
same way about the subject again. |
|
First edition 1993 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
227 |
Damian Thompson |
THE END OF TIME |
|
As the year 2000 approaches,
the world is witnessing a disturbing resurgence of apocalyptic belief.
In Latin America and the Far East, millions of people are converting
every year to a fundamentalist Protestantism which teaches that the
Second Coming is at hand. Across the globe apparitions of the Virgin
Mary prophesy the collapse of evil and the triumph of the Papacy before
the dawn of the Millennium. In the Texas desert and the Tokyo subway,
apocalyptic believers have already resorted to violence, raising the
spectre of worldwide millennium panic as hundreds of cults await the end
of time. |
|
First edition 1996 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
228 |
C.G. Jung |
MEMORIES, DREAMS, REFLECTIONS |
|
Until the end of his long life,
Jung steadfastly refused to attempt the autobiography which his friends
and disciples urged him to write and his admirers throughout the world
hoped for from him. The result, helped by his friend and assistant of
many years, Aniela Jaffe, is a unique memoir of the inner life of a
great and original genius. |
|
First edition 1961 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
229 |
Richard Andrews and Paul Schellenberger |
THE TOMB OF GOD |
|
The Body of Jesus and the
solution to a 2000 year old mystery. It began as an intriguing piece of
puzzle-solving and ended with the discovery of the greatest secret of
all. Dissatisfied with the explanations of previous researchers, the
authors applied mathematical logic to the enduring mystery of
Rennes-le-Chateau and the 'treasure' alleged to be buried there. They
were sceptical. They assumed the enigma would wither under such
scrutiny. It did not. |
|
First edition 1996 |
Q |
———————————————————————————— |
230 |
Foundation for Inner Peace |
A COURSE IN MIRACLES |
|
"This is a course in Miracles"
were the first soundless words mentally dictated to Helen Schucman and
transcribed by William Thetford, Professors of Medical Psychology in New
York City. This was the beginnings of a concise course which took seven
years to complete. The course is arranged throughout as a teaching
device comprising of three parts: a Text, a Workbook for Students and a
Manual for Teachers. The purpose of the book is to provide a way in
which some people will be able to find their own Internal Teacher. |
|
First edition 1996 |
Q |
———————————————————————————— |
231 |
Harry R. Moody and David Carroll |
THE FIVE STAGES OF THE SOUL |
|
In midlife many of us,
regardless of our wordly success, feel that life is not giving us what
we want. But when we come to analyse what it is that we 'do' want, we
are not sure. The confidence and idealism that carried us through the
first half of our lives often gives way to emptiness and confusion as we
get older. This is the first book to explore the specific stages of
spiritual awakening that we go through as we age - from midlife crisis
and the search for inner purpose - to the true happiness and fulfilment
that can be achieved once we find the path to spiritual wholeness. |
|
First edition 1997 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
232 |
Deshung Rinpoche translated by Jared Rhoton |
THE THREE LEVELS OF SPIRITUAL PERCEPTION |
|
In this accessible guide,
Deshung Rinpoche explains the 'Lam-dre', or 'Path with its Result',
system of meditation, which has been special to the Sakya tradition, one
of the four major branches of Tibetan Buddhism, for over a thousand
years. According to Lam-dre teachings, there are three main stages or
levels of perception on the spiritual path: the perception of ordinary
beings, the vision experienced by those who have begun meditation
practice, and the pure vision of those who have attained enlightenment.
These three levels are ultimately shown to be inseparable. |
|
First edition 1995 |
P |
———————————————————————————— |
233 |
Anonymous |
PAST ERAS AWAKEN - 3 Volumes in 1 |
|
Krishna, Nahome, Cassandra,
Mary of Magdala. These books contain facets of the high points and
turning-points in the history of humanity. Their purpose is not limited
to historical research, but goes beyond such findings. The accounts are
free from all the additions of subsequent influences pertaining to power
and geopolitics, thus making it possible to understand the events of
that time in the context of their origin and course of development. The
actual content of the books is the spiritual development of mankind in
times past, as received and portrayed by human beings called for the
purpose. |
|
First edition 1997 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
234 |
Fred Alan Wolf |
TAKING THE QUANTUM LEAP |
|
Taking the Quantum Leap
entertainingly traces the history of physics from the observations of
the early Greeks through the discoveries of Galileo and Newton to the
dazzling theories of such scientists as Planck, Einstein, Bohr and Bohm.
This humanized view of science opens up the mind-stretching visions of
how quantum mechanics, God, human thought and will are related, and
provides profound implications for our understanding of the nature of
reality and our relationship to the cosmos. |
|
First edition 1989 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
235 |
Fred Alan Wolf |
PARALLEL UNIVERSES |
|
Physicist Fred Alan Wolf
explores the startling concept of parallel universes - worlds that
resemble and perhaps even duplicate our own - and puts a refreshing and
illuminating spin on the complex theories challenging our perceptions of
the universe. Through such lively examples as a superspace theatre and
zero-time ghosts, Wolf deftly guides the reader through the paradoxes of
today's physics to explore a realm of scientific speculation in which
black holes are gateways of information between universes, and alter
egos spring into existence at the flip of a coin. |
|
First edition 1990 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
236 |
Francis King and Stephen Skinner |
THE PROPHECIES OF NOSTRADAMUS |
|
Nostradamus is the most famous
prophet the world has ever known. Of the thousands of predictions that
he made during his lifetime, many have come true - with startling
accuracy. In this book Nostradamus and the world's greatest seers and
mystics tell of prophecies and predictions that have been given for the
millennium and beyond. |
|
First edition 1996 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
237 |
David Hammond with David F Brown |
THE SEARCH FOR PSYCHIC POWER |
|
Two years of travel, research
and interviews with such psychic luminaries as Uri Geller, Peter Hurkos,
Jack Schwarz and Dora Van Gelder have convinced David Hammond,
associated publisher of Psychic Magazine, that psychic sense is latent
in all of us. We, too, can learn how to tap the power behind such
phenomena as telepathy, clairvoyance, precognition and out-of-body
experiences. Above all, we can learn to manage the stressful situations
which threaten our very existence. |
|
First edition 1975 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
238 |
D. Scott Rogo Postscript by Robert Crookall |
NAD |
|
NAD - a Sanskrit term
signifying transcendantal, celestial, astral, psychic or paranormal
music. One hundred and one remarkable case histories of people who have
experienced NAD (the hearing of superhuman music) including John Milton,
author Bayard Taylor and the well known parapsychologist Raymond
Bayless, illustrate the wide diverstiy of circumstances in which
transcendental music has been heard by reliable witnesses. |
|
First edition 1970 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
239 |
Dannion Brinkley with Paul Perry |
SAVED BY THE LIGHT |
|
In September 1975 Dannion
Brinkley was talking on the telephone during a thunderstorm when he was
struck by lightning and 'died'. He was clinically dead for more than 20
minutes. But between leaving his body and returning to it, he had an
extraordinary experience. He visited a spiritual realm and was brought
before 13 angelic instructors in what he described as 'a cathedral of
knowledge'. There, he was told of events that would shake the world
before the year 2000. Of the 117 revelations that he recalls, 95 have
already come to pass. |
|
First edition 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
240 |
Dannion Brinkley with Paul Perry |
AT PEACE IN THE LIGHT |
|
A man who died twice reveals
amazing insights into life, death and its mysteries. The author tells of
his remarkable story, describing how he has used the experience and the
powerful psychic ability which opened up to him and helped other people
on their journey through life. Dannion helps you understand, and not
fear the message for life within the meaning of death. |
|
First edition 1995 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
241 |
Grace Rosher |
BEYOND THE HORIZON |
|
The sincere and convincing
account of how the author suddenly became the recipient of messages,
apparently from a dear friend recently deceased, by automatic writing.
She tells of her bewilderment at this completely puzzling and unsought
phenomena, and after much hesitation her final acceptance of the
experience. |
|
First edition 1961 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
242 |
Zoe Hagon |
CHANNELLING |
|
In recent times channelling has
attracted considerable debate and controversy in the media. Yet, as
with all spiritual practices, there are both authentic practitioners and
sensationalistic opportunities. This book presents a balanced
perspective on the various approaches to channelling. In this
illuminating overview of a fascinating area, Zoe Hagon explains simply
each method of channelling, and illustrates it with examples from her
own experience and from around the world. |
|
First edition 1988 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
243 |
Linda Williamson |
CONTACTING THE SPIRIT WORLD |
|
When a loved one dies, it is
natural to want to find out what has happened to them. Have they ceased
to exist or are they living in another world? What kind of world is it?
Is it possible to get in touch? Is the feeling of their continuing
presence real or just your imagination? In Contacting the Spirit World,
experienced medium Linda Williamson provides many of the answers and
shows you how to develop your own powers as a medium. |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
244 |
Linda Williamson |
CHILDREN AND THE SPIRIT WORLD |
|
A book for bereaved families.
If you have lost a child, the need to know what has happened to him or
her can be overwhelming. You may feel that your child is still with you
or is trying to make contact. In this reassuring book, medium and
spiritual teacher Linda Williamson demonstrates how those in the next
world can and do come back to those on earth, bringing their love and
comfort. |
|
First edition 1997 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
245 |
Trevor H. Hall |
THE SPIRITUALISTS |
|
The story of Florence Cook and
William Crookes. Florence Cook was one of the most famous materialising
mediums of the last century, and in 1874 her attendant spirit 'Katie
King' was investigated and declared to be genuine by William Crookes,
the eminent chemist who was later knighted and elected President of the
Royal Society. Trevor Hall, a well known expert in psychic research and a
psychic author has skilfully and tactfully examined the mediumistic
careers of Florence Cook and her sister Kate and their connections with
Crookes and with Charles Blackburn, the Manchester businessman who
financed their activities. |
|
First edition 1962 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
246 |
Robert N. Kotze |
THE SCHEME OF THINGS |
|
This might well be described as
a book of travel, for in it the author sets out to explore the Universe
collecting facts and theories from the past and present, from
scientists and theologians, from philosophers and physicists, in fact
from all manner of men. These he sifts and sorts, expanding here and
refuting there but always seeking to show how the apparently differing
aspects dovetail into each other like pieces of a jigsaw and now as more
and more pieces are fitted together a clearer picture of the whole
emerges. |
|
First edition 1949 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
247 |
P.M.H. Atwater |
BEYOND THE LIGHT |
|
P.M. Atwater 'died' three times
in 1977. Since then she has devoted her life to understanding the
near-death experience and has spoken to thousands of survivors. This is a
very in-depth and comprehensive look at the near-death phenomenon
including its after-effects and implications. Atwater challenges the
stereotype of the tunnel of light, and presents provocative evidence of
many different types of experience, including the hell-like as well as
the transcendent. She also describes the experiences of people who were
dead for several days and then revived, and those who attempted suicide. |
|
First edition 1994 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
248 |
Jana A Kelly |
SPIRIT SPEAKS |
|
Jana Kelly has travelled a
circuitous route to 'A Course in Miracles'. Raised and educated in the
midwest with a strong Scandinavian Lutheran background, she abandoned
her Christian roots when travel in Asia and an interest in yoga drew her
to Eastern thought. Eastern thought with its emphasis on 'The Divine
Within' satisfied an inner hunger left empty by earlier teachings. And
meditation practice, based on the idea that Truth is directly available
to every seeker prepared her for 'A Course in Miracles' study. [See also book no. 230 (page 46)] |
|
First edition 1988 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
249 |
Michael Sabom MD |
LIGHT AND DEATH |
|
Begun in 1994, The Atlanta
Study is the first comprehensive investigation of its kind into
near-death experiences. The study's name hardly captures what lies
behind it: Life and death dramas played out in operating rooms and
hospital beds - and simultaneous events unseen by medical personnel but
reported with astonishing clarity and conviction by nearly 50
individuals who returned from death's door. A leading authority with
over twenty years in the field of near-death experiences, the founder of
The Atlanta Study, Dr Michael Sabom shares his findings. |
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
250 |
Ajahn Sumedho |
THE MIND AND THE WAY |
|
Buddhist reflections on life.
This lively, high readable book offers a radically simple approach to
life that is attractively clear to our confused and anxious society.
Ajahn Sumedho's advice to live simply, to contemplate the way things are
and to let go of suffering brings alive the possibilities of inner
peace, wholeness and happiness that is not dependent on external
conditions. Written with warmth, compassion and humour, it is an
invaluable resource for both the beginner seeking an introduction to
Buddhist teaching and the experienced practitioner seeking renewed
inspiration. |
|
First edition 1995 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
251 |
Jane Roberts |
SETH SPEAKS |
|
Seth is a metaphysical teacher.
An 'energy personality essence' no longer focused in physical form.
This is one of the most powerful of the Seth books. Seth Speaks is an
essential guide to conscious living. It clearly and powerfully
articulates the furthest reaches of human potential and presents the
concept that we are independent of our physical image and have access to
intuitional knowledge and other dimensions of reality. This book has
withstood the test of time and is still considered one of the most
dynamic and brilliant maps of inner reality and human potential
available today. |
|
First edition 1972 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
252 |
Janwillem Van De Wetering |
THE EMPTY MIRROR |
|
Janwillem Van De Wetering was
twenty years old when he set out on a journey which was to take him to
seven countries and last thirteen years. This book tells of the year and
a half he spent in Japan as the disciple of a Zen master in a Buddhist
monastery. It is both a record of his personal experiences there and a
sympathetic and highly informative account of the way of life and
practices of monks in a Zen monastery. It includes conversations with
the head monk, and a number of Zen stories. |
|
First edition 1972 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
253 |
Coral Polge and Kay Hunter |
THE LIVING IMAGE |
|
Coral Polge has a unique gift.
While clairvoyants can describe communicators from the spirit world, she
takes such communication one step further and transmits on to paper an
image of the spirit with whom she is psychically in touch. A trained
professional artist, Coral Polge describes in her book how she came to
terms with her psychic gifts, harnessing her artistic prowess to her
mediumship until she has become a world famous psychic artist,
constantly in demand in this country and abroad. |
|
First edition 1984 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
254 |
Osho |
AND NOW, AND HERE |
|
What happens when we die? Is
reincarnation a superstition or fact? Do we spend time as disembodied
spirits between lives? How and why do we choose to be reborn? These are
among the questions being asked at a meditation retreat in the remote
hills of Gujarat, India. The subject under discussion is death, and how
the fear of it affects the lives of human beings. The man conducting the
retreat is Osho, one of the most influential spiritual teachers of our
time. |
|
First edition 1995 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
255 |
Dr Karl Nowotny |
MESSAGES FROM A DOCTOR IN THE FOURTH DIMENSION |
|
Dr Karl Nowotny passed in 1965.
But a year later he returned through a friend, Grete Schroeder, who
became his medium for a series of compelling messages from the spirit
world. In these thought provoking communications he sheds important new
life on both psychiatric and psychic disturbances. This volume covers a
broad perspective, including an other-wordly view on abortion, epilepsy
and multiple sclerosis and their causes, comments on clairvoyance,
advice on curing abnormal emotional and mental attitudes, depression and
how to treat hysteria. It is essential reading for the practitioner and
layman alike. |
|
First edition 1972 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
256 |
Ivy Northage |
THE MECHANICS OF MEDIUMSHIP |
|
Psychism of all types is
undoubtedly becoming more widespread, for although it is not generally
recognised psychism is one of the normal factors of human experience,
everyone is endowed with a psychic mechanism which is more or less
imperfect and most often unused. It is the ability to operate this
mechanism whether voluntarily or involuntarily which separates the
psychic from the non-psychic. This book is concerned with the
development of this mechanism and the ability to use it when required. |
|
First edition No date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
257 |
Richard Moss MD |
THE I THAT IS WE |
|
Richard Moss is the founder and
director of Three Mountain Foundation in Lone Pine, California, a
non-profit organisation which invites people into greater aliveness,
health and wholeness. This book is "one of the most important survival
handbooks for the 1980s. It is this kind of book that synchronistically
appears when it is most needed. For those who are struggling with their
own transformative process, each page will provide bursts of instant
recognition, confirmation and support; however no one reading this book
will be left unmoved, or unchanged". New Realities magazine |
|
First edition 1981 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
258 |
John Randolph Price |
PRACTICAL SPIRITUALITY |
|
In this enlightening book, John
Randolph Price issues a call for spiritual pragmatism - a practical
approach to solving life's problems. He goes on to document the truth
that the Light is within us in the form-building energy of all
manifestation, and he shows us how to create a force field to reveal the
Reality that has always been behind the illusion, and how to move from
the third dimensional "getting by" to living joyously in the Fourth
Dimension. |
|
First edition 1985 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
259 |
Ramala |
THE REVELATION OF RAMALA |
|
It is rare, these days, that a
book is published because of public demand, but this has been the case
with this book. This perhaps gives some indication of the popularity of
the Ramala teachings. Since the teachings were first made available to
the public in 1971, the readership has spread to all parts of the world
to such an extent that it is only through the medium of a book that the
teachings can be made available to all those who seek their knowledge
and wisdom. This is a bold book. Its purpose is not to teach people of
God, but to help people to become more aware of the God in them. |
|
First edition 1978 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
260 |
Andrew Cohen |
ENLIGHTENMENT IS A SECRET |
|
Enlightenment is a secret that
very few people know about and even fewer understand. Why is it a
secret? Because enlightenment does not exist in time. That's why it's a
secret and that's why it will always be a secret. Enlightenment is a
vision that cannot be held or grasped in any way. Beyond this world it's
a mystery that is exploding. A fire that is burning. It's a fire that a
person is either going to jump into or run away from. This fire burns
beyond the mind. No time is the place where this secret abides. Realize
that and you realize the Self you are when there's no mind and no time.
Realize that, and cling to that alone as your own Self. |
|
First edition 1995 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
261 |
Napoleon Hill and W.Clement Stone |
SUCCESS THROUGH A POSITIVE MENTAL ATTITUDE |
|
It is possible to make all your
dreams come true, just think positively and discover how to awaken
hidden powers within you. This book, an international bestseller, will
show you just how easy it is. Learn how to motivate yourself, develop
personal initiative and self-discipline, use creative visualization,
employ organised thinking and concentrate your effort, find job
satisfaction and raise your energy levels. Transform 'Negative Mental
Attitude' into 'Positive Mental Attitude', add to this plenty of
enthusiasm and wealth, health, success and happiness can all be yours. |
|
First edition 1961 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
262 |
Roy Stemman |
REINCARNATION |
|
Here are over 100 astonishing
first hand accounts of people who remember a past life. This fascinating
book by past life expert Roy Stemman records the best cases of
reincarnation gathered from around the world. Read about people who are
haunted by a past life; soul mates who travel through time to be
reunited; people who remember a time between lives; people whose
illnesses and phobias are traced back to a past life and cured under
regression therapy; people who claim to be able to see into the future,
and much more. |
|
First edition 1997 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
263 |
Helen Steiner Rice |
THANKFULLY |
|
A collection of inspirational
verse, including The Christmas Guest. Helen Steiner Rice, through her
verse, has brought messages of hope and consolation to her many readers.
This volume of simple verse is eagerly welcomed by all who know what
she has to say about prayer in a language common to all who seek that
reality. |
|
First edition 1975 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
264 |
Helen Steiner Rice |
HEART GIFTS |
|
Helen Steiner Rice's verses
were first introduced to the British public in 1968 through her
collection Just for You. Their success was immediate; their appeal
lasting and they have brought a multitude of new admirers for her work.
Heart Gifts, the second collection to be published in England, has the
same qualities which gave the first collection such appeal, an outward
simplicity and straightforwardness concealing great inner strength and
purpose. |
|
First edition 1970 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
265 |
Helen Steiner Rice |
LOVING PROMISES |
|
Loving Promises has been a
bestseller all over the world since its first publication in 1978.
Heart-touching lines affirming God's love and His eternal promise are
combined here with verses from scripture, rendering them at once warmly
familiar yet amazingly fresh and new. The old certainties are expressed
in words that reveal their timeless relevance to life's cares and joys. |
|
First edition 1978 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
266 |
David Bedbrook |
THINE THE POWER |
|
This early spiritual book
contains theories, facts and information which may be helpful to those
who are studying unfoldment of the psychic faculties, or following the
path of psychical research. They have been pieced together as a result
of many years' observation and analysis of sensations personally
experienced with the practice of mediumship, and contacts made thereby
with discarnate entities. |
|
First edition 1951 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
267 |
Joan Grant |
FAR MEMORY |
|
Far memory is the ability to
recall one's earlier lifetimes with as much clarity and vividness as one
might recall an episode from twenty years ago in this lifetime. Joan
Grant has an exceptional talent for far memory, a talent she nurtured
and developed as a young adult. This led to the writing of seven novels
which are in fact recollections of earlier lives she has led. In this
book, her autobiography, Joan tells the story of her present life and
how she came to develop her intuitive skills and write her novels. |
|
First edition 1956 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
268 |
Edward Sellner |
SOUL-MAKING |
|
On sabbatical leave, Edward
Sellner travelled to England and Ireland for a period of four months to
experience and research the Celtic tradition of soul friendship. This
book is his journal of that exceptional journey. In it we share his most
intimate moments of prayer, of frustration, of insight and of joy.
Sellner's journey is more than a travelogue; we accompany him into the
deepest corners of his soul, sharing concerns about family and friends,
his hopes for his midlife years, what he would like to accomplish, and
his remarkable spiritual quest. |
|
First edition 1991 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
269 |
Ivan Cooke |
HEALING BY THE SPIRIT |
|
Ivan Cooke, whose own powers as
a healer have brought confidence and recreation and earned him the deep
respect of all, here explores the whole principle of healing by spirit.
He discusses the cause of sickness, describes what happens, spiritually
and physically, in a healing treatment, and offers practical advice and
help to the would-be healer. Some notable cures are described. His
writing is, throughout, supported and sustained by White Eagle's
teaching. |
|
First edition 1955 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
270 |
Margo Williams |
GHOSTLY ENCOUNTERS |
|
Margo Williams has been called
the greatest ghostbuster of them all, and her fame has resulted in her
being asked to many Isle of Wight homes and public buildings to remove
unwanted presences. Most ghosts call for help - it just so happens she
can hear them; and what she hears is written down in this book. Ghostly
Encounters includes some of the island's most celebrated haunts, such as
Carisbrooke Castle, the notorious Billingham Manor and, for those with
an interest in the Navy, the reader can find out about the ghosts of the
ill-fated Mary Rose, HMS Warrier and HMS Victory. |
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
271 |
Kathleen Taylor Fitzpatrick |
AND THE ROAD RESTS |
|
This is the fascinating, true
story of the author. Born in 1905 Kathleen was brought up by her
Edwardian grandmother and enjoyed a private education until accepted as
an apprentice in a South London 'rag trade' business. Later she married
Leslie Taylor, and had a son Michael. However, family life was disrupted
with the Second World War resulting in mother and son being evacuated
to Wales. Shortly after hostilities ceased, the pair returned home only
to face the tragedy of Kathleen's husband being killed in a motor-cycle
accident. In her deep grief, she was continually upheld by repeated
messages from her 'dead' husband, proving time and time again that
though physically absent, spiritually he was very much alive. |
|
First edition 1995 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
272 |
Alan Valiant |
MY CONVERSATIONS WITH JESUS CHRIST |
|
"Within a relatively short
space of time after I had developed an efficient method of communication
with the spiritual world, I asked my Guide, out of curiosity, if he had
seen Jesus Christ. The reply was in the affirmative. I then asked if he
were there. There was a pause of about twenty seconds and then my hand
began to write. I could sense that it was a different personality
writing through me and that which followed confirmed it ..." |
|
First edition 1989 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
273 |
Harry Edwards |
LIFE IN SPIRIT |
|
Harry Edwards, known throughout
the world as our foremost spiritual healer and the author of many books
on healing, paused in his busy life to contemplate what the Spirit
World might really be like. The result of these deliberations is all
here in fascinating and intricate detail as he describes various facets
of spirit life as he envisages it. How much of the narrative is his
imagination is for the reader to assess; but as Edwards the Healer
becomes Edwards the Visionary, giving full reign to an amalgam of a
searching imagination coupled with such vividly descriptive writing of
life in Spirit, which flowed freely, without a word of preliminary
preparation, indicates that it could not be anything other than Spirit
inspired. |
|
First edition 1976 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
274 |
Arthur Findlay |
ON THE EDGE OF THE ETHERIC |
|
Since it first appeared On the
Edge of the Etheric has run to almost 70 editions. Mr Findlay, one of
modern Spiritualism's most scholarly and esteemed writers bases this
book upon the superb mediumship of John Sloan. He attended his first
sitting feeling "decidedly suspicious, but that night heard over thirty
separate spirit voices of different tone and accent. They gave their
names, their correct earth addresses, spoke to the right people, who
recognised them, and referred to intimate family matters. Never once was
a mistake made". |
|
First edition 1931 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
275 |
Michael Findlay Roll |
THE SCIENTIFIC PROOF OF SURVIVAL AFTER DEATH |
|
A group of UK scientists have
been conducting experiments and solving complex equations which they
believe may have placed them at the very threshold of conclusive proof
of human survival beyond bodily death! Michael Roll, an English
rationalist and free-thinker, and unofficial spokesman for the group,
has recently revealed some impressive data which could alter humankind's
entire belief system regarding each individual's continuation of
consciousness beyond that change which is known as death. A sample collection of a thesis, pamphlets, newspaper cuttings, letters and a copytape of a special phone-in interview with Talk Radio host Dave Barrett on 22.01.99, are on loan or Michael Roll will send his thesis The Scientific Proof of Survival After Death free of charge to anyone who sends a stamped addressed envelope to: 28 Westleigh Road, Downend, Bristol, BS16 6AH. www.cfpf.org.uk Thesis(including tape): C |
|
First edition No Date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
276 |
Gwen Byrne |
RUSSELL |
|
Somehow Russell's mother always
knew that her son was not destined to remain long in this world.
Heartbroken when, at the age of nine, he contracted cancer and died, she
found that orthodox religion provided no solace.
Spiritualism seemed to offer some consolation and the turning point came
when a medium helped her to communicate with her mother who had
recently died. From then on Mrs Byrne became a fervent believer in
Spiritualism and was overwhelmed with joy when her son first made
contact with her. She has now been reunited with Russell on numerous
occasions and is totally convinced of his survival.
|
|
First edition 1994 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
277 |
R D Pearson |
INTELLIGENCE BEHIND THE UNIVERSE ! |
|
Written for the lay reader,
this book provides a fascinating introduction to a new theory now
gaining the enthusiastic support of aspiring young physicists. A new
angle on the elusive unsolved difficulties posed by gravitation has
surprising consequences. It spins off unexpectedly to show that
paranormal phenomena are truly real! They are explained by an extended
and enhanced physics which takes gravitation in its stride. The
atheistic base from which a start is made has to be discarded owing to
the peculiar way in which sub-atomic particles behave. The solution
homes in naturally on a creationist scenario. It also shows that an
immortal consiousness surviving death of the physical body is in accord
with extended physics. |
|
First edition 1990 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
278 |
Arthur Findlay |
THE PSYCHIC STREAM |
|
This book gives a wide-ranging
look into Christianity, covering its ancestors, relations, parents,
conception, birth, childhood, youth and its manhood. Psychic phenomena
have proved to us that beyond the physical lies the etheric, and that
there is not only a physical world, but an etheric world
interpenetrating and vibrating in harmony with our etheric bodies.
Armed with this greater knowledge, we can now approach the history of
man from an enlarged angle, enabling us to understand the reason for
present-day religious beliefs and the way they are likely to develop in
years to come. |
|
First edition 1939 |
R |
———————————————————————————— |
279 |
Arthur Findlay |
LOOKING BACK |
|
Looking Back is a truly
remarkable, important and absorbing volume detailing the life, times and
beliefs of one of the worlds finest ever Spiritualists. Mr Findlay
details his life at Stansted Hall, Essex, once described as
Spiritualism’s stately home which he bequeathed to the Spiritualists
National Union. |
|
First edition 1995 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
280 |
Ian Curry |
YOU CANNOT DIE |
|
Drawing on the findings of a
century of wide-ranging research and many compelling case histories,
accounts of out-of-body and resuscitation experiences, deathbed visions,
reincarnation, mediumship, apparitions and hauntings, Ian Curry offers a
convincing case for the proposition that we do indeed survive physical
death. Its revelations may also encourage us towards a new
understanding of the true meaning of life. |
|
First edition 1978 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
281 |
Eileen Caddy |
FOOTPRINTS ON THE PATH |
|
“The messages here offer, to
those who will read them receptively, nothing less than a way of living
which can be more meaningful, more purposeful, and result in a more
worthwhile contribution to life. They may be deceptive in their
simplicity. If you look in them for either beautiful spiritual
sentiments or profound philosophic truths, you will miss their real
value for you, and in so doing you will miss a wealth of life and love
and wisdom.” Roy McVicar |
|
First edition 1976 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
282 |
Archimeded and Solon of Athens |
THE LOST CIVILIZATION OF ATLANTIS |
|
Enlightening description of the
lost civilization, communicated from the Spirit World by the celestial
teachers Archemedes and Solon of Athens, inhabitants of Atlantis in
their former lives on the earth. – The Spiritualist Society of Athens
Communications received through George Ch Pisanis |
|
First edition 1998 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
283 |
Roberts Liardon |
KATHRYN KUHLMAN |
|
A Spiritual Biography of God’s
Miracle Working Power. Thousands of people were healed by the Holy
Spirit through her ministry. During her meetings, people were healed
through words of knowledge – she never laid hands upon a person. Before
each meeting, she opened her spirit, soul and body to the Holy Spirits
ministry. She often referred to the Holy Spirit as my best friend and
stated that he was her teacher, “the greatest teacher in the whole
world.” |
|
First edition 1990 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
284 |
Ursula Roberts |
LIVING IN TWO WORLDS |
|
This is a rather unusual
account of the life story of a well known medium who describes herself
as the symbol in the story written by Hans Anderson; the ugly duckling
which turned into a swan. Ursula considers that she turned into a swan
after receiving an unexpected mystical experience, which seemed to
stimulate her latent mediumship to such an extent that she has literally
lived with spirits, as well as the ordinary world of human beings. Her
search for an understanding and renewal of that experience led her into
the orthodox church, then to a yoga group, and finally into involvement
with Spiritualism, where her outstanding talents as a healer,
clairvoyant, trance speaker and inspired writer have made her known
throughout the world. |
|
First edition 1984 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
285 |
Jackie and Christine Hamlett |
A HOUSE WITH SPIRIT |
|
Sisters-in-law Jackie Hamlett
and Christine Hamlett care passionately about Marbury and the former
Hall near Northwich, a chateau modelled on Fontainebleau which was
pulled down in the late 1960’s and is famous locally for its ghosts.
They have spent three years meticulously researching the history of the
houses and tracing the lives of the aristocratic owners. They have
their own theories about the spectral Marbury Lady and the noted Marbury
Dunne. But above all, they believe every home has a heart and a soul.
“Contractors can pull these beautiful old houses down….. they can murder
the house, but its spirit will live on for ever.” |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
286 |
Jenny Smedley |
RIPPLES |
|
Jenny Smedley, an ordinary
housewife, has a new maxim: “You never know when your life will change
in a minute.” Hers certainly did. In one second of unconscious
recognition she rediscovered a soul mate from a previous incarnation, a
soul mate that her subconscious memories told her now dwelled inside the
person known as Garth Brooks. Garth is the biggest-selling recording
artist in the world. This experience changed and enhanced every part of
the author’s life. Ripples tells of the three years that their two
souls spent together in the seventeenth century, as Ryan and Madeleine
Fitzgerald. This is an inspirational story. It is about magic and
faith and a love so strong that it has spanned the centuries. |
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
287 |
Rev G Maurice Elliott |
THE PSYCHIC LIFE OF JESUS |
|
“Yesterday’s miracles are
today’s natural laws.” These, the author’s own words, are the keynote
of this book which, chapter by chapter, shows how mistaken the Church
has been in thinking that the psychic powers of Jesus were miraculous.
Mediumship is the solution to the wonders of Jesus, and to his
prediction that believers would do the works he did and greater works.
The Reverend G Maurice elliott was a frank, modern clergyman who
believed that the only orthodoxy is Truth. |
|
First edition 1938 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
288 |
Lin Cochran |
EDGAR CAYCE – ON SECRETS OF THE UNIVERSE |
|
This book reveals vastly
important mysteries that, once solved, could radically alter our lives.
In this extraordinary work Lin Cochran, a veteran Cayce student, delves
into the underlying principles that govern who we really are and how
our decisions, our work and our futures are shaped by forces we cannot
always perceive. From improving relationships to shedding fears, this
book reveals the channels between your consciousness and the laws of the
universe you inhabit, and illustrates Edgar Cayce’s dynamic insights
into our great hidden potential. |
|
First edition 1990 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
289 |
Henry Reed |
EDGAR CAYCE ON MYSTERIES OF THE MIND |
|
Edgar Cayce on Mysteries of the
Mind examines a force more powerful than the atomic bomb – the human
mind. Each one of us uses only a small fraction of that creative
energy, but Edgar Cayce revealed that through self-teaching and
awareness we can extend the frontiers of our mind’s potential. From
visulisation to altered states, premonitions to increased will-power,
Henry Reed – research psychologist and a noted authority on Edgar Cayce
shows how to discover and use the untapped power that resides within us
all. |
|
First edition 1990 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
290 |
Alien Books |
DEATH AND BEYOND |
|
What evidence is there for the
existence of an afterlife? Is there any proof that an afterlife
actually exists, in the form of Heaven or Hell? Can some people really
communicate with the spirits of the dead? Discover why, most
mysteriously, some corpses never seem to decay? And find out what is
known about the possibility of reincarnation into a future life on
Earth. |
|
First edition 1996 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
291 |
Chloris Morgan |
MEDITATIONS FOR BEGINNERS |
|
In 1987 Chloris Morgan won the
Two Worlds Centenary Award for services to Spiritualist literature.
Meditations for Beginners is a tiny booklet of short philosophical
stories, rich in meaning, for us to meditate on. |
|
First edition 1992 |
A |
———————————————————————————— |
292 |
Betty Shine |
CLEAR YOUR MIND |
|
Clear Your Mind is a pocket
companion to soothe and uplift you. Its inspiring quotes and advice cut
straight to the heart of the age-old problems of everyday life. This
book is based on Betty Shine’s groundbreaking A Mind of Your Own. |
|
First edition 1998 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
293 |
Hans J Eysenck |
EXPLAINING THE UNEXPLAINED |
|
Mysteries of the paranormal.
In this superbly illustrated book, a psychologist and a parapsychologist
join forces to present the best and strongest evidence for the
existence of psi (human psychic abilities). Parapsychology uses the
experimental and statistical methods used by social sciences and in the
space of 60 years has become a robust and broadly based edifice of
knowledge. The parapsychologist is the true sceptic – he does not
assume that anomalous events are hocus pocus, he looks at the strongest
evidence, forms theories about it, then invents experiments to test the
validity of his theories.
Hans J Eysenck and Carl Sargent |
|
First edition 1995 |
Q |
———————————————————————————— |
294 |
Jenny Randles |
U F O‘S AND HOW TO SEE THEM |
|
Did you know that a UFO
sighting occurs somewhere on the planet every three minutes? Witnesses
come from the great cities of America and the rolling English
countryside to the remote Australian bush and the depths of Scandinavia.
This book is for them, as well as for all those who are intrigued by
the UFO phenomenon and wish to find out more. Written by one of the
world’s leading UFO writers, this illustrated book also lists UFO hot
spots around the world. |
|
First edition 1997 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
295 |
Janet and Colin Bord |
MODERN MYSTERIES OF GREAT BRITAIN |
|
Bestselling authors in the
field of unexplained phenomena and mysterious happenings turn their
attention to recent British mysteries of England, Scotland and Wales
that have occurred over the last hundred years. This illustrated book
records such paranormal activities as celestial garbage (sky-falls of
fish and ice); weeping Madonnas; living frogs and toads entombed inside
solid rock; ghosts; phantom black dogs, UFO’s and beings from other
worlds; phantom armies; fairies and nature spirits….. and many more. |
|
First edition 1987 |
Q |
———————————————————————————— |
296 |
Rosemary Altea |
THE EAGLE AND THE ROSE |
|
The Eagle and the Rose
describes how Rosemary Altea gaines the confidence to develop her
contacts with the spirit world and how she met her Spirit Guide, an
American Apache Indian. Grey Eagle helped his Rose nurture her gift,
taught her to use her astonishing power to heal, astral travel and
rescue souls lost on the after life journey. “A fascinating spiritual
adventure, reminding us that our existence is more mysterious than any
of us have dared to believe” – James Redfield author of The Celestine
Prophecy. |
|
First edition 1995 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
297 |
Peter Underwood |
GHOSTS AND HAUNTED PLACES |
|
We all love a good ghost story.
The sound of unexplained footsteps or snatches of ghostly music, a
sudden chill in the atmosphere, the touch of a ghostly hand or the
glimpse of a spectral figure. Peter Underwood is the king of
ghosthunters and his new book marks a culmination of his 50 years study
and investigation into the subject. In it, he shares a lifetime of
research and experience and shows us that the subject of ghosts lies
more in fact than in fiction. |
|
First edition 1996 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
298 |
Alan Valiant |
HOW TO TALK WITH THE DEAD |
|
A manuel of communication with
the spiritual universe. Alan Valiant, in this easy to read book,
describes his experiences and method of communicating with the spirit
world. A book full of knowledge and advice. |
|
First edition 1987 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
299 |
Alan Valiant |
WHY BELIEVE? WHEN YOU CAN KNOW! |
|
“At last, the Truth about
existence has been revealed, free from all mysticism and religious
prejudice. Now that the knowledge is available to all, belief is
unnecessary. The information disclosed in this book may shock many, but
many more will welcome it because, never in the history of man on
earth, have the facts of being, been fully explained by the hierarchy in
the spiritual universe through incarnate psychics. |
|
First edition 1993 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
300 |
Tom Harrison |
VISITS BY OUR FRIENDS FROM THE OTHER SIDE |
|
This booklet by Tom Harrison,
founder manager of Arthur Findlay College, Stansted Hall describes the
experiences of his family home circle in Middlesborough from 1946 to
1950. In it he pays tribute to his mother’s outstanding mediumship,
Minnie Harrison. From his weekly diaries and recorded notes he
describes experiences of rare physical psychic phenomena, apports,
trumpet and direct voices, full ectoplasmic materialisations and he also
shows photographs taken at this remarkable home circle. We met them
face to face. We spoke with them person to person. |
|
First edition 1989 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
301 |
Ann Bridge |
MOMENTS OF KNOWING |
|
Ann Bridge, besides being a
famous author, is also, in her own words, “a person who frequently has,
when awake, inexplicable knowings of events taking place at a distance:
and, in dreams, am informed, sometimes uncomfortably, of facts of which I
can have no knowledge by normal means.” In this remarkable book, part
memoir, part a personal statement, she writes of a number of such
moments taken from a varied and distinguished career, and ranging from a
startling premonition of a cypher-breaking job in the Admiralty during
World War One to a somewhat macabre later episode concerned with the
Duchess of Windsor. |
|
First edition 1970 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
302 |
Frederick R Gould |
DEVELOPING YOUR LATENT POWERS |
|
This book is a practical
approach to a way of life that is appealing more and more in the Western
World today. It is a statement of a philosophy of life that
synthesises elements of Hinduist and Buddhist thought with guidance to
those who wish to be less tied to the mechanistic type of life and are
aiming at greater spiritual satisfaction. It blends Eastern wisdom with
Western knowledge. |
|
First edition 1976 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
303 |
Keith Thompson |
ANGELS AND ALIENS |
|
It was Carl Jung who first
spoke of the UFO phenomenon as “a modern myth in the making,” and Joseph
Campbell who insisted that the first function of myths is “opening mind
and heart to the utter wonder of all being.” Now Keith Thompson makes
it possible for us to share that sense of wonder as he explores the UFO
against the timeless backdrop of visionary experience:
Angelic visions, near-death experiences, shamonic journeys, religious
miracles and folkloric encounters with fairies. In a brilliant stroke
he takes a subject usually confined to sensation-expose and reveals its
surprising literary richness, intellectual energy, and symbolic depths.
By offering a new, open-ended perspective which avoids the dogmatism of
true believers and debunkers alike, Angels and Aliens invites readers
to enter a fascinating world with profound implications for our
understanding of the human spirit.
|
|
First edition 1991 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
304 |
Alfred Douglas |
EXTRA SENSORY POWERS |
|
A Century of Psychical
Research. This very thorough and balanced book covers, in effect, the
entire field of psychical research; it does so with scrupulous
objectivity; and while it presents us with the available evidence, it
arrives at a verdict of nonproven. This book lucidly presents and
balances a great deal of confused and conflicting evidence. Mediums
certainly appear to achieve extraordinary feats; but have they ever been
adequently tested? The need, Mr Douglas suggests, is for further
investigation. |
|
First edition 1976 |
N |
———————————————————————————— |
305 |
Kate Thomas |
BELOVED EXECUTIONER |
|
An account of training for
seership. This unique book contains first-hand observations of
specialist-applied teaching techniques designed to induce significant
modes of spiritual perception and experience – all of which are
virtually unknown in the Western world of today. The author describes
her contact with the young Teacher who conducted her through a severe
and traditional Sufi discipline. She equates the annihilative ordeal to
which she was eventually subjected with the inner Mysteries of all
major religions which, in our present civilisation must take place, of
necessity, in the mundane life situation of the individual concerned. |
|
First edition 1986 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
306 |
L.L.H |
FROM SOUL TO SOUL |
|
This is a short, early
spititual book illustrating:- Seven Illuminations on the power within –
Humility, Reverence, Desire, Work, Love, Freedom, and Creation. These
illuminations were received during seven moonlit nights amidst mountain
scenery of extraordinary beauty and solitude. The recipient, who, after
a short space of intense aspiration, passed into a state of supernormal
lucidity, transmitted them orally to the circle of friends present, one
of whom committed them to paper.
received by L.L.H |
|
First edition Second edition: 1923 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
307 |
D.A.M. Batchelor |
THE MIDDLE PATH |
|
Dulcie Batchelor is a strong
believer in reincarnation. The Middle Path is a fascinating and moving
book which demonstrates the power and beauty of the relationship between
Dulcie and her Guide, Karaticus. Beginning with a fine example of
regresson, the author describes her search for validation of her
communications and visions, and eloquently tells of the unfolding of her
healing abilities during her relationship with her parents and her
search for a lost relative through the power of Spirit. Not only does
this moving and genuine account communicate some important messages for
all those who would walk in Spirit, but it clearly speaks of the Power
of Love and Service, from one who has served before. |
|
First edition 1994 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
308 |
James Redfield |
THE CELESTINE PROPHECY – AN EXPERIENTIAL GUIDE |
|
James Redfield’s previous book
The Celestian Prophecy is an extraordinary life-changing book. Perhaps
you, like hundreds of thousands of readers, have discovered in its pages
a new vision of coincidences in your own life, the energies involved in
communicating with others, and the purposes behind human history. Now
this companion volume to that moving work helps you intensify and expand
the exciting knowledge contained in each of the 9 insights of Celestine
Prophecy. Through detailed explanations and carefully designed
exercises, you can uncover further revelations about your family and
partners, and the ways your past has been a preparation for the special
contribution you can make to the world. |
|
First edition 1995 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
309 |
William Bloom PhD |
WORKING WITH ANGELS, FAIRIES AND NATURE SPIRITS |
|
In his new book, bestselling
author and teacher Dr William Bloom presents a compelling description of
the angel, fairy and spirit realm. He reveals a world that lies behind
everyday reality and shows you how to co-operate with these invisible
beings of energy who are a fundamental part of every aspect of our
lives. In this book learn how to sense angels and spirits and
communicate with them, how to work with angels for healing and spiritual
growth. Learn too how they can bring you a deeper understanding of all
life. William Bloom’s teaching about angels is based on twentyfive
years of direct personal experience. He is a Fellow of the Findhorn
Foundation and Director of the Spiritual Freedom Network. |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
310 |
Grace Cooke |
THE JEWEL IN THE LOTUS |
|
This illuminating volume forms a
sequel to grace Cooke’s first book on the subject, now something of a
classic, which is entitled simply Meditation. Complete in itself, it
dwells upon a special aspect of the White Eagle way of meditation, which
is the use of the creative imagination as a way of stilling the mind
and leading the consciousness into the deeper place of meditation and
communion within. |
|
First edition 1973 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
311 |
Jeffrey Iverson |
MORE LIVES THAN ONE |
|
Arnall Bloxham is one of
Britain’s most respected hypnotherapists. In the course of his work
over two decades he has uncovered the most staggering evidence for
reincarnation ever recorded; A Welsh housewife describes the massacre
of Jews in 12th Century York. A press photographer remembers watching
the execution of Charles I in Whitehall in 1649. A Swansea man tells of
life aboard a frigate as a pressed man in Nelson’s navy. Under
Bloxham’s hypnosis more than four hundred ordinary people have
tape-recorded amazingly detailed account of their past lives – accounts
so authentic that they can only be explained by the certainty of
reincarnation. |
|
First edition 1976 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
312 |
Dr Joel L Whitton PhD |
LIFE BETWEEN LIFE |
|
Scientific explorations into
the void separating one incarnation from the next. Past-life therapy,
in which the patient relives previous incarnations under hypnosis has
been practised for many years by Dr Joel L Whitton with startling
results. But what of the void that seperates our earthly lives?
Intrigued by the experiences of his patients and with the help of Joe
Fisher, Dr Whitton began to delve into the literature of discarnation,
from the Tibetan Book of The Dead to writings of the Theosophists.
Their remarkable findings are that most of us have taken up residence in
the world between worlds many, many times as disembodied entities. And
in this path-breaking book they describe how we can return at will to
the plane of metaconsciousness.
Dr Joel L Whitton PhD and Joe Fisher |
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
313 |
J Bernard Hutton |
HEALING HANDS |
|
The amazing true story of a
spirit doctor. This strange account tells how J Bernard Hutton, a
journalist threatened with blindness, met the medium George Chapman. A
former Aylesbury fireman, Chapman claimed to be controlled by the spirit
of a long-dead surgeon, William Lang – a claim that Hutton viewed with
scepticism and contempt. Yet when he visited the medium a miracle
happened. Cured of his ailment, Hutton investigated further. What he
learned makes an astonishing and spellbinding story. |
|
First edition 1966 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
314 |
The Abu Trust |
ABU TALKS – VOLUME 1 |
|
Abu Talks comprises a rare
collecton of teachings, given to the dedicated sitters of the Norman
Hunt circles, by a spiritual teacher affectionately known to them as
“Abu”. Abu was an Egyptian priest when he lived on the earth plane over
3,000 years ago and met an untimely end by being murdered. Throughout
the intermediate years in the spirit realms, he managed – by his
gradual understanding to “climb” to the fourth plane of consciousness.
It is because of his own learning and experience that he is able to talk
to us with such knowledge and love, delivered with such simplicity,
that no one can fail to understand or be touched by his teachings. |
|
First edition 1992 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
315 |
Peter Underwood |
THE A – Z OF BRITISH GHOSTS |
|
An illustrated guide to 236
haunted sites. This fascinating guide contains over 200 uncanny
accounts of ghostly happenings throughout Britain, ranging from
legendary to real life experiences. Famous haunted houses such as
Borley, Hampton Court and Glamis are covered, along with lesser known
hauntings such as those associated with Woburn, the Gargoyle Theartre in
London’s Soho and Bury St Edmunds. Every entry includes the address of
a nearby hotel to assist people planning an overnight stay near a
haunted sight. Illustrated with 32 black and white photographs. |
|
First edition 1971 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
316 |
Alan Gauld |
THE FOUNDERS OF PSYCHICAL RESEARCH |
|
This is a scholarly examination
of the lives, characters and work of three close friends; Henry
Sidgwick, F.W.H. Myers and Edmund Gurney, all Fellows of Trinity
College, Cambridge, in the late nineteenth century. All three were
driven under the pressure of a reluctant agnosticism to examine the
claims of modern Spiritualism and of the mesmeric movement which
preceeded it. They were the first Englishmen to undertake serious
practical investigations into telepathy, apparitions, mediumship and
other paranormal phenomena. This book is a very good source of
refererence to early pioneers of Spiritualism. |
|
First edition No date – possibly late 1960’s |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
317 |
Jacques Bergier |
MYSTERIES OF THE EARTH |
|
The hidden world of
Extra-Terrestrials. Jacques Bergier has become famous in France through
his belief that “Intelligences” in outer space are watching us and
occasionally interfering with our affairs. Bergier cannot prove his
convictions but he cites numerous unexplained events. As well, he
points out that the case for extra-terrestrial intervention is taken far
more seriously by scientists in the Soviet union; and that the vision
of certain science writers like Arthur C Clarke and John W Campbell
sometimes become the reality for the next generation. |
|
First edition 1974 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
318 |
Rodney Marsden |
PSYCHIC EXPERIENCE FOR YOU |
|
Psychic ability is normal, not
supernatural. We all have a mind, and we can all learn to be psychic,
which simply means having the ability to control and use mental
faculties that are latent in us all. Given an open mind and a
willingness to learn, the author believes that psychic experience is
available to everyone. He gives step-by-step instructions to enable the
readers to test the reality of such phenomena as:- telepathy,
clairvoyance and precognition, psychokinesis, mind over matter, dream
control, psychometry, advanced ESP, dowsing and psychic healing. |
|
First edition 1983 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
319 |
James Coates PhD; F.A.S |
PSYCHICAL PHENOMENA – HAS W.T STEAD RETURNED? |
|
W.T.Stead was one of the
greatest advocates for Spiritualism. He died on the Titanic. This very
early book, which contains psychic photographs, gives testimonies of
the many communications given by him from the spirit world. |
|
First edition 1913 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
320 |
Geraldine Cummins |
I APPEAL UNTO CAESAR |
|
Geraldine Cummins was reported
by many in Psychic circles to be the greatest automatic writer this
century. In the 1920’s a small audience of distinguished churchman,
scholars and psychical investigators watched with amazement as words
dictated by the messenger of Cleophas were taken down at the rate of
1,500 words an hour. This book is part of the Cleophas series giving
detailed information of the period between the death of Jesus and Pauls
departure for Athens. Chronologically this book follows The Great Days
of Ephesus and preceeds When Nero was Dictator. It describes Pauls
Journeys and The Chronicle of Mary. |
|
First edition 1950 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
321 |
Lyall Watson |
SUPERNATURE |
|
In this book Dr Lyall Watson, a
professional life scientist, penetrates the fog of mysticism and
superstition that surrounds the “occult” to demonstrate a sound,
scientific basis for many so-called supernatural happenings.
Documenting this case with an impressive array of scientific literature,
he ranges across traditional boundaries, seperates the clearly
preposterus from the truly provocative and speculates on facts that once
seemed inexplicable. This “natural history of the supernatural,” he
explains, “is an attempt to fit all of nature, the known and the unknown
into the body of Supernature and to show that, of all the faculties we
possess, none is more important at this time than a wide-eyed sense of
wonder.” |
|
First edition 1973 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
322 |
Arthur Guirdham |
WE ARE ONE ANOTHER |
|
This book describes how a group
of people, who had lived and suffered together in the thirteenth
century, re-assembled in the twentieth in a limited area in the west of
England. Independently of each other these people tuned in, with the
piercing accuracy of searchlights, to the same tragic events in the
Languedoc in the years 1242 to 1244. One of the most remarkable
features of the book is the description of sketches made by a child of
seven. It is clear that in these she too, was remembering the same
tragic years. Of this circle of people alive in the twentieth century,
the author has discovered the mediaeval names and roles of seven of the
eight involved. This book, in fact, does for group reincarnation what
an earlier book, The Cathers and Reincarnation did for reincarnation in
general. |
|
First edition 1974 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
323 |
Mark L Prophet |
COSMIC CONSCIOUSNESS |
|
Discover the most sensitive and
unique approach to exalted awareness of your true self, where time and
space dissolve… expanding into another plane, and another dimension…
where life unfolds life, and self realizes more of Self, as the flaming
identity of being. You enter the secret chamber of the heart. You
accelerate beyond duality. You experience cosmic consciousness |
|
First edition 1962 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
324 |
Peter Rendel |
UNDERSTANDING THE CHAKRAS |
|
The chakras are the seven vital
force centres of man which exist at different levels of consciousness.
Using both Eastern esoteric philosophy and aspects of the Western
Mystery Tradition, Peter Rendel explains how to use and control the
inner energies of the human system by working through the chakras. For
those wishing to discover deeper realities within, and gain a deeper
understanding of the principles of yoga and meditation, harnessing
chakra energies will be the beginning of a spiritual adventure. |
|
First edition 1974 (as Introductions to the Chakras) |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
325 |
Brother Mandus |
THE GRAIN OF MUSTARD SEED |
|
“The kingdom of Heaven is like
to a grain of mustard seed, which a man took, and sowed in his field:
which is indeed the least of all seeds: but when it is grown, it is the
greatest among herbs, and becometh a tree, so that the birds of the air
come and lodge in the branches thereof.” Matt 13:31,32 Brother Mandus
writes: “This book is a very humble effort to share with you the good
news I discovered to be true in the gospels of Jesus Christ. If I write
with what seems to be authority and purpose, I pray your indulgence,
because it is only the fire of my conviction which makes it appear so.
If these stories of Divine Healing, and the power of love and prayer in
action, inspire you to extend your own experience, then I shall feel
privileged indeed to have had the honour of entering the garden of your
mind to plant a grain of mustard seed.” |
|
First edition 1959 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
326 |
Rev. William Stainton Moses |
SPIRIT TEACHINGS |
|
The Rev William Stainton Moses
was born in 1839. An Oxford graduate, he was ordained in 1863, and for a
few years lived an ordinary life of a country curate. In 1870 he
became interested in Spiritualism, shortly afterwards he moved to London
and became a master at University College School. In 1872, he joined
his close friends, Dr and Mrs Stanhope Speer, in forming a home circle.
They shortly obtained remarkable physical phenomena, and Rev. Moses
began to produce, automatic writings which resulted in Spirit Teachings.
“The literary merit of this book has made it the Bible of British
Spiritualism or at least its leading piece of patristic literature”
|
|
First edition 1949 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
327 |
Pauline Robinson |
THE PRODIGAL SON BY PASSPORT TO THE SPIRITUAL WORL |
|
This is a story straight from
the heart for everyone who has ever lost a loved one. In Pauline’s own
words – “The Prodigal Son was about how my life was changed after the
loss of our much loved son in 1981 and was written in the hope others
could gain comfort from my own proof which I had found. The father does
not divide because we are spirit both here and now. I first
found my 19 year old son through mediums, then I learned my two little
ones whom I had lost as babies were growing up in spirit, so too was my
sister’s son. With the grace of God I found all this and so much more.
I knocked at the door and it was opened to me. |
|
First edition No date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
328 |
Pauline Robinson |
ASTRAL TRAVEL AND THE MANY MANSIONS |
|
“I write this book on Astral
Travel for my fellow man because I have found the truth and wish to
share it. The Kingdom of Heaven is within each and every one of us, but
we all have to discover our own path to the mansions where we belong. I
found mine after the sad loss of our dear son in 1981 … I was told that
my grief from that summer time passing would be washed away with joy
before the same year ended. It happened. I became clairvoyant.” |
|
First edition No date |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
329 |
Pauline Robinson |
ONE DAY AT A TIME AND THE FOUR SEASONS |
|
A beautiful book of thoughts
and verse. The observations, struggles and spiritual feelings of life
are simply, yet eloquently put down on paper in the months and years
that followed the death of Pauline’s son. The thread which runs through
all of her writings strikes a chord in each one of us who are
privileged to read them and we are left all the richer for her empathy.
We are each part of a whole, each part must link together to become part
of that whole.
|
|
First edition No date |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
330 |
Margaret Nicholas |
THE WORLDS GREATEST PSYCHICS AND MYSTICS |
|
A national survey recently
showed that more than 30 per cent of the adult population had gone
through a psychic experience. An even higher percentage admitted they
believed that certain human beings were endowed with psychic powers.
There are an impressive body of men and women who have given convincing
evidence of genuine paranormal powers. This book tells the story of
some of the greatest psychics and mystics. They range from the earliest
sage-like figures who predicted milestones in world history to ordinary
twentieth-century housewifes, such as Doris Stokes who found themselves
with gifts of prophecy and healing. |
|
First edition 1986 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
331 |
Alex Owen |
THE DARKENED ROOM |
|
Women, Power and Spiritualism
in Late Victorian England. This brilliant and highly original study
looks at the central role played by women as mediums, healers and
believers during the “golden age” of British spiritualism in the late
Victorian era. The movement, which maintained that women were uniquely
qualified to commune with spirits of the dead, offered mediums a new
independence and authority which, while privileging so-called feminine
virtues, was capable of undermining conventional class and gender
relations and redefining the nature of women’s power in both the home
and society. |
|
First edition 1989 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
332 |
Thomas Paine |
THE AGE OF REASON |
|
The Age of Reason represents
the results of years of study and reflection by Thomas Paine on the
place of religion in society. Paine was never an atheist, the opinion
of many of his peers to the contrary. Together with many of the
foremost liberals and intellectuals in America and Europe, he believed
in Deism. After seeing the application of the light of rationalism in
the political revolutions in America and France, it seemed to him that
the next step was to apply this same rationalism to religion. Paine
wrote: “of all the tyrannies that affect mankind tyranny in religion is
the worst; every other species of tyranny is limited to the world we
live in; but this attempts to stride beyond the grave, and seeks to
pursue us into eternity.” The cool rationale of Paine’s The Age of
Reason influenced religious thinking throughout the world; and its
pervasive influence continues to the present day. The biographical
introduction by Philip S Foner sheds fresh and penetrating light on
Paine’s contributions and the times in which he lived. The First
Edition of The Age of Reason was published in Paris in 1794. |
|
First edition 1948 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
333 |
Harry Edwards |
THE MEDIUMSHIP OF JACK WEBBER |
|
The descriptive chapters and
the accompanying full-page art plates illustrating the physical
phenomena obtained through Jack Webber’s mediumship comprise one of the
most outstanding psychic books ever published. By means of the
infra-red ray many phases of physical phenomena were photographed for
the first time. They are invaluable to a study of mediumship. All
these amazing photographs were obtained during the sixteen months from
November 1938 to February 1940. “Never before has such a comprehensive
range of remarkable séance photographs been obtained in so short a time
through the mediumship of one individual.” |
|
First edition 1962 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
334 |
Rev. Charles L Tweedale |
NEWS FROM THE NEXT WORLD |
|
News from the next world is an
account of the survival of Antonius Stradivarius, Frederick Chopin, Sir
Arthur Conan Doyle, The Bronte’s, and of many of the Author’s relatives
and friends, as proved by their after-death manifestations, photographs
and signatures; together with their descriptions of the other-world
life, and a discussion of the bearing of these evidences on the
present-day religious teaching and the practice of the Churches. |
|
First edition 1940 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
335 |
Fred Archer |
EXPLORING THE PSYCHIC WORLD |
|
Fred Archer was the editor of
the largest newspaper for spiritualistic readers, the Psychic News, for
sixteen years. This book reveals the occult experiences of famous
people, among them, George Bernard Shaw, Albert Schweitzer and Sir
Winston Churchill. Included in this book of amazing revelations are
such topics as : Ghostology, Royalty and Spiritualism, Mediums are
people, puzzling poltergeists, Doctors and Healers, Clergy and
Spiritualists and This World and That. |
|
First edition 1968 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
336 |
His Divine Grace A. C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupada |
ON THE WAY TO KRISHNA |
|
Every one of us is searching
after happiness, but we do not know what real happiness is. We see so
much advertised about happiness, but practically speaking we see so few
happy people. This is because so few people know that the platform of
real happiness is beyond temporary things. It is this real happiness
that is described in On the way to Krishna. |
|
First edition 1984 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
337 |
His Divine Grace A. C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupada |
EASY JOURNEY TO OTHER PLANETS |
|
One can attempt to go to any
planet he desires, but this is only possible by psychological changes in
the mind or by yoga powers. Mind is the nucleus of the material body.
Anyone who trains the mind to turn from matter to the spiritual form of
the Godhead by performance of bhakti-yoga can easily attain the kingdom
of God in the anti-material sky. Of this there is no doubt. |
|
First edition 1988 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
338 |
Lobsang Rampa |
DOCTOR FROM LHASA |
|
This book is a picture of life
utterly unlike anything we know in the Western world, and one in which
occult powers and supernatural happenings play an important part. It is
the continuation of the story of a man whose body was so completely
possessed by the spirit of a Tibetan Lama from the Potala Monastery in
Lhasa that he became, in fact, the Lama himself. This Lama suffered a
long and arduous imprisonment, survived degradation, starvation, and
soul-destroying tortures inflicted by the Japanese during World War 11
and in this book he tells of the powers and knowledge which enabled him
to do so. Such a story might seem palpably absurd were it not for the
shattering reality with which it is related and the undeniable proofs of
supernatural and occult powers given by its writer. |
|
First edition 1959 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
339 |
Lobsang Rampa |
THE CAVE OF THE ANCIENTS |
|
This book is the story of
Lobsang Rampa’s experiences at the great Lamasaries of Tibet. It is the
fruit of a long life, training culled from this place and from the
powers which were gained by a very close adherence to the Laws. This is
knowledge taught by the Ancients of old, and is written in the Pyramids
of Egypt, in the Temples of the Andes, and in the greatest repository
of Occult knowledge in the world, the Highlands of Tibet. |
|
First edition 1963 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
340 |
Lobsang Rampa |
YOU - FOREVER |
|
This is Lobsang Rampa’s sixth
book. This master of the occult, who in previous books described his
experiences in the world of mysticism, now presents his readers with a
key with which they can explore the occult world themselves. Step by
step, he provides the methods whereby anyone can develop their psychic
powers to a degree never before thought possible. |
|
First edition 1965 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
341 |
Lobsang Rampa |
CHAPTERS OF LIFE |
|
Lobsang Rampa, mystic, sage and
student of the Astral, offers another of his profound dissertations on
the progress of the psychic world. Here he fortells the disasters and
happenings of the future, the events to come that will purify and evolve
a new cycle of life. |
|
First edition 1967 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
342 |
Lobsang Rampa |
BEYOND THE TENTH |
|
Lobsang Rampa explores the
spiritual potential inherent in every human being. It gives advice and
teachings on the care of man’s physical and spiritual forms.
Preparation on the present plane of existence can equip man more fully
for the life which commences in the Astral World. Beyond the Tenth is a
book that will bring comfort and learning to many. |
|
First edition 1969 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
343 |
Lobsang Rampa |
I BELIEVE |
|
“This book will tell of life
before birth, life on Earth, and the passing from Earth and return to
Life Beyond.” This is Lobsang Rampa’s seventeenth book. In previous
books he has written about his early life, his training at the Lamasery
and his battles against the forces of evil in the world. Now, in
response to overwhelming requests from his devoted followers all over
the world, he has set down his beliefs about the life after death – the
testimony of a remarkable teacher that will bring comfort to his
countless readers and shed the light of inspiration on this the greatest
of human mysteries. |
|
First edition 1977 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
344 |
Joseph Bradbury |
MY LIFE WITH SPIRIT |
|
This book is a unique view into
the world of spirit. Spirits have spoken to us since the beginning.
Joseph Bradbury says; “My life has been one of fun and laughter. The
spirit world has brought me enlightenment, knowledge, wonderful truth,
and above all, joy. I am the person I am today because of the influence
of spirit. For me, the human experience does not differ from the
spiritual experience of the simplicity and complexity of all that we
are. God is complex in his mysteries, but he simplifies his majesty for
the benefit of humankind. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
345 |
Dr C O Southard |
TRUTH IDEAS OF AN M.D. |
|
Dr Southard was an Ear, Nose
and Throat Specialist at the beginning of this century in San Francisco.
He was also associate editor of the Pacific Medical Journal. His
interest in psychotherapy and metaphysics gradually led to his interest
in spiritual healing.. He wrote many articles, on all matters, which he
submitted to the Unity School of Christianity in Kansas City. This book
is a collection of some of those articles of which some were most
certainly spiritually inspired. |
|
First edition 1934 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
346 |
Wolf Moondance |
RAINBOW MEDICINE |
|
Find a more peaceful,
meaningful way of life and develop a powerful sense of self-worth with
the help of a Native American shaman who, drawing on her Osage and
Cherokee heritage and training in human development, has been teaching
others these mystical secrets for over 27 years. Learn to carry out
ancient ceremonies, using ordinary objects, herbs and foods, as they
have been practiced for eons. Meditation and journal-keeping, along
with special words of prayer and power, will help you to find your path
and add direction to your life, open your mind and spirit, balance your
emotions, get in touch with your body and explore your creativity
through the ceremonies of growth, truth, wisdom, impeccability, and the
sacred quest for the whole self. |
|
First edition 1994 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
347 |
Wolf Moondance |
SPIRIT MEDICINE |
|
Native American teachings to
awaken the spirit. Reach beyond the physical and achieve a wholeness of
being by following the path of Spirit Medicine. With the help of a
Native American visionary who, drawing on her Osage and Cherokee
heritage and training in human development, has been teaching others
these mystical secrets for nearly three decades, you will develop an
understanding of why you do what you do, and then use that knowledge to
achieve a higher sense of self. Learn to perform numerous ancient
ceremonies using herbs, cornmeal, and other natural objects, and
discover the healing magic contained in the Rainbow Medicine Wheel.
Make a variety of tools that will help you on your jorney towards inner
peace and knowledge of your soul. |
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
348 |
Rosemary Altea |
PROUD SPIRIT |
|
Rosemary Altea is a British
Spiritual medium and healer. An international bestselling author, she
draws clients from around the globe. In this extraordinary book, she
explores opportunities for spiritual growth in our everyday experiences.
Using stories from her work and also from her personal life she
answers such questions as: Will our human personalities survive death
intact? Are people in the spirit world affected by the actions of their
loved ones on earth? But this remarkable tour-de-force goes well
beyond the subject of life after death, presenting awe-inspiring tales
that shine a light on human conduct, such as the spine tingling visit of
children from the spirit world, or the story of an abused young boy who
is kept safe by his guardian angel. Hopeful, uplifting, strengthening,
Rosemary Altea challenges us to know, value and be gentle with ourselves
– to be proud spirits. |
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
349 |
Glennyee S Eckersley |
AN ANGEL AT MY SHOULDER |
|
An Angel at my Shoulder shows
angels are returning – and being acknowledged – once again. Here are
true stories of countless ordinary people being rescued by angels, being
comforted and healed by them; feeling their presence in the face of
death and often appearing to little children. These tales are drawn
from such countries as Britain, Australia, Ireland and the United
States, showing angels can be found all round the globe, helping others,
often changing their lives completely. Warm and uplifting An Angel at
my Shoulder suggests it is more than time to reconsider our view of
angels, to let them back into our hectic, mechanized world and to
realise we are never alone. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
350 |
Rev. Charles Drayton Thomas |
SOME NEW EVIDENCE FOR HUMAN SURVIVAL |
|
An excellent book for
historians of Physical Research. This is an early book that deals with
new evidence given at the time supporting life after death. The
“evidence” comes in the form of book tests and newspaper tests. For
example: “In the book tests the exact position of some book in the
sitters or another persons library is named, the page given, and certain
words it is asserted, will be found on that page applicable to a
question asked or appropriate to the unseen communicator.” |
|
First edition 1922 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
351 |
James Coates PhD F.A.S. |
IS MODERN SPIRITUALISM BASED ON FACTS OR FANCY ? |
|
“Two reasons, among others,
have influenced me to write this book: First, the intense desire of the
public to obtain information about Modern Spiritualism; second, as an
investigator with some forty odd years’ actual experience I am able to
present some facts, based on actual research. I do not explain the
phenomena, being content to present concrete instances, leaving the
readers to form their own conclusion when they have investigated
Spiritualism for themselves.” This book touches well on the subject of
Spiritual Photography illustrating 4 photographs. |
|
First edition No Date (early, around 1914) |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
352 |
I M Butt |
PATHWAY TO GOD |
|
The Master, Jesus, did not come
to teach a new religion, he came to show the pathway to God. All
religions lead to God, and faith is needed, this cannot be taken out of
religion. Faith is essential. God reveals Himself to each seeker in
relation to their faith, understanding and sincerity, so each individual
perceives God in his own outlook. It is not necessary to belong to a
religion to believe in God and to do his work. |
|
First edition 1993 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
353 |
Benjamin O Bibb |
AMAZING SECRETS OF PSYCHIC HEALING |
|
Are you completely healthy?
Always? If not, you should be. Are any of your family, friends or
acquantances suffering from poor health, injuries or even long standing
afflictions? They need not, if you decide you want to help them, for
help them you can, and yourself as well. How? you ask. This book will
tell you how, for you do have the ability to heal. Right now you may
not be aware that you have it, but you do. This gift of God is part of
the birthright of every man and woman; it lies dormant in you waiting to
be awakened. Only a small effort on your part is required to stimulate
it to powerful and effective action, awaiting for you to discover for
yourself.
Benjamin O Bibb and Joseph J Wood |
|
First edition 1976 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
354 |
Paul Nichols |
JOURNEY TO INFINITY |
|
An easy to read book of one
mans quest to find the truth. Of his own personal “voyage of
exploration” he says. “For years I had been searching endlessly for
answers to the many questions which burned in my mind. And all I had
ever found was confusion, ignorance and inconsistency which resulted in
complete lack of harmony. It had now become plain to me that I would
not find the answers I was seeking buried and hidden away in the
hodgepodge of religions. It was only when I dared to venture abroad,
making my departure from the field of religion, that I started finding
the kind of answers which truly satisfield my insatiable curiosity. And
that is the primary reason why I decided to write this book. I wanted
to share with other seekers all the nuggets of gold I found in great
abundance at the rainbow’s end. Life is continuous – never-ending. |
|
First edition 1992 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
355 |
Stephen Turoff |
SEVEN STEPS TO ETERNITY |
|
“I died in the Battle of the
Somme…” These are the amazing first words spoken to the clairvoyant
author from James Legget, a World War One soldier. Over the next two
years, Stephen Turoff communicated with this soldier to produce Seven
Steps to Eternity which tells the story of the soldiers death and his
life thereafter in Spirit. The book was written to share the knowledge
that we are all eternal; there is no death, only change. It shares one
soul’s experience in order to comfort ALL about the transition called
death. |
|
First edition No date |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
356 |
Ronald Shone |
CREATIVE VISUALIZATION |
|
As children we all have natural
imaginative powers, but as we grow up we are taught that these are
"unscientific” and “illogical”, and our ability to visualize creatively
becomes obscured. Yet vivid imagery and symbolism affects us mentally,
emotionally and physically, and while creative visualizations may not be
logical, they may have the bizarre character of dreams or fantasies,
they can radically transform our lives. Ronald Shone explains practical
ways of tapping into this hidden potential to help us define and
achieve our goals. It can help us develop a positive attitude, raise
our energy levels, overcome shyness and improve our memory. Exploiting
the link between mind and body, Creative Visualization also enables us
to fight pain and illness by participating actively in the healing
process. |
|
First edition 1984 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
357 |
Betty Collins |
I`M JANE |
|
Those who love small children
will enjoy this book. Those who love animals will enjoy it too. Those
who have lost a child or animal in so-called-death, will find great
comfort and enlightenment between its covers, as will the seeker of
truth concerning the lives of us all, when our earthly span is done. In
the first part, life on “the other side” as seen through a child’s
eyes, can give much food for thought for adults, and a happy
introduction to the subject for younger readers, for whom it is a
complete book in itself. Part two offers an interesting analysis of the
first part. Together they answer questions that many people would like
to ask, but too often dare not. |
|
First edition 1988 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
358 |
G. M. Glaskin |
WINDOWS OF THE MIND |
|
Have we only one life, or do we
have several? Can we cross from one incarnation to another? Window of
the Mind tells how, without drugs, hypnosis or trance-states, anyone
can travel in time and space, and discover “The Christos Experience”: a
new understanding of the twilight between memory and consciousness. |
|
First edition 1974 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
359 |
Whitley Strieber |
COMMUNION |
|
Communion is one man’s powerful
testimony of his terrifying encounters with creatures, certainly not of
human origin, who invaded his home and rendered him helpless, making
him doubt his sanity and fear for his family’s safety. Whether you will
believe his story or not, you will be compelled to read every word as
Whitley Strieber take you to the frontires of the unknown. In the
authors own words, “When you read this incredible story, do not be too
sceptical: somewhere in your own past there may be some lost hour or
strange recollection that means you also have had this experience.” |
|
First edition 1987 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
360 |
Ted Andrews |
HOW TO DEVELOP AND USE PSYCHIC TOUCH |
|
Hunches, visions and dreams,
strong flashes of insight, a vague sense of something impending…..
Psychic experiences come in a variety of forms. Now you can learn to
read the “psychic imprints” on objects, people, and places to obtain
information about them. For most people, psychic touch is one of the
easiest psychic abilities to develop because it is rooted in one of our
most primal senses. Now you, too, can develop this innate ability to
astounding new levels. |
|
First edition 1997 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
361 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE MADMAN |
|
Prose and poetry with three
illustrations by Kahlil Gibran.
“His power came from some great reservoir of spiritual life,
else it could not have been so universal and so potent, but the majesty
and beauty of the language with which he clothed it were all his
own.”…. Claude Bragdon
|
|
First edition 1918 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
362 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE FORERUNNER |
|
More of Kahlil Gibran’s
parables and poems complete with five illustrations.
“You are your own forerunner, and the towers you have builded
are but the foundation of your giant-self. And that self too shall be a
foundation.”
|
|
First edition 1920 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
363 |
Kahlil Gibran |
SAND AND FOAM |
|
Another book of verse, with
five illustrations, commencing,
“I am for ever walking upon these shores, betwixt the sea
and the foam. The high tide will erase my footprints, and the wind will
blow away the foam. But the sea and the shore will remain for ever.”
|
|
First edition 1927 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
364 |
Kahlil Gibran |
JESUS, THE SON OF MAN |
|
“His words and his deeds as told and recorded by those who knew him.”
Complete with nine illustrations.
|
|
First edition 1928 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
365 |
Robert J. Gilson |
EVOLUTION IN THE NEW LIGHT |
|
This book challenges the
Darwinian theory of evolution with a logic that is both incisive and
direct. The author attacks the Evolutionists and the Creationists with
equal vigour yet accepts without rancour all he reasonably can. Then he
weights his argument with a reference list of over a hundred titles
from both sides so that the serious student can follow the author’s
trail in part or in full. This trail leads towards an amalgam of
Creationism and Evolutionism. The author retains the principle of
evolution by natural selection of advantageous variations,then asks that
we accept the possibility of a transcendental direction of those
variations. Similarly the principle of creation is retained subject to
the possibility of it being delagated through a heirarchy of powers.
While the two opposing schools are brought together, Gilson denies
allegiance to either. The unifying factor, he suggests, lies in the
acknowledgement that imagination, and not reason or thought, is the
primary function, the directive force of creative mind. The creator,
the ultimate source, is seen as the Divine Imaginal and what It
imagines, comes from being; is reality. He further suggests that this
transcendental Source is the fountainhead of a vast cosmic
heirarchy of primary and secondary imaginals which together make up a
non-physical realm of creative spirituality that originates and sustains
the universe.
A thought-provoking book that follows the work of Douglas Fawcett
in his Zermatt and Oberland Dialogues and the later verifying work of
Raynor C. Johnson in Nurslings of Immortality.
|
|
First edition 1992 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
366 |
Ingrid Lind |
ASTROLOGICALLY SPEAKING |
|
Life Patron of the Astrological
Association and the Faculty of Astroligical Studies, the author draws
on her vast experience as a counsellor to show how astrology works. Not
addressed to the established astrologer, this book is a treasure trove
into which the beginner and the curious alike can dip, as need or
inclination suggests. The easy style is an indication of Ingrid Lind’s
depth of knowledge; the subjects complexity is never apparent and its
verified level of accuracy fascinating. |
|
First edition 1981 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
367 |
Raynor C. Johnson |
THE IMPRISONED SPLENDOUR |
|
This is a remarkable book. It
has been called courageous, outreaching, “highly intelligent and
eminently readable” and it is all of these. Dr Johnson believed that
science, if properly viewed, reached beyond rationalism to the direct
apprehension of spiritual reality. He is never dogmatic, and marshals
impressive auguments drawn from natural science, psychical research and
mystical experience, with all the thoroughness of an eminent physicist.
In fact the final ordering of this evidence has such a cumulative
effect that the conclusions cannot be readily dismissed. |
|
First edition 1953 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
368 |
Raynor C. Johnson |
NURSLINGS OF IMMORTALITY |
|
This author, a physicist by
profession, brings to his writing an originality of thought that has
contributed much to our understanding of mankind’s spiritual nature. In
this book he enlarges upon the subject of imaginism; the name given to
the philosophy originally expounded by Douglas fawcett in his 1930’s
book The Zermatt Dialogues and The Oberland Dialogues. It postulates
the primary Source, God, as being divine imagination; the ultimate
creative impellent preceeding all original and innovative thought.
Within mankind, imaginative flair is the engine of all creativity.
Without it there is no origianl thought, no willingness of our finite
minds to reach beyond the boundaries of the known to the unknown.
Accordingly something of the nature of Creation can be glimpsed as we
see our puny creative impellent, our imagination, as the micocosmic
reflection of the macrocosm. When in 1957 Raynor Johnson sought to
verify Fawcett’s work in scientific terms, he brought to the task the
clarity of thought and exposition to be expected of such a distinguished
academic and physicist. Moreover his awareness of the mystical takes
the book into an area of perception both rare and far reaching.
While it demands concentration to follow this thesis, the rewards
for perseverance are rich indeed. Not only will we have “conversed”
with a visionary but gradually we may come to observe the author’s
findings at work in our own spiritual lives. |
|
First edition 1957 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
369 |
Raynor C. Johnson |
WATCHER ON THE HILLS |
|
This book is written for all
who are concerned to find the truth about life. It is largely based on
the private mystical and semi-mystical experiences confided to Dr
Johnson by people in the everyday world who, recognising the validity of
his work, were impelled to write to him. After prefacing these
accounts with a framework of clarifying ideas the author then endeavours
to show their relationship to the stages of the mystic way as expounded
by the great masters. With the tolerant understanding that was his
hallmark he discusses the relationship of mysticism with religion,
occultism and, perhaps most importantly, its coming about in the
ordinary person’s life. |
|
First edition 1959 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
370 |
Raynor C. Johnson |
A RELIGIOUS OUTLOOK FOR MODERN MAN |
|
To discover the enormous
resources of the inner self is a difficult quest yet, as the author
affirms, “it is the only satisfying way in which we may ride out of the
storms of this modern age with inner serenity.” Those many questions
about life which we often ponder but then shelve are here presented for
consideration with clarity and tolerance. No specialised knowledge is
required and the author freely admits that he is “not concerned whether
my answers and thoughts are orthodox or not …. I shall try to express
some facets of truth which I think I can see.” |
|
First edition 1963 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
371 |
Raynor C. Johnson |
THE DECISIVE TESTIMONY |
|
Originally published as part of
The Light and The Gate, it concerns the author’s relationship with a
highly unusual man, Ambrose Pratt. Later, when his friend died, Dr
Johnson sought to trace him through the mediumship of Geraldine Cummins.
By asking searching questions and through the depth of answer
received, the author was finally convinced that his friend had indeed
survived death with his questing mind and philosophical insight intact.
The experience formed a spiritual watershed for Dr Johnson and one
cannot fail to be impressed by the remarkable exchanges of thought here
recorded. |
|
First edition 1964 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
372 |
Raynor C. Johnson |
LIGHT OF ALL LIFE |
|
This, the last of Raynor
Johnson’s books, is based on a series of lectures delivered in America
and London. In his gentle style he draws upon more than eighty years of
life experience, during half of which his thinking bridged both science
and philosophy. No mere theoretician, this emenent scientist writes
with the authority of one who knows. He sees reincarnation and karma
as “great key truths to be reckoned with … Their truth illumines human
life, death and destiny, and without these keys it seems to me there can
be no comprehensive and satisfactory philosophy of human life.” In
the penultimate chapter – “The Nature and Problem of Time”, he writes
lucidly of this very complex subject. He reminds us of time’s
subjective impression, so dependent upon the individual and the current
mood. He seeks, in dealing with precognition and retrocognition, to
widen our perspective the immediacy of past and future into the present
moment. This in turn raises the question of freedom and he postulates
that, “It is largely in the quality of response to events that our
freedom lies.” All in all an exceptional work |
|
First edition 1984 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
373 |
D.M.A. Leggett, M.A., D.Sc. |
THE SACRED QUEST |
|
Many seeking an alternative
philosophy for life will find this book to be their starting point. It
examines the belief that spiritual evolution is the purpose of life and
weighs it against the normally presented view of Christianity. The
age-old problems of free will and determinism, good and evil, love and
justice are given balanced consideration and the reader is gently led
from a materialistic base towards a spiritual summit. |
|
First edition 1987 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
374 |
D.M.A. Leggett, M.A., D.Sc. |
FACING THE FUTURE |
|
Here Dr Leggett explores the
spiritual implications of today’s environmental threats. He also
provides a readily understandable and comprehensive review of the
material aspects. But the book’s worth lies in his bridging of the
chasm between the scienific and the religious; showing that the planet’s
future is too important to be left to the scientists alone. Their
solutions must be balanced by knowledge of lif’s basic spiritual laws.
The prognosis is optimistic provided we act now ! |
|
First edition 1990 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
375 |
Mabel Beatty |
MAN MADE PERFECT |
|
A book for all who seek to
understand life’s wider issues. The subjects covered include, among
many others, reincarnation, healing, colour, the spiritual significance
of numbers and the Christian mysteries. In particular the chapter “The
New Age” underlines the slow and evolutionary nature of the transition
about which we currently hear so much. Each subject is dealt with
concisely and without ambiguity. Although these transmissions,
purporting to come from the White Brotherhood, were given to Mabel
Beatty more than sixty years ago, they are as relevant today as they
were then. |
|
First edition 1929 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
376 |
Geraldine Cummins |
SWAN ON A BLACK SEA |
|
These are the Cummins-Willett
Scripts, a remarkable collection of writings received by Geraldine
Cummins, a sensitive of outstanding integrity. They are especialy
interesting because they involve communicators who were once members of
the Society for Psychical Research. On the physical plane they had
investigated the subject with scientific rigour but now, in the scripts,
and being fully aware of the difficulties of assessment, they provide
detailed information about incidents in their former earth lives. This
book is a classic in its field. |
|
First edition 1965 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
377 |
Charles Fryer |
GERALDINE CUMMINS: AN APPRECIATION |
|
This biography is an in-depth
study of the work of perhaps the foremost exponent of directed or
automatic writing. Geraldine Cummins, never credulous and sometimes
highly sceptical of the material she received, produced impressive
evidence of post-mortem survival. Charles Fryer, as her biographer and a
directed writer himself, questions the questionable and is loathe to
approve where there is the slightest doubt. In summarising more than
fifteen books, he makes some incisive comments about mediumship and his
conclusions are endowed with balance and much integrity. |
|
First edition 1990 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
378 |
Paul Beard |
LIVING ON |
|
A study of altering
consciousness after death. After presenting many different accounts of
post-mortem experience, purporting to come from former psychical
researchers, scientists, clergy, writers and many others of repute, the
author then subjects them to a rigorous scrutiny. The picture that
emerges is of a continuing life after death of order and effort. Every
step forward has to be earned and all is subjected to immutable law.
Considered by some to be “the best account to date of this relatively
unchartered territory.” This book will appeal alike to the searcher
after truth, to the modern, thinking churchgoer, the psychical
researcher and the openminded sceptic. |
|
First edition 1980 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
379 |
Paul Beard |
HIDDEN MAN |
|
For those who are trying to
understand life’s enigma. Paul Beard presents a concise distillation of
the contributions made by discarnate teachers. These wiser souls, who
nonetheless stress their fallibility, are never dogmatic but leave the
individual entirely free to accept or reject their teaching. On one
thing only are they insistent, that we must tread our own pathway in
what is shown to be a very long voyage over many lives. The aim through
this unique journey is to find, deep within ourselves, the inner and
intuitive being – the hidden man. |
|
First edition 1986 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
380 |
Paul Beard |
INNER EYE, LISTENING EAR |
|
A book that shows how important
is the work of serious mediumship in its contribution to our search for
the deeper values behind everyday living. But there are many
complexities that lie beneath the surface of such work and these often
make it the subject of misunderstanding, false claims and unworthy
prejudice, both for and against. Paul Beard, though not a medium, has
over many years been able to observe and closely study mediumship at
work. For some sixteen years he was President of the College of Psychic
Studies, and for considerably longer he has been a member of the
Society for Psychical Research. He is, therefore, well placed to assess
mediumship and to see all that is best in the subject as well as its
difficulties. He understands the essential roles played by the
communicator, the recipient and the medium, and from his vast experience
he stresses the essential nature of the harmony so necessary between
all three participants, a prerequisite for sound results. This book
does not set out a training programme for mediumship. He considers that
to be a task best left to the professionals. Nevertheless his research
and advice are particularly valuable to all who would aspire to
mediumship and to every pupil undergoing mediumistic training in a
development circle. Additionally it will assist those who wish to
enhance their awareness of life’s spirituality. |
|
First edition 1992 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
381 |
Marie Cherrie |
THE BARBANELL REPORT |
|
Maurice Barbanell, the founder
editor of Psychic News and the medium for the discarnate teacher Silver
Birch, arranged with Paul Beard that the first to depart this life would
attempt to convey what he found. After thirty sessions with the medium
Marie Cherrie a number of evidential facts appear but the main thrust
underlines the change in and growth of consciousness which Maurice
Barbanell has gradually undergone. A sincere record but one that
dispels many comfortable beliefs about our post-mortem state.
Edited by Paul Beard |
|
First edition 1987 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
382 |
Wellesley Tudor Pole |
PRIVATE DOWDING |
|
First published as long ago as
1917, this book was in the forefront of many invaluable records
purporting to describe the conditions of life after death. The author
remarked in 1966 that it was a “period piece.” Nonetheless it is still a
valuable documentation of that future existence which has been much
substantiated by subsequent writings. All in all an optimistic book
describing the hereafter in down-to-earth terms. |
|
First edition 1917 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
383 |
Wellesley Tudor Pole |
WRITING ON THE GROUND |
|
The author’s whole philosophy
“is a gentle, insistent assertion that the life we know is only a minute
part of a greater continuum, existing far back and far ahead. Tudor
Pole’s ability to scan this continuum brings glimpses that are denied to
most of us.” In this book he takes us beyond the familiar Gospel
narratives and suggests that many seemingly everyday events in the life
of Jesus were in reality of cosmic import. He sees the spiritual
impulse of two thousand years ago as a continuing process, as potent
today as ever. Very much a man of affairs, Tudor Pole shows yet again
that true mysticism is a practical formula for living. |
|
First edition 1968 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
384 |
Elizabeth Farrell |
THE UNFOLDING JOURNEY |
|
In the opinion of Paul Beard, a
past President of the College of Psychic Studies, this is one of the
best accounts of the working life of a medium. Elizabeth Farrell, with
honesty and integrity, portrays her career as one requiring a high
degree of discipline and she underlines the varying qualities needed to
succeed in this difficult profession. Prescribed reading for the
aspiring medium, it also reveals much that is essential knowledge for
the serious sitter. In this it informs the genuine seeker and must
assist in their search for enlightenment |
|
First edition 1990 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
385 |
Frederick W.H. Myers |
HUMAN PERSONALITY AND ITS SURVIVAL OF BODILY DEATH |
|
This must rank as one of the
most important studies, if not the most important yet achieved in
psychical research, written by one of the founders of the Society for
Psychical Research. He was a master of the English language, who was
equally and uniquely both scientist and poet, it details a most
meticulous and long-sustained research into paranormal faculties and
phenomena; research that was conducted with rigorous scientific
thoroughness and extraordinary strength of purpose. Furthermore, in its
discussion of divergent theories, there is a singular lack of bias and
the whole thrust of the work, which is never tedious, is “to the
deciphering of that open secret which has baffled the too hasty, or too
self-centred wonder and wish of men.” And the secret – to discover the
cosmic structure of the universe. When the poet felt justified in
taking up the hypothesis “that man is an organism informed or possessed
by a soul” he expanded it to a belief that we live two lives; the
planetary life in this material world and a cosmic life in the spiritual
world which is the soul’s native environment. He maintains that while
the waking personality is adapted to the needs of earthly life it
derives much of its spiritual energy during sleep. Furthermore that it
is while we are asleep that we maintain this most fundamental connection
between the organism and the spiritual world. From his research and
findings in the field of telepathy he deduces that communion between
this and a discarnate world is an absolute fact. |
|
First edition 1903 |
j |
———————————————————————————— |
386 |
Charles Jessel |
AN ANTHOLOGY OF INNER SILENCE |
|
Inner silence is the key to
self-knowing; it is “the liberation of the true self.” Through it we
find new energy and improve our “management of stress.” 365 quotations
for meditation have been garnered from many nations and cultures and
span the centuries. Within this selection, from poets, writers,
discarnate teachers, philosophers and saints, you will find passages for
meditation and contemplation that eventually become favourite and
familiar landmarks along the personal road to liberation. A constant
source of healing wisdom and an antidote for stress.
compiled by Charles Jessel |
|
First edition 1990 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
387 |
Richard Sale |
NOT TOO NARROW … NOT TOO DEEP |
|
Ten convicts who brave savage
heat and treacherous seas in a bid for freedom, are joined by another
man, unknown and uninvited, who became their leader. Jean Cambreau is
possessed of extraordinary powers; he seems to know each one better than
they know themselves. Who is Jean Cambreau ? Slowly he teaches that
the only true escape comes from knowing one’s self, an escape to within.
This novel is described by Sir George Trevelyan in the Forward as “an
example of the one great tale, of mans descent into the darkness of
separation and his redemption through the power of love awakening the
secret centre of divinity within the heart.” |
|
First edition 1936 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
388 |
Phoebe Payne |
MANKIND’S LATENT POWERS |
|
This book was first published
in 1938 as Man’s Latent Powers and has remained an authorative work for
all those engaged in mediumship who value their profession. It is
written by one who, as a child, was fascinated by the different
emanations she saw radiating from flowers and assumed such experience to
be commonplace. With this background, Phoebe Payne’s approach is
essentially matter of fact, and it is evident that once she realised the
nature of her gift she subjected it to some very critical analysis. An
innate integrity pervades her every observation and there is very
little that escapes her notice. She sees her talent as being on a par
with any other, as one requiring a high level of dedication to its
training and later, when sufficently developed, to its correct
professional use. Her advice to all who would unfold their gift of
mediumship has stood the test of time and, if studied and followed,
cannot do other than enhance such a gift. On the other hand, it may
help those of lesser ability to discover what they do not know and cause
them to approach their activities more carefully. In both cases the
results will raise the standards of professionalism. |
|
First edition 1938 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
389 |
Margaret Holmes |
GROWTH INTO BEING |
|
There is a simplicity about
this book which belies its profundity. It is a practical quide to
greater spirituality, based on the life and teaching of Jesus. It
recognises the immense power of thought and the benefit of meditative
stillness. It also recognises our need for continual appraisal of self,
of faith and of acceptance, whereby we acquire new values and increased
sensitivity. Still within the Christian framework, it moves back from
dogma to the simple words of Jesus, and without abstruse argument,
restates His basic teaching for today’s reader. For all of us there is
one objective, our growth in being, and this is our raison d’etre. |
|
First edition 1984 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
390 |
Albert Pauchard |
THE OTHER WORLD |
|
Albert Pauchard founded the
Metapsychical Society in Geneva and was successively librarian,
vice-president and president. He gave much of his life to the
examination of evidence concerned with communication after death, and in
this important work he describes the experiences which met him after
his own death and reflects upon their meaning. An intellectual and a
man of probity, Pauchard found himself confronted by much that was both
unexpected, very searching, and not at all like the comforting, somewhat
undemanding picture sometimes offered. He treats reincarnation as an
established fact and emphasises that our development on earth determines
the kind of experiences awaiting us after death. Here indeed is a
fascinating account, received through an anonymous, non-professional
Dutch sensitive, of adventures of the soul in realms which all of us
must eventually traverse. |
|
First edition 1952 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
391 |
Bob Bloomfield |
LINDA MARTEL : LITTLE HEALER |
|
One might say that this book
should be required reading for all who favour euthanasia or abortion.
It may well cause a change of mind ! At her birth Linda’s father
pleaded that she should not be allowed to live yet she acquired such a
remarkable reputation as a healer that it continued long after her death
at five years and two months. Many sought snippets of her clothing
and, allegedly, gained benefit therefrom. A rare soul of commanding
presence and gentle authority, her personality so exuded happiness as to
envelop all within an aura of reassuring spiritual light. An
intriguing story about a remarkable child. |
|
First edition 1990 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
392 |
Anonymous |
THE WAY OF THE SERVANT |
|
For over seventy years this
book has been used by many as a bedside companion, a basis for
meditation, and a call to devotion. Its timely reintroduction is for a
new generation who should find its spiritual value as immediate and as
long lasting as did the original readers. It contains fourteen
Directions whose authorship is not known, but where content speaks for
itself; each is a sighpost along the Way, an indication of the Path
that all must tread. With a gentle insistence the Servant is
encouraged to translate each teaching in terms of the physical, of
feeling, of mind and of spirit and to achieve mastery in each of those
four worlds, knowing that a fall will bear greater fruit than will the
hedging of the self from such experience. Author Unknown |
|
First edition 1918 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
393 |
John Pearson |
WITHOUT DOGMA OR CREED |
|
A small book that restates the
Ancient Wisdom without dogma, creed or theological argument. Its
purpose is to offer to those disenchanted with the presentation of
organised religion a concise philosophy that is both logical and
practical. It defines those essential landmarks that are fundamental
to all religions, the catalyst perhaps to finding one’s own particular
pathway. Above all it underlines the need for each one of us to accept a
personal responsibility for our life and our actions. |
|
First edition 1989 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
394 |
John Moss |
WHAT DO YOU THINK OF CHRIST ? |
|
This fundamental question,
pondered in 1 Corinthians 12.3 and 1 John 4.2, has been rigorously
applied to some of the best of modern, largely twentieth century spirit
and mystic sources. Thus Stainton Moses and Silver Birch, Rudolf
Steiner and Wellesley Tudor Pole, St Stephen and St Francis have all
been drawn into Dr Moss’s masterly treatise as he enquires into their
attitudes to Christ. What do you think of Christ is an intelligent,
lucidly written book, addressing its subject with serious academic
objectivity and a commendable lack of sensationalism. Meticulously
researched and pleasingly free of artifice, this eloquent and
thought-provoking work is for academics and ordinary readers alike. |
|
First edition 1996 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
395 |
Laneta Gregory |
HANDBOOK OF THE AURA |
|
An understanding of the aura is
a step towards a deeper comprehension of our higher self. To know what
it is and how it interweaves with those around us, how feelings and
intuitions can be related to aura, how competent auric analysis can
perceive and forstall major health problems. These and many other
aspects are dealt with by Laneta Gregory in a practical manner free of
too much theory. Thirty-six colours are interpreted and seven case
histories are linked to individual auric diagrams as seen and drawn by
Geoffrey Treissman. While this enlightened contribution is essential
reading for serious students of the aura, it will also appeal to those
who seek to know more about the other, subtler bodies.
Laneta Gregory and Geoffrey Treissman |
|
First edition 1985 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
396 |
Ursula Roberts |
THE MYSTERY OF THE HUMAN AURA |
|
This little booklet deals with
the Aura,, its colours, how it changes with spiritual development, and
the manner in which it reveals the character. |
|
First edition 1950 |
A |
———————————————————————————— |
397 |
Ursula Roberts |
SPITITUAL VIRTUES IN THE AURA |
|
The lectures in this booklet
deal with the way in which people develop spiritual qualities amid the
hard experiences of daily life; Ramadahn, the spiritual guide of Ursula
Roberts, also speaks of the need for such qualities in the development
of mediumship, and also indicates some of the colours created in the
aura by soul qualities such as courage, perseverance and tolerance.
Other chapters are under the headings: Honesty, Charity, Generosity,
Simplicity, Humility, Loneliness, Meekness and Purity.
Ramadahn through the mediumship of Ursula Roberts |
|
First edition No date |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
398 |
Ursula Roberts |
LOOK AT THE AURA – AND LEARN |
|
This small booklet is designed
to explain many things to those who wish to understand a little more
about themselves and the wonderful world in which they live, for as this
New Age unfolds many truths relating to the soul are becoming
increasingly important and the “open vision” which relates to aura sight
may become as natural a faculty to people as the ordinary seeing of
common objects in the every-day world. It is to meet the needs of those
who can “see” that this explanatory “Look and Learn” has been written
especially for the benefit of new and youthful enquirers into this
fascinating subject.
(396 - 398 sent together for postage D) |
|
First edition 1975 |
A |
———————————————————————————— |
399 |
Arthur Findlay |
THE CURSE OF IGNORANCE – VOLUME 1 |
|
From the time Arthur Findlay
commenced to write the first chapter of this book to the passing of the
final proof of the last page of the Second Volume, seven years elapsed,
during which time he devoted six hours a day, every day of the week, to
its production. No trouble was spared to make this history accurate,
interesting and perfect in every possible way. It was indeed a labour
of love, and the time and cost involved was for one reason only, to help
advance knowledge, to increase wisdom and to improve conduct everywhere
throughout the world. The troubles which have beset mankind, in the
past and present, have mostly come from ignorance of how best to live so
as to create the prosperity and happiness all desire. The past follies
and achievements of the race will be found recorded in the pages of
this book, and if these are remembered, they will act as a guide and
signpost to present and future generations showing the right of way to
think and live. Therein lies the value of history as recorded from this
wider angle of thought, and, if everyone, everywhere, would learn the
lesson these pages have to teach, war, suffering, poverty and human
misery would cease. This volume starts from the time of primitive man
to the Reformation. Covering the oldest civilisations, Hebrew, Greek,
Roman, Moslem, Chinese and Christian. |
|
First edition 1947 |
R |
———————————————————————————— |
400 |
Arthur Findlay |
THE CURSE OF IGNORANCE – VOLUME 2 |
|
Only after the two volumes have
been read and pondered over, will the reader realise the revolution in
thought this work may someday bring about, it is certainly history
written with a purpose. History, in some respects, has not been
accurately recorded because of prejudice and ignorance. Religion was
the cause of half the events of history, and, because the origin of the
numerous world religions was not known, historians have misrepresented
or ignored events they were unable to understand. Religious prejudice
has, moreover, falsified history and represented the Christian era in a
much too favourable light. Here in this book, history is presented from
a new and wider aspect, and this more modern approach clarifies the
many difficulties with which historians have been faced in the past.
Its insistence on increased knowledge, greater wisdom and a higher
ethical standard of conduct follow from the obvious neglect of these
assets in the past, the consequences being clearly revealed by history.
This volume continues covering Christian and Democratic Civilisations
from the Reformation to the end of the Second World War. |
|
First edition 1947 |
R |
———————————————————————————— |
401 |
Pauline Robinson |
MORE OF ONE DAY AT A TIME AND THE FOUR SEASONS |
|
“There is not much I can say
about this book apart from it is the continuation of the first book, One
Day at a Time, 1984 – 1985. I have continued to write down my life’s
experiences with each season and as I have continued to progress. I
wish to reach the people with the experiences I have found to be true,
so this has proved to go a little deeper, and hopefully it will be of
help to others.” |
|
First edition No Date |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
402 |
Cyril Permutt |
BEYOND THE SPECTRUMA |
|
A survey of supernormal
photography. Do the dead appear to the living ? Is it possible to move
objects merely by the power of thought ? Can thought waves produce
images on photographic film ? Cyril Permutt believes he has collected a
wealth of photographic evidence which supports the existence of these
phenomena and many more besides. Ever since the invention of
photography it has proved to be a valuable tool in the search for the
subnormal and, despite the efforts of frauds, swindlers and
over-sceptical scientists, a large number of genuine cases have been
recorded which are impossible to explain except as real instances of the
supernormal at work. Here Mr Permutt presents his evidence and leaves
the reader to decide for himself. |
|
First edition 1983 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
403 |
Mavis Pittilla |
MAVIS – WITH SPIRIT |
|
Mavis Pittilla is a Senior
Tutor at the College For Psychic Research in Stansted, Essex. The first
nine chapters of the book concern her early life as an ordinary girl
who grew up to work in a factory, as did many others of her generation
in the north-west of England, where cotton and allied trade provided
employment at that time. She was adult when she became interested in
Spiritualism, beginning on a day when she was told to seek spiritual
healing during a serious illness. She tells of her growing desire to
communicate with the Spirit World, and the realisation of her ability to
do so. This had not previously even occurred to her. Eventually she
became a medium, and now travels the world advocating Spiritualist
philosophy, and being a link between this world and the next. |
|
First edition 1997 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
404 |
Ursula Roberts |
LETTERS BETWEEN HEALERS |
|
Ursula Roberts is a writer and
medium healer who has earned a reputation for her services in Great
Britain, Australia and other countries. Her first works which were in
the form of slender pamphlets known as “Hints”, have been widely
circulated. Hints on Spiritual Unfoldment is regarded almost as a
text-book for those with spiritual aspirations. But Hints for healers
was the booklet which caused a number of people to write to her about
their problems. The replies to many of the queries from ordinary people
unaquanted with mediumship, manifesting as healership, are to be found
in this book. The whole range of spiritual healing with its problems,
limitations and sometimes “miraculous” results, is revealed in these
fascinating letters between healers. Some of them are born with the
gift of healing, others have the gift thrust upon them. |
|
First edition 1976 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
405 |
Betty Shine |
A MIND OF YOUR OWN |
|
A Mind of Your Own is a
sourcebook for the millennium. Although the world changes around us,
human beings never change, we experience the same thoughts, emotions and
problems generation after generation. In this book Betty Shine uses
over 200 carefully selected keywords to identify the most common
anxieties which face people today, and then, drawing on her 20 years’
experience of working as a medium and healer, she demonstrates how to
overcome them. Now you can harness the potential of your own mind to
improve your life and the lives of those around you. |
|
First edition 1998 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
406 |
Bishop James A. Pike |
THE OTHER SIDE |
|
Bishop James A. Pike’s
startling personal confrontation with the question of human immortality
began with the tragic suicide of his son Jim. A few days later
unexplained physical phenomena started to occur in the Bishop’s
apartment. After sixty separate incidents, Bishop Pike turned to other
clergymen, to internationally-known scientists, and finally, to Mrs Ena
Twigg, the well-known British psychic medium, who established contact
with his dead son. The full, startling, immensely moving chronicle of
father and son, on life and beyond is here revealed by the Bishop for
the first time. The impact of The Other Side is tremendous. For in it,
a clergyman of world-wide reputation, long known as a sceptic, calmly
and humbly offers tangible, documented evidence of life beyond the
grave. |
|
First edition 1969 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
407 |
Neville Armstrong |
HARVEST OF LIGHT |
|
The impact that LIGHT, the
quarterly Journal which has been published by The College of Psychic
Studies since 1881, has made on our psychic and spiritual knowledge over
ninety years has been of incredible importance. During that period
some of the greatest thinkers and investigators into the paranormal have
been contributors to the journal. This book is a collection of some of
the most outstanding contributions of the last fifteen years and is an
attempt to illustrate the impact of paranormal events and paranormal
thinking upon a wide variety of people.
Edited by Neville Armstrong |
|
First edition 1976 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
408 |
Harold Sharp |
ANIMALS IN THE SPIRIT WORLD |
|
Harold Sharp was one of
Spiritualism’s most widely respected mediums, held in affection by many.
A gentle soul, Harold both loved animals and had great admiration for
them as is apparent in this charming book. Harold takes the reader on a
visit to two worlds, this one and the next. He tells some astonishing
stories, such as how a much loved pet monkey materialised at a séance.
In gentle style he describes how other pet lovers have been reunited
with animals such as horses and pet birds. More than that, he gives
some enchanting descriptions of the spirit world and explains how
animals, both wild and domestic exist there. |
|
First edition 1966 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
409 |
Grace Cooke |
MEDITATION |
|
Our individual lives can only
be completed by their becoming at one with something far greater and
more beautiful than our own limited being. Saints and mystics of all
ages have through the practice of meditation sought this cosmic
consciousness or union with the divine life by which their lives have
become enriched with understanding, inner strength, and great power of
accomplishment. Grace Cooke had some thirty years experience of
teaching the art of meditation, and witnessed the effect upon the lives
of those who by this means were able to draw closer to the source of
their being. The book is the result of these years of experience, and
sets forth simply in a clear and straightforward style a safe method of
meditation and spiritual unfoldment which can be practised alone or in
groups. Grace Cooke’s own guide throughout has been the teacher known
to thousands as White Eagle. Much of his beautiful and practical
philosophy is incorporated in this book. |
|
First edition 1955 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
410 |
Dee May |
A NECKLACE OF ORANGE SEEDS |
|
Warengaro, a young black girl,
is captured in a raid by the warrior N’doko. She is no ordinary child:
she belongs to the Teutho tribe, well known for their supernatural
powers. Liloko the witch-doctor, realizing this, decides she must be
destroyed. Before this can happen Warengaro leaves her body and is
reborn as the white daughter, Keely, of an English couple Caroline and
Geoffrey Benton. What happens as a result, is only the beginning of a
nightmare.
“I started reading and got hooked and didn’t leave it down till I
finished the last word. It’s very rivetting stuff.” – Frances Molloy.
|
|
First edition 1991 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
411 |
Dee May |
FIVE KISSES FOR A PENNY |
|
This is the true story of
crisis apparitions experienced by Dee May who, after forty-seven years,
was able to trace and comfort a dying man. He needed her understanding
and peace, and this is what she was able to give. Jimmy wanted Dee the
first moment he saw her and called her Echo, but she belonged to Phil
who had known her since childhood. Neither man knew they had fought for
this woman through many incarnations; and the triangle would be
endlessly repeated, unless they remembered the plans they had made in
the bards. |
|
First edition 1994 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
412 |
Rev C. Drayton Thomas |
BEYOND LIFE’S SUNSET |
|
“Is there a New World beyond
the sunset of old age and death, a land where our loved ones await our
coming ? There is. I have spoken with many who reside there and who
return to tell, through such psychic channels as permit, the story of
their passing and the nature of their present surroundings. This book
records the experience of friends who came to my sittings to greet me
and tell me of things seen and done since their passing.” |
|
First edition No Date: Probably 1930’s |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
413 |
David Kennedy |
A VENTURE IN IMMORTALITY |
|
David Kennedy’s book is unusual
because of the author’s background and position: he is a narrator of
events and facts and would find it difficult to write about matters
which are not tangible, logical, reasonable or objective. He was for
many years a successful consulting engineer, engaged in presenting
mathematically accurate statements of fact. After fifteen years he
changed his profession and was drawn into the Ministry of the Church of
Scotland. It was because of his scientific background, his deep
sincerity and outstanding gift of oratory and logic that he soon became
one of Scotlands most widely known ministers. Then tragedy struck. His
wife Ann died. After her death he showed to friends and associates in
the academic world a record he had written down about the experiences
which took place almost immediately following her passing, indicating
that she was indeed alive. This book is the result of David’s endeavour
to present his material and evidence. |
|
First edition 1973 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
414 |
E.J. Cotton |
THEY NEED NO CANDLE |
|
Mr Cotton is a Lay Reader in
the Church of England. He is a lecturer and takes study groups at
Summer Schools on Spiritual Healing. A member of a number of Societies
concerned with healing and psychical phenomena, he has himself, he would
say, been used in some remarkable cases where help has been given in
his Sanctuary in Cheshire. John Cotton combines this ministry with the
eye of one able to see in another dimension places and people not
commonly seen, including the “little people”; a rare privilege. His
accounts of the indescribable beauty of the scene at his son’s wedding
is one which will stay long in the reader’s mind. Combined with all
this is his extraordinary “control” by the fifteenth century artist,
Perugino, while in trance and the resultant paintings have gone to many
parts of the world. Small wonder that he finds himself compelled by the
desire of many to write of his experiences. |
|
First edition 1971 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
415 |
Colin Wilson |
AFTERLIFE |
|
A subject of interest to all –
is there life after death ? Colin Wilson assesses the evidence, from
the voices-in-the-head experience of psychiatric patients to the world
of the clairvoyant, from books on the subject to psychical research.
Above all, he includes the striking case-histories of people who claim
to have “died” and balances them againt Bertrand Russell’s conviction
that there is no logical ground for a belief in an afterlife. Is the
“near-death” experience a defence mechanism of the brain or have people
actually been on the threshold of another world? When Colin Wilson
began researching this fascinating work he admits he was far from sure
of the conclusive evidence for life after death. By the end of writing
the book, as he explains in his Postscript, he was less certain. In
fact, as he says, the evidence “points unmistakably to survival.” |
|
First edition 1985 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
416 |
Lorna St Aubyn |
HEALING |
|
In this book, practising
healers describe what healing is, and how it can complement and assist
other forms of treatment. The book includes a survey of the many types
of healing therapy now available, a section on self-healing and how to
go about finding a healer or even becoming one. Anyone who is
interested in health, practitioners or any form of therapy, their
patients, and the general reader who wishes to become more fully aware
of himself or herself as a whole person, will find this book fascinating
reading and will benefit from the insights it provides.
Edited by Lorna St Aubyn |
|
First edition 1983 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
417 |
Bill Cox |
FROM EARTH TO ETERNITY |
|
Bill Cox attended a school for
blind children, which was evacuated during the last war to
Buckinghamshire. By the time he was well into his teens, and during
this time he and several of the blind fellows would go down into the
cellars and hold seances at which the most extraordinary events would
happen, not least the sound of strange voices with tales to tell of the
“unknown”. Eventually, Bill found a way of developing his psychic gift
in a reliable circle, and in due course, whilst “sitting” with his wife
and guide dog, Merlin, Brother Joseph spoke through him. Brother
Joseph’s communications will surely encourage readers to take a serious
look at the way Man behaves during his life on Mother Earth, thus
leading to the adoption of a lifestyle which will create peace and
plenty for all. The production of this book has truly been a family
affair.
Brother Joseph through the mediumship of Bill Cox |
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
418 |
Mrs Joy Snell |
THE MINISTRY OF ANGELS |
|
This little book records what a
woman has learned of the Ministry of Angels on earth, and of life in
other spheres of existence beyond this world. It has been written
because angels have told her that rare psychic powers have been bestowed
on her, and she has been permitted to see what is hidden from the vast
majority of mankind until after death, that she might tell others
something of what has been revealed to her. It is now sent forth in the
earnest hope that it may be the means of bringing comfort to some of
the millions in many lands who mourn their dead. |
|
First edition 1918 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
419 |
Albert H Hillyard |
THE ZODIAC MESSAGES |
|
In this volume of 395 pages of
actual text some 69 of Zodiacs most outstanding Addresses on important
subjects have been annotated and indexed for easy reading and study.
They cover a vast field of knowledge concerning man’s history from the
time of his creation in the image of God; the long journey of
experience, of involution and evolution, through many worlds and many
conditions, and of God’s Plan of Redemption in Christ.
“These messages, so vast in their portrayal of Divine Truth, so
revealing of the loving purpose of God for all His Creation, would if
their spiritual significance were fully grasped, transform the world.”
They are given in simple language that can be understood by the
ordinary mind.
arranged by Albert H Hillyard
|
|
First edition 1965 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
420 |
Mary Bruce Wallace |
THE THINNING OF THE VEIL |
|
A record of Psychic Experience.
Mary Bruce Wallace was the sister of Wellesley Tudor Pole, author of
The Silent Road, Writing on the Ground and other books. She possessed
many of his remarkable psychic gifts. She was both clairaudient and
clairvoyant. Many of the teachings in this book, which are timeless,
come from a high Spirit Teacher, plus some rather unusual visions. The
Thinning of the Veil is an inspired book whose message will live for
ever. It sets out to teach us a “practical” spirituality and the ideal
of brotherhood between people and nations. And a greater understanding
of the next world. The glory of man is that he has the birthright of
freedom. He may follow the light, or turn from it. It is his choise
whether he makes good or bad karma. Read and study this book in the
silence of your most private room. Raise your thought, your aspirations
and your powers of love, and let the Teacher guide your steps. |
|
First edition 1919 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
421 |
Parrallel Publications |
LIFE AFTER DEATH |
|
The mystery of what happens
when we die is one of the most baffling of all. This beautifully
illustrated book sets out the various theories and takes a cold, hard
look at the evidence. There is more of this than you might think. As
well as the pronouncements of Victorian spirit mediums and the dictats
of those who claim to have a direct link to God, there is the simple but
affecting testimony of those who have teetered on the brink of death
but have been brought back to life by modern resuscitation techniques,
and the intriguing claims of those people who appear to relive a string
of past lives under hypnotic regression. Finally, there are the strange
tales of those who would fervently wish that there was no life after
death - the zombie slaves of the West Indies - and those who by one
means or another, have reached out from beyond the tomb to achieve the
justice they never received in this life.
Parrallel Publications |
|
First edition 1995 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
422 |
S Webb & Son |
THE WORLD OF THE UNEXPLAINED |
|
Enigmas of mind, space and
time. People who can deliver a powerful electric shock with their
touch, portraits that appeared mysteriously on the floor of a Spanish
kitchen and the "paranormal" feats of Madame Blavatsky are just some of
the weird and remarkable mysteries explored in this book. Each case is
probed in an attempt to discover the truth behind the evidence and to
allow you to make up your own mind. Whether you are convinced or a
sceptic this book promises to offer a unique insight into our
extraordinary world.
S Webb & Son |
|
First edition 1997 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
423 |
S Webb |
THE PARANORMAL FILES |
|
Ghosts, UFO's, Aliens, Life
after Death. Have you ever seen a ghost? Have you ever met an alien?
What happens to us when we die? Do you know where UFO's come from?
These are some of the questions which are examined in The Paranormal
Files. By clearly laying out the evidence from those who witnessed or
experienced strange happenings and combining their stories with
hard-edged examinations of the facts, you, the reader, are asked to
decipher delusion from reality.
S Webb & Son
|
|
First edition 1997 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
424 |
David V Tansley, D.C. |
RADIONICS AND THE SUBTLE ANATOMY OF MAN |
|
Radionics is defined as a
method of diagnosis and therapy which is primarily concerned with the
utilization of subtle force fields and energies, for the purpose of
investigating and combating the causes of disease which ravage humanity
and the other kingdoms of nature. But in examining the history and
development of radionics from the pioneering work of Dr Albert Abrams
and Ruth Drown to the latest experimental work at the de la Warr
Laboratories, David Tansley discovered a curious paradox. In literature
on the subject, and in the rate books which provide the very core of
radionic therapeutic measures, there are plenty of references to man's
physical organic systems, but little regarding the probability of
underlying force fields which might govern and determine the health of
the physical form. This book represents an informal endeavour to
redress the balance by providing a simple yet practical outline of the
subtle anatomy of man. David Tansley believes that the time is ripe for
radionics to bear witness to an energy field of a more subtle nature. |
|
First edition 1972 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
425 |
Anthony Borgia |
A.B.C. OF LIFE |
|
The present volume forms the
third in a trilogy of communications from the spirit world, of which the
first and second are Beyond This Life and The World Unseen. A.B.C. of
Life arises directly out of the previous two books and it is
communicated by the same author. He and his companions have carried out
something in the nature of "mass observation" upon the reactions of his
readers and he has noted various queries that have come into their
minds. This book brings forth answers to those queries. |
|
First edition 1945 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
426 |
Michael Michael |
THE DOOR MARKED SUMMER/DOORS OF THE MIND |
|
To most people Michael Bentine
is a comedian, veteran Goon, scriptwriter and worldwide TV and radio
personality. But ever since childhood, when his father embarked on
research into the paranormal, he has been deeply involved with psychical
phenomena.
"I am of the earth, earthy, and I am certainly no saint, yet I can
experience the ecstasy of consciousness on a higher plane than that of
earth. So can you!" writes Michael Bentine. "I believe that we have
the ability, consciously, to soar beyond the confines of the body, over
the horizon and out into all time and space."
Now "both" of Michael Bentine's extraordinary exploratons of the
paranormal are available in one volume - a story that will hold you like
a magicians spell, a profoundly compassionate, positive and optimistic
philosophy.
|
|
First edition 1981/1984 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
427 |
Michael Bentine |
THE RELUCTANT JESTER |
|
Grandson of a vice-president of
Peru, Old Etonian,RAF Intelligence officer, founder member of The Goon
Show, creator of "Its a Square World", "The Bumblies" and "Potty Time",
investigator of the paranormal, explorer, author and much-loved
comedian, Michael Bentine describes in this deeply felt autobiography
the many joys, absurdities and tragedies of a life of rich and vivid
contrasts. An astonishing array of characters play their part in the
book: the larger-than-life Peruvian relatives, the "bleddy" Poles in the
wartime RAF who fought with supreme courage, the genuine psychics who
again and again prove the validity of their extraordinary gifts and of
course the colourful showbiz performers, not to mention the three other
Goons. In this funny, sad and absorbing account of a remarkable life
two themes predominate: the development of "my odd ability to make
people laugh" and the love of family. |
|
First edition 1992 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
428 |
White Eagle |
SPIRITUAL UNFOLDMENT - 1 |
|
This book shows how to discover
the Invisible Worlds and find the source of healing. Sound and
practical explanations of spiritual and psychic gifts and how to develop
them. The subjects covered include the nature of communication between
the two worlds, spiritual law and healing. |
|
First edition 1942 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
429 |
White Eagle |
SPIRITUAL UNFOLDMENT - 2 |
|
In this book White Eagle,
speaking through Grace Cooke, takes us into the inner world and reveals
the hidden life within the nature kingdom. He describes in fascinating
detail the fairies and elemental beings who, under the command of the
angels, help to make the world beautiful and productive for human kind
by their work with all growing things. He speaks of the angels and
their work with man, from those whose glory and purpose is almost beyond
our infinite comprehension right down to the least, not far removed
from the fairies themselves. This is one of White Eagle's most valuable
books, for knowledge of and co-operation with this inner world of
nature can bring the greatest happiness to man. |
|
First edition 1969 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
430 |
White Eagle |
WISDOM FROM WHITE EAGLE |
|
Wisdom from White Eagle has
been compiled from talks given through the instrumentality of Grace
Cooke to a group of students, with practical advice on spiritual
matters, meditation and life in the world today. White Eagle speaks
simply but with a gentle authority which commands attention and belief.
He draws aside the veil to reveal a world of infinite beauty beyond our
material conception. |
|
First edition 1967 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
431 |
White Eagle |
WALKING WITH THE ANGELS |
|
Many books exist on the subject
of angels, but few give so broad and poetic a guide as this as to how
we can actually work with them. White Eagle's teaching gives us
insights into the whole angelic kingdom: from the guardian angels who
trigger the miracles in our lives to the great beings who are masters of
the rays of creation. He also speaks of the angels of creativity, with
whom we may work, and the angels of other beings at work in the rhythms
of nature, with whom too, we may find harmony. More than this, this
book is about meditation and how our contact with the angels is also a
path of healing for ourselves. |
|
First edition No Date |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
432 |
James Van Praagh |
TALKING TO HEAVEN |
|
James van Praagh enjoys an
extraordinary gift - he can communicate with the spirits of men, women,
children and animals who have died. Possessed of the rare ability to
bridge the gap between the physical and spiritual worlds, he provides
comfort to those who have lost loved ones and brings back powerful
messages from the other side. Now, in his remarkable inspiring book,
this world-famous medium shows us what lies beyond our invisible world
and answers our most profound questions about life after death. |
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
433 |
Joan Webster Anderson |
WHERE MIRACLES HAPPEN |
|
Sequel to her best-seller Where
Angels Walk. Where Miracles Happen is another book of true stories of
heavenly encounters. It is an unforgettable collection of the
heart-warming true experiences of ordinary people whose lives have been
touched and changed by God. Sometimes these touches come in the form of
angels, seen or unseen. Sometimes they are transported through time
and space in messages from loved ones who are already in heaven. And
sometimes they come in the form of inexplicable rescues and healings,
mysterious answers to problems, marvels in nature and heavenly timing.
But always they bring with them the awesome awareness that, for each of
us, the experience of the divine is as near as a whispered prayer ... |
|
First edition 1994 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
434 |
James Redfield |
THE CELESTINE PROPHECY |
|
In the rain forests of Peru, an
ancient manuscript has been discovered. Within its pages are 9 Key
insights into life itself - insights each human being is predicted to
grasp sequentially, one insight, then another, as we move toward a
completely spiritual culture on earth. A non-fiction book ..? Maybe!
but when James Redfield first published this extraordinary book people
picked it up, read it, and were stunned by its contents. By word of
mouth alone, news of this magical, moving work spread throughout
America, until - within months of its first printing over a hundred
thousand readers had become excited by its predictions and touched by
the way it made sense of what was happening in their lives. |
|
First edition 1994 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
435 |
Raye Welch |
FOUNTAIN OF TRUTH |
|
A book of spiritual knowledge.
In this book Raye Welch wrote "If you are a dedicated seeker after
esoteric truth you will always find a teacher commensurate with your
latent abilities and understanding. This is spiritual law. Through
discipline of thought, through right motivation you are gently led by
the great Forces of Light away from your own self into an even greater
appreciation of the Whole, and to a realisation that you do indeed have
within yourself the Fountain of Truth." |
|
First edition 1975 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
436 |
Raymond A Moody, JR.,M.D. |
LIFE AFTER LIFE |
|
Actual case histories that
reveal there is life after death.
A man is dying and, as he reaches the point of greatest physical
distress, he hears himself pronounced dead by his doctor. He begins to
hear an uncomfortable noise, a loud ringing or buzzing, and at the same
time feels himself moving very rapidly through a long dark tunnel.
After this, he finds himself outside of his own physical body .... Soon,
other things begin to happen. Others come to meet and help him. He
glimpses the spirits of relatives and friends who have already died, and
a loving, warm spirit of a kind he has never encountered before - a
being of light - appears before him.
Over the past five years Dr Raymond Moody has studied more than one
hundred subjects who have experienced "clinical death" and been revived.
Their accounts of this experience are startingly similar in detail,
with descriptions so similar, so vivid, so overwhelmingly positive that
they may change mankind's view of life, death and spiritual survival
forever.
|
|
First edition 1975 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
437 |
Raymond A Moody, JR.,M.D. |
REFLECTIONS OF LIFE AFTER LIFE |
|
Further investigation of Life
after Death. Subjects who have experienced clinical death and been
revived. Since his book Life After Life Dr Moody has interviewed
hundreds more men and women who were close to death or actually
pronounced dead, all telling similar accounts.
"It seemed that for a second I knew all the secrets of the ages, all the
meaning of the universe, the stars, the moon - everything."
"He showed me all that I had done, and then he asked me if I was
satisfied with my life. He was interested in love. Love was it."
"Off in the distance I could see a city. There were buildings. They
were gleaming bright. I was told that if I went there I couldn't go
back."
|
|
First edition 1978 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
438 |
Raymond A Moody, JR.,M.D. |
THE LIGHT BEYOND |
|
Explorations into the Near
Death Experience. In the ten years since the landmark publication of
the international bestselling classic Life after Life extraordinary new
research has uncovered more patterns of near-death experiences, as well
as overwhelmingly confirming earlier descriptions of near-death
experiences. The Light Beyond examines these stunning findings and
explores more deeply than ever the incredible frontier between life and
death. |
|
First edition 1988 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
439 |
Hazel Courteney |
DIVINE INTERVENTION |
|
On the 7th April 1998, Sunday
Times health columnist Hazel Courteney underwent an experience that was
to change her life forever. From that day on an incredible drama began
to unfold that was to last for more than six months. She became
telepathic, began affecting electrical equipment such as televisions,
videos, radios and computers and started to pulse a powerful healing
energy through her eyes. Most remarkable of all however, was the
realization that she could clearly hear spirits from the higher realms,
and found herself receiving direct communication from Diana, Princess of
Wales. |
|
First edition 1999 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
440 |
Julie Gale |
SOUL TREK |
|
A channeled book with a
difference! Soul Trek looks at the evolution of all souls, not just the
human soul. Alpha, the communicant of these ideas, reveals the
panoramic grandeur of our Soul Trek with a vividness which leaves the
reader breathless. It charts the soul from the moment it leaves the
Source and makes its way through the realms of mind and energy, to its
choice of a more matter-like universe, entering the Etheric/Physical
Universe, and then descending into more solid realms, finally
personifying as an individualised physical form. As this journey is
described, much is covered: Group Souls, Twin Souls, Reincarnation,
Karma and our rather outmoded way of conceiving what we call "God".
Some of Alpha's information on pre - and past - human existences is
unfamiliar and quite wonderful. |
|
First edition 1996 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
441 |
Sir Oliver Lodge |
WHY I BELIEVE IN PERSONAL IMMORTALITY |
|
An early, illustrated book by
Sir Oliver Lodge written in 1928. In his introduction he says, -
"My whole contention rests on a basis of experience, and on
acceptance of a class of facts which can be verified at first hand by
others, I know how weighty the word "fact" is in science, and I say
without hesitation that individual personal continuance is to me a
demonstrated fact.
This book is a presentation of these facts.
|
|
First edition 1928 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
442 |
Sir Oliver Lodge |
FOR THOSE WHO ARE WILLING TO LISTEN ... READ ON |
|
This is the second book of a
trilogy written by a group of minds who now dwell in "the spirit world."
Many books are written purporting to have their origin in the mind
world, yet proof of the existence of that mind world is very difficult
to obtain. Proof of identity must be obtained by the transmission of
personal idiosyncrasies which must not be known by anyone living. Since
Oliver Lodge only died in 1940, many people still living claim to have
known him. This is why he plays the principle role in this and the
previous book. It is interesting to know that all the members of the
spiritual group took a great interest in hypnosis during their stay in
earthly life and that apart from being a mathematician, the medium
Raymond Smith has used hypnosis as a tool of healing since the time when
he was eighteen years old. Even in the book Human personality and its
survival of bodily death, written by Frederick Myers, a close friend of
Oliver, the longest chapter is entitled "hypnosis".
Transcribed by Raymond Smith from Sir Oliver Lodge |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
443 |
B.W. Jones |
EVERYTHING I HOLD SACRED |
|
The biography of the Rev.
Marion Butler. This book is not to be missed, for it tells of one
woman's fight against physical illness, deprivation, humiliation and
prejudice. Armed only with her unshakeable Christian faith, it tells of
her fight, triumph and eventual recognition of the great gifts bestowed
upon her - those of healing, clairaudience and clairvoyance. Marion
Butler's life experiences with Concentration Camps, Cancer, Healing and
Mediumship are all true remarkable stories in themselves. Her
distinguished career is vast, with over forty years' experience in
Spiritual Healing and counselling, which has lead her to lecture in many
parts of the world. Although she is a Past President of the World
Federation of Healing, and founder of the Temple of Light Church in
Ystradgynlais, South Wales, she has claimed nothing for herself, fully
recognising that she is simply a channel for Spirit or God, through
which love and compassion flow in abundance. Always an ardent and
fearless campaigner for that which is right and true, she makes a very
strong plea for Spiritual Healing and Medical Science to combine for the
benefit of mankind. |
|
First edition 1994 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
444 |
Chloris Morgan |
THE TWO WORLDS OF WILLIAM REDMOND |
|
The Trail-Blazing Medium. One
of this century's greatest mediums, William Redmond was able to fill the
Royal Albert Hall many times with up to five and a half thousand people
who were able to witness his amazingly accurate psychic gifts. For
thirty five years he was senior medium at the Spiritualists Association
of Great Britain. This book is both a biography and a record of
survival evidence that he has brought to audiences home and abroad. |
|
First edition 1985 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
445 |
Chloris Morgan |
MY NINE LIVES |
|
A procession towards the One
Life. Born in 1916, Chloris Morgan has played many roles, including
riding instructress, poet, dental nurse, member of the WAAF, fashion and
handicraft designer, women's editor, consultant and P.R.O to Norman
Hartnell, editor for the British Wheel of Yoga, and wife and mother.
The chapters of her life have been interspersed with much psychic
experience. As a member of the Atlantean Society and a close-knit Rosae
Crucian group, she studied comparative religion and many philosophies.
For the last quarter century she has lived in her beloved North Wales,
and now devotes time to writing on Spiritualist philosophy and the
paranormal. In 1987 she won the Two Worlds Centenary Award for Services
to Spiritualist literature. |
|
First edition 1990 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
446 |
Margery Eyre |
THE WAY OF COMPANIONSHIP |
|
Many have discovered from
Margery Eyre's earlier books how similar her spiritual difficulties,
problems and lessons are to their own, and have gained much help and
comfort from the instructions she received on how best to deal with
them. The inward voice, to which she learned through clairaudience to
attune herself, proved to be both loving and stern, and it showed a
patience and insight which she found both strenthening and encouraging.
The lessons in the present volume, given between 1936-1951, took her
into deeper waters still. She was called upon to make certain
sacrifices and as a result she reached a much closer companionship with
one she came to look upon as her twin soul. There is much in these
pages concerning the spiritual aspects of human love. |
|
First edition 1978 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
447 |
John Symonds |
IN THE ASTRAL LIGHT |
|
Madame Blavatsky probably
attracted more attention, abuse, and acclaim than any other woman in the
latter half of the 19th century. The founder of modern occultism,
Madame Blavatsky first achieved notoriety in America where she suddenly
appeard as a champion of spiritism and a medium of unusual power. Soon
fantastic stories of her powers spread throughout the world: how, in
India, she had "materialised" objects out of the atmosphere by the sheer
strength of her will. During her seances strange spirits and forms
were seen to appear and dissolve, not to mention weird lights and
sometimes music or astral bells ...
Was she a charlatan? According to some, she was "one of the most
accomplished, ingenious and interesting imposters of history." Today
controversy still rages. In this authorative biography John Symonds
throws new light on an astonishing, eccentric, and altogether
fascinating woman.
First edition as Madame Blavatsky:Medium and Magician:
|
|
First edition 1959 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
448 |
Michael Evans |
BILLY GROWS UP IN SPIRIT |
|
A cockney lad returns after
death to tell his story. The loss of a child or children is one of the
greatest sorrows we can suffer. A thousand things remind us of the
lively loved one who is no longer there with us. Where are they? Are
they dead and gone forever? Do they live on in another world? Are they
happy? Will we ever see them again? This book answers these questions
and should be read by all who have lost a child. Billy, a cockney boy,
made an unexpected return after death to a group of mediums who had
first come together to help the spirits of servicemen who were dying in
the Gulf War. When the war ended the group continued to meet and record
their proceedings as a service to any spirits in need of counselling.
Billy returned to speak to the group forteen times over the years and
gave regular updates on his progress as he grew up in the spirit world.
Edited by Michael Evans |
|
First edition 1997 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
449 |
Gladys Osborne Leonard |
MY LIFE IN TWO WORLDS |
|
Gladys Osborne Leonard was one
of the most respected mental and physical mediums of her time. Sir
Oliver Lodge in his opening words in the forward to this book wrote,
"This seems to me to be a useful and much needed book full of
information not easily accessible. It represents fairly and truly the
feelings and interpretations of a sensitive's experiences, and contains
material for psychological study." This book is indeed a fascinating
account of her life and teachings as a medium, given by her, in the hope
of setting the reader on a path of enlightenment. |
|
First edition 1931 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
450 |
Patricia Joudry |
TWIN SOULS |
|
Twin soulship is your destiny!
If you feel abandoned, or if you are pining in loneliness, you will
find this heartening book uniquely comforting and exciting. For each of
us there is a complentary "other". This sublime idea of twin souls,
joyfully united or painfully separated, has permeated mythology and
literature down the ages. But where do you begin the quest for your
spiritual partner and how do you recognize your twin? This
inspirational book brings you the guidance you need.
Patricia Joudry and Maurie D Pressman MD |
|
First edition 1993 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
451 |
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle |
THE EDGE OF THE UNKNOWN |
|
How was it possible for
Houdini, the worlds greatest magician to escape from a locked water tank
with the locks remaining untampered. His friend Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
thought the answer might lie in Spiritualism. And in this book he
presents astounding evidence that his theory was correct! Houdini's
"supernatural" powers comprised only one area on which the noted master
of detective fiction (author of the Sherlock Holmes novels) focused his
critical attention. Here, he describes in thrilling detail all he
uncovered in several decades of psychic investigation. Because he was
convinced for many years that "psychic" occurances could be explained by
natural laws Conan Doyle was a tough not-to-be-fooled sceptic. The
reader will find, then, his testimony especially persuasive,
encompassing mediums whose bodies produce ectoplasm; weird prophetic
dreams; seances with the "ghosts" of Lenin, Oscar Wilde, Dickens and
other famous people. But the most amazing and conclusive evidence here
is Sir Arthur's personal experience with the psychic phenomena he had so
long challenged. The fact that he did see and hear ghostly
manifestatons, on several occasions is the best recommendation for
anyone who has any doubts to read this important book. |
|
First edition U.S Edition: 1992 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
452 |
Florizel von Reuter |
THE MASTER FROM AFAR |
|
The author has written a novel
which goes behind the scenes of the life of Jesus, highlighting his
career as a man rather than as a divine being. He bases his sources on
historical evidence and legendary accounts, as well as on various
practically unknown details transmitted by his own psychic gift. He was
later able to verify the details by careful research. The author has
woven a fascinating narrative, told in modern language, of the events
leading to the arrest, trial and crucifixion of Jesus. |
|
First edition 1973 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
453 |
Paul Miller |
THE INVISIBLE PRESENCE |
|
This, the ninth book written by
the author on a variety of psychic themes, records the conclusions he
has reached after spending nearly half a century on his spiritual quest.
His professional life in Britain was spent in journalism, mostly in
Fleet Street, where he attained editorial status on national newspapers.
Some of his psychic experiences are remarkable. The evidence for
individual survival after death they demonstrate is difficult to refute.
But what are the implications? "Since the claim is made that upon
evidence submitted here we as personalities do survive bodily death,
then we must examine the nature and quality of the communication. We
have to ask what is borne to us by psychic communication between the two
worlds. And we have to ask many other questions." He does ask them -
and supplies the stimulating answers which will appeal to thinkers who
are concerned with life's deepest problems and issues. |
|
First edition 1976 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
454 |
Hannen Swaffer |
INTO THE UNKNOWN |
|
A report of an investigation
into Psychis Force by a panel of independent, distinguished experts,
including a famous Harley Street Surgeon, the Canon of St Paul's
Cathedral and a methodist preacher who was also Hon Chaplain to the
Forces. This book is a record of a quest. It is the documentary
account of an unusual investigation into the mysterious world of the
Unseen and the Unknown by a Panel of Inquiry, beginning in 1949 and
concluding in 1950. It is the story of how a group of one woman and
seven men set out to probe if not solve the riddle of that portentous,
eerie yet potentially mighty world which lies beyond the confines of the
human intellect.
A Panel of Independent Experts postscript by Hannen Swaffer |
|
First edition 1950 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
455 |
Stase Michaels, M.A. |
THE BEDSIDE GUIDE TO DREAMS |
|
An unanalyzed dream is like an
unopened letter from a friend. Inside are messages of caution and
concern, hope and inspiration, that can have a dramatic impaction both
on your everyday life and your lifetime goals. Psychologist Stase
Michaels guides you through the inner jouney and ends in exciting
practical and spiritual insights on the road to self-discovery. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
456 |
Dale E Graff |
TRACKS IN THE WILDERNESS |
|
An exploration of ESP, Remote
Viewing, Precognitive dreaming and Synchronicity. In 1975 Dale Graff
was safely entrenched as an aerospace engineer and physicist with the
United States Air Force's Foreign Technology Division. Little did he
know that the result of one of his assessment reports on emerging
technologies would be the beginning of the highly classified Project
STARGATE - which lasted over 20 years and, perhaps more importantly,
would bring him in contact with his own new perspective of reality.
"Dale Graff is one of those pioneers who risked a career and
respectability to pursue the truth. It is wonderful that he writes his
story." - From the Foreword by Dr Edgar Mitchell - Former U.S
Astronaut. |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
457 |
Jim Schnabel |
DARK WHITE |
|
Aliens, Abductions and the UFO
obsession. Could it be that hundreds of thousands, even millions of
Americans have been abducted by aliens, scared scarred, subjected to
sexual indignities and then returned home with memories that can only be
extracted by hypnosis? However unlikely it sounds, therapists' offices
are now overflowing with stories like these, as researchers uncover
ever more evidence that extraterrestrials are actively trying to study,
harm or bring enlightenment to us all. In this engrossing account,
journalist Jim Schnabel explores everything from the greatest airship
invasion of the 1980's to todays bizarre kidnappings, involving Harvard
professors, deranged CIA operatives, ferociously quarrelsome
"ufologists", the Prince of Liechtenstein and former UN Secretary
General Perez de Cuellar..etc. |
|
First edition 1994 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
458 |
Andrija Puharich |
URI |
|
"This is the original and
authorised biography of one of the most remarkable young men of our
times - Uri Geller, the Israeli psychic whose strange powers have so far
baffled scientists in many countries. It has been written by Geller's
friend and associate Dr Andrija Puharich, and it examines the sources of
Uri's powers - basically, an extra-terrestrial intelligence called
Hoova, which they believed contacted them through a voice called
Spectra. Here is an aspect of Geller's life hitherto unknown to the
millions of people who have witnessed Geller's astonishing
demonstrations of his E.S.P., clairvoyance and psycho kintic gifts. It
may prove to be one of the most important books on paranormal phenomena
ever published." |
|
First edition 1974 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
459 |
Roger Boar |
THE WORLDS GREATEST "GHOSTS" |
|
In this illustrated book is a
spine-chilling collection of people's true experiences of ghosts and the
supernatural, written in a no-nonsence and unfancied manner. Included
are some chapters about the well-known and celebrated ghosts of stately
homes, the terrifying antics of poltergeists, ancient curses and modern
and medievil witchcraft.
Roger Boar and Nigel Blundell |
|
First edition 1983 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
460 |
Colin Bloy |
I'M JUST GOING DOWN TO THE PUB TO DO A FEW MIRACLE |
|
"I propose to share the
rational way to spiritual healing with all those who, like me, never had
a gift, never had a visitation or revelation, nor a blinding light, all
of which is relevant and which I envy. There is a way, if you have the
desire to become a spiritual healer, which is perfectly logical,
perfectly rational and requires no mystical initiation. There are
exercises, disciplines, techniques which are within the range of the
western ethos - because it is empirical, a proven scientific method,
which requires no previously held precepts, simply the idea of "let us
have a look", and a series of experiments which I believe permit us, if
we so desire, to enter the world of spiritual science, without having to
freak out, without having to make pleas of external illumination or
control by discarnate entities - all of which are valid, but are not
always available to the man in the street who simply wants to be a
healer, and YOU can go down to the pub and do a few miracles. Most
important, it tries to show how pure love may be practised as a
discipline which is critical to spiritual healing." |
|
First edition 1990 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
461 |
Liz Hodgkinson |
SPIRITUAL HEALING - EVERYTHING YOU WANT TO KNOW |
|
Spiritual Healing is currently
enjoying the most phenomenal growth, and since 1977 it has been accepted
and recommended by the British Medical Association for use alongside
orthodox medical treatment. But what exactly is spiritual healing? What
is this mysterious ability that some people have that will enable a
patient to be healed without the intervention of drugs or surgery, often
by a person with no medical knowledge? And if it can help others, can
it help you? This fascinating and informative book shows how spiritual
healing could help you. It describes the many different kinds of
healing available and looks at the work of some remarkable healers who
practise today. It tells you what to expect when you consult a healer
and also advises you on how to approach the healing process. |
|
First edition 1990 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
462 |
Roberta Wright |
SPIRITUALISM FOR TEENAGERS |
|
"Many times I have met people,
fairly new to Spiritualism, who come to participate in, and enjoy, all
the aspects of being a spiritualist . The newcomer parents, often with
teenage children, can't just tell them about the many aspects of this
absorbing subject. In fact, very often they themselves are still
finding out more all the time. If they attempt to convey some of this
to their "nearing adult" offspring who are coping with a dawning
awareness of the very material world around them, the small attemps of
the parents to explain are often received with indulgent scorn and are
invariably regarded by their teenager as "loving" but a little
"gullible." This book is for teenagers. It is hoped that it will help
them and their parents to find out, in simple everyday language what it
is all about. "Here then, teenager, is knowledge, giving serenity, love
and understanding, much needed in today's world - and a little help in
your material life too." |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
463 |
John Sutton |
PSYCHIC PETS |
|
Here are some incredible true
stories about the psychic powers of ordinary household pets. Cats and
dogs that can read minds, foresee the future, transport themselves from
one place to another by non-physical means, see ghosts and even return
as ghosts themselves. You'll be amazed, astounded and intrigued by what
you read. These are recent stories from all over the world, collected
straight from the pet owners by the author. Your pet too may have
unsuspected talents. Take the specially designed tests and find out if
you too are the owner of a psychic pet! |
|
First edition 1997 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
464 |
Frances Banks |
FRONTIERS OF REVELATION |
|
This is not a book of theology,
but of experience, a remarkable study of a subject which is, on the one
hand, regarded as of paramount importance and, on the other, with
suspicion and scepticism. It is an examination of numerous experiences
in the nebulous world between this life and the next. Over 200 people
have provided the testimony, some three-quarters of them being members
of the Churches' Fellowship for Psychic Study. "The book can be
commended with confidence," writes the Bishop of Southwark in his
Forword, "as it throws a flood of light upon the ascending scale of
human experiences from the psychic at the lowest level to the
mystical-unitative at the highest. But it also points to the urgent
need for restatement and for the development within the Church of a
specialist ministry." |
|
First edition 1962 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
465 |
Robert Way |
THE GARDEN OF THE BELOVED |
|
An affluent young man enters a
Garden where he meets a humble gardener. The young man desires to learn
the art of loving and becomes the gardener's Disciple. He undergoes a
long and difficult apprenticeship during which he comes to recognize
that all creatures, even the most apparently loathsome, work for the
glory of the Beloved.
The Garden of the Beloved is a timeless, allegory of faith, love and the
search for God, simply and exquisitely written and superbly illustrated
with delicate pen and ink drawings by Laszlo Kubinyi. It reflects the
same beauty of thought as The Prophet of Kahlil Gibran and will be a
source of inspiration to all who read it.
|
|
First edition 1975 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
466 |
Louisa Johnson |
DIARY OF A BLACKPOOL MEDIUM |
|
"I have always looked upon
spiritualism in its highest form as a science rather than as a religion
since it does not interfere with other religious beliefs and doctrines.
I look back with great admiration to those early mediums I was
fortunate enough to meet. It was Estelle Roberts who inspired me, it
was her famous Indian Guide RED CLOUD to whom we owe so much. He
directly influenced and guided our great leaders Winston Churchill and
Lord Dowding during the Second World War. The first time I came out of a
Spiritualist Church there was a mob of jeering youths pelting us with
pebbles and calling us CRANKS! It took great courage on my part to
return to the church, but I felt compelled to do so. Today it is
difficult to find a spare car parking space. Many people today are
disillusioned with the material aspect of life and are looking for
spiritual guidance and assurance in our troubled world. I have been
very privileged to have met our late S.N.U. leader, Gordon Higginson,
also Hannon Swaffer, Maurice Barbanell, Brother Mandus, Harry Edwards
and Ivor James (the psychic artist) who has recently made his transition
into spirit. These are just a few who have "laid" the cornerstone of
modern spiritualism - we owe them so much. The bible quotes "We walk
hand in hand with angels." I sometimes wonder if all these great
mediums fall into this category." |
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
467 |
Edmund Harold |
CRYSTAL HEALING |
|
A practical guide to healing
with quartz crystal. It is becoming more and more apparent that the
humble quartz crystal has extraordinary psychic properties. It can help
heal the sick and improve the energies, concentration, decisiveness,
empathetic qualities and state of balance of the healthy. This "modern"
discovery is really a re-surfacing of ancient knowledge and, while the
knowledge and use of quartz crystal power has had a continuous history
ever since its ancient origins, it is now entering a renaissance. Much
of what was lost is being slowly pieced together again. The author
addresses in particular the healing powers of crystals, through
discussions of the characteristics of different types of crystals, and
how to select and use them to achieve harmony of body and spirit. |
|
First edition 1986 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
468 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE EARTH GODS |
|
"His power came from some great
reservoir of spiritual life, else it could not have been so universal
and so potent, but the majesty and beauty of the language with which he
clothed it were all his own." - Claude Bragdon
A beautiful book of prose, complete with five illustrations on the
observations of Man by three Earth Gods.
|
|
First edition 1931 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
469 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE WANDERER |
|
This book, which is the last
one that Kahlil Gibran wrote shortly before he died in 1931, is truly
one of his finest. The parables and poems are comparable to his The
Forerunner and The Madman. Its teachings leave you with a strong sense
of newly found compassion and wisdom. The wanderer's stories are both
profound and alive in this book. |
|
First edition 1932 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
470 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE GARDEN OF THE PROPHET |
|
The Garden of the Prophet,
which Gibran intended as a companion to his masterpiece The Prophet, is a
lyrical celebration of the mystical beauty of Nature. Full of insights
on the nature of wisdom, time, loneliness and God, and expressed in
Gibran's unique style. |
|
First edition 1933 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
471 |
Kahlil Gibran |
PROSE POEMS |
|
The present translation by
Andrew Ghareeb is an attempt to bring to the English-speaking world some
of the earlier of this poet's Arabic prose poems, a form of which he
was distinctly the originator in that ancient tongue. He has created a
school of writing which has caught the vivid and sensitive imagination
of the poetic and scholarly East, and of which he is recognised as
father throughout the great Arabic-speaking race of three hundred
million people. |
|
First edition 1934 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
472 |
Kahlil Gibran |
NYMPHS OF THE VALLEY |
|
In 1906, Gibran published his
second Arabic book called Arayis Al-Murvj (The Nymphs of the Valley)," a
collection of three allegories which take place in the Northern
Lebanon. The allegories of Martha, Dust of the ages and the Eternal
Fire and Yuhanna the Mad, dealt with issues relating to prostitution,
religious persecution, reincarnation and pre-ordained love. The
allegories were heavily influenced by the stories he heard back in
Bsharriand his own fascination with the Bible, the mystical, and the
nature of love. |
|
First edition 1948 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
473 |
Kahlil Gibran |
SPIRITS REBELLIOUS |
|
Spirits Rebellious is, in a
way, a continuation and extension of Gibran's Nymphs of the Valley. The
contents of this volume, though in story form, are really sermons and
parables. They are bolder, more outspoken, more forceful than the
stories that preceded them. The four stories in this volume deal with
the social issues in Lebanon, portraying a married woman's emancipation
from her husband, a heretic's call for freedom, a bride's escape from an
unwanted marriage through death and the brutal injustices of 19th
century Lebanese feudal lords. |
|
First edition 1949 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
474 |
Kahlil Gibran |
A TEAR AND A SMILE |
|
Gibran's first collection of
poetry appeared in Arabic in 1914 and was translated into English
several years later and published as A Tear and a Smile. It contains 56
parables, stories and poems in Gibran's wholly inimitable manner.
Illustrated with 4 of his own paintings and drawings, it is the most
important edition to the canon of this great writer.
"The tears, which are much more abundant here than the smiles," observed
N. Naimy in Journal of Arabic Literature, "are those of Gibran the
misfit rather than of the rebel in Boston, singing in an exceedingly
touching way of his frustrated love and estrangement, his loneliness,
homesickness and melancholy."
|
|
First edition 1950 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
475 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE BROKEN WINGS |
|
Broken Wings tells the tale of a
love doomed by the restrictions of a cruel society. The narrative
highlights many of Gibran's concerns about the plight of Eastern women,
wealth as an impediment to happiness, the greed and corruption of the
clergy, and the overwhelming power of love. |
|
First edition 1959 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
476 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THE VOICE OF THE MASTER |
|
In the style that gave Gibran
the title of "Dante of the Twentieth Century", The Voice of the Master
speaks stirringly of the victory of faith over grief, and love over
loneliness.
"Of Marriage", "Of the Divinity of Man", "Of Reason and Knowledge", "Of
Love and Equality," ... these are some of the themes Gibran searches in
this volume, offering fresh insight into many of life's most perplexing
riddles.
|
|
First edition 1960 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
477 |
Kahlil Gibran |
A SELF PORTRAIT |
|
A portrait of Kahlil Gibran is
revealed through the letters he wrote to his family and friends from
1904 when he was aged 21 years old, to 1930, one year before his death.
His sorrows, his hopes, his aspirations and dreams flow from these
pages. |
|
First edition 1960 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
478 |
Kahlil Gibran |
THOUGHTS AND MEDITATIONS |
|
This collection of thoughts by
Kahlil Gibran demonstrates three major aspects of his genius: the fiery
prophet, assailing the corruptions of Syrian governmental and upper
social circles with the wrath and scorn of Biblical seers; the poet of
love, apostophizing beauty, youth and nature, particularly the wonderful
vistas of Lebanon in poetry of passionate tenderness; and the author of
the remarkable poetic narratives in which Gibran's mystical, spiritual
vision of the transmigration of souls is embodied in tales of lovers
tragically parted in one existence and rapturously reunited, after
centuries of separation, in a later incarnation. |
|
First edition 1961 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
479 |
Thomas Paine |
THOMAS PAINE - THE MOST VALUABLE ENGLISHMAN EVER |
|
VIDEO
He was a Sussex customs officer who played a central role in the
American and French revolutions. The son of a Norfolk corset-maker, he
wrote such immortal political tracts as The Rights of Man and Common
Sense. Thomas Paine's bold, enlightened vision of the true meaning of
democracy laid the foundations of the modern United States, whose very
name he coined.
Paine is a leading candidate, as Kenneth Griffith's passionate biopic
suggests, for the title of The Most Valuable Englishman Ever. So why
were his works banned in his native country? Why did he die alone and
forgotten in American exile? Why, as Griffiths asks, do so few Britons
today even know his name?
From Thetford to Boston, The White House to the Bastille, Griffith
retraces Paine's steps in search of answers. En route he paints a
moving portrait of one of the great figures of Western civilisation - a
profoundly humanitarian thinker ahead of his time, bloodied but unbowed
by the many battles so free a spirit must face.
"Where freedom is," said Benjamin Franklin, "there is my country."
"Where freedom is not," replied his friend Paine, "there is mine."
In an unforgettable film which many consider his masterpiece, Kenneth
Griffith explains why, ... doing justice at last to the memory of one of
Britain's finest sons.
Watch this film, and you will never again see the world in quite the
same way.
Written and Performed by Kenneth Griffiths |
|
First edition BBC 1982: Produced by John Hefin |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
480 |
Leslie Flint |
AUDIO TAPE NUMBER 72 |
|
AUDIO TAPE
Leslie Flint was one of the greatest and most tested of all physical
mediums.
This audio tape recorded in 1965 records the voices that came
through him from the spirit world. An Introductory explanation of
Direct Voice is given by Mrs Green.
Side A - Talk by Mrs Green and Direct Voice from Michael Fearon.
Side B - Direct Voice from Sid Hopkins, Bobby, Tracy and Leslie
Flints guide Micky.
|
|
First edition |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
481 |
Gordon Higginson |
ON THE SIDE OF ANGELS |
|
Gordon Higginson's birth was
ordained - by the spirit world.
Now none would dispute that he is Britain's best-known medium, one whose
gifts include not only trance and clairvoyance, but the dramatic
faculty of materialisation when the so-called dead literally appear in
the seance-room to be reunited with loved ones. President of the
Spiritualists' National Union for over 20 years, countless hundreds of
thousands across the United Kingdom have marvelled at his brilliant
clairvoyance not only in Spiritualist churches, but in halls and
theatres, including London's famous Royal Albert Hall. On the side of
Angels is not only a thrilling biography, detailing Gordon's
action-filled life, but takes an inside look at one of the greatest ever
Spiritualist mediums.
compiled by Jean Bassett
|
|
First edition 1993 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
482 |
Colin Fry |
INSPIRED OF SPIRIT |
|
Colin Fry, also known as
Lincoln, is one of the most exciting trance mediums to have emerged over
recent years. Apart from demonstating in the UK, he has also completed
a highly successful visit to Australia. Here, for the first time, are
presented teachings from Magnus, one of his spirit guides. A financial
director of a publishing company in the late Victorian era, Magnus
passed on around the turn of the century. He acts as a spokesman for a
group called "The Diamond". Inspired of Spirit highlights spirit-given
answers to a host of subjects not only including details about passing
on and the Higher Life, but many other topics, such as euthanasia,
abortion, transplants, animals, rebirth and even space travel.
compiled by Tony Ortzen |
|
First edition No Date |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
483 |
White Eagle |
HEAL THYSELF |
|
A book for everyone, sick or
well, who would find and retain true health of mind and body. The
gentle teacher White Eagle describes the consciousness of man, which has
two aspects to it: the so-called lower self, which is the everyday one,
prone to all the fears that so regularly assail us; and the higher,
which is our true and deeper consciousness. The higher self, unlike the
earthly self, knows no sickness or limitation; and through the higher
self flows the Christ healing and radiance which can conquer all ills
and resolve all difficulties. |
|
First edition 1962 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
484 |
White Eagle |
THE GENTLE BROTHER |
|
This book consists of short
extracts from White Eagle's talks to Brothers of his Lodge, specially
chosen to guide and help the aspirant in his daily life. These "Gentle
Brother" extracts have long been the most loved feature of the magazine
Stella Polaris, and many friends have asked if they could be collected
and published in a small book suitable for the pocket or as a bedtime
book. White Eagle has the art of putting his finger right on the spot,
as it were, of one's particular problem, and giving a wise, practical
and helpful answer. |
|
First edition 1968 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
485 |
Moira Adela Nicholls |
THE PEACEFUL HEART |
|
In her lifetime, the author has
experienced the normal mixed emotions of living and growing. Coming
from a secure home, she ventured forth to visit other countries. Her
travels gave her insight into people and their attitudes, some of which
disturbed her greatly. There followed a period which brought a degree
of personal devastation, which happens to all at some stage in their
life. On overcoming the initial impact, and "travelling on" in life she
was often aggresive and bitter but she reached a turning point.
Through guidance and encouragement, she began to see purpose in all that
happens, good and bad. When put together from the start, to the time
of deep thinking, a pattern emerged and she realised that all the
experiences had taught her much in understanding and compassion. From
there, she began the climb into inner development, with the bringing of
inner peace and learned all the lessons contained in this book. Through
these experiences and the eventual growing awareness of purpose, she
pursued diligently, the path of inner peace and was inspired to put
into words, the lessons she had learned and to show others the peace and
joy which can be found if we truly look for it. |
|
First edition 1985 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
486 |
Alan E Crossley |
THE STORY OF HELEN DUNCAN |
|
A dramatic account of the
tragedy and persecution of the greatest physical medium in psychic
history. In 1944 Helen Duncan was the last person to be tried and
imprisoned in Great Britain, under the old antiquated laws of the
Witchcraft Act of 1735. The uproar from this case caused this act to be
repealed in 1951. In The Story of Helen Duncan, Alan Crossley
assembles many hitherto unpublished facts about this extraordinary
materialisation medium in the sincere hope of her complete and utter
vindication. |
|
First edition 1975 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
487 |
Peter Matthews |
SPIRITUALISM AND REINCARNATION |
|
The idea of reincarnation is as
old as religion itself. Modern Christianity rejects the concept whilst
many other religions have it as a central belief. Spiritualism neither
accepts or rejects it an opinion seems evenly divided between both
schools of thought. However reincarnation is not the simple subject
that many imagine it to be. In this book the author looks at the whole
concept of reincarnation, including the arguments and evidence for and
against, as well as its associated ideas such as karma, (compensation
and retribution) and personal responsibility. The book then examines
the various forms which the process of reincarnation could take,
offering theories and concepts to explain it, answers which hopefully
will satisfy the inquiring mind. |
|
First edition 1997 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
488 |
D.L.I. Hedges |
CORNERS OF MY MIND |
|
In writing this book I fully
expect to stir up some controversy, for not everyone believes in
reincarnation. I do not ask my readers to believe simply because I
write about my experiences, only to think of the pros and cons of the
subject. In recent years there have been many documented cases of
persons remembering a previous life they have lived. A number has
occurred in India and have involved children of a very young age, even
to speaking the language of that previous life. An adult can deceive
many perhaps, but can this really be so with a child as young as three
or four years old? From the land of Atlantis, the mythological land of
gold and plenty to the horror of the Crimean war, it would seem my
life's experience has been varied. Introduction by Sally Jane Danter. |
|
First edition 1992 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
489 |
Janet Locke |
A ROSE FOR BRIDIE |
|
Jeannie Martin is a young woman
who has grown up without ever experiencing the feeling of love either
in the receiving or the giving of it, then one day after light heartedly
following a rainbow she meets Bridie a young waif from the animal
sanctuary, a puppy who needs love as much as Jeannie herself does. The
two share an idylic life until in old age death claims Bridie's soul and
Jeannie in her desperate grief wishes that death would also hold out
its cold hand to her. Falling asleep by Bridie's grave one hot summer's
day Jeannie's spirit is transported into Paradise where she is welcomed
by Saint Francis of Assisi; and to her overwhelming elation once again
meets her beloved Bridie. |
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
490 |
Denzil Fairbairn |
THE SUNSHINE OF MY LIFE |
|
The Sunshine of my Life is an
interesting work from the pen of a sincere and knowledgable
Spiritualist. The author benefited greatly by virtue of the fact that
his father was a medium whose own "doorkeeper" was a remarkable
Blackfoot Indian healer called Mahanka. Sunshine, an Inca priest whilst
traversing this earthplane, provides the first four chapters of this
book. The book begins with Sunshine explaining about Christ being the
foremost medium of his day. Next comes a journey through "the Seven
Spheres", a guided tour through the Spirit world, followed by a chapter
called "Life in Spirit" with an explanation of the spirit world and how
we travel in it through thought projection. Finally comes "The Cycle of
Life", which is full of many uplifting thoughts. After some beautiful
poems inspired from spirit through the author's father, there is a final
chapter provided by a talk from Mahanka, on the way in which spirit
healing is performed and how we all have the potential to perform this
healing. |
|
First edition 1994 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
491 |
Robert Cull |
MORE A WAY OF LIFE |
|
In his first book More to Life
than this, Bob Cull gave a dramatic account of how a group of spirit
friends persuaded his wife, Jean, to develop her natural gifts as a
medium, and how they led the Culls into the extraordinary world of
psychic phenomena. We see how she has found missing people, predicted
pregnancies, given marital advice, unravelled mysteries surrounding
haunted houses, but there is a side to Jean's mediumship the public has
never seen. It can be frightening and dangerous. In his new book, Bob
Cull describes how Jean helps the "lost souls" who wander in the darker
planes of the spirit world. We discover how Jean herself was once
almost suffocated by an evil power, how she helped the police to catch
the Black Panther, received a tragic warning from Maria Caldwell and has
brought relief to suicide victims and to men and women who died in the
Nazi concentration camps. But above all, the Culls show from personal
experience what happiness can be found as a result of communication with
spirit, and the book ends with the incredible story of how a message
from the Other World reunited Bob with the brother he never knew he had. |
|
First edition 1988 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
492 |
Mother Meera |
ANSWERS |
|
Mother Meera was born in 1960
in a village in South India. She soon showed herself to be an unusual
child; by the age of three she would report going to various lights; the
state of samadhi was constant for her. Under the auspices of her uncle
she lived for some time at the Aurobindo ashram, where her exceptional
presence attracted considerable attention. She is now based in Germany,
attracting thousands of devotees from all over the world who come to
receive darshan, her silent bestowal of grace and light. Answers
contains the essence of Mother Meera's teaching which offers a radically
direct path to the Divine, a path that uses the power of light to
transform our world by changing us, gently and protectively, from
within. |
|
First edition 1991 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
493 |
Billy Roberts |
SHADOWS OF THE FUTURE - PROPHECIES FOR THE MILLENN |
|
This book is a book of
prophecies for the New Millennium, channelled through professional
Medium and Psychic Billy Roberts. It contains his incredibly accurate,
though tragic prophecy about the death of Diana, Princess of Wales.
Starting from the year 1999 these prophecies, often startling, somtimes
frightening, take us right through the future history of the Earth until
the year 4,300 and beyond. |
|
First edition 1998 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
494 |
Cassandra Eason |
PSYCHIC POWER OF CHILDREN |
|
Children seem to live in a
world where the border between apparition and reality is in very soft
focus. On occasions they can read the parental mind and describe events
while they happen in another part of the Country! Cassandra Eason
began her research after one such incident. Jack, the third of her five
children, saw and told about his Father's motorcycle accident - while
it happened 40 miles away. This brush with Clairvoyance set her on a
fantastic journey into the world of psychic children. A world which is
clearly beyond the understanding of science. Now you too can travel
this journey. But be prepared to come face to face with telepathy,
prediction, reincarnation, near-death experience, ghosts and
poltergeists. All of them in very sharp focus! |
|
First edition 1994 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
495 |
E.L.Grant Watson |
THE MYSTERY OF PHYSICAL LIFE |
|
E.L.Grant Watson's writings on
natural history and the countryside are classics of their kind,
reflecting a deep insight into and love of nature. An outstanding field
zoologist, but also a psychologist and speculative thinker, Grant
Watson combined meticulous and beautifully written descriptions of
animal behaviour observed in the wild with reflections on fundamental
questions about the origin and nature of life. He concluded that the
observed patterns of instinct and behaviour in animals were not
consistent with accepted "physical" laws with their all-encompassing
theories, and that Creation reflected a higher and more mysterious level
of reality. |
|
First edition 1964 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
496 |
Brother Philip |
SECRET OF THE ANDES |
|
High in the Andes mountains on
the northern peruvian side of Lake Titicaca, is the Monestry of the
Brotherhood of the Seven Rays. Here, in this Shan-gri-La, lies secret
knowledge which has been hidden away for thousands of years and will
remain hidden until the children of the Earth develop a spiritual
perfection which will allow them to use it once again. Here, and in the
many other monasteries set up throughout the world by The Masters, are
stored away the Divine Truths dating back to the times when the highly
advanced civilisations of Lemuria and Atlantis inhabited the Earth. |
|
First edition 1961 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
497 |
Edgar Evans Cayce |
MYSTERIES OF ATLANTIS REVISTED |
|
The lost civilization of
Atlantis, one of the most enduring controversies of all time, has
haunted scientists and occultists, philosophers and sceptics alike for
centuries, but no conclusive evidence has ever been found. American
visionary Edgar Cayce died before he could explain his own theories, but
he referred to Atlantis hundreds of times in his remarkably accurate
"life readings". Now, armed with Cayce's psychic clues and the latest
findings from archaeology, geology, and anthropology, three scholars
have travelled the world in search of proof. From the hidden vaults
beneath the Sphinx to the coastal waters of Bimini join them on their
amazing voyage as they explore the wisdom of Edgar Cayce and discover
shocking new evidence about the destruction of Atlantis.
Edgar Evans Cayce, Gail Cayce Schwartzer and Douglas G Richards |
|
First edition 1988 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
498 |
Dr Edward Bach MB,BS,DPH |
HEAL THYSELF |
|
An explanation of the real
cause and cure of disease. Dr Bach reveals the vital principles that
are influencing some of the more advanced members of the medical
profession today and will guide medical practice in the near future. |
|
First edition 1931 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
499 |
Elisabeth Kubler-Ross |
ON DEATH AND DYING |
|
Although most ares of human
experience are nowadays discussed freely and openly, the subject of
death is still surrounded by conventional attitudes and reticense that
offer only fragile comfort because they evade the real issues. The
dying may thus be denied the opportunity of sharing their feelings and
discussing their needs with family, friends, or hospital staff.
Although receiving devoted medical care, a dying patient is often
socially isolated and avoided, since professional staff and students can
find contact painful and embarrassing. Aware of the strains imposed on
all sides by this situation, Dr Kubler-Ross established a seminar at
the University of Chicago to consider the implications of terminal
illness for patients and for those involved in their care. Patients
invited to talk about their experience often found great relief in
expressing their fear and anger and were able to move towards a state of
acceptance and peace. The seminar, initially composed of students of
medicine, sociology, psychology, and theology, but later joined by
hospital staff and relatives of the patients, enabled many to come to
terms with their own feelings and to respond constructively to what the
patients had to teach them. |
|
First edition 1970 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
500 |
Elisabeth Kubler-Ross |
THE WHEEL OF LIFE |
|
Dr Elisabeth Kubler-Ross shot
to world fame in 1969 upon publication of her seminal work, On Death and
Dying. Since then, through her many books as well as her life's work,
she has brought comfort and understanding to millions coping with the
fear and reality of death. Now, after a series of strokes she finds
herself, aged seventy, confronted with her own death. In Wheels of
Life, her ultimate book and much-anticipated autobiography, she offers a
work that is as inspiring, insightful and incendiary as anything she
has written in the past. We see how her birth in Switzerland and
childhood years formed the solid base from which her outspoken and
confident views sprang. Then, from her work as a young woman in
war-ravaged Poland to her pioneering counselling of the terminally ill,
her legendary seminars on death and dying at the University of Chicago
and her eye-opening discussions with people who had been revived after
death. This book is an extraordinary thought-provoking memoir of an
exceptional lady. |
|
First edition 1997 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
501 |
Gaye Muir |
WITHIN AND BEYOND |
|
Gaye Muir has an international
reputation as one of the most able and recognised mediums in the world.
She has worked with both the Arthur Findlay College and the
Spiritualists Association of Great Britain, and demonstrates her psychic
abilities in Europe where her sterling pioneering work has done much to
advance the Spiritualist movement there. Within and Beyond is a
classic work of modern Spiritualism from an author who has, over many
years of active service to others, experienced both the joys and sorrows
of spiritual work. It gives a clear account of the many aspects of
mediumship, from valuable received teachings to sound advice on the
development of spiritual abilities, delivered in a down-to-earth manner
which is at times both witty and wry. It is a blend of personal insight
and practical advice based on years of teaching experience, and anyone
who is interested in the diverse facets of mediumship will find this
book an enthralling and instructive read. |
|
First edition 1995 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
502 |
James Van Praagh |
REACHING TO HEAVEN |
|
James van Praagh has touched
the lives of millions through his extraordinary ability to communicate
with the next world. Known to millions through radio and television
shows in the United States, his first book Talking to Heaven became an
international best seller. In his new book Reaching to Heaven he
provides a reassuring and inspiring guide to becoming a true spiritual
being. He takes us on a journey to show us what happens at death, what
the spirit world is like, how a soul chooses to be reborn and how the
process of reincarnation works. It also contains simple exercises and
meditations that will help you to rediscover your true spiritual nature
and achieve greater self-awareness and inner peace. |
|
First edition 1999 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
503 |
John Ivimy |
LIVES RELIVED |
|
The theory that the human
psyche survives the death of the body and returns to earth to be born
again later into a new body has been a commonly held belief in the East
from time immemorial, but in the sceptical West it has found few serious
supporters. In this book John Ivimy has collected a mass of objective
historical evidence in the form of biographical sketches of people whose
names were famous in the ancient world, such as Plato, Julius Caesar,
Cleopatra, and compared them with the lives and characters of people he
identifies as their "counterparts" in the modern world. The
coincidences in these comparisons he claims to be so numerous, and often
so improbable, as to prove that reincarnation can and does take place.
The reader has to decide whether to accept that conclusion, or can he
or she explain the mass of coincidences in some other way? |
|
First edition 1996 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
504 |
John Ivimy |
TROY REMEMBERED |
|
There is no historical record
of the Trojan War. That Troy was destroyed by fire around 1200BC has
been established by archaeology, but the story of the siege belongs to
Greek Mythology. In this book John Ivimy has given body to the myth.
Whether or not one accepts his claim to have "remembered" those
traumatic events from a former life, his story is both credible and
entertaining. In straightforward narrative the heroes of the war
Agamennon and Menelaus, Helen and Paris, Achilles, Hector, Ulysses and
the rest come alive as real characters living in a secular society not
unlike our own. The story follows the mythological record as closely as
possible, but the more absurd elements, like the story of Leda and the
Swan, the Judgement of Paris, and the Wooden Horse are given rational
interpretations within the factual context in which they occur. |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
505 |
Rama |
A SEED OF LOVE |
|
Seven steps towards
Enlightenment. A small booklet of teachings from Rama, a spiritual
teacher, discussing: Who am I?, Why am I here?, Where am I going?, Seven
steps to controlling emotions, Seven steps showing the Laws of
Creation, The Seven Bodies of man and the Seven Spheres, Control of your
Life, your virtues, colours and radiations concluding in a final
chapter showing seven steps to Spiritual Guidance. |
|
First edition 1990 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
506 |
Brian Inglis |
SCIENCE AND PARASCIENCE |
|
A History of the Paranormal
1914-1939. When Brian Inglis wrote Natural and Supernatural, he decided
to bring it to a close in 1914, on the ground that the First World War
terminated one phase of physical research, and that the new phase
ushered in by J.B Rhines work on extra-sensory perception at Duke
University did not begin until twenty years later. When he came to
examine the work that was done in that intervening period, however, he
found that it represented some of the most remarkable and productive
psychical research which has ever been conducted, but whose results had
largely been ignored. |
|
First edition 1984 |
P |
———————————————————————————— |
507 |
Ray Brown |
TEACHINGS WITH PAUL - I |
|
AUDIO TAPES
These three audio cassettes were recorded at Knuston Hall Conference
Centre in October 1995 where Paul (through the trance mediumship of Ray
Brown) held a seminar of spiritual teachings. The lectures explain the
levels and progression of spirit in the spirit world and include
questions and answer sessions with Paul.
Paul through Ray Brown |
|
First edition 1995 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
508 |
Jane Roberts |
A SETH BOOK - THE SETH MATERIAL |
|
The extraordinary true story of
a "Personality" who has dictated more than 6,000 pages on
reincarnation, clairvoyance and the Universe beyond the five senses.
Late in 1963 Jane Roberts and her husband came into contact with a
personality calling himself "Seth". Soon, Miss Roberts began passing
easily into trance - her gestures, her eyes, her voice "borrowed" by
Seth himself. The Seth Material is the documented story of how a woman
who balked at the idea of life after death was confronted with
overwhelming proof. Seth has diagnosed ilnesses, correctly described
the contents of sealed envelopes (and buildings) thousands of miles
away, and given life readings. He has materialized apparitions in a
well-lit living room and continues to amaze students of the occult and
professionals alike. And from the very beginning, the text of each
semi-weekly session has been recorded in full. |
|
First edition 1970 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
509 |
Jane Roberts |
A SETH BOOK - THE UNKNOWN REALITY - VOLUME I |
|
In one of Jane Robert's earlier
books, Seth Speaks, Seth introduced the concept of probable realities,
in which our idle daydreams and unfulfilled impulses do take place, in
which all possible choices are fully explored. Yet of all those "roads
not taken", we normally focus on only one that we consider real. Now,
Seth examines the probable pasts of Jane Roberts and her husband, Robert
F Butts, showing how old photographs often depict selves that literally
no longer exist in present terms. Religion and death, sexuality and
dreams, creativity and physical health are all underlaid with unknown
dimensions whose understanding can change the world as we know it. And
indeed, Seth stresses that this "unknown" reality must be explored: "The
individual self must expand to include previously unconscious
knowledge. Your species is now poised on a threshhold. Potentials
within the body's mechanisms can immeasurably enrich the race and bring
it to levels of spiritual, psychic, and physical fulfillment. I am
suggesting ways in which the unknown reality can become a known one." A
provocatively mind-stretching journey into the very frontiers of
philosophy and thought. |
|
First edition 1977 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
510 |
Jane Roberts |
A SETH BOOK - THE UNKNOWN REALITY - VOLUME 2 |
|
In Volume I, Seth began his
discussion of how idle daydreams and unfulfilled impulses do take place
in one or another "probable" reality. Now, in this concluding volume, he
shows precisely how probable realities combine to create the waking
life we know. Here, Seth explains the dazzling labyrinths of unseen
probabilities and correspondences involved in any decision as well as
how different probabilities influence one another. According to Seth,
each atom, molecule, and cell has its own consciousness and power of
choice, and time and space are far more flexible than any textbook can
suggest. Here, too, are his discussions of the worlds we visit in
dreams and in out-of-body states, a far-reaching exploration of the
dynamics of desire and free will, and new "practice elements," Seth's
specific directions on how to explore your own "unknown" reality. |
|
First edition 1979 |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
511 |
Jane Roberts |
A SETH BOOK - DREAMS, EVOLUTION AND VALUE FULFILLM |
|
In this concluding volume Seth
continues his explanation of how the physical world is an ongoing
self-creation, - a direct and wholly intentional outgrowth of the basic
wisdom of the life forms that inhabit it, including mankind. Here, Seth
explains the link between reincarnation and genetics, showing how the
human species keeps "within its genetic bank millions of characteristics
that might be needed in various contingencies," and how the soul
employs both physical "handicaps" and advantages as springboards for
further achievement. |
|
First edition 1986 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
512 |
Jean-Francois Revel |
THE MONK AND THE PHILOSOPHER |
|
Two men, father and son, each
brilliant indifferent ways, meet in Nepal to discuss the most
fundamental questions of human existence, such as: Does life have
meaning? What is consciousness? Is man free? The resulting
conversation is inspiring, accessible and the most lucid and eloquent
meeting of Eastern and Western thought to date. Their vital and
practical answers offer revolutionary approaches to how we can enrich
the way we live our lives.
The book skilfully educates readers who might be new to both Eastern and
Western philosophy without alienating those already familiar with
either strand. Neatly weaving in details of the father-son
relationship, and why and how Matthiew turned to Buddism, the discussion
follows a logical and seamless line through every philosophical and
metaphysical aspect of life, a wonderful book." - Time Out
Jean-Francois Revel and Matthiew Ricard (translated by John Canti) |
|
First edition 1997 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
513 |
Harry Edwards |
THE HEALING INTELLIGENCE |
|
Hitherto, the healings of
"incurables" have been described as "miracles" simply because they could
not be accounted for by medical science. But, Harry Edwards asserts,
spiritual healing is not mysterious, although it is generally thought to
be so. It is, in fact, a spiritual "science". This book explains how
the healing processes operate and the postulates which govern them. It
shows how we can more closely co-operate with the healing purpose by
fully employing the different intelligence systems we possess. The
causes of many organic diseases still elude medical research. In this
book the factors which the author has observed to be associated with the
primary causation of perhaps the most mortal of diseases are described
in detail, as well as the means by which he is convinced its coming can
be prevented. This book illustrates many authenticated medical
histories from Harry Edwards own casebook. |
|
First edition 1965 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
514 |
William John Macmillan |
THE RELUCTANT HEALER |
|
William John Macmillan is no
saint. He would do almost anything else in the world rather than heal.
For eighteen years he has been forced to live for other people. His
own conscience and the desperation of the sick, coming to him in faith
for his help, have not allowed him to rest. This fine and truthful book
tells with dramatic frankness the story of his struggle with himself
during these years. No one who reads it can fail to be moved. And many
may be comforted to learn something more of the divine mystery that is
the main spring of human life. |
|
First edition 1952 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
515 |
E Baxandall |
SERMONS IN STONES |
|
This is the third book to be
published of the controlled (Automatic) writing received from the Spirit
World through the hand of E Baxandall. This volume is concerned with
the philosophy of living life on Earth in such a way as to assist the
spiritual growth of each one of us. As well as the spiritual knowledge,
teaching and philosophy, the souls sometimes wrote in allegorical form
so that the image is more vivid and memorable and will remain with us to
help us through all the different times of our Earthly existence.
E Baxandall and D.M. Illingworth |
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
516 |
Sir Oliver Lodge |
RAYMOND OR LIFE AND DEATH |
|
Sir Oliver Lodge, 1851-1940,
was a world-renouned physicist and a fearless champion of survival. Sir
Oliver's first experiences in psychical research dates back to 1883/84,
when he was invited by Mr Malcolm Guthrie to join his investigations in
thought transference in Liverpool. Perhaps the most convincing and
challenging communications were those which came from his son Raymond:-
On September 17th, 1915, the War Office notified Sir Oliver and Lady
Lodge that their son, Raymond, had been killed in action on Sepember
14th. A few days later on September 25th, Lady Lodge had a sitting with
the renouned medium, Gladys Osborne Leonard. Raymond communicated and
sent this message: "Tell Father I have met some friends of his." On
asking their names, Frederick Myers was mentioned.
Another medium, Alfred Vout Peters, two days later spoke about a
photograph of a group of officers with Raymond among them. Various
messages came from different mediums. On November 25th, Mrs Cheves, a
complete stranger to the family, wrote a letter saying that she had a
photograph of the officers of the South Lancashire Regiment of which
Raymond was second lieutenant and offered to send it to the Lodges.
They graciously accepted the offer.
On December 3rd, Raymond, communicating through Mrs Leonard's
mediumship, gave a complete description of this photograph. He
described himself sitting on the ground, with a fellow officer, placing
his hand on Raymond's shoulder. On December 7th, the photograph arrived
and corresponded with the description, given four days earlier, in
every detail.
This illustrated book as well as describing the above in much greater
detail is a moving tribute, in the form of letters and transcriptions
written at the time from Raymond's family to commemorate his life,
achievements, memory, and ultimatetely his continued survival.
|
|
First edition 1916 |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
517 |
Sir Oliver Lodge |
RAYMOND REVISED |
|
Raymond Revised is a much
altered form of Raymond, it contains a totally new chapter about more
recent conversations and an explanatory chapter about points which have
seemed specially open to hostile criticism, also each of the original
books Three Parts has been shortened and simplified, and to some extent
rearranged, for students, though as it stands now the book is easier
than the original for the general reader. |
|
First edition 1922 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
518 |
Silver Birch |
LIFT UP YOUR HEARTS |
|
Of all the great and famous
discarnate beings who have mastered the art of communication between the
two worlds, none has been so widely loved and honoured as Silver Birch.
He was the spirit guide of medium Maurice Barbanell through the home
circle of Hannen Swaffer. Over the years the wisdom of Silver Birch was
transcribed and has appeared in such spiritual publications as Two
Worlds and Psychic News. His teachings have been put together in many
books amongst which this one compiled by Two Worlds editor, Tony Ortzen.
compiled by Tony Ortzen |
|
First edition 1990 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
519 |
R.H. Saunders |
THE RETURN OF GEORGE. R. SIMS |
|
George. R. Sims, who died on
Sepember 4th 1922, has returned to us through Voice mediums to give to
humanity in this world a fuller knowledge of life in the next. He
describes in vivid words his own transition, and tells us clearly what
is the future that awaits us in the spheres.
A Friend of his and R.H. Saunders |
|
First edition No date: around 1923/24 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
520 |
Ursula Roberts |
HINTS FOR HARMONY OF BODY AND SOUL |
|
An early book by well-renouned
spiritual healer Ursula Roberts. "A useful book to read when you are
feeling unwell, as it may help you to avoid chronic illness by
explaining which biochemic tissue salts are needed, so that you may take
the correct remedy, as indicated by your birth date." |
|
First edition No date-early |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
521 |
Margaret Collier |
THE GIFT IS NOT FOR ME |
|
Initially raised in a Scottish
mining community by foster parents, Margaret Collier experienced
unimaginable cruelty during her unhappy childhood. Having moved to the
South of England in order to start afresh, she soon found herself
destitute and sleeping rough, together with her young son, on a beach,
there only food was raw fish... In her autobiography, written at the
insistence of her dead fostermother from beyond the grave, Margaret
Collier describes how her spiritual gift has matured in parallel with
her broken life and how her own experiences now assist her in her
vocation to bring comfort to others. This is a book which plumbs the
depths of sadness and climbs to the height of happiness, a book for both
believers and sceptics, all of whom will admire Margaret Collier's
strength in following her vocation in spite of great adversity. |
|
First edition 1992 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
522 |
Richard Kent |
THE FINAL FRONTIER |
|
Incredible stories of
near-death experiences. Where do we go when we die? And is there
really such a place as hell? Here are more than 20 stories from people
who are convinced of the afterlife - because they've been there. These
"near death experiences" followed anything from heart attacks to car
crashes and every person who tells their amazing tale is convinced they
have seen what is behind the final frontier of death. Some tell of
wonderful experiences of heaven and the happiness they felt there.
Others recall the spine-chilling moments when they realized they were in
a place they were convinced was hell... This book could change your
afterlife.
Richard Kent and Val Fotherby |
|
First edition 1997 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
523 |
John Dale |
THE PRINCE AND THE PARANORMAL |
|
The psychic bloodline of the
royal family. A controversial and extraordinary book of the
unexplained. Did the Prince of Wales lead ghost-hunting expeditions
through the corridors of Windsor Castle? What kind of spiritual
experience was he searching for in a remote region of Kenya? Was Queen
Victoria really an active Spiritualist? John Dale has made the first
detailed study of the whole fascinating subject of Prince Charles and
the Royal Family's beliefs in psychic and spiritual phenomena - beliefs
which many would consider irrational or even dangerous... |
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
524 |
Bettine Pickles |
MIRACLES |
|
In Miracles we have the story
of a spiritual journey. The author tells of amazing experiences after
the death of her father which changed the whole course of her life. We
learn, that from an early age, she combined deep religious faith with
unorthodox views and she tells us how the path on to which she was led
by her father illumined her abiding faith in God and presented her with
greater opportunities for service. The author touches upon the purpose
of suffering and imparts to her reader some of her own assurance of
eternal life. She sees as normal a pure, natural communion between
those on earth and their departed loved ones, but there shines all
through this narrative a personality warm hearted and practical, a born
teacher with a sense of fun and an affinity with children. She draws
upon her experience as a head teacher and frequently uses the ordinary
to highlight the extraordinary. This book also pays tribute to a
religious trust, the White Eagle Lodge, where, our author tells us,
members "are led on to a higher path and trained to use their pure
spiritual faculties for the benefit of mankind." |
|
First edition 1981 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
525 |
S.G.J. Ouseley |
THE SCIENCE OF THE AURA |
|
An introduction to the study of
the Human Aura. Of all branches of Occult Science one of the most
interesting is the study of the Aura. Speaking concisely, the aura is a
subtle, magnetic emanation generated by the etheric and other forces of
the being or object with which it is connected. Everything in nature
generates its own aura, atmosphere or magnetism. This little book is
also a fascinating explanation of the individual colours of the aura, -
not to be missed. |
|
First edition 1949 |
A |
———————————————————————————— |
526 |
Dr. Reuben Amber |
COLOUR THERAPY |
|
Colour is a vibration that is
constantly affecting us in our daily lives. This book enumerates the
myriad ways we can choose to consciously use color to influence our
body, mind and soul to promote balanced health and well being. This
book is invaluable and important not only for healing already existing
physical imbalances, but ideally to help us become more aware of how
colour can create a positive balance within ourselves and our
environment. |
|
First edition 1980 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
527 |
Larry Kettlekamp |
SIXTH SENSE |
|
Extra sensory perception or ESP
has been of interest to scientists for many years. The tragedy of the
Titanic and many other disasters were forseen by people possessing this
gift many years before the event. What does it all mean? Included in
this large print book, are sections on ESP impressions, such as
telepathy and clairvoyance, predictions of the future, ability to
reconstruct the past, travelling consciousness, and mind over matter. |
|
First edition First USA edition: 1970 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
528 |
S Webb & Son |
STRANGE BUT TRUE |
|
An insight into bizarre
phenomena of all kinds. Revealed - the secret of the Indian Rope Trick.
Is it really possible to quite literally be in two places at once?
Could it be that illness can be cured from a distance? And marvel at
the evidence for a mongoose that could speak. |
|
First edition 1997 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
529 |
Shirley Maclaine |
DON'T FALL OFF THE MOUNTAIN |
|
An outspoken thinker, a keen
observer, a truly independent woman, Shirley Maclaine takes us on a
remarkable journey into her life and her inner self. From her Virginia
roots, to stardom, marriage, motherhood and her enlightening travels to
mysterious corners of the world, her story is exciting and poetic,
moving and humorous, the varied and life-changing experiences of a
talented, intelligent and extraordinary woman. |
|
First edition 1971 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
530 |
Rupert Kilmartin |
BELOVED TORCH |
|
If I had not been assured that
this story of our little girl and the subsequent approach to
Spiritualism would be consoling to others whose children have passed on
before them, I should not have cared to lift the veil that shrouds the
tragedy of our home. A fear that time would dim the memory of Eileen
led me to pen a word-picture of her short life. In the first instance, I
wrote it for myself, but as the truth of human survival unfolded, I
wrote on and if these pages bring hope to those who read them, I shall
not regret the publication of so personal a record. I have found much
to criticise in the Spiritualist movement; I cannot conceal my
impatience with the puerility of many Spiritualist meetings, especially
when I think of the enormous value of the knowledge of human survival,
and if any criticisms of mine effected a scarification, then I should be
profoundly grateful, but I do not pretend to write of needs that have
not been recognized already. Thousands of bereaved people before me
must have discovered that they have to plough through a mass of ranting
ignorance to enter this new world of thought and my book is in the
nature of a plea on their behalf. I write only as a seeker, humbly and
perhaps a little immaturely; my theory of spirit evolution and opinions
of the spirit-state, although arrived at by independent thought, have
probably been more fully expounded elsewhere, but I repeat, my story is a
personal one, revealing the results of my search. Being this, it may
strike a new note for those whose enthusiasm is flagging and encourage
others to persist until, like me, they reach the state of conviction.
War is taking its toll, and unhappily, the numbers of bereaved people
are increasing. Fear of death lies close to the multitudes of our great
cities and coasts. Much of my book was written in that fateful period
of summer when clouds of smoke from burning Dunkirk hung low over the
horizon and the battle roared through the Kentish sky, and there were
many occasions when I wished ardently that the knowledge of human
survival and spirit communication was more widespread. It was a climax
to the conditions under which the book was written that the original
manuscript and a copy were destroyed by enemy action, the one in the
great incendiary raid on the City of London at the close of 1940, and
the other when the printing works where it was being set up were gutted. |
|
First edition 1941 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
531 |
Ralph Smith |
THE LEGEND OF THALNE |
|
A book of verse. "Two worlds
intertwine, one immortal and the other mortal, each in its own
dimensions of reality. The first is veiled from the second and when its
inhabitants are seen they are called ghosts or phantoms however,
sometimes, an immortal being materialises in the physical world and
appears as if "flesh and blood." Those who do so have a purpose and so
it is when Thalne visits the village of Drakelow somewhere in medieval
England. The messages he gives are ageless and as pertinent now as they
would be then. As happens whenever a spirit enters the mortal plane,
he has a lasting effect and influence on those he meets. When he enters
your imagination he may exert a similar influence." |
|
First edition 2000 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
532 |
Valerie A. Lancaster |
JUST POEMS |
|
In 1992, Valerie Lancaster, a
married housewife with three grown children started to receive
inspirational poems from spirit. "Just Poems" are based on Nature (for
upliftment) the Natural Laws (for guidance) and Spiritual Philosophy
(for learning) encouraging people to understand this life and our
continued lives when we pass to Spirit. They bring re-assurance of life
after physical "death" and a comfort and understanding to those who are
grieving or are missing their loved ones, human or animal, who have
moved into the Spirit Realms. They also try to ease the heart-ache of
those who know a loved one is near to making their journey into Spirit.
The children's stories are also in verse and each has a simple moral to
it, hopefully helping our children to keep a spiritual outlook. Ten
Booklets:-
1 A Mixed Selection from "Just Poems" (1993)
2 Anothe Selection from "Just Poems" (1994)
3 A Further Selection from "Just Poems" (1995)
4 "Just Stories" and Fairy Tales ... For Children and the Young at
Heart (1996)
5 A Selection from "Just Poems" (1997)
6 A Selection from "Just Poems" ..with special thoughts for those
"passed" and present (1998)
7 A Selection from "Just Poems" .. for young and old alike (1998)
8 A Special Selection of "Just Poems" (1999)
9 A Selection from "Just Poems" ... with special thoughts for those who
are grieving (2000)
10 A Natural Selection from "Just Poems" (2000)
"I realised they were telling me what I had always known but never
really understood, and I knew I wanted to share them with others. I
hope you enjoy them as much as I do." V.L.
|
|
First edition 1993-2000 |
1 Booklet -C / 2 Booklets-D |
———————————————————————————— |
533 |
Alan Pemberton |
THE SCIENCE OF ETERNITY |
|
VIDEO
The greatest question affecting each and every human being is the
question of death and dying. Do we simply cease to exist or do we pass
quite naturally into the next world? Astounding personal encounters
with supposedly dead relatives coupled with new scientific evidence
based on Quantum physics - the study of the invisible part of the
universe - suggests that WE ALL SURVIVE death. This stunning 60 minute
video reveals, for the first time, vital evidence which until now has
been largely suppressed. Amongst those who Alan Pemberton interviews are
Ron Pearson, Michael Roll, Gwen and Alf Byrne, Tom Harrison and David
Iche. (Michael Roll's pamphlet The Scientific Proof of Survival After
Death included with this video.) |
|
First edition |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
534 |
Michael Roll |
Radio Talk In about Life after Death |
|
AUDIO TAPE
A fascinating recording of a late night phone in chat show, hosted by
Talk Radio presenter Dave Barrett with his guest Michael Roll. The
guests who telephone in discuss their belief or scepticism with the
subject of life after death and some even give first hand accounts of
their own personal experiences, and how it has affected their lives.
Michael Roll and Dave Barrett |
|
First edition About 1999 |
B (533 & 534 sent together for F) |
———————————————————————————— |
535 |
Arthur Findlay |
MORE TRUTH |
|
This book, communicated by
Arthur Findlay, tells of his initial experience of life after death
given through the mediumship of Eileen Winkworth.
"There were many friends who were gathered, too numerous to
mention, but there was my old friend, Sloan, who was there to greet me."
"The peace that is with me is wonderful." "So many people are afraid
of the word "death"... yet I say to you that it is no harder a stage to
go through than the birth. It is just the door that opens to take you
into your new life."
|
|
First edition 1985 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
536 |
ARK REVIEW JOURNAL |
THE ARK REVIEW JOURNAL - BACK ISSUES |
|
Journal Of The Noah's Ark Society
A Worldwide Educational Society For The Promotion, Development And Safe Practice Of Physical Mediumship.
|
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available: August 1998 ... |
2 issues - D |
———————————————————————————— |
537 |
GREATER WORLD |
THE GREATER WORLD - BACK ISSUES |
|
"Britain's Only Spiritualist Newspaper Founded On The Christ Teachings."
Founded in 1928 by Winifred Moyes on the teachings of Zodiac.
|
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available: Some 1981 - 1989 |
1 issues - C |
———————————————————————————— |
538 |
PSYCHIC NEWS WEEKLY NEWSPAPER |
THE PSYCHIC NEWS WEEKLY NEWSPAPER - BACK ISSUES |
|
"The World's Oldest Established Weekly Spiritualist Newspaper."
Founded by Maurice Barbanell.
|
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available - Some 1981, 1984 |
2 issues - B |
———————————————————————————— |
539 |
PSYCHIC WORLD MONTHLY NEWSPAPER |
THE PSYCHIC WORLD MONTHLY NEWSPAPER - BACK ISSU |
|
Psychic World was first published in May 1993 |
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available: First 1993 issue |
2 issues - C |
———————————————————————————— |
540 |
TWO WORLDS MONTHLY MAGAZINE |
TWO WORLDS MONTHLY MAGAZINE - BACK ISSUES |
|
Founded in 1887 by pioneer, Emma Hardings Britten. |
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available: 1967-1995 Approx |
2 issues - D |
———————————————————————————— |
541 |
THE SPIRITUAL HEALER |
THE SPIRITUAL HEALER - BACK ISSUES |
|
The Journal of The Harry Edwards Spiritual Healing Sanctuary Founded by Harry Edwards. |
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available - October 1997 ... |
2 issues - C |
———————————————————————————— |
542 |
STAR MESSENGER |
STAR MESSENGER - BACK ISSUES |
|
A monthly local magazine from
the Star of the East Hall in Broadstairs, Kent, edited by Karin Page. A
very informative magazine, with much to interest readers everywhere,
full of indepth articles, inspirational verses, news and views. |
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available - Some 1997 ... on |
2 issues - C |
———————————————————————————— |
543 |
SATHYA SAI BABA MAGAZINE |
SATHYA SAI BABA - BACK ISSUES |
|
A Quarterly Magazine founded in
1983 by Peggy and Ron Laing dedicated to India's Guru, Sathya Sai Baba.
Its circulation is worldwide. |
|
First edition 1992... onwards |
2 issues - B |
———————————————————————————— |
544 |
Sai Baba |
THE SONG OF SILENCE *VIDEO |
|
VIDEO
A beautiful and inspiring film well produced with highly atmospheric
music, made at the time when people from all over the world gathered
together to see this great Avatar and commemorate his 70th birthday.
People from different walks of life - a doctor, a baker, an engineer, a
musician all speak movingly of the love and peace they experience while
giving service on the Prasanthi Nilayam ashram and the camera follows
them around as they work in the kitchens, hospitals, food distribution
and the "Water Project". The darshan scenes are extremely reverential
and we also see Swami smilingly throwing ladoos at his birthday
celebrations. An excellent video showing the transforming effects of
Swami's teachings on service and celebrating the life and works of
Sathya Sai Baba. |
|
First edition Produced in 1996 |
F (544A one copy of 543 included - G) |
———————————————————————————— |
545 |
Peggy Mason |
TALES OF TWO WORLDS |
|
"Since I started writing
monthly articles four years ago for the magazine Two Worlds a large
number of people have been kind enough to write and tell me how much
they enjoy and appreciate them, and, indeed, have been helped by them. I
have also received many requests from regular readers asking me to
collect them under one cover." "It is my sincere hope that still more
people may find comfort, or help, or food for thought, or some of the
answers to some of the questions which present-day humanity is asking -
and must ask - in the dawn of this New Aquarian Age. Never was the need
to change the world more vital, nor the opportunity greater as old
man-made orthodoxies fade away and new enlightenment about the spiritual
nature of the cosmos is entering into men's minds - even into the minds
of our more advanced scientists. Having been given the privilege of
living, as it were, in two worlds, through the activities of our home
circle, it is my deepest desire to share with other seekers and
searchers some of what I have learned and experienced myself." |
|
First edition 1972 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
546 |
Peggy Mason |
NEW AGE COMPANION |
|
"This little volume is really a
continuation of my previous book Tales of Two Worlds."
"To live, as it were, on both sides of the veil, in daily contact with
friends and teachers in the next phase of life, was a great privilege.
But I have studied the subject of metaphysics for the best part of fifty
years. In fact I do not remember a time when, even as a child, I did
not know that life is continuous and our appearance in the flesh on this
(or any other) planet merely an interlude.
|
|
First edition 1975 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
547 |
Liz Hodgkinson |
REINCARNATION, THE EVIDENCE |
|
Much of the appeal of
reincarnation lies in the fact that it offers answers for such questions
as: Why are some people born handicapped? Why do some people live in
desperate poverty whilst others are wealthy and have every possible
advantage? Why are people killed young as a result of wars or
accidents? If we believe that we only have one life on this earth, then
it seems terribly unjust. Yet, if we think that we will return to this
earth again and again, each time experiencing different circumstances,
then it all becomes logical, and the apparently meaningless universe
suddenly seems to have a sense of pupose. Or does it? Liz Hodgkinson
carefully weighs up the arguments for and against reincarnation. She
investigates a number of fascinating case histories and examines why
some could be interpreted as offering proof of reincarnation and how
some could also be seen to suggest deceit (conscious or unconscious), or
falsified evidence. She leaves no stone unturned in her search for the
truth. The result is a compelling read which presents both sides of
the case, and finally leaves readers to make up their own minds about
whether or not they believe in reincarnation. |
|
First edition 1989 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
548 |
John Edward |
ONE LAST TIME |
|
One Last Time is the remarkable
true story of one of the world's most highly acclaimed psychic mediums.
John Edward began having Psychic experiences when he was no more than a
toddler. Here he reveals for the first time how he discovered, and
gradually developed his amazing power to fortell the future and
communicate with the dead. His extraordinary gift has opened a window
to the spirit world through which come messages of love and healing,
messages about the continuous nature of life from those who have passed
over to the other side. He shows us that our loved ones never cease to
love us, and never really die. |
|
First edition USA edition: 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
549 |
Sylvia Browne |
THE OTHER SIDE AND BACK |
|
For anyone who has ever
experienced a premonition, felt the presence of an angel, feared death
or wished for one more moment with a loved one, comes The Other Side and
Back. Sylvia Browne is an extremely well known American Psychic who has
amazed and helped millions through her readings and television
apearances. Her live shows are sold out five years in advance. She
reveals the truth about the power of psychic energy to change lives and
to communicate with the other side, and shows how anyone can tap into
its energy. |
|
First edition USA edition: 1999 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
550 |
Ormond McGill |
SEEING THE UNSEEN |
|
"I have always felt that I
lived in two worlds: one seen and the other unseen. The partition
between the two seems paper thin ..." So begins this captivating story
by hypnotist Ormond McGill about a famous American public figure when
she regresses to a past life as a well travelled Victorian psychic
investigator. This enthralling book includes an amazing postscript,
detailing how the regression has had a far-reaching impact on her
subsequent life. An easily understood guide to past-life regression
therapy, complete with full explanatory clinical notes. |
|
First edition 1997 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
551 |
Jane Sherwood |
THE COUNTRY BEYOND |
|
"Books which have strongly
influenced one's life can be likened to old friends, rare and beloved,
and to whom one can turn again and again for truth and wisdom. Such a
book is Jane Sherwood's "The Country Beyond." The author started her
investigations when her husband was killed in the First World War. She
could not accept either that Andrew was no more or that he might survive
in a realm where there was no use for his own energy and enquiring
intellect. A valuable section of the book describes what befell the
author when she set out to try to contact her husband. She was not in
touch with anyone who was qualified to advise or warn her, and
throughout many years endured frustrating, misleading experiences and
dangers of which she had been innocently unaware. If for no other
reason the book should be valued for the advice given to all who pursue
psychic investigations. Jane Sherwood came through it all having three
supreme advantages; unshakeable Christian faith, a keen logical mind and
sound common sense. Finally, through unflagging determination, to her
surprise she found herself to have the gift of automatic writing. She
achieved her ambition of contact with her husband..."
Jean Snow, The
Quarterly Review of The Churches' Fellowship
|
|
First edition 1969 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
552 |
Eileen J Garrett |
MANY VOICES |
|
An attractive young Irish
medium called Eileen Garrett leaped into the world headlines after a
sensational seance at the National Laboratory of Psychical Research in
London on October 7, 1930. Two days before the seance took place the
British airship R101 on its maiden passenger flight had crashed in
flames at Beauvais, northern France, killing many passengers including
the airship's captain, Flight Lieutenant Carmichael Irwin. During this
seance an anguished voice broke through, delivering highly technical
information in a torrent of words that left the sitters in a state of
shock and led them to have no doubt in the belief that these were the
last words of Captain Irwin given during that fateful crash. This and
other stories are told in this vivid and fascinating autobiography of
Eileen Garrett, one of the greatest mediums of her era. |
|
First edition 1969 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
553 |
Rosemary Brown |
UNFINISHED SYMPHONIES |
|
This is the extraordinary story
of Rosemary Brown, a South London widow, whose remarkable psychic
powers enable her to communicate with several great composers of the
past. With very little musical training or experience, she is inspired
by Liszt, Chopin, Beethoven and Bach, among others, to compose, write
down and play works of which composer Richard Rodney Bennett said "You
couldn't fake music like this without years of training." In this
fascinating autobiography, Rosemary Brown describes the famous musicians
who appear to her, their tastes, appearance, and mannerisms. |
|
First edition 1971 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
554 |
Ivy Northage |
MEDIUMSHIP MADE SIMPLE |
|
Mrs Northage is one of
Britain's best known teaching mediums and for many years has trodden the
path of dedication and service with Chan, her spirit helper. Some of
the many subjects covered in this comprehensive book are: Psychic
centres, healing, psychometry, flower clairsentience, auric reading,
astral travel, poltergeists, materialisations, direct voice, apports,
levitation, slate writing, psychic photography, trance, inspiration,
clairaudience, clairvoyance, the aura, psychic self defence, guides and
doorkepers, exercising and closing psychic centres. |
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
555 |
Ivy Northage |
SPIRITUAL REALISATION |
|
Inner Values In Everyday Life.
The wisdom and philosophy of discarnate teachers such as Silver Birch
and White Eagle are widely known yet the different appeal of each
teacher is not due to contradictory philosophies but to change in
emphasis. Another such emphasis appears, in these spiritual teachings
given to Ivy Northage by her teacher Chan, and will evoke from some
readers responses hitherto dormant. The authority of the teacher,
always positive but never over-assertive, becomes evident in these
expositions of spiritual and natural laws. With great simplicity, he
underpins this wisdom and offers many suggestions for handling life's
problems. |
|
First edition 1988 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
556 |
Kevin McGrath |
RADIANT FRIENDS BESIDE ME |
|
A fascinating autobiography of
Kevin McGrath, a well renowned Psychic, Medium, Healer and Exorcist.
"This book is a compelling account of many unforgettable life
experiences, a remarkable spiritual development, and the enthralling but
authentic supernatural case histories of Kevin McGrath, a unique
Psychic of his time." |
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
557 |
Paula Horan |
EMPOWERMENT THROUGH REIKI |
|
Reiki is a Japanese term which
means "universal life energy" - i.e. the energy that lives in all
creation, that is inherent to all living beings and that nourishes them
and keeps them alive. Reiki is also used to describe a natural method
of healing which can be used alone or in combination with other systems.
In this book, Paula Horan, a experienced Reiki master who practices
Reiki all over the world, describes exactly how Reiki energy works, the
way it can be used and the effects that can be achieved with its help.
In principle, Reiki is a way of gaining access to both one's own inner
healing powers as well as the subtle energy that pervades all inner and
outer manifestations of life. Reiki is explained here with a series of
practical exercises and a description of how spiritual healing works.
At the same time, the author also shows how colours, tones, crystals and
massage can be incorporated into the Reiki healing process. |
|
First edition 1990 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
558 |
Paula Horan |
ABUNDANCE THROUGH REIKI |
|
A book that goes right to the
core of your abundance issues. A timeless jewel, full of insights for
the Golden Age of Now. Abundance through Reiki is a powerful, poetic
evocation of true Self and Universal Life Force Energy. At the heart of
the book are the 42 steps from Core Self to Core Abundance, creating
richness within and without. They are presented in detail in the form
of two very different finely tuned 21-day abundance plans, taking you on
an exploration of some of your belief patterns, which keep you from
experiencing all the things you need or desire in your life. Also
discussed are: reiki and abundance; abundance of health; love;
friendship; knowledge;and experience. By introducing you to the real
limitless you. |
|
First edition 1990 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
559 |
Annie Besant |
KARMA |
|
The judgement imposed upon the
self during the spirit experience being put into effect in material
life.
A very early spiritual booklet written by Annie Besant in 1895.
Published in India by the Theosophical Society she puts forth a very
interesting outline of the great Law of Karma and of its workings.
|
|
First edition 1895 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
560 |
Paul Hawken |
THE MAGIC OF FINDHORN |
|
The story of an extraordinary
community where man co-operates with plants, where people are
transformed, where nothing is impossible and legends are reborn. There
have been stories in the press and other media about a small community
in the north of Scotland called Findhorn where people talk to plants
with amazing results. Stories of vegetable and flower gardens animated
by angelic forms where Pan's pipes are heard in the winds. Stories of
plants performing incredible feats of growth and endurance, 40-pound
cabbages, 8-foot delphiniums, and roses blooming in the snow.
"The Findhorn community is said to be run and operated under messages
and guidance received from God.... With those sketchy and unbelievable
tales, I left America for Scotland to search out The Findhorn Gardens.
What I found there seems larger than a 40-pound cabbage. Fairies and
elves seem tame stuff compared to what one experiences there. Findhorn
may be a manifestation of a light and power which could transform our
planet within a lifetime, or it could be an illusory bubble on the
troubled waters of the world civilisation that will burst, leaving no
traces."
|
|
First edition 1975 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
561 |
White Eagle |
SPIRITUAL UNFOLDMENT - 3 |
|
Spiritual Unfoldment 3 opens
the way to practical spiritual service and will be of interest to all
who wish to open their awareness to the higher worlds. White Eagle
re-awakens for his readers memories of the mystery schools of old, and
shows that the same path exists today, the path of initiation through
the experiences of everyday life, through suffering and joy. There is
teaching in the book about the creative power of thought, on the higher
senses, and on meditation, which is seen as the way to communion with
the world of spirit and as a way of developing God-consciousness. The
attainment of divine peace by the individual aspirant brings light to
the whole of humanity; as White Eagle says elsewhere, "Everyman is his
own saviour; and every man is the saviour of all mankind". |
|
First edition 1987 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
562 |
White Eagle |
SPIRITUAL UNFOLDMENT - 4 |
|
Spiritual Unfoldment completes a
series of books which introduce the reader to the path of unfoldment
through meditation and service. It gives a deep inner meaning to the
ordinary experiences which the soul meets once it has embarked on its
quest, experiences which prepare it for ever greater service through the
putting into practice of the ideal of brotherhood. It describes the
expansion of consciousness which comes through inner initiation, how the
dual aspects of the soul are balanced as the soul gains wisdom and
mastery over the elements and over the emotions, and gives a glimpse of
the wonderful service that may be given to any soul as it opens itself
to the light. |
|
First edition 1988 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
563 |
Grace Cooke |
MINESTA'S VISION |
|
A Centenary Collection of Grace
Cook's Writings. The life of Grace Cooke (1892-1979) - "Minesta", as
she is known in this book was one that touched many other people's. Her
gift of clear vision gave her a perspective on human existence that
enabled her to see what others believed they could not. From the age of
twelve she was able to use this gift in a way that could totally
transform the attitude of another towards the conditions of their life.
Yet this gift was coupled, not with any sense of being someone special,
but simply with a warm awareness of the role of mother. Through her
gentle mediumship came words of great wisdom - White Eagle's; the
relationship between them is one of the underlying fascinations of this
book. It contains extracts from her writing over many years. There is
one complete and otherwise unpublished teaching by White Eagle in which
he talks of himself and his instrument, and there is a clear glimpse of
her human qualities active within the organization that she founded
under his guidance, the White Eagle Lodge. First and foremost, however,
it is a celebration of her writing, less often heard, at the time of
the centenary of her birth. |
|
First edition 1992 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
564 |
White Eagle |
THE ILLUMINED ONES |
|
"I saw not only my brief life
with the Mayas but a vista of lives going far into the future in lands
separated from this by half a world".
Grace Cooke relives in her memory incarnations with White Eagle, her
spirit teacher in this life, among the Mayas and the ancient Eqyptians.
Her most compelling story brings these civilisations vividly to life
and will stimulate memories in many readers. The lives are not however
isolated incidents but are part of a larger picture which emerges of the
ageless brotherhood of the light which has guided the destiny of man
since the beginning of time.
|
|
First edition 1966 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
565 |
White Eagle |
BEAUTIFUL ROAD HOME |
|
This is a book of the deepest
comfort and inspiration. It is a collection of some of White Eagle's
most loving thoughts, expressed as ever through the beauty of his manner
and the gentleness of his tone of voice. His guidance continues to
inspire and motivate in the ways of love and his message is clear and
simple: follow the wisdom of the heart and it will lead you home! |
|
First edition 1992 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
566 |
Jack Canfield |
CHICKEN SOUP FOR THE SOUL |
|
101 stories to open the heart
and rekindle the spirit and restore your faith in human nature.
Chicken Soup for the Soul is a publishing phenomenon with over seven
million copies sold. The short stories collected by the authors include
examples of the best qualities we share as human beings: compassion,
grace, forgiveness, generosity and faith. In passing on these stories
they share a collected wisdom on love, parenting, teaching, heroism,
death and the overcoming of obstacles.
Jack Canfield and Mark Victor Hansen
|
|
First edition 1993 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
567 |
Jack Canfield |
A SECOND HELPING OF CHICKEN SOUP FOR THE SOUL |
|
Stories may be the most
powerful teaching tool available to us, especially when the subjects
being taught are love, respect and values. Jack Canfield and Mark
Victor Hansen are professonal speakers who have dedicated their lives to
enhancing the personal and professional development of others. In this
their second volume of Chicken Soup for the Soul they bring you another
101 stories that are sure to warm your heart, brighten your day and put a
smile on your face that will last a lifetime.
Jack Canfield and Mark Victor Hansen |
|
First edition 1993 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
568 |
Diana Cooper |
A LITTLE LIGHT ON ANGELS |
|
I believe in angels is the
title of a well-known song - but do we really?
With this book, we meet everyday folks who have experienced angels in
their lives. Yes, angels do exist: they are highly evolved beings that
have a lighter and faster vibration than humans, and are normally
invisible to us. However, many of them have chosen to serve mankind and
are available to help, support, heal and guide us - all we have to do
is ask! There are small angels who care for the little daily tasks and
enormous beings that overlight great universal projects. There are
angels who can assist in healing and others who attend celebrations and
rituals. A Little Light on Angels gives us guidance on how we can call
on them for help and companionship in our lives. We are surrounded by
angels, all we have to do is raise our consciousness to become aware of
them and communicate with them, to welcome them into our lives and allow
joy, light and peace of their presence into our hearts.
|
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
569 |
Ruth White |
WORKING WITH GUIDES AND ANGELS |
|
In this accessible and
practical book, Ruth White provides information on how you can work with
your guides and angels. She explains what guides and angels are, their
purpose in our lives, how we can learn to communicate with them and
what to expect. She highlights the areas of our lives in which they can
help and gives a wealth of practical exercises to help us to make
contact. Throughout the book Ruth draws on her personal experience with
angels and provides channelled information from her own well-known
discarnate guide, Gildas. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
570 |
Ormond McGill |
GRIEVE NO MORE BELOVED |
|
This is a book about death, and
yet it is a joyous book, for it tells that loved ones are never lost.
It also gives insights into life after death and immortality.
When Ormond McGill's beloved wife Delight died he was grief-stricken.
Yet soon afterwards she began to bring him comfort by regularly making
her presence felt. This grew into a period of communication during
which he became increasingly aware that she was conveying information to
him about life after death. He was also able to seek answers to
various questions on this subject. Such experiences came as a wonderful
proof of the continuation of life after death. Ormond felt that these
insights, bringing solace and understanding, belong to everyone, and
thus he wrote this book to provide a comfort to share with all who hold
in their hearts a beloved who has passed on. Furthermore it will remove
the reader's fear of death by assuring them of their own immortality.
|
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
571 |
S.M. McLeod |
NOW PIONEER |
|
This story covers the life of a
girl, Sheila Connery, originally from Ireland and starts with a brief
account of her life as a child. At an early age she begins to show a
psychic ability and the simplicity with which the spirit world guided
her. There was a space of fifteen years when this gift appeared to have
disappeared completely. The story continues with her marriage in her
early twenties to a Scottish scholar whose work as a teacher and
lecturer, took them to California and Stanford University. She found
herself taken from a simple but cultured life, into the razzle dazzle
world of San Francisco in the sixties. The music and the clothes were
quite different from what she was used to at her home village. The most
gripping significance in her new life was the people, with their
strange ideas about life, which was to her quite mad. All around,
gradually gathering momentum, was the influx of drugs and the increasing
notoriety of the Hippy Movement. These aspects surrounded her life
which continued as she had envisioned, with a large family and a
friendly comfortable home, to which all were welcome. Then came a duty,
for in her own happiness she became fully aware of the misery that
drugs were bringing to the people she mingled with on a daily basis.
Like a captive in a prison camp, she searched for ideas to ease the pain
of these troubled people. Her inherited gift of second vision and
healing was brought firmly to her attention by the spirit world. From
then on, her days were filled with the needs and pain of the drug
sufferer. This book tells you how, in her own way, guided and
strengthened by the spirit world, she gained a strong foothold in her
new life and was able to bring help and hope to many. |
|
First edition 1999 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
572 |
Peter J Hudson |
WHERE DO WE GO FROM HERE? |
|
Highly relevant for today and
into the millennium, this book, dedicated to the memory of Linda
McCartney, contains information relating to the purpose of this earthly
life and beyond, including the Universe as a whole. Peter Hudson has
researched and practised in the field of natural medicine for over forty
years. Spiritual awareness and continuous searching of great minds
have guided this visionary of our time in his quest for answers. The
result is a simple-to-read precis of his findings and experiences. |
|
First edition 1999 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
573 |
Katie Coutts |
MY PSYCHIC EYES |
|
Born into a psychic family the
psychic powers of Katie Coutts are legendary. By looking into the eyes
of total strangers, sometimes using no more than a photograph, she is
able to see their past, present and future. She has made contact with
departed relatives on the "other side", and has taken her subjects back
over the centuries to relive past lives. |
|
First edition 1996 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
574 |
Peter Lee |
THE SPIRIT CALLS |
|
An autobiography by top
clairvoyant Peter Lee. He shares for the first time some hilarious
encounters with world-famous clients, shares bizarre experiences with
the lunatic fringe and tells of frightening confrontations with dark
forces from this and other worlds. He also describes one of his most
famous disclosures when he predicted that Dr Umaru Dikko, the kidnapped
Nigerian politician would be found in a crate at Stansted Airport. |
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
575 |
Uri Geller |
URI GELLER: MY STORY |
|
This is the autobiography of
the famous and controversial Israeli psychic known throughout the world
as the man who, apparently by force of will, bends keys and spoons,
mends broken radios and stopped watches, and who has demonstrated in
controlled experiments at the University of London, the Stanford
Research Institute and elsewhere, staggering extra-sensory powers. It
is Uri's first book and it tells, in his own words, how he came to
realize his incredible powers and how they affected him. "It amazes
me," he says, "every time these things happen. I want to jump up and
point them out to people," He describes an event in a "magical mystery
garden" when he was three or four, and he recalls his first telepathic
and clairvoyant experiences. This book goes beyond anything written
elsewhere and it ends with the strangest event of all - one never before
revealed. |
|
First edition 1976 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
576 |
Pat Delgado |
CIRCULAR EVIDENCE |
|
A detailed illustrated
investigaton of the flattened swirled crops phenomenon.
In the summer of 1981 Pat Delgado brought to the attention of the
national press the existence of some mysterious circular depressions in
the fields at Cheesefoot Head, Hampshire. Since then, the sitings of
similar phenomena in southern Britain, many of them striking in their
symmetry and beauty, have transformed initial curiosity into a
full-blown investigation. One look at the photographs will suggest why
the circles raised so many questions - such as, how on earth did they
get there? While theories have naturally abounded since the circles came
to light - theories that the authors have considered and tested - the
book does not set out to prove anything beyond the existence of a
persistent and compelling enigma in our midst.
Pat Delgado and Colin Andrews
|
|
First edition 1989 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
577 |
Jenny Randles |
LIFE AFTER DEATH AND THE WORLD BEYOND |
|
In this exciting new
illustrated book, the authors, two leading paranormal researchers
investigate the case for heaven. They interview many people who claim
to have direct knowledge about what heaven is like - people who believe
they have visited that other world and returned to tell the tale. They
also assess the first-hand reports of heaven that supposedly reach us
from people who have made that final journey. Drawing on a fascinating
array of material and the views of many experts in different fields,
they present an objective and comprehensive investigation into the
afterlife and show us what life in heaven may really be like.
Jenny Randles and Peter Hough |
|
First edition 1996 |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
578 |
Stuart Gordon |
THE PARANORMAL - AN ILLUSTRATED ENCYCLOPEDIA |
|
The Paranormal is a
wide-ranging, authoritative and highly stimulating survey of everything
that falls outside the bounds of normal experience: psychic,
supernatural and occult phenomena, believers, theorists - and victims.
This book brings together an enormous volume of experience and
knowledge, both ancient and modern. The encyclopedia, with over 750
entries, weighs up the evidence for and against the paranormal in all
its fantastic manifestations, and sifts out genuine marvel from
make-believe and misperception. |
|
First edition 1992 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
579 |
Billy Roberts |
BILLY ROBERTS INVESTIGATES THE PARANORMAL |
|
VIDEO
A video to lift the veil on the sometimes dark and mysterious world of
the paranormal.
In this video Billy Roberts investigates haunted houses,
messages from the spirit world, psychic experiments and listens and
talks to the spirits about matters which effect all our lives. He
enters two haunted houses, Chingle Hall and Holly Tree Farm. He visits a
haunted pub and lastly converses with the spirits of the dead through
Mr Alan Webb, a trance medium.
|
|
First edition No date |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
580 |
Liz Hodgkinson |
PSYCHIC COUNSELLING |
|
"This book demystifies the
world of psychic counselling and therapy, and offers an objective,
useful and practical guide to all those interested in this kind of help,
even the out-and-out sceptic. It answers all those awkward questions
such as exactly what it is, how it can help, what is likely to happen
during a session, whether it is possible to distinguish the genuine from
the spurious and what it actually means to be psychic. Many different
methods are covered, including dowsing, pyramid healing, aura reading,
astrology, tarot, crystal balls and channelling. The nature of psychic
powers is also discussed, together with former and current theories on
the paranormal. At its heart, psychic counselling is just one way of
helping people to become more positive and to clarify their goals and
aims in life. An open-minded view of the subject can prove very
rewarding, enabling us to take charge of our lives, and become more
confident and serene. This straightforward and comprehensive overview
sheds valuable light on this intriguing world". |
|
First edition 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
581 |
Peter Richelieu |
A SOULS'S JOURNEY |
|
While in a state of despair
after the death of his brother, the author is visited by Acharya, an
Indian mystic. Using astral projection, Acharya takes him out of the
physical world onto the astral planes of the "afterlife". Each astral
plane teaches something new about life and death, karma and the ego.
Through a series of meetings with the "dead" - including his brother -
the author comes to realize how irrational it is to fear death. Through
his teaching, Acharya opens up a whole vision of life in the world that
follows this, a life where anything is possible. This book is based on
notes taken immediately following out-of-body experiences, and gives
the reader a direct insight into the unknown mysteries of life and
death. |
|
First edition 1953 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
582 |
Ron Scolastico |
DOORWAY TO THE SOUL |
|
Throughout the ages, human
beings have searched for the key to the mystery of life. In Doorway to
the Soul, distinguished spiritual psychologist Dr. Ron Scolastico shows
that the key is in your hand. It is the power of your consciousness.
This inspiring book will teach you how to use the key of consciousness
to unlock the spiritual dimensions of reality. You will learn that you
are never alone in the pursuit of your spiritual ideals, and that
guidance and comfort are available to you at every moment. He shows you
how to deepen your love for yourself and others, enhance your
creativity and strengthen your intuition. You will become more and more
able to receive spiritual guidance and to experience the limitless love
and wisdom of your soul. |
|
First edition 1995 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
583 |
Rita Rogers |
SOUL MATES |
|
Rita Rogers finds that most of
her clients come to see her not because of a need to be in touch with
the next world, but for a much more immediate concern: who is the
partner of our dreams, and where and when will we meet them? What's
more, can we really live happily ever after? Rita believes that we are
all destined to spend our lives with one special person, our soul mate.
Between soul mates exists a spiritual and emotional bond that
transcends all things. A soul mate may become your partner. They may
help you find a special friend until the time for a partnership is
right. And they may even be someone you may not meet in this life - but
who may help you to find fulfilling relationships. But this book is
not just for people who are looking for true love. It is also for those
who have found it but need help, for those who have met their soul mate
but may not realize it, for those who are forced to live without their
true love, and for those whose soul mates have passed away. |
|
First edition 2000 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
584 |
Gill Edwards |
RESCUE WORK WITH LOST SOULS |
|
An excellent, informative
booklet for all those interested in rescue work. In her opening
paragraph well known writer and clinical psychologist says -
"I began rescue work with lost souls nearly ten years ago now -
and have always felt blessed to be called upon to do it. I've had many
memorable, moving and even comical experiences with lost souls - some
of which I'll share with you in this booklet".
|
|
First edition 1998 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
585 |
David Bassant |
THE TRUTH ABOUT THE HEREAFTER AND REINCARNATION |
|
"You and I as physical-mental
instruments through which our soul functions are at a point somewhere
between birth and death. We are frequently aware as we travel life's
jorney that as we leave our birth experience behind us we are travelling
closer to the death experience which we fear, mainly because it
constitutes the unknown. On this journey we as individuals experience a
wide range of vastly different lives and experiences. I believe we
have the right to question why. We read books and perhaps spend years
searching for the answers on the taboo subject of death, but we are
never inwardly sure. Some never find the true answers, others may see
the truth clearer with inspiration and knowledge attained through
self-development. We must, all of us, have an open and receptive mind
so that we may be diligent and discerning in our quest for the truth.
If we are to refine and evolve our soul it will demand courage and
fearlessness of what others may think of us in our quest. It is my
profound wish that this book will help." |
|
First edition 1982 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
586 |
Ivy Northage |
JOURNEY BEYOND |
|
Ivy Northage has for many years
been acclaimed as one of the best known teaching mediums, and has
demonstrated her gifts in the UK and abroad, including Australia. This
book features talks given by Chan, Ivy's spirit guide. He gives one of
the clearest and most concise accounts of the passage through physical
"death" into the relms beyond, describing in detail the spirit's arrival
on the astal plane. He tells of the music, laughter and love which
abound, of the reunion of those who had been parted on earth, and of the
"many mansions" and levels of progression to be encountered. He
assures us that one day we will stand upon the threshold and say "Yes,
it was worthwhile - everything I paid for it was of little cost compared
to what I have earned as a result of my efforts." This is a book for
the new Millennium: a message of inspiration and hope. It is a message
at once new and timeless, containing echoes of the perennial wisdom that
has been taught under many names, in many religions, for many thousands
of years. |
|
First edition 1972 (as Journey into Spirit) |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
587 |
Ursula Roberts |
ALL ABOUT MEDIUMSHIP |
|
Ursula Roberts has been a
medium for many years, demonstrating not only throughout Great Britain
and Europe but countries as far afield as Australia, New Zealand, Egypt
and Finland. In this long awaited volume, Miss Roberts gives advice on
how to develop various psychic gifts, including: Psychometry,
Clairvoyance, Astral Travel, Trance, Automatic writing, Psychic
artistry, Healing, Direct voice, Telepathy and Inspiration. Written in
an easy-to-understand style, All About Mediumship is essential reading
not only for those who wish to develop their gifts, but for all who want
to know more about the spiritual side of life. |
|
First edition 1994 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
588 |
Ursula Roberts |
THE AIM OF SPIRIT REVELATION |
|
This booklet presents lectures
by Ramadahn about the reasons why spirits entrance their mediums, and
some of the difficulties encountered, Also, information about the way
mediums may help to develop a better co-operaton with the spirits who
entrance them. |
|
First edition 1976 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
589 |
Ursula Roberts |
HINTS FOR HEALERS |
|
A little booklet designed for the person who wants to be a channel for healing, giving simple instructions for beginners. |
|
First edition No date |
A |
———————————————————————————— |
590 |
Caroline Myss, Ph.D. |
WHY PEOPLE DON'T HEAL AND HOW THEY CAN |
|
Why do some people heal, while
others do not? For more than fifteen years, Caroline Myass has studied
this question, working with hundreds of people and motivating them to
examine their souls and change their lives. She builds on her earlier
teaching to reveal the cultural and individual contexts in which people
become physically and spiritually ill. With her practical approach to
healing, readers will learn to overcome the mental and emotional blocks
to becoming well. This book brings together Dr Myss's breakthrough
views on energy medicine and the development of human consciousness and
spirituality over the ages. She teaches you how to perceive the seven
different energy centres of the body and interprets the spiritual
challenges they present. The book finally provides healing rituals and
prayers that wil help you to get and stay on the path to wellness.
Through her characteristic no-nonsense style and high-voltage
storytelling, Caroline Myass provides non-stop insights and practical
advice that will enable you to disconnect from a culture of wounds and
reconnect with an inner and outer spiritual energy and purpose. |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
591 |
communicated through Andrea Grieveson |
READ HOW WE DIED |
|
Everyone in the world, at some
time in their life, wonders about death and dying. If you have been
bereaved yourself, you have such a desolate feeling of ignorance as to
how the person felt just before their death. Is there really something
after death? How does one get to it? Is there scenery and countryside?
Are there relatives waiting to greet you? Will you feel strange and
frightened? What about Hell? Does it exist? Are you judged on your
life? Are there angels? So many questions and so few answers.
Although for the most part, we do not dwell on this morbid subject, when
someone you know and care for dies - somehow death has much more
significance,and your life is never really the same again. Somehow you
have to cope alone with little or no information to help you. Read How
We Died is a collection of 29 experiences, written through the
mediumship of Andrea Grieveson. Ordinary people have put in great
efforts of concentration in order to contact you to tell their own
individual stories of before, during and after the moment we call death.
They want to enlighten and inform you. |
|
First edition 1996 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
592 |
Tom Cowan |
THE BOOK OF SEANCE |
|
Since ancient times,the living
have used the powerful ritual of the seance to reach out to the next
world for answers to questions that this existence cannot provide.
Where does the human spirit go after death? How is it possible to
communicate with those who have crossed over to the next realm? What is
our purpose on this earth, and will we rejoin our loved ones when we
ourselves pass on? The Book of Seance shows how to use the life energy
of the seance to connect with the world beyond and establish contact
with its inhabitants. From setting up a seance circle, to approaching
spirit guides, to interpreting messages from departed loved ones, each
aspect of conducting and participating in a seance is thoroughly
explained. Offering timeless insights into an unknown world, this guide
is a powerful tool for communicating with those who have gone before
us. |
|
First edition 1995 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
593 |
Muriel Tennant |
AS I SEE IT |
|
Have you ever thought about
what really happens to us when we die? Do you think it is the end of
everything or do you share with millions of others that innermost
glimmer of belief, hope, call it what you will, that life in some form
really does continue. Muriel Tennant is a practising medium with a deep
involvement in spiritualism. She helps many people come to terms with
this concept through lectures, talks and seminars which she gives in her
own native East Anglia, and indeed countrywide. This is her own story
of the awakening of a belief in a life beyond, within her own everyday
life. It is very readable and easy to identify with, so much so that
all who read it will be able to say it has changed their ideas on life
after life! |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
594 |
Anne Cordell |
A MEDIUM WITH A DIFFERENCE |
|
Anne Cordell was certainly a
medium with a difference, who left her mark on all who came into contact
with her. She tells the fascinating story of her life as though
telling it to a friend in the comfort of her own home sat round a
roaring fire on a winters evening. She tells her story as she speaks it,
in the dialect of her London surroundings. A story not to be missed.
Anne Cordell with Peter Spillett |
|
First edition 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
595 |
Barbara Bush |
TRAVELLING WITH TAMARIND |
|
Gentle healing meditations and
cameos from the world of nature in the form of short stories.
"Tamarind is the companion of my journeyings. Together we walk along
the pathways of my mind, turning to enjoy the view across the meadows,
stopping to breathe in the fragrance of the flowers, resting a while on a
fallen log to listen to the song of the birds. This companion helps me
when the going becomes difficult; opens my mind to scenes I might have
missed; refreshes memories of childhood holidays as the family walked
the English lanes. I like to think that Tamarind is the part of me that
remains in spirit while I walk the earth plane. We have been re-united
time and again at the ending of each earthly life, then borne the pain
of parting at each rebirth." A door was opened and the stories poured
out ...
|
|
First edition 1996 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
596 |
Messenger |
SPIRIT INFLUENCES |
|
Have you ever wondered what
Spirit communicators think of us, how they know all about us, what they
can do for us? In these scripts, given through inspirational writing,
they answer these questions and many more. How can we establish our own
personal link with Spirit helpers? First we must ask for their help,
then we must listen for the inter-leaving of their thoughts with ours.
Do they understand our problems? They tell us their thoughts about our
lives today ... family life and work etc.. and on the wider issues they
speak of man's stewardship of Earth's resources, farming and animal
welfare etc.. and the knowledge of God's Plan for mankind on Earth that
they seek to make known to us all. Messenger lived as a Buddhist Monk
in the Western Himalayas and was a medium then for the wise Spirit
Beings who were in contact with the Earth at that time. His concern for
the progress of mankind continues in Spirit with his work as the link
between the group who compiled these scripts and the recorder Daisy
Sadler .. a housewife and mother, who through family tragedy and her
successful search for evidence of survival of her 26 year old son, was
contacted by Messenger and asked to do this work, so realising her own
latent mediumship.
recorded by Daisy J. Sadler |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
597 |
narrated by Leonard Cohen |
THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD - A WAY OF LIFE |
|
VIDEO
From the same production team as the Way of Life this dramatization
reveals the story of the Book of the Dead through a dialogue between a
Tibetan priest and a boy novice. Together they guide the mind of a
recently deceased man on its voyage through the afterlife. This
definitive and unique film presents an unflinching view of the role of
the Tibetan Book of the Dead among the traditional Buddhist communities
of Ladakh. Filmed in the spectacular heart of the Himalayas where a
rich Buddhist culture survives, cameras document the whole process of
the 49 death ritual with readings from the Book of the Dead together
with an account of its history. The programme also features an
interview with the Dalai Lama who speaks of his own views of life after
death. |
|
First edition Produced in 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
598 |
Ambika Wauters |
COLOUR HEALING |
|
From ancient times, healers and
mystics have used colour to heal body and mind and many colours have
been given importance in different spiritual traditions. Today,
psychologists can measure our personality responses and emotional
reactions using colour. Colour therapy is an important branch of
vibrational healing, working on the energy systems of the body, and this
book provides the perfect introduction. |
|
First edition 1997 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
599 |
Maurice Barbanell |
I HEAR A VOICE |
|
"The subject of this biography
is E.G. Fricker, one of the most remarkable healers in the world today.
In the seven years, after discovering his divine gift and dedicating
the whole of his life to practising it, he has rapidly achieved
prominence because of his phenomenal cures of thousands of
"incurables"... so wrote Maurice Barbanell in the opening of his book
about the life of a healer who gave healing to the thousands who flocked
to his North London sanctuary. |
|
First edition 1962 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
600 |
Bernard |
DREAM JOURNEY TO HEAVEN (1) |
|
"Bernard" was the spiritual and
writing name of the late M.E.Williams, author of a series of nine books
called "Heaven Books" given by a kind of spiritual experience to the
author when they were at their lowest ebb through pain or illness. "The
experience described in each of the nine books came to me while I was
awake and conscious, so all I can do is call it a "waking dream". It
occupied about three to five minutes. Immediately I had had the
experience I was filled with such joy that I could hardly wait to get it
all down, writing on and on at top speed for hours each day, despite
the fact that I was ill and in much pain... yet I could hardly wait, but
wrote on and on, scarcely stopping for food - and immediately each book
was finished I was well again, and have remained so ever since."
Copies of Bernard's books are available FREE - write to Kenneth
Churches, 18 Kimberley Road, Chingford, London, E4 6DD.
(please enclose postage)
|
|
First edition No date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
601 |
Bernard |
PURPLE GOWNED {2) |
|
Bernard continues his accounts
of his experiences in the spirit world. His first book is concerned
mainly with the cleansing of his spirit robe from all the soils of
earthly thoughts and actions not proud of. Eventually he acquires his
purple robe. "The news reached me and many others of the Purple-Gowned,
that a number of people had suddenly died, and would soon arrive in the
Hall of Reception. I knew that I must go to help in the welcoming of
them. At first I wondered why this should be, as angels usually
performed this service. Then, reaching out for the answer, I knew.
These people were so unready for Heaven that they would only be
frightened if they met an Angel! This was the Father's loving plan - to
send the Purple-Gowned who would help to reassure them." |
|
First edition No date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
602 |
Bernard |
DEATH AND LIFE OF A SOLDIER (3) |
|
"The valley on the fringe of
heaven's realm lay dreaming in fragrant peace. The pearly sky held no
hurrying clouds, but remained lightly veiled in mist as though time and
season stood still. Down the grassy hillside, flowers rose motionless
on their slender stems, for not a breath of air was stirring. Their
petals were half-opened, like the eyes of a child in the early morning,
and their fragrance mingled with the air in sweetness. In the depths of
the valley a stream flowed gently on its way, its silver ribbon cut
with stooping foliage and the sharply-etched rim of a bridge. On the
other side of the valley, the hills climbed and climbed as though in
friendly rivalry. How high was the topmost peak it was not possible to
see, for in the far distance the veiling mist seemed to close in with a
secret smile. Almost, it seemed as though no sound had ever broken this
deep stillness, nor any movement stirred to life the long, gleaming
blades of grass. Then, startling in its unexpectedness, the bowed
figure of a man appeared. He came toiling up the hillside from the
depths of the valley, stumbling a little as though he carried a great
pack upon his back; but his hands and his back were empty of any burden.
Now and then he paused and glanced round in perplexity, shading his
eyes and gazing steadily in every direction. When he reached the plain
he stood quite still, smiling a little. Then, yawning, he stretched
himself among the flowers and fell asleep. The valley dreamed on. The
man on the ground became a part of the peace of it all. Time flowed
without measure. Was it a mist that began to surround the sleeping
man? At first it appeared so; then the misty outlines became more
clearly defined - and two angels stood looking down at him...."
The soldier had entered the spirit world...
|
|
First edition No date |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
603 |
John .... |
ROAD OF MANY WAYS |
|
"It has always been said that
to every story there is a beginning, a middle and an end. But how, and
where does one begin a story which has neither beginning, nor end, and
no middle - a story that is timeless, endless?" With these words JOHN
... commences an amazing narrative of conditions in the next plane of
existence - an astounding guide for all who have wondered what happens
after death in the physical world. His tale starts with his own violent
passing in the Second World War during a mortar barrage and transports
the reader through many levels of existence on a vibration higher than
our own material world. |
|
First edition 1975 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
604 |
Frederick C. Sculthorpe |
EXCURSIONS TO THE SPIRIT WORLD |
|
One of the most fascinating
books on Astral Travel ever to be written.
Mr Sculthorp has the remarkable faculty of vacating his physical
body during the day, and bringing back a full recollection of what he
has seen and heard while in the Spirit World and the people he met
there, including his own wife. The author has also an advanced
scientific mind, which he brings to bear upon the construction of worlds
from their atomic particles and explains the physical and spiritual
worlds from this angle.
|
|
First edition 1961 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
605 |
Frederick C. Sculthorp |
MORE ABOUT THE SPIRIT WORLD AND EXPERIENCES IN AST |
|
"This is a remarkable work-a worthy successor to "Excursions To The Spirit World." A.H.Hillyard |
|
First edition 1975 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
606 |
Margaret Prentice |
RICHARD, SPIRIT AND I |
|
"Thankfully the vast majority
of us go through life without having to suffer the ultimate experience
in mental torture - losing a beloved child. Margaret has been kind
enough to credit me as the person who was responsible for starting to
bring her out of the depths of despair to the heights of happiness.
Prepare to shed tears of sadness as Margaret unfolds her horror story,
but take heart, these quickly change to tears of joy as Margaret is
swamped in love from good people all around her, and share her happiness
as she finds out that her "dead" loved ones are in fact very much alive
and living in the huge universe that is normally out of range of our
physical senses. from the foreward by Michael Roll. |
|
First edition 1999 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
607 |
Gaye Muir |
MY ROUTE TO THE OTHER WORLD |
|
Gaye Muir is one of the most
famous mediums of our time. This is her autobiography. Growing up in
the 30's wasn't easy, especially if you saw people who wern't there. As
a small child Gaye Muir surpressed her psychic ability because of the
disapproval of her strict parents. Later she also learned it was wiser
not to mention what she saw to her peers, not even to her first husband!
Much to her own surprise, she slowly learned that she was not alone,
that there were many others, even churches and organizations, dealing
with the phenomena of spiritualism. This was the real beginning of her
route to the other world. |
|
First edition 1983 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
608 |
Paul Miller |
FACES OF THE LIVING DEAD |
|
The story of a Psychic Artist.
"If only I could see his face." That is the heart-cry of the mourner
from the moment the body is laid away until time wears down the sharp
edge of grief - or until Spiritualism answers the cry and there appears
in reality the voice, the touch, the message, or the face of the living
dead. It has happened so often that the time has come to record, in
lasting form, some of the many cases of evidence which prove, beyond
question, that not only do the "dead" live beyond the grave, but that
they have the power, under suitable conditions and with the right kind
of medium, of posing for their portraits. Paul Miller in this
wonderfully illustrated book tells his story. |
|
First edition 1943 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
609 |
Maurice Barbanell |
THEY SHALL BE COMFORTED |
|
"I have written this book to
show the comfort available to mourners through the New Knowledge that
life continues beyond the grave. Every day, the Angel of Death visits
hundreds of homes removing the presence of a loved one from the family
circle. Inevitably, sorrow and mourning follow in his train. Those
left behind are filled with the deepest sadness that afflicts the human
race - the love that mourns its beloved. For centuries, death has been
regarded as the greatest mystery of life. Although, through the ages,
seers and mystics have caught glimpses of the Beyond, to the average
individual death has remained an insoluble riddle. It is true that all
religions have made references to an after-life, but of evidence, none
had been forthcoming. In more recent years, through the channels of
mediumship, a steady stream of messages has poured into this world,
there are, today, records of communications between the two states of
life - records that are constantly growing, cumulative in effect,
vouched for by men and women of unimpreachable integrity and honesty.
For over threequarters of a century, the New Knowledge of spirit life
and spirit activity has been given to this world. Sometimes it has been
accepted with open arms, but more often than not, like every new truth,
it has had to face opposition and hostility. Often the religious
leaders who should have been the first to accept proofs of Survival have
been fierce in their denunciation of those proofs, treating the New
Revelation, not as an ally, but as an enemy. But the evidence goes on
accumilating. Of their own accord, those who have passed through the
gates of death have returned to demonstrate their survival. They have
done so because they are attracted by the greatest force in the universe
- love. |
|
First edition No date:about 1938 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
610 |
Maurice Barbanell |
WHERE THERE IS A WILL |
|
Another excellent book on the truths of life after death by the founder editor of Psychic News. |
|
First edition 1952 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
611 |
Silver Birch |
PHILOSOPHY OF SILVER BIRCH |
|
"If the power of the spirit
could fail, the earth would cease to spin on its axis and the seasons no
longer follow one another in orderly sequence. If the power of the
spirit fail, the sun would cease to be a fiery orb and the moon fail to
reflect its illumination. If the power of the spirit could fail, no
seed would flower, no fruit would grow." "It is this latent spirit in
man that we seem to coax into higher expression and by so doing enjoy
the boundless beauties, the riches, lustre, dignity, grandeur and
nobility that are the expressions of a divine spirit."
edited by Stella Storm |
|
First edition 1969 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
612 |
Silver Birch |
LIGHT FROM SILVER BIRCH |
|
Silver Birch beginning his
mission to bring awareness of spiritual truth from beyond to the
troubled people of the earth, had many problems. His chosen medium was a
young agnostic businessman. He would be required to give up his
commercial career and devote his life to fulfilling the divine plan.
Silver Birch had no earthly contacts. His knowledge of English was
slight. Yet he found the means to control the young mans vocal
apparatus. A group of interested friends soon gathered, naming
themselves the Hannen Swaffer Home Circle. Swaff, the worlds most
famous journalist, knew the superb quality teachings must be published.
compiled by Pam Riva |
|
First edition 1983 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
613 |
Silver Birch |
THE SEED OF TRUTH |
|
A new reprint of one of the
books from the Teachings from Silver Birch Series.
"The word finis does not appear on the book of life because the body has
come to its end. Life goes on and its story is continued and developed
amidst scenes of greater splendour, beauty and richness than those who
dwell on Earth have any conception. It is sad that fruit should drop
fom the tree before it is ripe, but those who leave the physical body
before their spirits have had an opportunity for maturity are able to
complete their unfoldment elsewhere,"
"Man was born to be free, to dwell in liberty; he was not born to be a
slave, bound and fettered. His life should be full of richness, the
richness of mind and body and spirit, All knowledge should be open to
him, all truth, all wisdom, all inspiration. He should dwell in the
splendour of the spirit with none of the cramping, irksome, vexatious
restrictions imposed upon him by those who would deny his heritage and
thwart his destiny."
compiled by Tony Ortzen |
|
First edition 1987 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
614 |
Silver Birch |
THE SPIRIT SPEAKS |
|
"No man can set aside the
channels where the power of the spirit shall flow. The power of the
spirit cannot be regimented; it cannot answer to dictation; it cannot be
restricted; it cannot be confined to any instrument. Matter is
inferior; spirit is superior. Matter lives only because it is the
reflection of spirit." "Each has its place in the divine scheme.
None of the darker experiences - dark to you, that is, because you do
not like them - is so strong that you cannot overcome it. You will not
be called upon in your earth life to face any test or crisis for which
you do not possess the strength to overcome it. If I can make every
soul I reach not only know that but feel it and live it, then they would
be in harmony with the Great Spirit and the laws of the Great Spirit
would be supplying themselves with all that they require from day to
day, from hour to hour, from minute to minute, if you like. But there
are the great enemies, fear, worry, anxiety. These are the foes because
they set up conditions which disturb and prevent the very help that you
want to receive. Calmness, confidence, receptivity, with these the
spirit can flourish; with these you will find all you want from day to
day; they will provide all that is necessary for the physical
well-being."
compiled by Tony Ortzen |
|
First edition 1988 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
615 |
Frank Newman |
THE UNIVERSE OF SILVER BIRCH |
|
This volume is unique in that
Frank Newman has examined the teachings of Silver Birch and measured
them side by side with the deductions of modern science. Seldom has
such an undertaking proved so effective in bringing together two such
apparently opposing viewpoints. With a refreshingly open mind, he
applied his knowledge of science to examining and analysing the spirit
teachings of Silver Birch. The results of his momentous task bring new
insights into these magnificent teachings. In addition, we gain some
fascinating glimpses as to the real identity of the spirit guide
himself. |
|
First edition 1994 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
616 |
Patrick Jasper Lee |
WE BORROW THE EARTH |
|
This book reveals the inner
Romani shamanic path through the experiences and knowledge of one of the
few remaining chovihanos (Gypsey shamans) still practising in Britain.
Drawing on his personal experience and the story of his lineage,
Patrick Lee explores the history and culture of his people and their
knowledge of the ancient arts of healing and prophesy. He includes
chapters on their origins and customs as well as looking at their
potions, spells, charms and curses in an open and accessible way. The
fact that Gypsies have never before written about their own culture
makes this a unique and fascinating work. |
|
First edition 2000 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
617 |
John O'Donohue |
ANAM CARA |
|
Spiritual wisdom from the
celtic world.
When St Patrick came to Ireland in the fifth century AD, he encountered
the Celtic people and a flourishing spiritual tradition that had alrady
existed for thousands of years. He discovered that where the Christians
worshipped one God, the Celts had many and found divinity all around
them: in the rivers, hills, sea and sky. The ancient Celtic reverence
for the spirit in all things survives today - a vibrant legacy of
mystical wisdom that is unique in the Western world. Now, in this
exquisite book, Irish poet and scholar John O'Donohue shares with us the
secrets of this ancient world. Using authentic Irish prayers and
blessings, he reveals the treasures that lie hidden within your own soul
and the "secret divinity" in your relationships. As he traces the
cycles of life and nature, he draws from the holy waters of Ireland's
spiritual heritage to lead you to a place where your heart can be healed
and nourished. It is a place where you will discover your own anam
cara, your true "soul friend".
|
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
618 |
Malidoma Patrice Some |
THE HEALING WISDOM OF AFRICA |
|
The Healing Wisdom of Africa is
a fascinating journey through the ritual and spiritual wisdom of the
Dagara people who are renowned throughout West Africa for their
miraculous healing powers. The author brings a unique insight into the
spiritual life of traditional Africa and explains how this ancient
knowledge may be used to heal widespread emotional stress and spiritual
hunger in the West. By adapting the ritual and ceremony of his people
to the modern world he shows us how we can find new balance between the
self, the spirit, the community and the environment. As he draws us
closer to the heart of the indigenous world we come to a new
understanding of our own life's purpose through a deeper connection to
nature and spirit in daily life. |
|
First edition 1998 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
619 |
Shimara Kumara |
THE FLOWERS OF LIFE |
|
Flower and Gem essences for
healing and spiritual transformation. Shimara is a leading
international healer, visionary and creator of Crystal Herbs flower and
gem essences. Clairvoyant and naturally sensitive from birth, she
switched these faculties off in childhood to make it easier to live a
"normal" life. During her own path of healing, Shimara's psychic gifts
returned to be used for helping others. Working as a vibrational
medicine therapist, healer and sensitive, she helped the healing process
of hundreds of clients and continues to do so through her healers
training school, the Golden Age Reiki Academy. Shimara developed many
new flower and gem essences, in addition to the traditional flower
essence collection. These are well described in this book, which is
beautiful illustrated with flower photographs, designed to be an
informative diagnostic tool for therapists and anyone interested in
healing self or others. |
|
First edition 1997 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
620 |
Mari Hall |
PRACTICAL REIKI |
|
Practical Reiki is a fully
illustrated, complete guide to Reiki, the universal life-giving energy
system. Reiki is an ancient form of harmonization by laying on of hands
which was rediscovered in the mid 1800's. This method of transmitting
universal energy can bring great relief to the recipient; not just in
the physical body, but also on an emotional, mental and spiritual level. |
|
First edition 1997 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
621 |
Geddes and Grosset |
GHOSTS |
|
Pocket reference digest
An entertaining and enlightening introduction to the world of real-life
ghosts. As well as an introduction to the various forms of paranormal
activity encountered by many people, there are over ninety descriptions
of ghostly or mysterious encounters experienced by people as varied as
Carl Jung and Queen Wilhelmina of the Netherlands.
Geddes and Grosset
|
|
First edition 1999 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
622 |
Geraldine Cummins |
UNSEEN ADVENTURES |
|
An Autobiography covering
Thirty-four Years of Work in Physical Research.
Geraldine Cummins was born in 1890 in the county of Cork, one of
eleven children of the Professor of medicine at Cork University. A
naturally gifted author at a young age she went on to become one of the
worlds greatest automatic psychic writers and by the mid 1920's she was
producing automatic scripts at an astonishing rate. Sitting alone in a
room with nothing more than a pad of notepaper and a pencil, over the
years she wrote fifteen books transmitted from the world of spirit until
her death in Cork in 1969. This book written in 1951 tells the
fascinating story of her life up until that time.
|
|
First edition 1951 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
623 |
Florizel Von Reuter |
PSYCHICAL EXPERIENCES OF A MUSICIAN |
|
From the introduction by Arthur
Conan Doyle:
"Music lovers of twenty years ago will doubtless still remember
"Florizel" the boy violinist, who made such a sensation in Great Britain
at that time. He appeared unsupported twenty times in the largest
halls of London, and he gave eighty-five concerts in the provinces. He
also appeared three times in Buckingham Palace before Queen Alexandra
and King Edward VII winning for himself a name which is second to none
among the violin virtuosos of the Continent." This book is the story
of his fascinating experiences of the world of spirit.
|
|
First edition No Date: about 1928 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
624 |
Dr Robert Crookall. DSC. PD |
THE SUPREME ADVENTURE |
|
The scientist Dr Robert
Crookall was amazed at the consistency of evidence of life after death
which was coming from all over the world. Communications from every
country, from Brazil, from England, from South Africa, from Tibet, from
Europe, from India and from Australia are all consistent. He was also
amazed that they were identical with the beliefs held by the natives of
the Hawaiian Islands, cut off from other civilisations for years prior
to their "discovery" by Captain Cook in 1788. He was also amazed at the
consistency of the evidence given by people who had out of body
experiences, near-death experiences and the communications of high level
mediums. Crookall was a member of the Churches' Fellowship for
Psychical Study which came into being in England to allow those who had
personal experiences of a psychic and spiritual nature to share them and
to examine them in the light of traditional church teachings on the
afterlife. The preface of this book was written by a former Chief
Justice of the British High Court who concluded that; "It behoves
every ordained Minister in the land to use it."
In this classical work Dr Robert Crookall undertook a systamatic study
of the psychic evidence given by many of the great authors from this
past century among with hundreds of other communications from the
Otherside. His work is considered "scientific" in that it painstakingly
and objectively examines the evidence, it is internally coherent and it
provides hypotheses consistent with a great mass of factual evidence.
|
|
First edition 1961 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
625 |
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle |
THE HISTORY OF SPIRITUALISM - VOLUME TWO |
|
Few books are more important in
the annals of psychic literature than Sir Arthur Conan Doyle's
brilliant and ever-readable The History of Spiritualism. Amongst the
chapters in this book he discusses: The Career of Eusapia Palladino;
Great Mediums from 1870-1900 e.g Charles H Foster, Madame D'Esperance,
William Eglinton and Stainton Moses; The Society For Physical Research;
Ectoplasm; Spiritual Photography; Voice Mediumship and Moulds; French,
German and Italian Spiritualism, Spiritualism and the War; and the
After-Life as seen by Spiritualists. |
|
First edition 1926 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
626 |
Sirrell |
ANGELS |
|
"I was born in England at the
end of the Second World War. My life has been for me, an eventful one.
The place I resided in until my marriage was a place called Knutsford,
in Cheshire, nestled between beautiful surrounding villages. I moved to
a small town called Wilmslow when I married. My life was busy raising
four children. When nearing my thirtieth year I emigrated to Australia,
which was in 1974. Over the years my family grew up, leaving me with
time on my hands to explore whatever my heart desires. If this book can
give just one person a purpose in life then that for me is enough."
A beautiful book full of wisdom and spiritual truth given lovingly to
help others.
|
|
First edition 1999 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
627 |
Joan Wester Anderson |
WHERE ANGELS WALK |
|
True stories of heavenly
visitors. Where Angels Walk is a heartwarming, spine-tingling, true
account of people who in time of need, have found themselves in the
loving presence of Beings who led them out of threatening darkness and
into the light of hope. Defying explanation or description in our
everyday terminology, the beings they encountered can only be called ...
angels. For years, many of these people have cherished their
extraordinary experiences in the secret depths of their hearts until
author Joan Wester Anderson encouraged them to come forward with their
spiritual treasures, to share with you their wonder and awe and in doing
so transform and enhance your life. |
|
First edition 1992 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
628 |
D.J. Lightfoot |
YOUR DEAR COMPANIONS |
|
In that part of France known as
Provence it used to be customary for peasants to greet each other with
the words, Bonjour, vous et votre cher compagnon! - "Good day, you and
your dear companion! The origin of this charming yet strange greeting
lay in their belief that the person they were addressing was accompanied
by an invisible guardian angel who also deserved to be treated with
courtesy, So real to them were these beings that they would no more
think of neglecting to greet them than they would dream of saying hello
to man ignoring the wife who walked beside him. Such a belief - in
Provence or anywhere else - is not so widespread nowadays. The fact,
however, that a long-held belief is no longer current is, of course, no
proof that it was erroneous. It is the purpose of this book to
reintroduce this idea and demonstrate that it is founded on a reality.
Most of what modern Man believes is taken on trust. His faith in the
authority of those he believes to be "experts" is almost total. The
primary meaning of the word "expert" is simply someone who has tried
something for himself and found it to be true. In this book you will
read accounts of many spiritual experts and will be able to judge for
yourself whether they have opened up for you a more surprising world
than the one you thought you lived in. |
|
First edition 1990 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
629 |
Ted Andrews |
HOW TO MEET AND WORK WITH SPIRIT GUIDES |
|
Often, we experience spirit
contact in our lives but fail to recognise it for what it is. Through
the easy techniques presented in this book you can learn to access and
attune to beings such as guardian angels, nature spirits and elementals,
spirit totems, archangels, gods and goddesses - as well as family and
friends after their physical death. Your contact with higher soul
energies strengthens your will and enlightens your mind as you read this
book that helps you take your first steps through the corridors of the
life beyond. |
|
First edition 1992 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
630 |
Diana Cooper |
THE POWER OF INNER PEACE |
|
Diana Cooper as well as being a
highly respected metaphysical writer is a therapist, broadcaster and
healer. She runs popular workshops in Britain and abroad In The Power
of Inner Peace, she offers inspiration to everyone who is seeking
greater meaning and happiness in their life. Giving practical advice
and using case histories from her own work, she helps us to make the
journey to the peaceful and tranquill world that lies within each of
us. When we connect with this quite centre, we can face our fears,
regain our confidence and find the strength to heal ourselves. |
|
First edition 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
631 |
Emanuel Swedenborg |
HEAVEN AND HELL |
|
Emanuel Swedenborg was born in
Stockholm in 1688. He was educated at Uppsala University. His
inventive and scientific activities attracted the attention of Charles
XII, King of Sweden. During the period 1716 to 1734, Swedenborg wrote
extensively on scientific and, especially, metallurgical subjects making
his name widely known throughout Europe. From 1734 to 1742 his
attention was chiefly directed to physiological and anatomical subjects,
more especially to the human body. Swedenborg was the first to show
that the cortical substance of the brain is the exclusive seat of the
higher psychical activities, and his physiological researches were
avowedly directed to the discovery of the soul. His discoveries and
theories aroused so much interest early in the last century as to lead
the Royal Swedish Academy of Sciences to publish, in 1907, an extensive
collection of his worked on Geology, Chemistry, Physics and Cosmology.
In 1743 a remarkable event occurred in Swedenborg's life. He thus
briefly describes that event in a letter written to an English clergyman
in 1769. "I have been called to a holy office by the Lord Himself, who
most graciously manifested Himself in person to me, His servant, in the
year 1743; when He opened my sight to the view of the spiritual world,
and granted me the privilege of conversing with spirits and angels,
which I enjoy to this day." In or about 1743, therefore, he
relinquished the study of material science, recognizing that all his
learning had been merley a preparation for the exalted mission to which
he was to devote the remainder of his life.
Heaven and Hell is a description based on things heard and seen;
Swedenborg's intromission into the spiritual world was Divinely intended
and permitted so that knowledge of that world might be revealed to
mankind. We are shown how we enter the next world; the spiritual
character of our surroundings there; where and how judgment is effected;
the life of heaven; the universal language; recreations; the orderly
arrangement of heaven into societies; these and many other matters are
described in great detail.
|
|
First edition 1758 / Revised 1958 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
632 |
Emanuel Swedenborg |
THE LAST JUDGMENT |
|
The Last Judgment foretold in
the Book of Revelation refers not to some future earthly calamity, but
to events which Swedenborg witnessed in the spiritual world in the year
1757. He describes the re-ordering of the spiritual world and the
restoration of equilibrium. |
|
First edition 1758/1763 New edition:1991 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
633 |
Emanuel Swedenborg |
THE NEW JERUSALEM |
|
The New Jerusalem and its
Heavenly Doctrine according to what has been heard from heaven, with an
introdution concerning the new heaven and the new earth. This book
summarizes the main teachings contained in the theological writings of
Swedenborg, and forms an excellent introduction to them. |
|
First edition 1758/Translated edition: 1990 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
634 |
Emanuel Swedenborg |
DIVINE LOVE AND WISDOM |
|
Angelic Wisdom concerning the
Divine Love and Wisdom. The book is in five parts, treating of the
essential nature of the Lord, the media of creation, the unique
doctrines of "degrees" of creation, and "uses" (the supreme object of
all creation), and the correspondential relationship between man's
bodily structure and content, and its spiritual counterpart, the facts
of anatomical science being cited in detail to confirm the spiritual
exposition. |
|
First edition 1763/Translated edition: 1969 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
635 |
Rudolph Steiner |
ROSICRUCIAN WISDOM |
|
In Rosicrucian Wisdom, Rudolph
Steiner (1861-1925) speaks out of the stream of Rosicrucian teaching.
But rather than borrowing old ideas from historical tradition, Steiner
presents a wholly new contribution arising from the results of his own
experiential research. He talks of the Rosicrucian path as being
appropriate for the modern spiritual seeker, but warns that Rosicrucian
teaching should not be taken as abstract theory. Rather than remaining
in the head or even the heart, spiritual ideas should reach into daily
action, transforming all aspects of life, including the law of destiny,
the fact of life after death, ways of developing spiritual vision,
humanity's past and future evolution and much more. |
|
First edition 1907/revised 1954 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
636 |
Irene Sowter |
TAILS TO TELL |
|
The extraordinary experiences
of an animal healer. In this book, Irene Sowter traces her remarkable
life, which began in a harsh area of London where her psychic gifts
first manifested. Poor though home circumstances may have been, she
enjoyed a childhood surrounded by loving parents ... and spirit helpers.
Today, Irene and her husband Gerald run a well known spiritual healing
centre in Reigate, Surrey, where they treat both humans and animals.
Tails to Tell, as well as being an autobiography, describes many of the
heartwarming cures they have performed - with the invaluable assistance
of a "dead" vet, and his pet dog. |
|
First edition 1992 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
637 |
Ann Walker |
THE MYSTIC LIFE OF ANIMALS |
|
As the New Age moves upon us,
we will increasingly recognise animals as spiritual beings worthy of our
respect, "Communication is the golden key that unlocks the door to
understanding." Animal communication is mostly concerned with emotions,
feelings, events and happenings in the here and now. We tend to think
that animal communication involves them understanding what we want, but
in truth, it is a two-way process. A lifetime of living with and loving
animals has led Ann Walker to conclude that much communication with
animals is on a mind to mind level, and she tells of many personal
psychic experiences with animals. Old superstitions and magical beliefs
about animals are examined, also the attitude of different religions.
Ann shares her own experiences and those of others with dead pets
returning or sending messages and expresses a firm belief in the
continued spiritual existence of animals after death. This is a
fascinating book for all who love animals. |
|
First edition 1998 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
638 |
Andrew Green |
HAUNTED HOUSES |
|
The subject of ghosts and
hauntings has been a controversial topic ever since man saw his first
phantom. But in recent years parapsychology has opened up new methods
of research and investigation into the hundreds of cases of haunted
houses which continue to be reported at the rate of 150 every year.
This book describes and illustrates some of the better and a few of the
lesser known properties in Britain affected by spectres, phenomenal
smells and mysterious footsteps. Having been actively engaged in the
study of the paranormal for some 30 years, Andrew Green has written
numerous books about haunted properties, as well as being a well-known
broadcaster and tutor for courses on parapsychology for the Kent
Education Authority. |
|
First edition 1975 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
639 |
David Lawson |
YOUR PSYCHIC POTENTIAL |
|
We all have the potential to
develop our psychic and intuitive abilities. You may discover that you
are a natural healer or a latent clairaudient. You could awaken a
powerful clairvoyant vision. Activating your psychic potential is safe,
transformational, and fun. This introduction includes; exercises to
encourage your unique psychic abilities, techniques for awakening your
inner wisdom, ways to develop the latent powers of your mind, and
affirmations, visualizations, and practical guidance to enhance your
spiritual growth. David Lawson is a leading international expert in
self-help, self-healing and psychic development. As a child he was a
natural intuitive, and as a teenager developed auric sight and profound
healing abilities. He now runs courses throughout the world and has
written several acclaimed books. |
|
First edition 1997 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
640 |
Billy Roberts |
MASTER YOUR PSYCHIC POWERS |
|
Discover your own psychic
powers, learn how to activate thought power, explore time vision and
channelling, teach yourself healing meditation, discover the powers of
the aura. All of the previous and much, much more is contained in the
pages of this exciting and stimulating new handbook. Written with the
benefit of Billy Roberts' twenty-five plus years of practical and wide
experience in psychic activities, this book will prove an invaluable and
workable manuel for anyone endeavouring to develop their own special
powers. Every exercise in the book has been tried and tested
successfully for a number of years in the author's many nation-wide
psychic workshops. In addition, the information contained here has been
responsible for the effective devolopment of many mediums, psychics and
healers. |
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
641 |
Grace and Ivan Cooke |
THE LIGHT IN BRITAIN |
|
A vision of the ancient
spiritual centres of Britain.
The spirit of the great sun-gods, the God-men who first came to this
ancient land of Britain, still lingers to inspire the people of this
land to deeds of courage, kindness and goodwill.
So says White Eagle, whose wisdom animates this clairvoyant
investigation of some of the spiritual centres of Britain's prehistory:
Stonehenge, Avebury, St David's Head, Maiden Castle.
Grace and Ivan Cooke both contribute to this account of our early
ancestors and to the story of the ageless light dwelling in the heart of
Britain which, as we learn to respond to it, can bring the nations
together in the ideal of brotherhood.
|
|
First edition 1971 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
642 |
White Eagle |
JESUS TEACHER AND HEALER |
|
This book offers a broad
spectrum of teaching about the message of Jesus, about his work of
healing, about the miracles and parables, and a beautiful
reinterpretation from an inner viewpoint of some traditional Christian
beliefs. Above all, however, we feel it would be White Eagle's wish
that his words should help those who read them simply to feel that they
can draw close to the Master; that, in their hearts, they may touch the
hem of his garment. He brings us a vision of the great healer and
teacher whose simple love has been a universal inspiration, far wider
even than just to those who work within the Christian tradition. This
book is also a useful source of readings for services and for
meditation. |
|
First edition 1985 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
643 |
Ylana Hayward |
A WAY TO HAPPINESS |
|
The White Eagle way of
meditation provides a unique means of crossing from the clamour of the
everyday world into the silence of the true self, to find not only true
peace but a deep understanding of the love at the heart of all life.
Part of its power derives from the use of visual images, images which
gently take the awareness from the outer life into an inner, creative
life; and it is through allowing this creativity full play that the soul
begins to realize that it contains within itself the seed of its own
perfection. Slowly, through practice, this sense of its perfection
becomes more and more real until the whole life of the seeker is
transformed. Ylana Hayward is the daughter of Grace Cooke, whose 1955
textbook Meditation is still a classic today. She has been teaching
students the White Eagle way of meditiation for very many years and
describes, with all the clarity that comes from personal experience, the
deep communion and reassurance that comes through this form of
meditation. |
|
First edition 1995 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
644 |
Gary Zukav |
THE SEAT OF THE SOUL |
|
A new species is being born.
The Seat of the Soul is about this birth. This new species longs for
harmony, cooperation, sharing, and reverence for Life. It uses higher
orders of logic and justice - those of the heart. The number of people
who are becoming aware of this birth is growing very fast, because the
new species is being born inside all of us. The Seat of the Soul
provides a vocabulary for this new species - a vocabulary of authentic
power, the alignment of the personality with the soul. Human experience
is exploding beyond the five senses, and The Seat of the Soul is about
that, too. This is the most exciting time to be on earth and this book
describes why. |
|
First edition 1989 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
645 |
Edited by Phil Cousineau |
SOUL AN ARCHAEOLOGY |
|
Readings from Socrates to Ray
Charles
What does soul mean? Is it, as in Aristotle's classic definition, the
"life-giving principle"? Is it the shiver up your spine when Aretha
Franklin sings the blues? Or is it the simple, breathtaking beauty of a
Pablo Neruda poem? Soul offers a range of stories, essays, poems, myths
and songs that illustrate the ways in which soul has been expressed
through the ages and explores its myriad dimension - philosophical,
spiritual, theological and even alchemical. Selections include writing
from such literary and historical luminaries as Carl Jung, James Joyce,
Thomas Aquinas, St Teresa of Avila, D.H. Lawrence, Jack Kerouac, John
Keats, Milan Kunders, Alice Walker, Wassily Kandinsky and many, many
more.
|
|
First edition 1994 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
646 |
Pamela Constantine |
THE SEVEN LAMPS AND DAWN OF AQUARIUS |
|
Pamela Constantine is known to
many as the founder of the Solar Sanctuary, for thirty years a centre
working to assist those on the journey of Self-realization. Her
writings, which originally appeared under The Sharkti Laureate imprint,
supported this work with books, papers and magazines, evolving to
enshrine the timeless values in general literature and poetry. As a
published poet from the age of thirteen, who has contributed to Poetry
Review and other publications in the UK and around the world, her aim
remains "to revive a sense of soul in society by the subtle power of the
word."
These two booklets are a collection of her individual poems.
|
|
First edition 1999/2000 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
647 |
Grace Magazine |
GRACE MAGAZINE |
|
A quarterly magazine devoted to
Nature's way.
To help us to live. Positive thinking: spiritual refreshment; healing
by natural methods, and to give expression to thoughts which the
Publisher believes will contribute to social and spiritual development.
|
|
First edition |
1 issue: C |
———————————————————————————— |
648 |
Zodiac |
REFLECTIONS ON A THEME |
|
Here is a new aproach to the
concept of the Zodiac Messages. It will help you to a deeper
understanding of the Christ Mission of the Greater World, and encourage
further development of your own individual spiritual progression through
active service to your fellow man wherever you find yourself.
The messages in this book are the bridge between the earthly and
heavenly conditions. These heavenly conditions are available on the
Earth for anyone, anywhere, who is prepared to read and understand.
Megan Long, Greater World National President
|
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
649 |
Lita De Alberdi |
CHANNELLING |
|
What it is and how to do it.
Lita De Alberdi is a gifted spiritual teacher who has taught hundreds of
people to channel their guides. In this accessible and practical book,
she explains how you too can learn to contact and channel your own
spiritual guide. Full of easy-to-follow meditations and exercises based
on her successful courses. She also includes channelled material from
her own guides and answers the many questions that people ask.
|
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
650 |
Ron Baker |
AUTOMATIC WRITINGS OF RON BAKER |
|
Ronald Baker, a brilliant
natural medium, later to become a former SNU secretary, was born into a
staunch Roman Catholic family. He was destined for priesthood, but at
the impressionable age of eleven he was thrown into conflict between
Rome's interpretation of irreversible hell, with its fire and brimstone,
and the tranquiltity of his astral visions. Dismissed from his
religious instruction class for daring to question the priest's
authority, he was plunged into soul searching which finally led him to
renounce not only the fear and superstition that he could not accept,
but also the position that awaited him at the seminary.
This book as well as being a short autobiography is a book of questions
put by Alec Gilchrist, and answered by Ron Baker through his automatic
writings.
|
|
First edition About 1980 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
651 |
George Gallup Jr |
ADVENTURES IN IMMORTALITY |
|
Is Death the end?
George Gallup, president of the world famous Gallup Poll, here presents
the results of an eighteen month long investigation that explored the
hidden fears, hopes and beliefs of ordinary people, presenting them, not
as proof of life after death, but as a series of statements that speak
for themselves. Men and women tell of white clouds, of long-dead
relatives coming to meet them, of sensations of floating, sinking and,
above all, of great peace and joy. Adventures in Immortality, forces us
to look again at our own attitudes towards death and to explore the
implications of a mystery that may have no final answer this side of the
grave.
George Gallup Jr with William Proctor |
|
First edition 1983 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
652 |
Dr. Melvin Morse |
TRANSFORMED BY THE LIGHT |
|
Millions of people throughout
the world have had a near-death experience. In this fascinating and
moving book, Melvin Morse and Paul Perry present a wealth of evidence
from people who have returned from death after being Transformed by the
Light. They show how the lives of people who return from the brink of
death are usually changed for the better spiritually and physically for
the rest of their lives. These extraordinary revelations may
permanently alter your views on death and dying.
"I didn't want to return to my body. I was comfortable there, and the
light that surrounded me was pure love. The being of light asked me if I
wanted to go back and I said "No". He then told me I had to go back,
that there was more work to be done. I was then sucked back into my
body. There was no other way to describe it. Suddenly, I was there,
looking up at a doctor."
Dr. Melvin Morse with Paul Perry
|
|
First edition 1992 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
653 |
Andre Luiz |
THE ASTRAL CITY |
|
This was the first book of a
series to be written by Dr Andre Luiz (Spirit), received through the
mediumship of Francisco Candido Xavier and is the only one so far
translated into English. This series of books is highly esteemed within
the Spiritist Doctrine as they bring information on all manner of
topics and are unique in that they relate, through actual case
histories, the true picture of our physical experiences as seen through
the all-seeing eyes and wisdom of Spirits of great Light. They are
narrated from the world of spirit in such a fashion that we are enabled
to see the simultaneous happenings on both the material and spiritual
levels. Therefore we are helped to more clearly understand the workings
of the Law of Cause and Effect. From this we are greatly aided in
understanding our own situations during the present incarnation.
Andre Luiz through Francisco Candido Xavier |
|
First edition First Portuguese edition: 1944 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
654 |
Allan Kardec |
THE SPIRITS' BOOK |
|
The Spirits Book contains
teachings of high degree spirits transmitted through various mediums
detailing the principles of spiritist doctrine on the immortality of the
soul, the nature of spirits and their relations with men, the moral
law, the present life, the future life and the destiny of the human
race. This book is mostly questions and answers. It is a valuable
spirit book definately worth investigating. |
|
First edition 1996 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
655 |
Margaret Clark |
THE LIFE OF A MEDIUM |
|
This book is about spirit
rescues, and the many spirit entities that were released into the light
of knowledge, by myself and my wonderful spirit Guides. The feeling of
joy that is experienced when the rescue of a lost soul is successfully
accomplished is heavenly.
It is an ongoing journey of enlightenment, evolvement and spiritual
enchantment that is never ending …
|
|
First edition 2003 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
656 |
Nostradamus |
BIOGRAPHY OF NOSTRADAMUS |
|
VIDEO
For 400 years his dark prophesies have inspired fear and debate; his
followers say he predicted the French Revolution, the birth of Adolf
Hitler and the assassination of John F. Kennedy. In an age of magic and
superstition, the medieval physician Nostradamus gained renown for
healing victims of the deadly plague. But it is his prophetic visions -
900 cryptic poems called The Centuries that have enthralled generation
after generation of readers. Did he, as believers claim, predict some
of history's most monumental events from the Great Fire of London to the
destruction of the space shuttle Challenger ? And what about his
terrifying prophecies of the end of the world? In this remarkable
presentation scholars are interviewed on both sides of the discussion
and the makers of this video invite you to examine the evidence as you
enter the eerie world of the man known as the "Prophet of Doom".
presented by The History Channel Nostradamus |
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
657 |
Francesca Fremantle |
THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD |
|
In this classic scripture of
Tibetan Buddhism, traditionally read aloud to the dying to help them
attain liberation, death and rebirth are seen as a process that provides
an opportunity to recognize the true nature of mind. This translation
of The Tibetan Book of the Dead emphasizes the practical advice that the
book offers to the living. The insightful commentary by Chogyam
Trungpa, written in clear, concise language, explains what the text
teaches us about human psychology. This edition will be of interest to
people concerned with the death and dying. As well as those who seek
greater spiritual understanding in everyday life.
translated with commentary by Francesca Fremantle and Chogyam Trunga |
|
First edition 1975 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
658 |
Florence Scovel-Shinn |
THE SECRET DOOR TO SUCCESS |
|
Everyone has the potential to
be successful, but this success is often obscured behind a wall, a wall
we may well have built ourselves in the first place. This book explains
how to find and open the door through that wall. Success is not a
secret, but a system. We can be prosperous, happy, healthy, loved and
much more besides, and few writers have explained the system with as
much clarity as Florence Scovel-Shinn. |
|
First edition 1930 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
659 |
Mary Ellen Carter |
EDGAR CAYCE ON HEALING |
|
Edgar Cayce's ability to
diagnose, while in trance, the physical disorders of a person he had
never met, and then suggest effective treatment, remains one of the most
astonishing psychic feats of all time. In this book a dozen of these
cases are scrutinized. What sort of person consulted Edgar Cayce? What
did the readings mean to those who received them? What light does
modern medicine shed on his unorthodox recommendations for treatment?
The often surprising answers make fascinating reading for everybody
interested in psychic phenomena and in medical science.
Mary Ellen Carter and William A. Mcgarey, M.D |
|
First edition 1972 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
660 |
Joseph Millard |
EDGAR CAYCE MAN OF MIRACLES |
|
Edgar Cayce might well be
called one of the world's greatest healers; certainly he was one of the
most controversial figures America ever produced. "ILLITERATE MAN
BECOMES A DOCTOR WHEN HYPNOTISED...STRANGE POWER SHOWN BY EDGAR CAYCE
PUZZLES PHYSICIANS... these were the headlines printed in 1910 by the
New York Times. Cayce recognised from the beginning, that this unknown
power came from God, and was a force he could neither abuse nor disavow.
His mission in life was to heal the sick. Over and over again he
confounded those who scoffed and labelled him a hoaxer. Yet, when
sceptical medical investigators studied his 30,000 case records, they
arrived at an astouding conclusion: more than 90% were absolutely
accurate. Doctors throughout the world not only sent their incurables,
but also asked him to carry out diagnoses on patients many thousands of
miles away, whom Cayce had never seen. Joseph Millard, who was
authorised to write this biography, tells an amazing and inspiring
story; shows how, throughout Cayce's life, he was helped by the devotion
of his wife and family and how in the midst of poverty and derision,
they kept faith. Reading this masterly biography one sees how far
medical science lags behind; for it proves unquestionably that healing
by faith can indeed produce so-called "miracles". |
|
First edition 1961 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
661 |
Harry Emerson |
LISTEN MY SON |
|
The story of Hunter Selkirk,
born in the year 1900.
Employed as a Miner at the local Colliery. A natural Psychic, he
began to see spirit forms at the age of three. A remarkable experience
at the age of sixteen changed his life. Coming home one night from his
work and passing through a wood he saw a brilliant light and with it
came the vision of a man whom he recognised as his father, killed eight
years earlier in the West Stanley Pit explosion. Hunter was not only a
great Medium but also a wonderful Healer. He passed into Spirit in
1965. "Listen, my son, and listen attentively. What I am about to
relate is my own experience, and will be of great value to you in your
conduct of life. It will teach you how to live wisely, how to live
socially, politically and religiously, and it will not confine you to a
narrow way of living."
|
|
First edition About 1943 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
662 |
Grace Cooke |
THE GOLDEN KEY |
|
Tragedy struck one autumn day
when Percy Welsford died after a short illness. Indeed, it was one of a
series of calamities to strike the Welsford famly, including the death
of his brother George whilst in action during the First World War. But
as their mother, Ethel Welsford, was to discover, both her sons were
more alive than ever. For there followed a series of dramatic and
touching letters written from beyond the veil through famous medium
Grace Cooke.
Though these letters from a "dead" son to his dearly loved mother were
received in 1926, they have lost none of their importance, illumination
and exhilaration. They really do cast a new light on what awaits all on
entering the spirit realms.
Percy Welsford through Grace Cooke
|
|
First edition 1927 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
663 |
John G. Fuller |
THE GHOST OF FLIGHT 401 |
|
In the dead of night in
December, 1972, Eastern Airlines jumbo jet Flight 401 plunged into the
Florida Everglades killing 101 passengers and crew. Months later, the
ghosts of its pilot and flight engineer began to appear on sisterships
carrying parts salvaged from the crash...
At first, airline employees refused to talk - afraid of possible
reprisals. But gradually, one after another, stewardesses, pilots and
ground crews came forward to tell their part of one of the most
astonishing stories in recent aviation history.
|
|
First edition 1978 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
664 |
Glennyce S. Eckersley |
ANGELS AND MIRACLES |
|
Only in recent times have we
felt alone and isolated in our universe. Yet for centuries men and
women fervently believed in the intervention of a higher power in their
lives, of the gift of angels and of extraordinary coincidences. Today,
as more of us search for greater spiritual fulfilment, we wonder once
again whether such things may mean we live, not in a purely chaotic
world, but in one of harmony, meaning and order. The author has here
collected many fascinating true stories of angelic visitations in
people's day-to-day lives; unusual tales from the dreamworld and
contemporary miracles from around the globe. They all suggest the
fundamental interconnection of life and a greater overarching truth that
we may never fully understand... |
|
First edition 1997 (published as Out of the Blue) |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
665 |
Joe Cooper |
MODERN PSYCHIC EXPERIENCES |
|
In this refreshing and
open-minded book Joe Cooper, a recognized authority on the paranormal,
offers new and detailed evidence on psychic phenomina. Avoiding
familiar cases and sensational presentation, he documents remarkable
experiences through transcripts of interviews conducted by himself
during the seventies and eighties. Interviewees describe encounters
with the dead and experiences of teleportation, astral travel and
clairvoyance. Data from materialization sittings are also reported.
Building on the evidence, the author suggests that facts call for
explanations as to how and why the phenomena occur. The importance of
altered states of consciousness and strong emotions is stressed. He
calls for a more tolerant attitude among physical and social scientists
in examining the significance of these experiences and claims that such
broader outlooks will bring benefits at personal, social and aesthetic
levels. |
|
First edition 1989 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
666 |
Peter Hurkos |
PSYCHIC |
|
"I am what parapsychologists
refer to as a psychic." "When I shake hands with a stranger, I know all
about him: his character, his private life, even the house in which he
lives. For in simply touching his hand I receive a series of images
like those thrown on a screen by a motion picture projector. They are
often unrelated images, one picture flashing to another quite different
from the one before, but I see them. After a single handshake I know as
much about the man as an old and dear friend would know - often much
more." "I hold no grudge against anyone who is sceptical; I expect all
people to be sceptical until the truth is proven to them in such a way
that they can no longer deny it. That is the scientific way. In
thousands of public and private "readings" I have convinced sceptics,
simply by telling them things about themselves, and discussing
occurances that I could not possibly have known about by any normal
human means, except through extra-sensory perception. Every man has the
power of ESP within himself, but he must learn to use it. That is the
purpose of this book; to prove to the reader that the power does exist,
by telling in detail the story of my life, and through that story to
encourage people to believe that the workings of the human mind are
infinite." |
|
First edition 1961 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
667 |
Donald Galloway |
INEVITABLE JOURNEY |
|
Since childhood he has had
evidence that he is possessed of psychic gifts and, although for many
years he attempted to reject these, he finally gave himself to public
and private mediumship. A member of several scientific and spiritual
organisations, founder of the Lynwood Fellowship and a member of the
National Federation of Spiritual Healers for thirty years, Don has also
done considerable research work with the International Association of
Metapsychology and was awarded a Doctorate in Philosophy in 1986; also
in that year he was accorded the Psychic News annual award as
"Spiritualist of the Year". Inevitable Journey is less an
autobiography than an exploration of Don Galloway's world, the psychics
and mediums that he has met, the experiences and manifestations that he
has witnessed or been part of, and the deductions that he has made about
the nature and potential of man's spirit. |
|
First edition 1974 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
668 |
The Society of Metaphysicians |
The Society of Metaphysicians |
|
It all began with mystical and
revelatory experiences in the life of John J Williamson, from his early
boyhood onwards. During World War Two, John Williamson was a radio
instructor in the RAF at Cranwell in Lincolnshire. From 1944 to 1946 he
also lectured to his colleagues on "the new metaphysics" which much
later became known as neometaphysics: These lectures, which were later
published in three booklets as "The Cranwell Lectures", constituted the
first formal presentation of neometaphysics. As a result of the
interest generated in the lectures, the Society of Metaphysicians was
founded in 1944.
Lecture One - The Structure of All B Lecture Two -
Metaphysical Application B
Lecture Three - Metaphysical Analysis B Cataclysm Has
begun by J.J.Williamson B
Twice Yearly Neometaphysical Digest - Some Volumes (1994 onwards ..)
B
An Outline of the Priniciples and Concepts of the New metaphysics by
J.J. Williamson (1967) B
Aura Research (1998) B Members' Practical Guide, How you may join in
the Society's work B
Educational Services, Correspondence Courses & Recommended
Bibliography (1997) B
|
|
First edition |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
669 |
Matthew Manning |
NO FAITH REQUIRED |
|
"The idea that healing only
works if you believe in it is simply not true! Healing can work on a
sceptical person yet sometimes fail to help a believer. Healing also
works in test-tube laboratories, as well as on animials and
brain-damaged children. It cannot be said that these results are
brought about by psychological factors, faith or placebo. There is no
faith required." Matthew Manning |
|
First edition 1995 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
670 |
Ted Andrews |
HOW TO HEAL WITH COLOUR |
|
When you are "balanced", you
can more effectively rid yourself of toxins and negative patterns that
hinder your life processes. One way to achieve balance is through the
vibrational remedy of colour. Colours interact with the human energy
system in a unique way to stabalize physical, emotional, mental and
spiritual conditions. |
|
First edition 1992 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
671 |
Maurice Barbanell |
THIS IS SPIRITUALISM |
|
"Do you live after death?" "I
am certain of it ... To me the "dead" are as real and vital as what are
called the living", so says Maurice Barbanell who after 37 years of
research is acknowledged to be one of the greatest authorities on
Spiritualism today. This revised version of his book does not set out
to convert the sceptic but to explain the facts and give examples of
psychic experience, drawn from people in every walk of life. As
Barbanell points out, Spiritualism is by its very nature open to abuse
by fakes and phoneys. His book, therefore, has the widest possible
appeal as a genuine and definitive work on the subject. This is
Spiritualism is a challenge to the layman - it may not change his views,
but will provide a clear understanding of man's faith in Spiritualism
and the reasons why so many accept it. |
|
First edition 1959 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
672 |
Rev. C. Drayton Thomas |
IN THE DAWN BEYOND DEATH |
|
"Where shall we be a century
from now? Others will occupy our house, and in the familiar streets,
the shops, the favourite walks, we shall be seen no more. We shall have
left earth; what do we think will be our occupation and surroundings
then?"
"Those who hunger for reality will turn with relief from the guesses
of philosophy, the material preoccupations of science and the
controversies of religious sects, to read actual experiences of people
speaking from the realm so shortly to be ours. In these reports we
shall note how present life influences future prospects, and we may
infer the splendour of our destiny, the responsibility of our choice.
At frequent intervals I have been privileged to sit with my friend, Mrs
Osborne Leonard, while, during deep trance, her lips express the
thoughts of relatives and acquantances who return from the dead to speak
to me."
This book is a testimony of those meetings.
|
|
First edition No Date |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
673 |
Geraldine Cummins |
THE ROAD TO IMMORTALITY |
|
"I feel at liberty to commend
this book as a serious attempt to give information about a future life
and the stages through which earnest people may expect to pass. The
accounts which F.W.H. Myers goes on to give of the Fourth, Fifth, Sixth
and Seventh States are remarkable." Sir Oliver Lodge |
|
First edition 1932 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
674 |
Geraldine Cummins |
TRAVELLERS IN ETERNITY |
|
"Numbers of books have
described conditions in the hereafter. But Travellers in Eternity is
perhaps somewhat different from these in the sense that it is a
connected, coherent biography of certain members of a family joyfuly
re-united after death. The characters, so clearly drawn and alive,
convey conviction of the reality of their existence in Eternal Life."
E.B. Gibbes
"My father, mother, brother and sisters met me at the Gate of Death.
Because we were united by Love, which is the one thing that matters, I
had that ineffable joy. It was a welcome Home after many years of
separation from those beloved travellers who had made the Channel
Crossing long before me. If you are inclined to believe in what I tell
you, pray call Death by this name - "A Channell Crossing." I had always
been terrified of the inevitable experience of death. As it happened, I
was entirely mistaken. The experience of passing was, for me, exactly
like a rough channel crossing - rather frightening at first, but really
not more unpleasant and uncomfortable than that experience. But it was
all made up to me by the immense relief of seeing my family on the
farther shore." Communicated by Hilda.
|
|
First edition 1948 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
675 |
Arthur Conan Doyle |
THE NEW REVELATION and THE VITAL MESSAGE |
|
Reprinted in this one volume
are two famous books written by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, who devoted many
years to propagating the truth of Proved Survival. His fearless
championship of Spiritualism had the effect of interesting thousands in
this subject. In these two books Sir Arthur gives a concise exposition
of the case for spiritualism. His interest was aroused as long ago as
1885, long before he became world-famous as the creator of "Sherlock
Holmes". At the summit of his literary fame he published the two books
which comprise this volume and then devoted the rest of his days, with
pen and voice, to spreading the knowledge of Spiritualism. |
|
First edition 1918/1919 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
676 |
Richard Jones |
WALKING HAUNTED LONDON |
|
25 original walks exploring
London's ghostly past.
London has the reputation of being the most haunted city in the world.
The dark recesses of the city's historic buildings, narrow streets and
alleyways are said to be occupied by ghosts from many centuries and all
walks of life. In Walking Haunted London Richard Jones takes you on a
spine-chilling journey through eerie and, in many cases, forgotten parts
of the city and invites you to share - if you dare - in its haunted and
mysterious past.
|
|
First edition 1999 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
677 |
Astrid St Aubyn |
GHOSTLY ENCOUNTERS |
|
True Tales of the Ghouls,
Spooks and Spectres in the Lives of the Famous.
In this entertaining and spine-tingling book, Astrid St Aubyn and Zahra
Hanbury present the spectral experiences of over eighty celebrities -
from Jeremy Irons and Dame Barbara Cartland to Edward Woodward and the
Marquess of Bath. Read how, as a struggling young actor, Roy Dotrice
was woken one night to find himself being strangled by a pair of ghostly
hands. Read how Will Carling came face to face with a cloaked figure
in a corridor at school. And by contrast, read of the very moving
personal experience of Julian Lloyd Webber, which he believes was the
turning point in his life and musical career.
Astrid St Aubyn with Zahra Hanbury
|
|
First edition 1996 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
678 |
Stan Gooch |
THE PARANORMAL |
|
In his Total Man trilogy
(recently completed with the publication of The Neanderthal Question),
Stan Gooch has made many significant contributions to our understanding
of the paranormal. Now, in his major new book, he reveals himself as a
powerful psychic and medium. Drawing on his own varied psychic
experiences and those of other psychics known personally to him, the
author argues strongly for an "alternative universe" lying beyond the
reach of science. Unlike many psychics, Stan Gooch is himself a trained
scientist. Carrying the argument into the enemy's camp he demonstrates
the inadequacy of statistics in coping with the paranormal -
establishing a "chance barrier" beyond which chance can never reach, but
meaning can. In all this, Stan Gooch is no less firm with the
fraudulent and the naively enthusiastic. |
|
First edition 1978 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
679 |
Jenny Randles |
TIME STORMS |
|
Amazing evidence for Time
warps, Space Rifts and Time Travel.
Time Storms documents dozens of cases from around the world that share
extraordinary similarities. Witnesses have all encountered a strange
energy cloud that in turn provokes a series of physical and
physiological effects. When these people regain consciousness they
typically find that they have unaccountably lost track of time and
space, often losing hours or even days of real time. They may have
travelled significant distances - in one case over a thousand miles.
Have these witnesses actually slipped through the barriers of time and
space? Could near-death exeriences be a trip into the future? Are
experiments by scientists producing a breakdown in the space-time
continuum? And could our own descendants be coming "back from the
future" in time machines that we are shortly to perfect?
|
|
First edition 2001 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
680 |
Ken Webster |
THE VERTICAL PLANE |
|
The Mystery of the Dodleston
Messages - A Bizarre record of communication through Time.
For a period of two years, Ken Webster found himself in the
extraordinary position of corresponding directly with an individual who
had lived on the site of his own cottage four centuries earlier. The
correspondence began with messages left on his home computer on the
kitchen table, and ended with communication scrawled directly onto
paper. Fully prepared for some form of elaborate hoax, Webster found to
his consternation that the language of the messages tallied precisely
with 16th-century English usage.
A unique supernatural detective story which is also a riveting personal
experience of an inexplicable fault in the fabric of time - and a moving
account of a relationship mediated across four hundred years.
|
|
First edition 1989 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
681 |
Arthur Findlay |
WHERE TWO WORLDS MEET |
|
This book tells of nineteen
seances Arthur Findlay attended with famous Glasgow direct voice medium
John Campbell Sloan. At these, literally hundreds of spirit
communicators spoke. An expert stenographer took down everything said
by the so-called dead. The result is an array of evidence which even
the most cautious investigator must admit is overwhelmingly in favour of
survival after physical death. Speakers from the Other Side tell much
about their world, what it is like and how they live. Their talks on
what they think, what they do and what they believe make compelling
reading. |
|
First edition 1951 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
682 |
Arthur Findlay |
THE WAY OF LIFE |
|
419 extracts taken from the
records of sittings with Direct Voice medium John Campbell Sloan.
"When an inhabitant of the world to which we pass at death was
once asked, by a lady present at one of Mr Sloan's seances, what his
work was, he replied that he was attending a University. When asked
what he was learning he replied: "I am learning the Way of Life."
"After bringing together all the extracts given in this book, it
occurred to me that The Way of Life would be a suitable title for it, as
it embraces life and its meaning, both here and hereafter. The Way of
Life: how much these four words mean, not only as to how we live, but as
to what life is, its meaning, its course, and its purpose. The way our
life is lived on earth, and in the heareafter, is a matter of supreme
importance to us, and from whom could we get better advice than from our
friends who have lived on earth and passed on to a larger, fuller, life
in the world beyond? With their wider and greater experience, who
better could be our teachers and our guides?" What they have to say is
found in the pages of The Way of Life.
|
|
First edition 1953 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
683 |
George Chapman |
EXTRAORDINARY ENCOUNTERS |
|
"This book deals with just one
healer, or rather, a healing partnership. I am one half of that team.
My partner is a surgeon who died in 1937. My role is a passive one, in
that I allow my body to be taken over in trance by the spirit of William
Lang." George Chapman
"We have all wanted to get in touch with God, in one way or
another, to ask His blessing and comfort in moments of anguish or
stress. One day we came across a book which told of the work of Dr
William Lang and his medium George Chapman. My husband and I were
fascinated by it. We came to know personally George Chapman and William
Lang and were most impressed by Mr Chapman's simplicity, sincerity and
love for his fellow men; dedicating his daily life so that Dr Lang could
work through him, to cure and help us mentally and spiritually. Dr
Lang and his work put the fourth dimension in our grasp through
spiritual healing. We cannot recommend this book too highly to every
reader who wants to know about the work of Dr William Lang that is going
on in our midst today. Ye who trust shall receive." Anne (Queen Anne
of Roumania) Versoix, December 1972
|
|
First edition 1973 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
684 |
Robert Blatchford |
MORE THINGS IN HEAVEN AND EARTH |
|
An early book by a
distinguished writer. A must of a read for all enquiring minds.
"I have written this book, not as an exposition of spiritualism, nor
even as a defence, for I am only a recruit, or rather a cadet in the
camp, and it were presumtion in me to pretend to the rank of an
instructor. But in my study of the subject, and before I had any
personal experience of spiritualist phenomena I had been convinced by
the testimony of distinguished explorers that the case for spiritualism
deserved a scientific and judical examination by careful and
dispassionate inquirers whose sole object would be to discover the
truth."
|
|
First edition No Date: possibly 1920's |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
685 |
Colin Wilson |
MYSTERIES |
|
An investigaton into the
occult, the paranormal and the supernatural.
Mysteries is the powerful and definitive statement of Colin Wilson's
belief that every human being houses a superior being. In fact each of
us has a ladder or hierarchy of selves, the upper members of which may
be called upon at will.
"Mans being is like a vast mansion, yet he seems to live in a single
room in the basement."
|
|
First edition 1978 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
686 |
Hannen Swaffer |
NORTHCLIFFE'S RETURN |
|
When Lord Northcliffe died in
August 1922 the front page headlines of the Daily Graphic read:
Death Of Lord Northcliffe, The Greatest Journalist Who Ever Lived
Hannen Swaffer was his employee and friend who wrote that headline.
This book is about the proof that came to Hannen Swaffer that the
personality of the man he loved and called the Chief still very much
continued.
|
|
First edition 1925 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
687 |
Anonymous |
THE BOY WHO SAW TRUE |
|
The Diary of a Victorian child
who could see Spirit.
"The Boy Who Saw True comes into a totally different catagory and
differs materially from all the hundreds of books I have read on
Spiritualism and kindred subjects," writes Cyril Scott, the well-known
occultist, in his preface to this unusual book. "Not one of them has
ever displayed the characteristics of this highly diverting human
document, with its naive candours, its drolleries, its unconscious
humour, its oscillations between the ridiculous and the exalted, and its
power to convince, for the very reason that the young diarist never set
out with the intention of carrying conviction. Here was a precocious
young boy born with clairvoyance who could see auras and spirits, yet
failed to realise that other people were not similarly gifted. In
consequence he was misunderstood and had to suffer many indignities.
Apart from this his diary is of interest in that it reveals the
thoughts, emotions and perplexities of a Victorian youngster grought up a
little prior to the "naughty nineties".
|
|
First edition 1953 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
688 |
Kenneth Ring |
MINDSIGHT |
|
Near-Death and Out-of-Body
Experiences in the BLIND.
This volume is a ground-breaking work in the field of near-death
studies. It investigates the astonishing claim that blind persons,
including those blind from birth, can actually "see" during near-death
or out-of-body episodes. The authors present their findings in
scrupulous detail, investigating case histories of blind persons who
have actually reported visual experience under these conditions. There
is compelling evidence that the blind do "see" in these moments, but it
is not sight as we think of it. Ring and Cooper uncover a kind of
transcendental awareness they refer to as mindsight. It involves the
strange experience of being able to perceive from all angles at once,
from every focal depth at once and a sense of "knowing" the subject, not
just visually, but with a deep and inexplicable knowledge.
Kenneth Ring and Sharon Cooper
|
|
First edition 1999 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
689 |
Harry Boddington |
MATERIALISATIONS |
|
With the resurgence of physical
mediumship after decades of decline, this book, written over half a
century ago, is a worthy contribution, both from an historical point of
view and extremely relevant to the contemporary situation regarding the
development, mechanics and scientific aspect of the subject -
particularly in the case of materialisation phenomena, that is, the
production of a full human form of a "deceased" person, capable of
intelligent communication and recognisable to the loved one or relatives
to whom they appear. Harry Boddington sets out clearly the various
anomalies, problems and psychological aspects of this type of
mediumship, provides a case for its efficacy, insofar as the return of a
loved one in solid form, complete in every sense, with memory bank
intact, is able to prove their continued existence and all that implies.
With modern techniques and scientific progress in quantum physics, the
day is not far off when the phenomena of the seance room will not only
be recorded on video film as the process takes place, but will have
scientific support based on subatomic physics. Things are moving ahead
at a pace that will assuredly confirm what Spiritualists have claimed
for many years; the survival of the human personality after so-called
"death". From the Forword by Alan E. Crossley, President of The Noah's
Ark Society |
|
First edition 1938 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
690 |
Arthur Conan Doyle |
THE WANDERINGS OF A SPIRITUALIST |
|
"The Wanderings of a
Spiritualist is a personal account of the journeys of Sir Arthur Conan
Doyle, geographic and otherwise, in support of Spiritualism, written
soon after he announced his belief in Spiritualism and communication
with the dead." |
|
First edition 1921 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
691 |
Thelma Moss,PH.D |
THE BODY ELECTRIC |
|
A Personal Journey into the
mysteries of parapsychology and Kirlian Photography.
After the death of her husband, Thelma Moss decided to leave a
successful career as a showbusiness writer and go back to university.
Her aim: to study parapsychology by applying scientific methodology to
the elusive phenomena of mind power and energy fields. The Body
Electric is the fascinating, anecdotal story of her struggle to be
accepted by the conservative scientific establishment and of the amazing
results she has achieved on the very frontiers of human knowledge. Her
research in the area of bioenergetics - particularly Kirlian
photography, for which she undertook extensive travels behind the Iron
Curtain - is now world famous. The story of how it was done, full of
personalities, politics, controversy and breath-taking discovery, is one
of the most compelling books about scientific endeavour since James
Wilson's classic The Double Helix
|
|
First edition 1979 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
692 |
Ronald D. Pearson |
ORIGIN OF MIND |
|
"New ideas show that physics
can be turned round to explain every aspect of the paranormal! Most
physicists say the paranormal cannot exist because, if it did, the whole
basis on which physics rests would crumble. This is because the
paranormal depends on the existence of an all-pervading medium called
the "Ether" which the established "New Physics" denies. However, Stefan
Marinov, a brilliant physicist, is touring this country as I write and
he is proving that the whole basis of this denial has been flawed
already! Both he and another physicist called Silvertooth, each without
knowledge of the other, have carried out experiments to measure the
speed of the Earth through the Ether - and both come up with high and
similar speeds, so proving the Ether exists after all! The New Physics
is largely based on experiments carried out late last century which gave
zero for this speed and so discredited the idea that an Ether could
exist. The ether, however, as this book shows, is the essential
ingredient on which the paranormal and spirituality depend. No wonder
established physics tries with all its might to discredit all aspects of
the paranormal and deny that any mind could possibly exist separately
from the brain! Worse, assessors are religiously throwing out
alternative theories or controversial experimental findings. This is
why Marinov is having to go on lecture tours to communicate his
findings. This is why this book is being provided to communicate a new
approach. This, based on a new angle, yields solutions to major
problems which still confound established physics. But the exciting
spin-off is a new theory showing how the Ether must have arisen
spontaneously from nothingness to provide the base of all that is; the
base of our universe and several others which interpenetrate us and
allow consciousness to be immortal. This book shows the universe is
made out of pure mindstuff and provides details of its structure!"
Ronald D.Pearson |
|
First edition 1992 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
693 |
Will Parfitt |
PSYCHOSYNTHESIS |
|
Psychosynthesis is a
comprehensive and practical approach to self-realisation which aims to
help people discover their one nature and then to use this discovery
effectively in everyday life.
This book explains: What psychosynthesis is. How you can unleash your
creative potential. Why is it more than just another kind of
psychotherapy. How you can learn to take charge of your own life. And,
In what way psychosynthesis can improve the quality of your
relationships.
|
|
First edition 1990 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
694 |
Raymond M. Smullyan |
THE TAO IS SILENT |
|
A Beguiling and whimsical guide
to the meaning and value of Eastern Philosophy to Westerners
"To me," writes Smullyan, "Taoism means a state of inner serenity
combined with an intense aesthetic awareness. Neither alone is
adequate; a purely passive serinity is kind of dull, and an
anxiety-ridden awareness is not very appealing." This is more than a
book on Chinese Philosophy. It is a series of ideas inspired by Taoism
that treats a wide variety of subjects about life in general. Smullyan
sees the Taoist as "One who is not so much in search of something he
hasn't, but who is enjoying what he has." Readers will be charmed and
inspired by this witty, sophisticated, yet deeply religious author,
whether he is discussing gardening, dogs, the art of napping or
computers who dream that they're human.
|
|
First edition 1977 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
695 |
Dr Paul Brunton |
THE SECRET PATH |
|
This work presents a fully
detailed description of the technique which the author pursued in the
East, a system which rewarded him with amazing spiritual experiences.
He also reveals a Yoga breathing exercise safe enough to be practiced
without the supervision of a teacher and one which yields remarkable
results. By this method it is possible for everyman to discover the
deathless spirit within his own being. |
|
First edition 1934 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
696 |
Michael J. Roads |
JOURNEY INTO ONENESS |
|
Michael Roads has earned the
right in consciousness to enter into the nonphysical realms. "When I
stepped through those Doors, linear time and normal reality ended.
Everything of the known was abruptly replaced by an absolute unknown.
Time, if it had any meaning at all, was spherical, so that all points of
a sphere were the same time - always." Michael finds himself in his
light body. Catapulted through one spiritual doorway after another, he
meets numerous Beings who expand his awareness of the dimensions of
reality. Step-by-step, Michael is led to the greatest understanding of
his journey into oneness. As consciousness, he evolves from gas, to
mineral, to plant, to animal, and finally to human, experiencing the
pull of Self to express itself through physical form. Michael explores
the infinite universe and comes to know the meaning of I AM THAT I AM. |
|
First edition 1994 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
697 |
Abu |
ABU TALKS - VOLUME 2 |
|
Abu Talks comprises a rare
collection of teachings, given to the dedicated sitters of the Norman
Hunt circles, by a spiritual teacher affectionately known to them as
"Abu". This fascinating book, together with other volumes in this
series, will feed many hungry souls, for not only are the teachings
"food for thought", but the questions put to Abu, by the circle members,
are not the general "run of the mill" type. Throughout it is apparent,
in keeping with all great teachers, that Abu's strongest and greatest
message is that of love. |
|
First edition 1996 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
698 |
Val Wiliams |
TWO WORLDS AS ONE |
|
Widely applauded for her strong
gifts of communication with spirit, Val Williams has for years
delighted audiences across the globe with her inimitable window on the
world unseen. In this, her first book, she charts the often tumultuous
path of a working medium, illuminating along the way the hidden world
which ultimately concerns us all. Its not hard contacting the dead, the
problem is getting through to the living. Val Williams, Evening Standard
Magazine,London. |
|
First edition 2000 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
699 |
Dorothy Davies, B.Sc. S.N.H.S. |
CIRCLE OF LIGHT |
|
"Circle of Light is a quarterly
magazine, of inspirational writing, poetry, philosophy, thoughts from
great writers and thinkers past and present. It is designed to uplift,
comfort and console each soul as well as give them encouragement for
their journey through life. If it casts a light in only one dark
corner, it will have justified its existence.
Edited by Dorothy Davies in Ryde, Isle of Wight, "this magazine is
dedicated to the memory of Sir Winston Churchill who was guided by
Spirit to be in the right place at the right time, when he became the
beacon, the light the British people needed at a time of great trauma.
His fighting spirit is still there, helping each one of us as we battle
through life's storms."
Edited by Dorothy Davies, B.Sc. S.N.H.S.
|
|
First edition |
One edition: B Two editions: C |
———————————————————————————— |
700 |
Dorothy Davies, B.Sc. S.N.H.S. |
MEDITATIONS FOR CIRCLES |
|
A beautiful book of 52 short
inspirational introductions to meditation.
"This little book is dedicated, with great love and thanks, to the
guides who gave me a meditation a week for a year. It is also dedicated
to every circle member everywhere, who meet with devotion and
dedication to sit in love and harmony to receive communication and
development from the Realms. May the love and protection of the great
white spirit be with you all."
|
|
First edition No Date |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
701 |
Dorothy Davies, B.Sc. S.N.H.S |
CONVERSATIONS WITH A CARDINAL |
|
"In December 1997, I was given a
message from the platform that Spirit wanted me to do automatic
writing. This was confirmed in a private reading the following day.
"Just sit with a pen" I was told, "and it will come." It wasn't easy,
with many demands on my time, to just sit, but I did feel my hand
changing, the fingers tingling, the sensation of something else taking
over. I normally work with a keyboard and a computer, writing means
typing to me. But eventually I wrote: Love is the key. Love is
everything. But then the feeling came - go to the keyboard. So I did,
and wrote the same words, with my hands tingling madly. The following
is the first "automatic" inspirational piece of writing which came from
the friend I now know as Thomas, Cardinal Lindenwood." "Here they are,
my conversations with a Cardinal, so far ..." |
|
First edition 1999 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
702 |
Edain McCoy |
HOW TO DO AUTOMATIC WRITING |
|
Introducing the first practical
guide to Automatic Writing! It clearly instructs readers through each
step of learning and then using Automatic Writing as a tool for
divination and spiritual growth. Ten short chapters, aimed at
beginner's, detail everything from what Automatic Writing is and how to
use it to where to go for additional resources. |
|
First edition 1994 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
703 |
Bryan Gibson |
IS THERE ANYBODY THERE? |
|
This is the fourth book by
highly acclaimed medium Bryan Gibson. Within its pages is an insight
into the highs and lows of a medium's work and day to day life. We meet
various characters from different backgrounds, both on earth and from
Spirit, as Bryan and the families concerned share with us the details of
private sittings and the messages conveyed from their loved ones. We
learn that laughter and humour play a very important role in Bryan's
work with Spirit, as we read about some of the funnier moments. He also
deals with some more serious experiences which have taught him valuable
lessons and shaped his life and work as a medium. In the twelve years
since he was introduced to his guide Running Foot, and to mediumship, he
has earned a reputation as a medium of extremely high calibre and
integrity who has reunited more than 20,000 people with their loved ones
in Spirit. |
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
704 |
Paul Desmond |
MEDITATION & DREAMS FOR FAIRLY NORMAL PEOPLE |
|
"When I first heard about
meditation, I was immediately suspicious. I found myself visualising
all sorts of odd-bods with rubber legs waiting for me. So when I went
to the meditation centre and was greeted by a serene and beautiful young
woman called Christine, I was a little taken aback. We sat down and
she began to explain, "Meditation is just a process of creating more
loving thoughts. "She looked at me and I noticed just how peaceful her
eyes were. She went on, "Whether it's more loving thoughts about the
self or others, or life in general, meditation is the time we give to
create these thoughts." "The first step is to see everyone as a soul
and to try to understand the good in them. To see that each soul is
just like you, another being just trying to be peaceful and happy." She
looked into my eyes with her clear, steady gaze and I realised
straightaway just how much understanding this practice had given her.
Her eyes had a light of happiness in them that I'd never seen before.
She wasn't just talking. She was living it. It was so real. I found
that the more I looked at people like this, the more it seemed that
everyone had something amazing to share with me. Whether young or old.
It was as if there was a magic in them. Until then I'd always been
rather cynical; if there had been a way of recognising what a moran they
were I definately would have discovered it, but suddenly I found myself
appreciating the strangest people. Even old ladies and foreigners!" |
|
First edition 1992 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
705 |
Constellation Network |
NEWSLETTER |
|
A Mind, Body, Spirit Contact
Advertising Newsletter distributed freely to anyone who asks to go on
their mailing list at 5 Ennerdale Road, Formby, Liverpool, L37 2EA. They
reach mostly Merseyside, Yorkshire and Cumbria but these areas are
spreading with each issue. They would love to hear about local events,
group meetings (even the very small ones that happen in people's
houses), web sites, favourite sayings, poems, readers letters, etc ..
constellationnews@aol.com
Constellation Network
|
|
First edition |
Sample Issue: A |
———————————————————————————— |
706 |
Rudolf Steiner |
LIFE BEYOND DEATH |
|
While western humanity has
conquered the outer world with the aid of technology and natural
science, the mysterious question of death is still largely shrouded in
fear, and remains an insoluble riddle. Rudolf Steiner (1861-1925) was
the founder of Anthroposophy - a modern science of the spirit. From his
own highly-developed clairvoyance he was able spiritually to research
the question of what happens to human beings after their physical bodies
pass away. Life continues beyond death, he affirms in these
astonishing lectures, and the human being awakens to a higher reality,
where the soul begins a great journey to the farthest expanses of the
cosmos. When the discarnated soul has been purified and prepared, it
then begins the descent into a new physical body for a new incarnation.
Rudolf Steiner suggests that one of the most important tasks for our
present civilisation is to re-establish living connections with those
who have died. He gives instructions as to how this can be done, and
also describes how the dead can be of help to us in our lives on earth. |
|
First edition 1987 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
707 |
Carol Brierly M.B, Ch.B, B.S.D, M.I.A.C.T. |
ALL THIS AND HEAVEN TOO |
|
A Study in Past Lives. This
book is not intended to be a scientific investigation into past life
phenomena. Its aim is rather to show the effect that past life
experiences have upon our present lives. Just as in this life our
present moulds our future, so in past lives does the past mould our
present being. Like beads on a string, each life touches the next, in
some way transmitting something of itself. The people who came together
in this book did so because of their individual problems. For some it
was a sense of belonging somewhere else, a sort of deja-vu, for others a
symptom, and occasionally a search for a friend or lover in the past.
The results were not necessarily verifiable, but far from dull. Those
involved tell their stories with humour and astounding reality. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
708 |
Mary Errington Evans |
A PAST LIFE REVEALED |
|
The author believes that in the
seventeenth century she was Lady Wyndham with two sons, Patrick and his
twin brother Thomas. Furthermore, she had one daughter, Cloretta, and
that her husband in this life, Penry, was her partner in that life, he
being Lord Charles Wyndham. History leaps off the pages in this
remarkable book, which includes spirit-inspired portraits from psychic
artist John Brett. |
|
First edition 2000 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
709 |
Jeffrey Iverson |
IN SEARCH OF THE DEAD |
|
Is there Life after Death? For
over a century scientists have tried to prove that there is part of us
that can survive death. In this fascinating book, Jeffrey Iverson,
bestselling author of More Lives Than One?, the story of the Bloxham
tapes, looks at today's scientific evidence for life after death. This
book is about e.g: Psi - Powers of the Mind that may survive death.
Unknown targets seen from a distance where the odds against guessing are
billions to one. The secrets of mediums and the seance-room. The
scientist whose team of psychics "saw" the Son of Sam killer who
terrorised New York. Near Death Experiences - Children who draw
pictures of the next world. The out-of-body experience of the
critically ill patient who saw a shoe on a ledge on the far side of her
hospital. Apparitions - The ghostly warning that saved a ship in the
1942 siege of Malta. Reincarnation - Children who bear the physical
scars of other lives, which they recall in detail. And Reality - Does
it begin and end in the Mind? Views of some of the world's leading
scientists and mystics. |
|
First edition 1992 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
710 |
Peter Kolosimo |
NOT OF THIS WORLD |
|
The "astronauts" of ancient
Japan, Mexico and the Sahara ... the mysterious Great Wall of Peru ...
the legends of Mu and Atlantis ... the astronomical clock at Stonehenge
... the extra-terrestrial giants described in the Popal Vuh, ancient
bible of the Maya Indians. Not of this World is a revolutionary survey
of the evidence that a highly advanced technological people from another
solar system had contact with our planet in the prehistoric past. The
author backs his argument with an impressive array of fact drawn from
history, myth and archaeology, and a unique collection of drawings and
photographs. |
|
First edition 1970 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
711 |
Jenna Kirby |
WE NEVER SAID GOODBYE |
|
"This is a true story of a love
that refused to die. And this book is a testimony to all those
grieving souls, who believe they will never see their loved ones again.
Do not believe it! It is not true! Have you lost a loved one? Has a
soul mate left you behind? Do you want to know where they are? Are you
interested in where you are going when you die, and leave the Earth
plane? Yes! Then this book has been written especially for you. Your
loved ones never leave you. They have just gone ahead to a truly
wondrous place, full of beauty, warmth and light. A place where there
is no darkness, hatred, or greed, unless that's how you want to live.
Be patient, my friends, you will be going there, when it is your
allotted time to leave this dreary Earth. And your beloved ones will be
waiting, with hearts full of love, and arms open wide to welcome you." |
|
First edition 1999 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
712 |
James McQuitty |
GOLDEN ENLIGHTENMENT II |
|
Questions and Answers for
Seekers of Spiritual Knowledge, Truth and Wisdom.
The intention of this revised book is to provide readers with simple,
easy to understand answers to the questions asked by most people when
they first embark upon their quest for spiritual knowledge, truth and
wisdom. It is intended as a beginners handbook but also a book of value
to those who might regard themselves a little further along the
spiritual pathway, the author always endeavouring to ensure that it
retains its easy to understand explanations.
"Once read, I hope this book will provide a foundation which will help
each reader to move forward with greater confidence, understanding more
of their own spiritual nature, and thus helping their eternal growth
toward enlightenment." James McQuitty
A book not to be missed.
|
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
713 |
Eileen Ellen Davey |
WORDS OF WISDOM |
|
Channelled through the Deep
Trance Mediumship of Eileen Ellen Davey.
Words of Wisdom or "The Communications with our Circle of Friends",
incorporates over 150 in-depth answers given direct from the spirit
realms. The questions asked were from members of a "Home Circle" and a
number of seekers of truth. The band of communicators in spirit
consists of at least 20 spirit tutors whom all have their special
subjects. The answers were given through the trance mediumship of Ellen
within the controlled environments necessary for this type of
communication.
"These words are offered to the reader for their consideration, with
an open mind, to generate a deeper quest for knowledge in a positive
manner. They may not be the answer to the reader's exact question, but
to find yet another piece of this great "jigsaw" of life, where our
earthly existence is just but one phase of our journey."
|
|
First edition 1998 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
714 |
Eileen Ellen Davey |
GO FORWARD TO A NEW MILLENNIUM |
|
Trance Communication Through
Eileen.
Trance communications that discuss; seekers of truth and working for
harmony and peace for all; the work that spirit undertakes to prevent
hostilities between nations and how they need to use loving thoughts for
peace; the sending of energy to assist in areas of turmoil; and talks
about companionship in times of trouble ... to name but a few.
|
|
First edition 1999 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
715 |
Eileen Ellen Davey |
FURTHER WORDS OF WISDOM |
|
Eileen Ellen Davey returned to
spirit in May, 2001.
She was one of the greatest trance mediums of our times. Acting as a
channel for teachers from the Spirit Realms, her words have directed
many aspiring mediums and lost souls upon the path towards spiritual
awareness and enlightenment. Further Words of Wisdom was written for
enquiring minds regardless of religious beliefs. It explains and
answers questions most freguently asked when it comes to the Spirit
World, including: Communication with Spirit, Energy Recognition,
Ectoplasm, Healing, Sitting for Development, Protecting the Medium,
Cause and Effect, The Higher Realms and Spirit Children ... to name but a
few.
|
|
First edition 2001 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
716 |
Colin Fry |
MAGNUS GUIDES |
|
VIDEO
"The greatest lie is death, there is no death"
Having sanctioned the recording of his words for this production, Magnus
returns to impart knowledge to us, from his side of life through
physical and trance medium Colin Fry. Thought provoking issues
discussed relate to religion, at which point the soul enters the body,
the untimely loss of loved ones, upcoming earth changes, and life on
other planets. Colin Fry talks of Magnus, his own beliefs concerning
his mediumship, and invites you to make up your own mind regarding "Life
after Death".
|
|
First edition Produced in 1999 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
717 |
Colin Fry |
A VOICE FROM THE LIGHT |
|
VIDEO
Magnus Guides - Volume 2
Australian Psychic Artist Shakti Joy has managed to capture the
essence of Colin Fry's Spirit Guide Magnus in her Spiritually Inspired
portrait of him which Colin confirms is exactly as he sees him. Magnus
is generally reluctant to share his feelings regarding his earthly
existence, explaining that he considered it, "In the greater part as a
waste ...", but presented here you will hear the sadness in his words as
he describes his lost opportunity.
Covered firstly however are the ever controversial and much debated
issues of: Re-incarnation, Karma,and Suicide which are dealt with in a
very intelligent and concise manner amongst which there are also
enquiries relating to: Euthanasia, Spirit rescue, the location of the
spirit world and what is involved in our passing. Former Earthly Evil
dictators come under scrutiny as does the location of Hell, Prison
philosophy, and an alternative view regarding the Ten Commandments. A
perspective on Astrology, Astronomy, Fortune tellers and Tarot reading,
but also thoughts on the "Tall Dark Stranger", syndrome are
contemplated.
"Amazing videos that everyone should have the opportunity of watching."
|
|
First edition Produced in: 1999 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
718 |
Michael Roll |
LIVE INTERVIEW ON THE JENNY SMEDLEY HOW |
|
VIDEO
On May 21st 2001 Michael Roll was invited to speak again on Taunton TV's Jenny Smedley Show with Gwen Byrne and Pat Jeffreys.
Pat Jeffreys has been physically reunited with her "dead" son Michael on approximately 300 occasions.
Gwen and Alf Byrne have been reunited with their dead son Russell on over 50 occasions. (see book 276)
|
|
First edition Produced in: 2001 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
719 |
Tribute |
TRIBUTE TO SPIRITUALIST PIONEERS |
|
VIDEO
In 1999 Derek Robinson, the President of Wimbledon Spiritualist Church
in London organised a Tribute to the Pioneers of Spiritualism in aid of
the "Psychic News Editors Christmas Appeal" run every year to help
ageing and infirm Spiritualists at this festive time. The film shows
well-known working mediums coming together with an audience to prove
survival, through communication with spirit.
Mediums that made this a day to remember were Ivy Davis, Lyne G de
Swarte (Editor of the Psychic News), Keith Charles, Ron Jordan, Tony
Katz, Alan Law, and Derek Robinson.
By Tribute
|
|
First edition Produced in 1999 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
720 |
John Edward |
CROSSING OVER |
|
VIDEO
A personal home video lent out, showing a superb sample of John Edwards
TV work from the network channel Living called "Crossing Over" as he
demonstrates to audiences that their loved ones continue to exist. |
|
First edition |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
721 |
George G. Ritchie |
RETURN FROM TOMORROW |
|
At the age of twenty, George
Ritchie died in an army hospital. Nine minutes later, he returned to
life. What happened to him during those minutes was so compelling, it
changed his life forever. In Return from Tomorrow, he tells of his
out-of-body encounter with other nonphysical beings, his travel through
different dimensions of time and space, and ultimately, his transforming
meeting with the Light of the world, the Son of God. Ritchie's amazing
experience not only altered his view of eternity - it has since
directed and governed his entire life. The story that first inspired
Raymond Moody. |
|
First edition 1978 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
722 |
Rosalind Cattanach |
"BEST" OF BOTH WORLDS |
|
"The annals of Spiritualistic
history abound with records of the work of many astoundingly gifted
mediums and such history is most admirably enhanced with the story of
Albert Best, his work and his life. Being of nature a man of simple
tastes and pleasures, Albert Best was never content only to be
psychically gifted enough to bring forth many amazing proofs of survival
of the human personality beyond physical death, but always retained a
deep and abiding sense of true compassion for the bereaved and for the
sick. Demonstrating his mediumship privately or publicly Albert came
through with some of the most astonishing details in proving
communications between the world of spirit and world of the physical,
but also he was the channel for countless outpourings of healing energy,
so often bringing results in total defiance of medical
prognostications. With all his modesty and simplicity of style, Albert
was, also quite a colourful character and this story gives an all-round
account of the life and work of a remarkable man, one I was proud to
know as friend and colleague for over thirty years".
- Don Galloway
|
|
First edition 1999 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
723 |
Gordon Smith |
INNER VISIONS |
|
Gordon Smith saw a friend one
morning. There is nothing unusual in that. But what Gordon did not
know was that the friend had been involved in a terrible fire - and was
dead.
The episode proved to be a dramatic turning point. For after the
encounter, Gordon found that "a floodgate was opened in my mind. It
felt like a tidal wave of psychic phenomena that I had suppressed since
early childhood, and it was now playing back like a succession of old
black-and-white movie clips." Inner Visions charts Gordon's life and
his astonishing gift of mediumship, one which has brought him heartbreak
and happiness. His story will make you laugh ... and cry. Now one of
Britain's best-known mediums, Gordon assures us "There is a spirit
world. And if you have created a bond of love with another in this
world, then nothing - not even death - can separate you from them .."
|
|
First edition 2000 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
724 |
Gordon Smith |
DEVELOPING MEDIUMSHIP, TRANSFORMING SELF |
|
A Manuel For Developing Mediums
Gordon Smith who was born in Glasgow, has worked for many years as a
medium, and is respected for his honesty and sincerity. He has worked
both in the United Kingdom and in many countries around the world. This
book traces the fascinating journey that all developing mediums and
psychics have to travel. Rarely have there been such clear and simple
signposts to map out this path in life.
|
|
First edition No date |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
725 |
Jane Sherwood |
PETER'S GATE |
|
A book for the elderly.
"Written for the elderly, this book offers common-sense practical advice
to those living alone, perhaps for the first time, and facing the
approaching fact of death. Instead of self-pitying loneliness,
something quite different, "alone-ness" should be welcomed as a time for
getting to know one's true self. Peter's Gate brings a refreshing,
optimistic message that the final stage of life is a thrilling prelude
to the new adventure in living."
|
|
First edition 1973 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
726 |
Glennyce S. Eckersley |
CHILDREN AND ANGELS |
|
Angels - and how they can
rescue, support and heal us in times of trouble have become deservedly
popular in recent years. But there is one part of this fascinating
subject which has been little covered: children and their own encounters
with angelic beings. Glennyce Eckersley shows how children experience
angels in many different forms - in traditional guise, with wings; as a
simple light or fragrance; as heavenly voices and music - or as people
in modern-day clothing. Full of extraordinary, true stories from all
round the globe, Children and Angels is an enchanting book that will
open your eyes to new possibilities, and to other worlds. |
|
First edition 1999 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
727 |
Lee Carroll |
THE INDIGO CHILDREN |
|
The Indigo Child is a boy or
girl who displays a new and unusual set of psychological attributes,
revealing a pattern of behaviour generaly undocumented before. This
pattern has singularly unique factors that call for parents and teachers
to change their treatment and upbringing of these children to assist
them in achieving balance and harmony in their lives, and to help them
avoid frustration. Throughout this book, the authors bring together
some very fine minds (doctors, educators, psychologists, and more) who
shed light on the Indigo Child phenomenon. These children are truly
special, representing a great percentage of all the children being born
today on a worldwide basis. They come in "knowing" who they are - so
they must be recognised, celebrated for their exceptional qualities, and
guided with love and care.
Lee Carroll & Jan Tober |
|
First edition 1999 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
728 |
Carol Bowman |
RETURN FROM HEAVEN |
|
Return from Heaven is based on
direct observation of very young children. It follows the true stories
of ordinary families as their toddlers' statements and behaviour
convince them that the child is remembering the past life of a departed
relative. The parents who witness their child's experiences are not
necessarily religious and many had no prior belief in reincarnation.
Carol Bowman is recognised as a pioneer in reincarnation studies. She
began collecting cases in 1988 as a mother trying to understand the
past-life memories of her own two children. She shared her discoveries
in Children's Past Lives, the first book to explain in practical terms
how to recognise and respond to a child's past-life memories. |
|
First edition 2001 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
729 |
Wayne Wayne |
MEDJUGORJE |
|
The Message.
On June 24, 1981, six children in the mountain village of Medjugorje in
central Yugoslavia reported that the Virgin Mary had appeared to them on
a hillside. Allegedly she has been returning ever since. In 1985
Wayne Weible, a South Carolina newspaper publisher and columnist first
learned of the phenomenon occuring in the little town with the
unpronounceable name. Sensing that there might be material for a column
on it, he decided to pursue the story. The following evening,
reviewing a videotape documentary of the events at Medjugorje, he
realised that there was far more to it than one column. As it turned
out, there were eight, and as requests poured in for reprints, to cut
down on copying and postage costs he reproduced them in tabloid form.
To date, more than fifteen million copies of the tabloid have been
distributed. The author's life has been radically and permanently
altered. Now he has written this book about Medjugorge - A penetrating
first from a Protestant perspective.
|
|
First edition 1989 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
730 |
D.Scott Rogo |
LIFE AFTER DEATH |
|
Telephone calls from the dead.
Crisis apparitions. Out-of-Body Experiences. Visions of Heaven..
The Case for Survival of Bodily Death.
Does the human personality survive the death of the body? And could
survival be tested scientifically? In this wide-ranging book D.Scott
Rogo, a well-known researcher and writer in the field of parapsycology,
surveys the evidence available, using classic accounts and the latest
laboratory research to provide a balanced and informative appraisal of
the case for life after death.
|
|
First edition 1986 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
731 |
Bryan Gibson |
SPIRIT, MY SECOND HOME |
|
The life story of one of
Britain's most celebrated mediums.
"As a spiritualy-aware medium, it is nice to be able to say, "Yes, I
have two homes," I am lucky. Here, on a material level, I am able to
share my home with my family and friends and also have access to a
second home in the spirit world. From that world come the many voices
sending messages to loved ones, telling of their safe arrival in the
spirit world and describing happy reunions with relatives and friends
who had arrived ahead of them. They want to let us know they are not
lost and alone, and have found their new world full of love, peace and
harmony ... "
"He sets very high standards for his own work, and for those around him.
So, it is hoped that this, his third book will convey some of his own
views and attitudes to his life, and to the role that mediums and
Spiritualism has to play in all our lives. John Brett, Bryan's Manager.
|
|
First edition 1994 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
732 |
Jack Angelo |
THE HEALING SPIRIT, THE STORY OF DENNIS BARRETT |
|
The Healing Spirit is the story
of Dennis Barrett's life and work as a healer of remarkable power and
international repute.
A warehouse foreman in his forties with no particular interest in
spiritual matters, Barrett discovered his healing gift by chance.
Reluctant, at first, to accept the role of healer, his early experiences
in easing pain, both physical and emotional, convinced him to continue,
and have led to the thriving practice which he has today. Barrett
heals privately, in public demonstrations, and also, most remarkably,
from a distance. Top consultants refer their patients to him, and he
has worked both with practitioners of conventional medicine and with
Native American spirit healers, believing that all healing power is
ultimately derived from the God force within.
|
|
First edition 1990 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
733 |
Dilys Gater |
A PSYCHIC'S CASEBOOK |
|
Dily's Gater is a practising
psychic and in this book she reveals in compelling detail the day-to-day
aspects of work that bring her into contact with, for example, lost
spirits and the suffering, with more than fifty case histories from her
personal files.
As a clairvoyant she can "see true" into the past, present and future.
She has released trapped and wandering souls. As a medium she is able
to contact the dead, and as a healer she has brought comfort, peace and
consolation to the living.
A fascinating insight into just what it means to live and work as a
psychic - Psychic News
|
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
734 |
Martin Goodman |
IN SEARCH OF THE DIVINE MOTHER |
|
Born in 1960 in a village in
southern India, a sickly child named Kamala is soon "discovered" and
guided out of poverty and onto the world stage as an incarnation of the
Divine Mother on earth. Mother Meera, as she became to be known, is a
figure shrouded in mystery and wonder. She lives in a small town in
Germany, where over 40,000 people from around the world have gone to
seek enlightenment in her presence. She teaches only through her
profound, silent gaze and remarkable touch, and asks nothing - no money,
no allegiance - from those who choose to follow her. |
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
735 |
Desmond Doig |
MOTHER TERESA |
|
Her people and her work.
Desmond Doig was the first journalist ever to write about Mother Teresa,
when she had just left the security of a rich Order for the poverty of
the streets of Calcutta, and he had just started writing for The
Statesman, India's leading newspaper. This book is based on the many
articles Mr Doig has written about Mother Teresa in the succeeding
twenty-seven years, arising from the unique experience he has gained by
his deep friendship with her and knowledge of her work. |
|
First edition 1976 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
736 |
Geraldine Cummins |
THE SCRIPTS OF CLEOPHAS |
|
Through the automatic writings
of Geraldine Cummins in semi-trance, in the presence of dignatories and
officials, sometimes writing up to 2,230 words in one and a half hours.
With the unearthing of ancient writings found in caves near the Dead
Sea, Man's knowledge of early Christian life has been enhanced. Now the
publication of a new edition of THE SCRIPTS OF CLEOPHAS, whilst
originating in a manner far removed from that of the Dead Sea Scrolls,
bears equal authenticity and sheds further light on the people and
places of early Christian times. The Scripts contain material which
both supplements and explains what we know of the New Testament, and
supplies information which the Bible furnishes either incompletely, or
not at all. They supplement the Acts of the Apostles, and the Epistles
of St Paul, in that they furnish an account of the early Church and the
Apostles, immediately following the death of Christ.
|
|
First edition 1928 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
737 |
Silver Birch |
A VOICE IN THE WILDERNESS |
|
Further teachings from Silver
Birch.
"I am a voice in the wilderness. I am a servant of the Great Spirit.
Judge me by what I strive to do. If my few words, my eanestness, my
determination, my mission among you, brings help to one soul, gives
comfort only to one, brings light to one who is struggling in the
darkness, then I am Happy." Silver Birch
Edited by Tony Ortzen
|
|
First edition 1986 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
738 |
Robert Goodwin |
TRUTH FROM THE WHITE BROTHERHOOD |
|
Robert Goodwin has worked
publicly as a medium and lecturer for over twenty years and is highly
respected for his work as a trance medium. After becoming aware of his
potential as a teenager, he was guided wisely by his spirit mentors over
a number of years before being persuaded to demonstrate in the public
arena and has devoted much of his life to working in this way for the
spirit world. This book contains teachings from his guide, White
Feather, who is part of a spirit based group known as The White
Brotherhood. Compiled from recorded sittings over a ten year period,
the teachings contained within this book will undoubtedly appeal to
young and old alike. |
|
First edition 1998 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
739 |
Andrew Gorman |
RIDE A COCK HORSE TO BANBURY CROSS |
|
"The reason for writing this is
that we must forgive those who have inflicted pain and suffering on us,
whether it be physical or mentally, otherwise we cannot evolve in life
only regress. It is not easy but it has to be, I firmly believe we no
longer need misguided voices of outdated religious teachings. We are
responsible for our own mortality and behaviour. We must never doubt
the love of God. At the time of completing this book I was 58 years
old, and was coming to an end of nine and a half years councelling with
the Samaritans. I am now an organiser of The Meeting Place in Blackpool
a Spiritual centre, a clairvoyant, healer and philosopher. My partner
Rozanne who is also a medium, healer and teacher of spiritual
philosophy, travels the North of England for platform work at Spiritual
churches and other places." |
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
740 |
Mary Armour |
HELEN DUNCAN, MY LIVING HAS NOT BEEN IN VAIN |
|
Mary Armour has been
demonstrating as a medium for over twenty-five years. Her work has
taken her across the world from Iceland to Australia. She is also
undoubtedly the world's leading authority on the life and work of Helen
Duncan. This book contains the factual testimonies that would reveal
the true facts of her fateful last sitting. This book is a tribute to
two great ladies of Spiritualism. Mary is president of the White Rose
Fellowship in her hometown of Gourock, Scotland. |
|
First edition 2000 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
741 |
Alice A. Bailey |
DEATH: THE GREAT ADVENTURE |
|
Alice Bailey, the well known
esoteric writer and teacher was born into a wealthy English family in
1880. She is best known for her work as secretary to the entity known
as Master Tibetan, Djwhal Khul. Together they wrote nineteen books and
Alice herself wrote four. These books were given to the Tibetan
telepathically in full consciousness to Alice Bailey. Her duty as
secretary was to get the new age teachings down exactly as they were
given, while putting them in readable English. They wrote together for
thirty years and after the last planned book was completed, Alice died
on December 15, 1949.
Alice Bailey founded an esoteric training school, the Arcane School
in 1923. In this world- wide correspondence school, the principles of
the Ageless Wisdom are presented through esoteric meditation, study and
service, as a way of daily life. (An esotericist is one who looks
behind world events and seeks its deeper spiritual meanings, then
applies this knowledge to living a higher spiritual existence.)
She and her husband also founded The Lucis Trust. They provide
spiritual students new insights into the coming century's unfoldment and
requirements. www.lucistrust.org/
This book is a compilation by the Lucis Trust of extracts from the
books by Alice Bailey.
Alice Bailey, the well known esoteric writer and teacher was born into a
wealthy English family in 1880. She is best known for her work as
secretary to the entity known as Master Tibetan, Djwhal Khul. Together
they wrote nineteen books and Alice herself wrote four. These books
were given to the Tibetan telepathically in full consciousness to Alice
Bailey. Her duty as secretary was to get the new age teachings down
exactly as they were given, while putting them in readable English.
They wrote together for thirty years and after the last planned book was
completed, Alice died on December 15, 1949.
Alice Bailey founded an esoteric training school, the Arcane School
in 1923. In this world- wide correspondence school, the principles of
the Ageless Wisdom are presented through esoteric meditation, study and
service, as a way of daily life. (An esotericist is one who looks
behind world events and seeks its deeper spiritual meanings, then
applies this knowledge to living a higher spiritual existence.)
She and her husband also founded The Lucis Trust. They provide
spiritual students new insights into the coming century's unfoldment and
requirements. www.lucistrust.org/
This book is a compilation by the Lucis Trust of extracts from the
books by Alice Bailey.
Alice Bailey, the well known esoteric writer and teacher was born into a
wealthy English family in 1880. She is best known for her work as
secretary to the entity known as Master Tibetan, Djwhal Khul. Together
they wrote nineteen books and Alice herself wrote four. These books
were given to the Tibetan telepathically in full consciousness to Alice
Bailey. Her duty as secretary was to get the new age teachings down
exactly as they were given, while putting them in readable English.
They wrote together for thirty years and after the last planned book was
completed, Alice died on December 15, 1949.
Alice Bailey founded an esoteric training school, the Arcane School
in 1923. In this world- wide correspondence school, the principles of
the Ageless Wisdom are presented through esoteric meditation, study and
service, as a way of daily life. (An esotericist is one who looks
behind world events and seeks its deeper spiritual meanings, then
applies this knowledge to living a higher spiritual existence.)
She and her husband also founded The Lucis Trust. They provide
spiritual students new insights into the coming century's unfoldment and
requirements. www.lucistrust.org/
This book is a compilation by the Lucis Trust of extracts from the
books by Alice Bailey.
from the writings of Alice A. Bailey and The Tibetan Master, Djwhal Khul
|
|
First edition 1985 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
742 |
Alice A. Bailey |
FROM INTELLECT TO INTUITION |
|
one step on the way to a fully
awakened and active mental body. Between the intellect and the
intuition a gap exists until it has been consciously bridged through
meditation. Meditiation is sometimes defined as "thinking in the
heart"; correct meditation proceeds only when the heart and mind
function together in unison. To touch the intuition, therefore, this
blending of heart and mind is a necessity. Right use of the mind in
meditation pens the consciousness to the beauty, truth and goodness of
the soul, through the five stages of
concentration-meditation-contemplation-illumination-inspiration. These
five stages lead to union with the soul - the "son of mind" - and direct
knowledge of divinity, creating an instrument of intelligence for the
soul to use in daily life. |
|
First edition 1932 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
743 |
Alice A. Bailey |
THE LIGHT OF THE SOUL |
|
In this book the factor of mind
in meeting present-day needs is given prominence as the agent of the
soul, and the key to personality release. These Yoga Sutras Of
Patenjali are based on Raja Yoga, the "kingly science of the soul":
"Through the science of Raja Yoga, the mind will be known as the
instrument of the soul and the means whereby the brain of the aspirant
becomes illuminated and knowledge gained of those matters which concern
the realm of the soul." Patanjali explores exhaustively the means, the
techniques and the mental posture which create the connecting thread
between the form-centred personality and these stages towards spiritual
achievement and soul fusion. |
|
First edition 1927 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
744 |
Alice A. Bailey |
EDUCATION IN THE NEW AGE |
|
Education is, or should be, a
continuous process from birth to death concerned not so much with the
acquisition of knowledge as with the expansion of consciousness.
Knowledge of itself is a dead end, unless it is brought into functioning
relationship with environment, social responsibilities, historical
trends, human and world conditions and, above all, with the evolution of
consciousness which brings the infinite vastness of an unknown universe
within the range of the finite human mind. |
|
First edition 1954 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
745 |
Alice A. Bailey |
PONDER ON THIS |
|
A compilaton of esoteric teachings extracted by a student from the books of Alice Bailey. |
|
First edition 1971 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
746 |
Ivy Northage |
WHILE I REMEMBER |
|
The life story of Ivy Northage.
We are indebted to Brenda Marshall (past president of the College of
Psychic Studies) for allowing us to share Ivy Northage's memories of her
long and intriguing life. Ivy's story is both fascinating and
revealing, from her childhood excursions to a local Music Hall where she
hid behind a curtain to catch "the turns", through her unwilling
introduction to psychic work (which entailed sitting for hours in a dark
cupboard!), to her life's work as one of the most respected teaching
mediums of her generation and channel for the wisdom of her spirit guide
"Chan". Ivy's lively personality, wit, energy, and her professionalism
and single-minded dedication to her work are apparent in this
elegantly-compiled memoir, which includes new first-hand descriptions of
seances with Helen Duncan and other famous physical phenomina mediums.
Ivy Northage edited by Brenda Marshall
|
|
First edition 1999 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
747 |
Beatrice Coulson |
MY LIFE'S MEMORIES AND HOW I ENTERED SPIRITUALISM |
|
London in the early twentieth
century was a very different place from the sprawling metropolis it is
today. In this poignantly frank autobiography, Beatrice Coulson, a true
"Cockney Sparrow" who was born in 1920 within the sound of the Bow
Bells, captures all the vivacity and community spirit which
characterised the capital in the pre-and post-War years. Tales of
financial hardship and the terrors of wartime bombing are sometimes
distressing, yet they are balanced by a real sense of joy and optimism
that is perhaps missing in today's more affluent but fiercely
competitive society. As a young woman Beatrice became aware of a
spiritual dimension in the universe and discovered healing gifts which
she has since used to cure the sick and alleviate suffering, from minor
ailments to threatened blindness and cancer. She also gives fascinating
examples of automatic writing, in which the spirits of such literary
geniuses as Wordsworth and Longfellow use her as a channel for their
poetry. Lovers of literature can judge for themselves. Sceptics and
believers alike will warm to the author's compassion and her belief,in a
world gone mad for material gain, that there is something beyond the
purely physical which neither science nor religion can explain. |
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
748 |
Sanaya Roman |
OPENING TO CHANNEL |
|
How to connect with your Guide.
Throughout recorded history it has been thought that only those with a
special gift could connect with a spirit guide, their higher self or the
universal mind. Now, bestselling author and channel for Orin, Sanaya
Roman has collaborated with Duane Packer, Ph.D., channel for DaBen, to
produce the first step-by-step guide to the art of channeling.
Sanaya Roman and Duane Packer
|
|
First edition 1987 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
749 |
Sylvia Browne |
LIFE ON THE OTHER SIDE |
|
Renowned psychic, spiritual
teacher and New York Times bestselling author Sylvia Browne has changed
millions of lives with her unique gifts. Now she leads readers on an
adventure of the spirit: a surprising glimpse into the next world, where
their loved ones patiently await them. In this extraordinary book,
Sylvia reflects upon her past experiences, hypnosis sessions, and
research to tell the truth about The Other Side. She explains the
process of leaving this world for the next and how we can resume our
lives on Earth. Filled with stunning revelations and stories of those
who have visited The Other Side, this uplifting book is the ultimate
guide to finding peace in the afterlife. |
|
First edition 2001 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
750 |
Irene Hickman, D.O |
MIND PROBE - HYPNOSIS |
|
Hypnosis, though long ignored,
is now coming of age and is being used more and more by the helping
professionals. Hypnosis is probably the finest tool available for the
probing of the human mind. Its increased use non-directively will
undoubtedly bring us even closer to the answers to questions as to who,
what, and why we are and to how our minds really function. This book
illustrates the kind of adventures that are possible while exploring the
human mind, and further illustrates how ghosts from the past may be
discovered and laid to rest giving great benefit physically, mentally
and emotionally. |
|
First edition 1983 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
751 |
Morey Bernstein |
THE SEARCH FOR BRIDEY MURPHY |
|
Hypnotic regression is the
return of a person, under hypnosis, to an earlier age to recall or
relive detailed episodes of the past. This regression to the past can
be in the person's lifetime, and supposedly also in a previous life if
the regression goes back far enough. The most famous hypnotic
regression case is that of Bridey Murphy. In the early 50s Morey
Bernstein, a Colorado businessman and skilled hypnotist, regressed
Virginia Burns Tighe to her allegedly previous incarnation as Bridey
Murphy, a woman living in Cork, Ireland, in 1806. This book recounts in
vivid detail her former life in Cork. |
|
First edition 1956 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
752 |
Richard Bach |
JONATHAN LIVINGSTON SEAGULL |
|
A story.
People who make their own rules when they know they're right …
People who get a special pleasure out of doing something well (even if
only for themselves) …
People who know there's more to this whole LIVING thing than meets the
eye: they'll be with Jonathan Seagull all the way. Others may simply
escape into a delightful adventure about freedom and flight.
This book, quite simply, is unique. One Million Copies Sold
|
|
First edition 1972 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
753 |
Jasper Swain |
ON THE DEATH OF MY SON |
|
This touching and inspiring
book record's the author's reactions to the death of his eldest son in a
car accident. Bitterly cursing his fate, he is unwillingly drawn to
listen - first through a medium, later directly - to extraordinary
messages of comfort and instruction from a higher level of his son's
existence. This book is an astonishing and true testament of a
relationship that transcends death, and is a mine of information about
the real reasons for human existence, and the spiritual laws that govern
us. It has brought, and will bring, comfort and hope to many who are
perplexed, frightened or saddened by death.
Jasper Swain lives with his family in Pietermaitzburg, South Africa.
Well known in Natal for taking the cases of underdogs and used to being
the centre of controversy, he is now a magistrate in a Zulu community.
|
|
First edition 1974 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
754 |
Andrew Croft |
CATS, A GHOST AND GOD |
|
Andre Croft has a psychic
ability and he has linked with the spirit world on many occasions and in
many ways. In order to benefit others he has published his
experiences.
Introduction by Rev. John Jewsbury, West Wales
|
|
First edition 2001 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
755 |
Omraam Mikhael Aivanhov |
LOOKING INTO THE INVISIBLE |
|
The French philosopher and
spiritual Master, Omraam Mikhael Aivanhov (1900-1986), was born in
Bulgaria. In 1937 he emigrated to France, where he lived and taught for
almost fifty years until his death. One of the most striking aspects
of his teaching was the great variety of ways in which he presents the
one central theme of man and his growth in perfection. Whatever the
question under discussion, he invariably deals with it in terms of how
we can better conduct our lives.
"You must not imagine that, just because some people have mediumistic
capacities, this necessarily gives them access to every region of the
invisible world; on the contrary, they will see only what corresponds to
their own level of consciousness, their own thoughts and desires. Each
individual receives the degree of clairvoyance that matches his level
of evolution. Those who are still mired in the lower regions of the
astral plane are bound to suffer because they will only encounter the
entities of that plane. If you want to be in communication with
heavenly entities, with divine splendour, you must purufy yourself,
broaden the scope of your consciousness and work for the highest ideal:
the brotherhood of all men, the Kingdom of God. When you do this, your
emanations become purer, your vibrations subtler, and not only will the
spirits of light allow you to reach them but they themselves will come
to you."
|
|
First edition 2000 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
756 |
James E. Padgett |
TRUE GOSPEL REVEALED ANEW BY JESUS - VOLUME 1 |
|
In today's turbulent world, we
have to contend with not only modern day stresses, but also with
violence, hatred, pain and suffering. With these things surrounding us,
it can be very easy to feel a sense of hopelessness and despair. But
it is in these times, especially, that we need a closeness with our
Heavenly Father and His Divine Love in our hearts and souls. It was
during a similarly difficult time in our history, World War 1, that a
man named James Padgett began to receive messages from the spirit world.
There were many spirits who came to him and wrote messages on various
topics, but most important were the messages from Jesus of Nazareth who
chose Mr Padgett to receive messages of comfort and joy for mankind as
well as instructions for attaining the same Love in our souls that Jesus
himself experienced during his life and public ministry on earth. Mr
Padgett was born August 25, 1852, in Washington, D.C. and attended the
Polytechnic Academy Institute at Newmarket, Virginia. In 1880 he was
admitted to the bar in Washington, D.C., and thereafter practiced law
for 43 years until his death on March 17, 1923. During his student
years he became friendly with Professor Joseph Salyards, an instructor
at the Academy who, after his death in 1885, wrote him many interesting
messages between 1914 and 1923 through the vehicle of Mr Padgett's
developed gift of automatic writing. His wife, Helen, died about
February 1914, and was the first to write to him from the spirit world.
Mr Padgett never practiced his gift of mediumship as a means of earning
money. He was dedicated wholly to the reception of the great messages
signed Jesus and his many disciples. (Foundation Church of the New
Birth: www.divinelove.org )
received through James E. Padgett |
|
First edition 1958 |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
757 |
James E. Padgett |
TRUE GOSPEL REVEALED ANEW BY JESUS - VOLUME 2 |
|
These volumes explain Jesus'
public ministry as God's Messiah, and how he proclaimed the Glad Tidings
of the rebestowal by God, the Father of His Divine Love on mankind,
teaching his followers to pray and long for Its inflowing into their
souls. The volumes reveal how this Love's entrance into the soul
bestows the Kingdom of Heaven by causing the New birth of soul into the
Father's Immortal nature; and how these simple truths were lost after
Jesus' death, when men of lesser faith changed them without pursuing the
true and only way to the Divine Kingdom of Heaven which he had taught.
www.divinelove.org
received through James E. Padgett |
|
First edition 1941 |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
758 |
James E. Padgett |
ANGELIC REVELATIONS OF DIVINE TRUTH - VOLUME I |
|
These messages of Eternal
Truths from Jesus and Celestials, speak of the True Nature of God and
that the Holy Spirit is that part of God's Spirit which conveys His
Divine Love into the souls of His children. There are countless
messages concerning the spirit world - the spiritual spheres, the
natural heaven, the Celestial Heaven, the lower spheres or hells, and
what to expect when we die. Jesus speaks of our soul and of the sin and
error and how we are our own judge. He speaks of a God of Love who is
not waiting for a judgment day to condemn His children, but is awaiting
their acceptance of His Love. This book too speaks of the Authenticity
of the Bible in the form of messages relating to the truths and
non-truths contained within the Bible. (Foundation Church of Divine
Truth: www.fcdt.org ) mail order:- hollybrne@earthlink.net
received through James E. Padgett |
|
First edition 1989 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
759 |
James E. Padgett |
ANGELIC REVELATIONS OF DIVINE TRUTH - VOLUME 2 |
|
Presented in 2 Parts, Eternal
Truths contain formal messages from Jesus and the Celestials concerning
the higher truths of the spirit world. Some of the subjects include:
the True Nature of God, the importance of prayer, the New Birth of the
soul, the incarnation of the soul, life after death and soul
progression. Contemporary Misconceptions contains messages about
existing doctrine within and among present day religious organizations.
www.fcdt.org
received through James E. Padgett |
|
First edition 1992 |
M |
———————————————————————————— |
760 |
James E. Padgett |
NEW TESTAMENT REVELATIONS OF JESUS OF NAZARETH |
|
This volume contains messages
regarding correction to, and expansion of, the present-day New Testament
of the Bible. Jesus of Nazareth, Master of the Celestial Heavens,
along with a host of his Celestial brethren, discuss Jesus' birth and
boyhood in Egypt. Jesus discusses additional Old testament prophesies,
characters and occurrences, and explains the origins of further errors
in Orthodox religious beliefs and practices. www.fcdt.org
received through James E. Padgett and Dr Daniel G. Samuels |
|
First edition No Date |
O |
———————————————————————————— |
761 |
White Eagle |
THE LIVING WORD OF ST JOHN |
|
This is a full commentary by a
modern spiritual teacher on the most mystical of the four gospels, that
of St John, and it demonstrates the remarkable spiritual harmony between
White Eagle and the writer of the gospel, who lived so many years ago.
One of the things that separates St John's gospel from the others is in
the degree to which Jesus describes the purpose of his work on earth,
and what his life means for the relationship of the individual soul to
God. White Eagle takes up this point particularly, and it becomes clear
that the Christ is the central life, or light, within each one of us,
and that the path Jesus trod is the same road that each of us takes.
That is the starting-point for a much deeper and more detailed vision,
with a reinterpretation of the whole story of Jesus' life and its
significance. |
|
First edition 1949 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
762 |
Diane Cooper |
LIGHT UP YOUR LIFE |
|
… and Discover Your True
Purpose and Potential.
This book is about the Spiritual Laws of the Universe and how our lives
can change dramatically when we understand and apply them. Using
striking imagery and examples drawn from life, Diana Cooper shows how
techniques such as visualisation can be used to heal and strengthen.
She pays particular attention to relationships and how the misuseof
energy can lead to depression. She shows how we can learn to claim our
power and use it on the Spiritual Path to create good relationships,
prosperity and success. This is a life enhancing book, filled with hope
and inspiration.
|
|
First edition 1991 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
763 |
Nella Jones |
GHOST OF A CHANCE |
|
The life story of a Psychic
Detective
"I knew that the things I could see and hear were something
special.."
Paranormal gifts are rare. A gift like Nella Jones' staggering ability
to see events that have yet to take place, to envisage crimes that will
happen tomorrow, is quite unique. Ghost of a chance is the
extraordinary story of the girl, born the daughter of an itinerant
family of Kentish farmworkers, who grew up with a phenomenal gift of
faith-healing. Yet her psychic gifts have proved even more remarkable in
the realm of crime and detecton on such cases as the Kenwood art theft,
the Balcombe Street Seige and the Hunt for the Yorkshire Ripper.
Nella Jones with Shirley Davenport
|
|
First edition 1982 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
764 |
Clive Harold |
THE UNINVITED |
|
"It began with a bright light
high in the night sky …"
Every word in this book is as true as it is incredible. It happened in
1977. An ordinary family living in South Wales found themselves
entangled in a series of unearthy encounters. At first the
manifestations were minor. UFOs were sighted in the area. Huge burnt
patches were found in the fields. Television sets and cars blew all
their wiring. But before long the Coombs family was visited by weird
lights, huge white figures and a glowing, disembodied hand. Their lives
were disrupted, and they were terrified by something unidentifiable,
unimaginable …
|
|
First edition 1979 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
765 |
Hudson Tuttle |
LIFE IN TWO SPHERES |
|
Hudson Tuttle was born in 1836
in a log cabin to a poor farming family in Ohio, America. He was a
frail, sensitive boy, shy and modest. His education amounted to very
little, yet whilst still in his teens he astounded the world,
particularly the learned men of science, by embarking upon a series of
automatic writings that started with this book about scenes in the
summerland and included such books as the Arcana of Nature, which was a
book so philosophical and so profound, starting with the construction of
the atom and ending with the laws of spirit life. |
|
First edition 1895 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
766 |
Trutz Hardo |
CHILDREN WHO HAVE LIVED BEFORE |
|
In this book children from
England and the rest of Europe, the U.S.A. Lebanon, South Africa,
Israel, India, Brazil, Sri Lanka and Turkey remember their past lives.
Scientists - most notably Professor Ian Stevenson, Director at the
University of Virginia - report on how their stories are then followed
up to verify that the children's memories are correct. When the
children's statements are subjected to scientific verification, they are
invariably confirmed in every detail. |
|
First edition 2000 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
767 |
Gina Cerminara |
MANY MANSIONS |
|
The Edgar Cayce Story on
Reincarnaton.
Edgar Cayce's incredible healing power is recorded fact. Thousands of
microfilms filed at the Association for Research and Enlightenment at
Virginia Beach testify to Cayce's ability to diagnose, prescribe for,
and cure the ills of people whose names and locations he was given, but
whom he had never seen. Known as "The Miracle Man of Virginia Beach, "
his successes astonished medical authorities - and the world.
Many Mansions is Dr. Cerminara's account of these healings - and an
affirmation of the age-old belief in reincarnation. She tells how Cayce
saw the barriers of space and time, how he penetrated the "previous"
lives of his subjects, and performed the fantastic cures and prophecies
that made him the most remarkable clairvoyant in modern history.
|
|
First edition 1950 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
768 |
Florence Marryat |
THERE IS NO DEATH |
|
Death is not the end! "That is
the message of this remarkable book, which describes the incredible
phenomena of Spiritualism in its golden age of the nineteenth century.
Written in 1891, it is still as fresh and as wonderful as when it first
appeared. The woman who wrote this book not only knew all the great
mediums of her time, but was also gifted with rare psychic powers
herself. Hundreds of educated people - men of letters, scientists, and
clergymen were brought to the study of Spiritualism by this courageous
book. She personally attended the seances of Florence Cook, the
marvelous medium who was investigated by the famous scientist Sir
William Crookes. She knew Mrs Guppy Volckman, and here tells how this
medium, one of the heaviest women in London, was levitated over the
heads of the sitters at a seance. The message of the book is that
individuality survives death, which is only the beginning of a further
chapter in human evolution. The authoress claimed personal experience
of the reality of individual survival, and here narrates first-hand
accounts of the materialization of spirit forms, as well as convincing
messages from individuals who had passed over." Michael Lord |
|
First edition 1891 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
769 |
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle |
THE HISTORY OF SPIRITUALISM - VOLUME 1 |
|
The History of Spiritualism,
penned by the man who invented Sherlock Holmes, is a truly astonishing
book. Sir Arthur Conan Doyle begins by featuring visionary Emanual
Swedenborg, telling, for example, how the seer observed and reported on a
fire in Stockholm 300 miles away with perfect accuracy, even though "he
was at a diner party with 16 guests, who made valuable witnesses."
Among others Sir Arthur features is Andrew Jackson Davis, the American
clairvoyant who whilst in trance spoke Hebrew, a language that as an
"ignorant young man," he simply did not know. Moreover Sir Arthur
documents the advent of modern Spiritualism from its beginnings in
America to its dawning in Britain. Mediums he highlights include D.D.
Home, who demonstrated his superb psychic gifts to European and Russian
royalty. Of course, no investigation of Spiritualism would be complete
without mentioning scientific pioneers like Sir William Crookes. Sir
Arthur describes the thrilling materialisation seances Sir William
attended with Florence Cook. |
|
First edition 1926 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
770 |
Neil Irwin |
UNDERSTANDING CRYSTALS |
|
Formed 40 million years beneath
the earth's surface in beds of volcanic rock, crystals are the focus of
a growing interest worldwide. In this clearly understood introduction
to the study of crystals and gemstones, Neil Irwin outlines the
properties and uses of crystals and their value in furthering inner
growth and awareness. |
|
First edition 1991 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
771 |
April Ryedale |
WISDOM STRANDED |
|
Once upon a time long, long ago
there was Wisdom … and she was present everywhere with all the desire
and all the intensity of all there was … Was it good, this infinite
presence of the not-yet-created? It simply was … Wisdom alone knew
something of its possibiliities.
At last in time-without-end … the Word was spoken … birthed from
uncreation as surely as a mother births a child … Ceaselessly she loved
creation out of uncreation … She alone knew that the Word arrived as
both gift and burden.
Into the vast unutterable space Wisdom poured herself. She alone
knows something of its possibilities.
Before time began, or could have been, was Will-to-Be. Wisdom waited in
the silence for the Word to sound; then she poured herself into the
vast spaces that became. She alone knows something of the
possibilities.
Unfurling from the felt constraints of Will,
Wisdom wandered off and lost herself.
This is the story of what befell her - and the first two generations of
her family - in the Southern continent of Godwonland, during the first
half of this twentieth century, when ancient cultures clashed with
colonisers.
|
|
First edition 1998 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
772 |
April Ryedale |
STRANDS OF WISDOM |
|
This middle volume of THE
WISDOM TRILOGY carries the story of Wisdom's family, in the southern
continent of Godwonland, as a speeded-up myth of human evolution through
to the 4th and 5th generations, thus bringing it to the end of this
millennium. The final volume projecting into the future, will end with
the 7th generation in about 2040.
The underlying theme of life as the dynamic interaction of ray energies
at every level is explicitly developed in an interlude following Phase
1. In Phases 2 and 3 oppressive pressures on and by the 3rd generation
begin to resolve as the reflective consciousness of the 4th is
unexpectedly enhanced by a new and refreshing approach to learning and
to meaning, together with the infusion of new blood into the family from
that same source.
|
|
First edition 2000 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
773 |
April Ryedale |
RISKING WISDOM |
|
This third volume sees the
fifth generation of the family of Wisdom spanning the earth from North
to South, while the sixth go far into the west before returning to their
native Godwilland, to birth the somewhat startling seventh.
Both world need and how the workings of the cosmos may be better
understood in terms of the coherent energies of sound and light are
central themes of this final narrative of human evolution, telescoped
(to speak figuratively) from the day before yesterday to tomorrow
afternoon. (The author calls us to awaken to the truth of our being -
Bridge Trust Newsletter)
|
|
First edition 2002 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
774 |
April Ryedale |
MY ENEMY MY FRIEND |
|
The author is one of the
offspring of a 1920's liason between a severely maimed, self-exiled
writer, born in Dublin, and an English lady, raised in Russia and sent
to England to escape the Revolution. Educated in Ealing, a leafy West
London suburb, this daughter excelled in neither work nor play. A brief
period of work at the Paddington Library during the Blitz, was
interrupted when she joined the Army in 1942. From this new vantage
point she gained a place at Somerville to read for English Honours as
part of the post-War vintage of 1946. Having again not distinguished
herself, she withdrew to start a family in the Lake District. April
Ryedale has been widowed for the past decade and is now approaching her
seventieth birthday. The death of her youngest son from AIDS two years
ago has been a major impetus in launching her on a writing career. My
Enemy My Friend explores what the author believes to be the world's most
urgent need today: to face the minefields inherent in our relationships
at every level, from interpersonal intimacy to international relations
and even with our planet itself. These poems demonstrate the importance
of trying to reach full awareness of our instincts and bodily feelings,
which have been stunted by our inadequate and one-sided western
education. |
|
First edition 1993 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
775 |
Vera Stanley Alder |
WISDOM IN PRACTICE |
|
All around us the world of
human affairs hums its busy complex life. The mixture of good and bad,
beauty and sordidness, vitality and monotony, which offers itself for
our judgment, is accepted by us according to our individual outlook.
Perhaps we ask ourselves sometimes what the meaning is of this
tantalizing mixture, why it is as it is - maybe we criticize it all
bitterly. To what degree, though, do we connect it all with ourselves?
In this book we are out to find just how much each one of us is
responsible for the state of human affairs today. If we can bring home
the blame equally to all of us and ascertain our part in the creation of
present world chaos, then by the same token we will have discovered the
cure, and the means by which all of us without exception must build our
new world.
Written around the time of War Two, this book still finds relevance in
our modern age today.
|
|
First edition No date |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
776 |
Litany Burns |
DEVELOP YOUR PSYCHIC ABILITIES |
|
Do you ever wonder why some
people seem to have exceptional luck, uncanny perception, and perfect
timing? It's no accident, for hidden within each of us is an intuitive
potential waiting to be tapped. In this book the author explains,
through a series of simple, effective, step-by-step techniques and
exercises how you can learn to recognize and cultivate your hidden
talents and achieve serenity, harmony and success. |
|
First edition 1985 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
777 |
Glennyce S. Eckersley |
SAVED BY THE ANGELS |
|
Saved by the Angels tells warm
and uplifting true stories of the extraordinary things that can happen
to people if they have a near-death experience, and the effect this may
have on their friends and relatives. It also desribes incredible events
which show just how close we all are to the "other" world, which we may
only glimpse occasionally but which, if we do, may change our lives
forever. |
|
First edition 2002 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
778 |
Ted Andrews |
HOW TO SEE AND READ THE AURA |
|
Each of us is enveloped in a
telling energy field called the aura. If you've ever felt immediately
uncomfortable or unexplainably at ease with someone you've just met, you
have experienced his or her aura. Now you can learn to see auras
around yourself and others, and determine by their varying sizes and
colors what they say about a person's physical, emotional and spiritual
self. |
|
First edition 1991 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
779 |
Finbarr Nolan |
SEVENTH SON OF A SEVENTH SON |
|
Finbarr Nolan is a rare and, in
Irish folklore, highly regarded quirk of genealogy, the seventh son of a
seventh son. It is said that such a man can cure all illnesses by the
touch of his right hand … Finbarr was two days old when people started
coming to be healed by him. He was seventeen when media discovery led
to thousands flocking to his home in a remote Irish village. Since then
he has experienced highs and lows - bankrupsy and public rejection
amidst international travel and the constant flow of proven cures. The
sick and the lame that conventional medicine failed to help have flocked
to him down the years and the healing gift considered to be his as a
birthright has transformed their lives. Yet there has been tragedy and
chaos in his own life. After over twenty years as a respected and often
controversial healer, Finbarr tells the full story of his life in this
book. With total honesty he presents his experience as an ordinary man
granted an extraordinary gift.
Finbarr Nolan with Martin Duffy |
|
First edition 1992 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
780 |
Neville Randall |
LIFE AFTER DEATH |
|
Leslie Flint was one of the
greatest direct voice mediums that this country has ever known. Neville
Randall has sifted through over 500 taped conversations that psychics
Betty Greene and George Woods held through the trance mediumship of
Leslie Flint with those who have passed on, in order to compile this
amazing dossier of life as it is lived in "heaven."
(see also 66) |
|
First edition 1975 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
781 |
John Edward |
CROSSING OVER |
|
BOOK
John Edward is changing the way millions of people think about life
after death. His show Crossing Over with John Edward, has been the talk
of the television industry since it first hit the airwaves in June 2000
on the Sci Fi Channel. Now that Crossing Over has become nationally
syndicated, the first-ever psychic television host takes millions of
fans behind the scenes of his life, his work, and his breathtaking
programme. In this fascinating and highly entertaining book, John
brings you with him on the extraordinary journey that has been his life
since his bestseller One Last Time was published in 1998. In the style
of his TV show and personal appearances - poignant, funny and remarkably
candid - John deals head-on with the controversial issues he has
confronted on his voyage as a psychic medium. On the way to becoming an
international celebrity, John has had to learn his own lessons about
the meaning of his work and about the motivations of some of the people
he has met on his path. |
|
First edition 2001 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
782 |
Stuart Gray |
MEDIUMS RARE |
|
Who are they? Where do they
come from? How do they work?
This book contains the life stories of six working mediums. The various
biographies detail in their own words their personal history; explain
their upbringing, early psychic experiences and introduction into
Spiritualism; their training and development as mediums; and the
differing ways in which they work. Each medium has a very personal
attitude to the methods by which clairvoyance is obtained, and examples
are given of both physical and mental mediumship, spiritual healing, and
other associated phenomena. Forword by Tony Ortzen
|
|
First edition 1985 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
783 |
Thomas Sugrue |
THERE IS A RIVER |
|
Here is the real-life story of
one of the most extraordinary human beings the world has ever known -
Edgar Cayce … the man whose uncanny powers of clairvoyance provided him
with miraculous insights that went far beyond the world of reality -
baffling doubters, astounding believers … and almost always being proved
correct. This amazing true story of Edgar Cayce, his remarkable
prophecies, insights into the soul, and the medical cures he prescribed
while in trance is told by the only writer who knew and investigated him
while he lived. |
|
First edition 1942 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
784 |
D Scott Rogo |
THE RETURN FROM SILENCE |
|
A Study of Near-Death
Experiences.
Is there life after death? For the living, this is the greatest
unsolved mystery, but one for which we shall all know the answer one
day. However, there are many people who have had close calls with death
and who believe they have been given a glimpse of the future, of an
existence which awaits us after we die. They find themselves floating
outside their bodies, and often transported to a heavenly world before
returning to earth. Do these near-death experiences prove that the soul
survives after death, or are they simply vivid hallucinations? The
Return From Silence is an up-to-date examination of what medicine,
psychology and science are learning from the near-death experience, or
NDE. Rather than assuming that such experiences prove life after death,
the author critically examines the important issues concerning the
phenomenon, such as who has the experiences, how it affects them, and
whether their culture affects the manner of their experiences.
Furthermore, can the experiences be induced by situations other than
near-death?
|
|
First edition 1989 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
785 |
edited by Canon Michael Perry |
SPIRITUALISM |
|
The 1939 Report to the
Archbishop of Canterbury.
In 1936, Archbishop Lang set up a Committee under Dean (later Bishop)
Underhill "to investigate the subject of communications with discarnate
spirits and the claims of Spiritualism in relation to the Christian
faith". It reported in 1939, but the text of its Report was not made
public for another forty years, and has been out of print for some time.
It is now reproduced in full, with essays on the formation of the
Committee, the fate of the Report, and an assessment of its contents.
|
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
786 |
Joel Rothschild |
SIGNALS |
|
Signals is the extraordinary
true story of two young men who met, became friends and then drifted
apart. When they met again several years later, both were living with
full-blown Aids. As Joel and Albert began a warm and loving
relationship that sustained them through early days of the Aids epidemic
that hit LA, they witnessed the deaths of many close friends and
decided to make a pact: whoever died first would attempt to contact the
other. It was Joel, the more sceptical of the two, who was left behind.
Distraught with grief, and yet furious that he had been "abandoned" by
his friend, Joel soon discovered that - try as he might - he could not
ignore the signals that began to drift into his consciousness or the
words of guidance and support he received from his friend. He also
began to realize that his new-found psychic awareness was a precous gift
that could be used to help others. Written with honesty and insight,
Signals is the remarkable story of an awakening, an adventure story of
amazing experiences and encounters which offers wonderful proof of an
afterlife. It is also a story of hope and healing, and a moving
testament to the power of love. |
|
First edition 2000 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
787 |
Jean Kelford |
OBLIVIOUS BUT TRUE |
|
This memorable book of strange,
wonderful experiences in Jean's connections with the Spirit world are,
as she says, "incurred by those around me and are a way of life."
Realisation of the gift of communicating with the so-called "dead"
arrived later making her whole life change. Suddenly strange past
experiences became more easily understood by herself, family and friends
bringing an awareness that through those years she had indeed been
"oblivious" to the fact that she had been talking to "dead" people. |
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
788 |
W. F. Wilson |
IT HAPPENED TO ME |
|
A tale of a Northern Home
Circle The Author was born in 1903. His parents were devout Anglicans.
He was confirmed in 1917 but became confused after the preparation
classes. A few years later the confusion became slowly disbelief.
Becoming agnostic he still retained a deep respect for the great leader,
Christ, and felt convinced that His words and actions had been
represented incorrectly by the hierarchy over the last twenty centuries.
From 1952 he accepted Spiritualism, receiving many proofs of survival
in his Home Circle. This book explains his experiences and beliefs for
future generations to come. |
|
First edition 1970 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
789 |
Wellesley Tudor Pole |
THE SILENT ROAD |
|
"Man's life on earth is of
short duration. Viewed from the background of history it is literally
true to say that we are here today and gone tomorrow. We come into this
world. We remain here for a little while. Then we go away. Where
have we come from? For what purposes are we here? What happens next?
For those who think that man's existence as a conscious being begins at
birth and ends at death, these questions are meaningless. For the rest
of us, they are surely of great importance and cannot be side-stepped or
dismissed outright". W.T.P.
In his Foreword the Author wrote, "Awareness of reality must
inevitably be reached interiorly. For this reason I have no desire to
bring conviction to those who may regard what I have written as being
incredible or the product of a fertile imagination. It is well,
however, to remind ourselves occasionally that in almost every field of
research the so-called fantasies of yesterday often become the facts of
today. The horizons of the mind are not fixed: they are expanding
easelessly. Therefore it is suggested that what I have recorded should
be read with a mind free from preconceived ideas or set opinions. The
search for Truth is a personal and solitary adventure". Each chapter is
a little gem in itself - a separate entity, dealing with some aspect of
the mind, be it clairvoyance, precognition, dreams, memory or
imagination.
|
|
First edition 1960 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
790 |
compiled by Mary Halfpenny |
MISCELLANY |
|
"This little book is a
collection of inspired verse and readings received during quiet moments
by several Spiritualists from the West Midlands. We all need words to
live by, to inspire and guide us". Gordon M. Higginson, President of
the Spiritualists' National Union. |
|
First edition 1990 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
791 |
Stephen Levine |
A GRADUAL AWAKENING |
|
This classic book has never
been out of print since it was first published in 1979. It has been
widely acknowledged as probably the best existing text on Vipassana
meditation. A simple and gently-written book, it is about Mindfulness -
an ancient and accessible meditation form, with Buddhist origins. The
basis of the practice is, Stephen says, "to directly participate in each
moment as it occurs, with as much awareness and understanding as
possible". A Gradual Awakening has been important to thousands of
people as a clear, basic guide to meditation, covering both the method
itself and the issues arising from it. |
|
First edition 1979 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
792 |
Stephen Levine |
WHO DIES? |
|
While many books have dealt
with the "stages of dying," and particularly the stages of acceptance of
death, this is the first to demonstrate how to open the immensity of
living with death. Who Dies? shows us how to participate fully in life
as the perfect preparation for whatever may come next, be it sorrow or
joy, loss or gain, death or a new wonderment at life.
Stephen Levine is a poet, longtime practitioner of Buddhist
meditation, and meditation teacher who in close collaboration with his
wife, Ondrea, is a dedicated servant to those facing death. In this
book he integrates all these areas of expertise in a manner that at
moments assumes classic proportions. I honour this effort and invite
you to share in the richness of this offering. Ram Dass
|
|
First edition 1986 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
793 |
Chogyam Trungpa |
MEDITATION IN ACTION |
|
The search to understand the
workings of the human mind is an age-old phenomenon. The practice of
meditation provides an intuitive and simple, yet profound means of
gaining this understanding, by observing our world and ourselves. To
sit in meditation and allow mental pictures, concepts, and emotions to
arise, dwell, and then disappear leads to genuine insight into the
background of our psychological makeup. In this way the world of
thoughts and the world of action are brought together, and one's
experience can be seen clearly, without conceptual overlays. If
meditation practice is seen as a purely religious activity, we miss the
point. To call something "religious" implies its otherworldiness: it
implies that there is a separate "secular" reality. But in the practice
of meditation, sacred and secular are not distinguished; rather one's
experience is seen simply as the ground of what is real. The Author's
discussion of meditation is neither esoteric nor distant: it is directly
significant to our lives in the present "here and now" of our
experience. His introduction to meditation and its application in our
everyday world of action presents the possibility of living our lives
sanely, with understanding of ourselves and compassion for others. |
|
First edition 1969 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
794 |
Sheila Gwillam |
IN TOUCH WITH RAYNOR C. JOHNSON |
|
In his lifetime Dr. Raynor C.
Jonson combined the clarity of a research scientist with the knowledge
of a scholar and the spiritaul insight of a meditator. Master of
Queen's College, in the University of Melbourne, his books such as The
Imprisoned Splendour and Watcher on the Hills received worldwide
recognition among those on the spiritual path. Dr Johnson passed from
this life in 1987 having, over the years, given 30,000 students a
glimpse of the spiritual world. He returned in 1992 from his realm
beyond death through the trance medium Sheila Gwillam to dictate the
contents of this book to a group in Devon. Read how the respected
author Paul Beard joined the group to chat to his old acquaintance of
many lifetimes, and to receive spiritual guidance in which all of us who
read and treasure this book may share. |
|
First edition 1996 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
795 |
Paul Beard |
THE JAMES - JOHN EXPERIMENT |
|
The College of Psychic Studies -
Paper 6
This experiment was framed in the autumn of 1966 by Brigadier Firebrace.
Its purpose was to obtain evidence of survival of a sophisticated
kind, including, if possible, cross-correspondences from two specific
deceased communicators named James and John.
|
|
First edition 1973 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
796 |
Betty Wilby |
CLIMBING THE MOUNTAIN TO FAITH |
|
"This true story reveals
wonderful proof of survival of my loved ones in the spirit world. They
showed great knowledge of my life since their passing and their joy at
being able to share in the building of a new life for me. They bought
help to me in my troubled personal situation, bringing love and solace
to my tears and trauma; gently leading me to a new life; finding me a
new home - even to the exact location; encouraging me to write this
book; recognising the coming of new grandchildren and many other things.
As my knowledge increased and my faith and trust in my beloved Father
God grew, He gave me the gift to heal, which became the focal point of
my life and was part of an "out of body" experience, which changed my
whole concept of life. The gifts from God and the spirit world have
been many over these last years, but also my lessons and tasks have been
hard. The way up the mountain is not easy, it seems to be true that
there can only be gain through pain, but still I find the journey
totally absorbing". |
|
First edition 1997 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
797 |
Betty Wilby |
WALKING MY PATH OF DESTINY |
|
"My first book, Climbing the
Mountain to Faith covered the first five years of my spiritual journey,
bringing much proof of survival of my loved ones in the spirit world,
finding my way to be a healer, and my hard lessons as I climbed my
Mountain. This second book continues the journey from 1995 to 1998 and
shows how I used the faith I found on the mountain to continue my work
of healing and helping others find their way forward and also in my own
life. I was helped always by my Father God and my loved ones from the
spirit world, who come to work with me. As I began to recognise my path
was a predestined one, I saw all the pieces of the jigsaw of my whole
life slip, one by one, into place, until I found that peace and
contentment which every one seeks". |
|
First edition 1999 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
798 |
Betty Wilby |
SO WHERE DO I GO FROM HERE? |
|
"This third book is the
continuation of my journey, showing how my healing work progressed and
became my whole life; how I came to grow in my understanding of the
spirit world and of my guides and helpers on the higher side of life.
How I came into much closer contact with my loved ones in spirit when I
witnessed physical mediumship and we were able to hold hands and talk
together, indeed to be truly reunited. Why I continue to search and
seek for the answer to the question "So Where Do I Go From Here?" |
|
First edition 2001 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
799 |
Betty Shine |
A FREE SPIRIT |
|
A lifetime of healing has given
Betty Shine an insight into the inhumanity that prevails in today's
society. Though many people try to sweep these issues under the carpet,
the interaction between every living thing on this planet affects us
all. In fact, so many life forms have become extinct, it is only a
matter of time before it happens to us. There is a way out, and that is
for everyone who cares about our planet to take up the challenges
represented in this book. With courage and tenacity you can become a
free Spirit. Whether an animal lover or simply seeking to improve your
relationships, this book will give you a simple philosophy that could
change your life. In A Free Spirit Betty Shine not only shares her own
remarkable gifts but she also recalls the experiences of her readers
when their own healing abilities have been revealed at the time they
needed them most. You will be inspired by Betty's relentless campaign
against cruelty, both in the animal kingdom and our own, but her
greatest gift to you will be the key to the doors of your mind that
would otherwise remain closed. |
|
First edition 2001 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
800 |
Billy Roberts |
THE HEALING PAW |
|
Whether your pet is a furry
feline or a cunning canine it will be deeply in tune with your personal
rhythms and uniquely equipped to tap into your need for healing.
History is full of stories of exceptional relationships between pets and
their owners - animals who have searched for us, guided us, offered us
companionship and security and even saved our lives. This book contains
astounding true stories of special animals whose exceptional
intelligence and power has transformed the lives of those who lived with
them. |
|
First edition 2000 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
801 |
Amanuesis W.T. Stead |
AFTER DEATH |
|
Enlarged Edition of "Letters
From Julia". Before his death on the Titanic, W.T. Stead had already
had various re-prints of this book published. This book is an enlarged
edition of his book, put together by his daughter Estelle Stead after
her fathers death. The book comprises of a series of letters given to
W.T. Stead before his death through automatic writing, from Julie his
childhood friend after she had passed a lengthy period in the afterlife. |
|
First edition 1897 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
802 |
Reginald M. Lester |
IN SEARCH OF THE HEREAFTER |
|
"Mr Lester gives in this book
an account of his investigations, over a period of some thirty months,
into the evidence for life after death and the claims made by various
branches of the spiritualist movement in connection with survival. The
author is no woolly theorist but a prominent member of the journalistic
profession, tending by the nature of his work to take a somewhat
sceptical view of things. In the matter under discussion he was
decidedly a sceptic to begin with, but he found that his investigations
gradually drew him towards belief, and he eventually became a convert.
The reader gets a frank, sincere and straightforward report of the
author's personal findings, and of what he considers to be facts and
proofs making up a conclusive case for the continuity of life beyond the
existence of the body. Mr Lester rejects as false some of the evidence
placed before him, and he criticizes mediums whose messages and methods
he doubts, thus giving a fair picture. The author has become convinced
that life is continuous, and he feels it his duty to present the
evidence he has accumilated. |
|
First edition 1952 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
803 |
Robert Crookall |
THE NEXT WORLD - AND THE NEXT |
|
This book is a careful study
and survey which has been made on the clothes that have been worn by
appearances of the dead. "Since characteristic differences are noted
as between the clothes that are worn by the newly-dead and the
long-dead, communications that describe the two chief after-death
environments, namely Hades and Paradise, are then examined, as are those
that describe transitions from one to the other". |
|
First edition 1966 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
804 |
Einer Nielsen |
SOLID PROOFS OF SURVIVAL |
|
"My childhood was very bright
and happy. I was like all other children, and loved the same games that
they loved. When I was about three years of age my mother died. I was
so young that I do not remember her, but my father has told me, that
when, a month later, he visited her grave together with me, I saw her
and talked to her and wished to take her home. My father was not
familiar with Spiritualism at that time, and he thought that it was only
a childish illusion. He also noticed, when I was playing alone, that I
sometimes talked with somebody. When he asked me withwhom I was
playing, I told him that Paul and Mary paid me visits. I was very much
surprised that my friends were invisible to my father." …. so begins
the story of the Danish transfiguration medium Einer Nielsen whose
materialisation seances have astounded the world not to mention the
psychic researchers who so rigorously put him to the test. Foreword by
Einer H. Kvaran, President, Society for Psychic Research, Iceland. |
|
First edition 1950 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
805 |
John Hawkins |
THE RAINBOW MANSIONS |
|
"Living with spiritual gifts
proved more of a burden than a blessing. My spiritual insight led me to
uncover, in the Bible, a book within a book. I found a dual-purpose
book for dual-purpose beings, harmonising two sides of my personality;
being a natural Spiritualist gave me the advantage as a theologian.
This has given me the courage to reveal my secret life, previously
shared only with my spirit guide. I have always lived with the
knowledge that there is life after death for us all - there is nothing
to fear in death. I offer you a detailed, step-by-step, explanation of
the natural transition from this world to the spirit realms. This book
will, therefore, open the door for you." |
|
First edition 2002 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
806 |
Julie Ness |
THROUGH MY EYES |
|
This is an interesting
autobiography from Julie Ness. People often express curiosity about the
special gifts of those who operate as psychics or clairvoyants, and in
this text Ms Ness offers the reader an opportunity to hear a first-hand
insiders account. We learn how the author's gift came to her in the
years of young adulthood, and of how she came to terms with the
difference that this ability marked in her. Certainly she has used her
gift to positive effect, working to help people who have some
psychological or emotional need. The author's personality comes across
in the text as sympathetic and engaging, addressing the reader on
friendly, even intimate terms. As a result there is a directness and
honesty in the telling of this account, and even a sceptical reader
might find some occasion to adjust his convictions. |
|
First edition 2001 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
807 |
David Moorhouse |
PSYCHIC WARRIOR |
|
The true story of the CIA's
paranormal espionage programme. When David Moorhouse, a much decorated
army officer was hit by a stray bullet, he began to be plagued with
visions and uncontrolled out-of-body experiences. As a consequence, he
was recruited as a psychic spy for "Stargate", a highly-classified
programme of espionage instigated by the CIA and the US Defence
Department. Trained to develop spiritual, clairvoyant capacities, he
became one of a select band of "remote viewers" in pursuit of previously
unattainable political and military secrets. When Moorhouse discovered
that the next step in the top-secret programme was "remote influencing"
- turning "viewers" like himself into deadly weapons - he rebelled. In
his efforts to expose the programme, he and his family endured the full
force of the US intelligence community's attemps to silence him. As
the multi-million-dollar Stargate scandal was exposed to the world,
Morehouse himself became the enemy of the secret services. |
|
First edition 1996 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
808 |
J. Aelwyn Roberts |
HOLY GHOSTBUSTER |
|
Aelwyn Roberts is an Anglican
priest of the Church in Wales. Throughout his long ministry he was
called to help people haunted by ghosts. Over thirty-six years as Vicar
of Llandegai, he investigated countless cases of hauntings, freed
families from fears of ghost interlopers and sometimes made it possible
for terrestrial and celestial tenants to live together under the same
roof. Aelwyn finds his Christian beliefs have been strengthened by
first-hand knowledge of life after death and is able to say, "At one
time I believed in life after death but now I know." The remarkable
stories he tells of his encounters with the supernatural speak for
themselves. |
|
First edition 1990 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
809 |
William Bloom |
PSYCHIC PROTECTION |
|
We all have a natural
sensitivity to energies and atmospheres in people and places. In this
book the author shows you how to protect yourself from difficult
situations and unpleasant atmospheres and what you can do to change
them. |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
810 |
Diana Cooper |
A LITTLE LIGHT ON THE SPIRITUAL LAWS |
|
"Life on Earth is a team game.
It is vital to learn the rules so that you can participate and make
your contribution. A game of football would become a free-for-all if
everyone did their own thing, so players are taught the rules before
they go on to the field. In the same way we are taught the spiritual
laws before we are born. When you understand and follow the spiritual
laws you can create heaven on Earth. But life on Earth has turned into a
free-for-all because people have forgotton them or chosen to disregard
them. This book offers reminders and an understanding of the spiritual
laws. For thousands of years humans have played the game like a rabble
of children. Relationships have been based on need and desire for
control, success measured by material gain and possessions. Predominant
emotions have been anger, hurt and fear because people have been
focused on physical and sexual sensation. When people take themselves
too seriously they are critical and judgmental of themselves and others.
Many people feel tense and out of control. Often people feel they
have to justify their existence or prove their superiority, so that life
becomes a power struggle and disharmony prevails. It is time for a
change. We are preparing for promotion to a higher league." |
|
First edition 2000 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
811 |
Geraldine Cummins |
MIND IN LIFE AND DEATH |
|
Geraldine Cummins was one of
the greatest automatic writers of her time. Her work was stringently
tested by the Council of the Society for Psychical Research. This book
can well be described as a well documented disection of some of the
cases of automatic writing that was received through the hands of Miss
Cummins. Of particular interest to readers may be the fascinating
"Roosevelt" case. |
|
First edition 1956 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
812 |
Sir Oliver Lodge |
THE TRUTH THE WHOLE TRUTH AND NOTHING BUT THE TRUT |
|
Ray Smith was born in
Lancashire and has for many years resided in both Gibralter and Spain.
He became a schoolteacher for twenty five years then sampled the
business world by buying and running first a large public house then a
guest house. In-between these two ventures he bought a yacht in which
he and his family sailed to many places over a period of nearly ten
years. His interest in psychic research has been with him all his life
in a quest to find the truth about life and death. He and his wife June
helped form the Gibralter Psychic Research Society and have appeared
many times on Television and Radio. They have presented some of the
world's finest mediums to the people of the southern Mediterranean
coast. To his surprise, after nearly half a century he has succeeded in
fusing minds with the late Sir Oliver Lodge as well as others who now
dwell in the mind/spirit world. Subjects hitherto not fully researched
are covered in his books and offer new truths about previously accepted
evidence.
Transcribed through Raymond Smith from Sir Oliver Lodge |
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
813 |
Reginald M Lester |
TOWARDS THE HEREAFTER |
|
This book, a sequel to the
author's In Search of the Hereafter carries his personal investigations
into life after death several stages further, and particularly in the
direction of spiritual healing, which he examines impartially from all
angles before giving his conclusions. A good deal of attention is paid
to the recent developments in relating psychic research to the Christian
religion, whereby the study of this subject has now been brought into
the orthodox churches. It is also shown how the gap between religion
and science is narrowing, and how scientists are now co-operating with
church leaders on a common frontier. |
|
First edition 1956 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
814 |
Eileen Drewery |
MY LIFE AS A HEALER |
|
'I am amazed at what healing
has achieved for me and I would say to those who mock it "Don't knock it
till you've tried it" '.
These words, spoken by one who has benefited, show why Eileen Drewery
has been one of Britain's most successful faith healers for many years
now, bringing hope to many who are suffering from appalling pain and
grief. In this powerful and uplifting book she recalls the many
fascinating and moving cases where she has helped those who are
suffering. Thrust into the limelight because of her work with Glenn
Hoddle and the England football squad, Eileen Drewery explains how she
has used her astonishing powers, given to her by God, to bring comfort
and relief to those most in need. She reveals how healing works, and
discusses her beliefs. My Life as a Healer is the remarkable story of a
remarkable woman, and her journey to enlightenment.
"Eileen, I have told them (the press) everything, about your work and
how much I have benefitted from it. I told them you're a saint". Ian
Wright
|
|
First edition 1999 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
815 |
Tony Hogan |
BORN TO HEAL |
|
He was born wrapped in a caul
and fighting for his life, but as soon as she saw him the old nurse knew
that Tony Hogan was "rare and special". Yet many years were to pass
and adventures take place before Tony himself discovered his true
vocation: he was born to heal.
This is the autobiography of an extraordinary man who has devoted
his life to restoring health and happiness to all those who come to him.
In Born to Heal, Tony takes us with him on the colourful journey from
his childhood roots in rural Ireland, cared for by his formidable yet
wise grandmother, through his turbulent youth in Dublin, to his
wonderful success as one of Ireland's leading spiritual healers.
|
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
816 |
Cassandra Eason |
A COMPLETE GUIDE TO FAIRIES AND MAGICAL BEINGS |
|
"Fairies have been described in
mythology and actual experience in almost every culture and age. They
are as varied in their forms and attributes as nature itself: gentle
and ethereal, magnificent beings of light, hideous black forms with eyes
like glowing coals, golden-haired maidens, withered crones, a shadow in
the grass, a rustling of leaves when there is no wind, the ripple of
sunlight or moonlight on water".
This book introduces you to the enchanting world of these
beautiful and powerful creatures. From wood nymphs to lorelei, goblins
to pixies, Cassandra Eason explores fascinating fairy myths and legends
from around the world, and shows you how to unlock fairy energy and
magic for yourself.
|
|
First edition 2001 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
817 |
Teresa Moorey |
FAERIES AND NATURE SPIRITS |
|
"The entrances to the World of
Faerie are elusive and, if we once find one, we may return on a cold
morning to find it gone, leaving us in the greyness of our mortality.
And yet there are many Faerie portals; in the twisted claw of a
tree-root, shimmering where a sunbeam earths itself amid beech trees,
around the other side of the barrow-mound - always around the other
side. We catch echoes of faery music or glimpse the grace of their
movements from the corner of the eye, for only to rare mortals and at
rare times do the Fair Folk manifest in their brilliance. Our "reality"
is too stodgy a medium for their delicacy."
As we become more aware of other dimensions, faeries are making
their presence felt, as they did to our ancestors. Cross over into the
Otherworld and meet the faeries …
|
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
818 |
Rudolf Steiner |
GUARDIAN ANGELS |
|
Throughout the ages,
traditional folklore has spoken of guardian angels as spirits who guide
and protect human beings. In modern times, however, their existence has
largely been written off as myth and superstition. Based on his
personal experience and cognition, Rudolf Steiner speaks of guardian
angels and other spiritual beings as a reality. Their existence, he
says, is a spiritual and scientific fact which can be fruitfully
researched and studied through clairvoyant means. Furthermore, working
consciously with these entities can assist each of us in fulfilling our
evolutionary goals. In these six specially selected lectures Rudolf
Steiner elucidates the role of the guardian angel, and also discusses
our relationship to the heavenly hierarchies of spiritual beings as a
whole, and how they shape our human form as a result of their cosmic
activity. |
|
First edition 2000 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
819 |
Cherie Sutherland Ph.D |
IN THE COMPANY OF ANGELS |
|
Throughout history angels have
played a major role in literature, art, theology, myth and folklore.
Portrayed as symbols of the divine in our earthly realm, these luminous
beings continue to inhabit the conscience of our culture. However, in
today's materialistic world they have become images of fiction and
fantasy for many people. In a down-to-earth style, Cherie Sutherland
draws on research gathered from around the world to answer the most
commonly asked questions about angels and gives practical advice on how
to call on them to help us through difficult and stressful periods in
our lives. Dr Cherie Sutherland is a visiting research fellow in the
School of Sociology at the University of New South Wales. She is one of
Australia's leading experts on the study of near death experiences. |
|
First edition 2000 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
820 |
Doreen Virtue Ph.D |
ANGEL VISIONS II |
|
Do you wonder whether there are
angels around you, who they are, and what they look like? In this
eye-opening book, you'll read uplifting, true stories by ordinary people
who have had extraordinary experiences. The author has combed through
thousands of reports of angel visions to bring you the most touching and
revealing accounts possible. In this follow-up to Angel Visions, you
will read about children and adults who have seen, heard, talked to and
even detected the scent of their guardian angels, deceased loved ones,
and ascended masters. This book also includes instructions to help
everyone to see, hear and feel their presences too. |
|
First edition 2001 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
821 |
Victor Goddard |
FLIGHT TOWARDS REALITY |
|
Sir Victor Goddard has had two
careers. In the first he became well-known not only as an air marshall
but also for his contributions through radio, television and the Press
on matters relating to aviation and war in the air. He became in war
the Commander of the New Zealand Air Forces in the South Pacific. His
distinguished career culminated in the Air Council and the famous
operation of the Berlin airlift in 1951. Since that time his second
career spanning twenty years has been spent in the fields of
psychological studies, physical research and healing. This book is an
unusual book. It is a book of extra-ordinary experiences - physical,
temporal, psychical and mystical, presented by a man of action and
eminence who is also a deep thinker. It leads to some vital opinions
about Life and Reality. Among the subjects discussed in relation to
consciousness are slips through time, dowsing, reincarnation,
mediumship, fairies and U.F.O's. This book is timely because
civilisation has reached a critical stage where the powers which man has
most sought to develop - Reason, Will, Knowledge, Creativity, all
focused upon Intelligence, are simply not enough. The Author produces
compelling evidence that man needs to be more aware that his greatest
potentialities lie within the dynamic power of imagining prompted by
intuition, checked and balanced by reason; all three being divinely
harmonized. |
|
First edition 1975 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
822 |
Shirley MacLaine |
GOING WITHIN |
|
In her other books, Out on a
Limb, Dancing in the LIght and It's All in the Playing, Shirley MacLaine
described her own remarkable spiritual journey and the life-changing
paths she has travelled in search of inner harmony and understanding.
Now this celebrated actress and outspoken thinker answers many of the
most challenging and important questions she has been asked about her
experiences in the seminars and interviews she has conducted all over
the world. At the heart of her profound and inspiring message is
Transformation - the power to shape our lives, to find inner peace and
awareness, and to reach our highest potential in relationships, at work
and at home. |
|
First edition 1989 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
823 |
Marva Egenberger |
JOURNEY INTO FAITH |
|
In her news writing days the
author became very observant of other people. In time, she began to
examine herself and her own life in the same way. What was her worth to
herself, to God, and to others? She began to work spiritually on her
own problems. This self-examination brought to light habits, attitudes,
and misplaced priorities she could no longer live with. So, with God's
help, she is getting herself straightened out - one problem at a time.
This book is her description of how she did this, and of her relevant
discoveries along the way.
As an experienced feature writer the author who lives in Boulder City,
Nevada, feels she has a message to give to others, especially to those
with no religious beliefs or who have left their religions behind. She
too has given up finding a satisfying religion, but found much more - an
understanding of what spirituality really is and how it frees one from
restricitions on thinking and living. The author has kindly offered
copies of her book to readers free of charge by writing to her at 1200
Industrial Road, Site 56, Boulder City, Nevada 89005, USA
|
|
First edition 2001 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
824 |
Neale Donald Walsch |
CONVERSATIONS WITH GOD - BOOK 2 |
|
"This book is an actual
dialogue with God. It is the second in a series of three books
capturing a conversation with Deity which has lasted well over five
years and continues to this very day. You may not believe that this
material has actually come from God, and I have no need for you to.
What is important to me is only whether the material itself has any
value, brings any insight, produces any awakening, sparks any renewed
desire, or promotes any fruitful change in our day to day life on Earth.
God knows, something has to change. We can't keep on going on as we
have been". |
|
First edition 1997 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
825 |
Neale Donald Walsch |
CONVERSATIONS WITH GOD - BOOK 3 |
|
The question is not, to whom do I talk, but who listens? |
|
First edition 1998 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
826 |
Ursula Roberts |
MORE WISDOM OF RAMADAHN |
|
" Beloved ones, do not be so
hasty in the judgments that you render one to the other. Do not be so
eager to seize upon the little faults, nor yet to see the failings in
those who are surrounding you. When it is properly understood, love
will see the reason for the faults and will overlook the failings, for
the love that is lavished upon you from the source Divine is a love that
flows out like a great flood of warmth and fills the crevices which are
the symbols of imperfection, flooding in through the places showing the
faults in the character. Therefore, as you learn to receive the inflow
of love Divine, and as you are flooded through and through with the
love which we try to direct to you, absorb it and let it heal and
restore your own inward being; then let it flood out in forgiveness, in
gentleness, in healing, and in peace unto all those whom you will meet
in the ways of your earthly experience.."
In response to the many requests from delighted readers for more of
Ramadahn's wisdom, this further volume of his teachings was published.
compiled by Lilian Litton through the mediumship of Ursula Roberts
|
|
First edition 1992 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
827 |
Glenn Williston |
SOUL SEARCH |
|
Within each of us, the authors
of this remarkable and inspiring book claim, reside the memories and
perceptions of many former lifetimes. Meticulously recorded, these
images play an important role in shaping the people we are today. In
this fundamental sense, we are all prisoners of the past. Through
carefully guided hypnotic regression it is possible to relive past
incarnations and become aware of these "primal events". Past life
therapy can dissolve the bonds of negative conditioning, stimulate
self-knowledge, release the individual from guilt and the fear of death
and reveal the karmic causes of physical illnesses. The authors believe
that everyone has a responsibility to release those aspects of the past
that retard spiritual growth in the present. Their book is an eloquent
revelation of the multi-dimensional nature of every human being and of
the universal laws that govern our spiritual evolution.
Glenn Williston and Judith Johnstone |
|
First edition 1983 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
828 |
Judy Hall |
PAST LIFE THERAPY |
|
The key to our present
experiences may lie in other lives, lived before we were born. Reliving
past lives can heal chronic diseases, release phobias, improve
relationships and enhance physical, emotional and mental wellbeing.
This book blends information with practical advice. |
|
First edition 1996 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
829 |
Harry Boddington |
THE UNIVERSITY OF SPIRITUALISM |
|
The origin of this
authoritative book is a three-year course on all aspects of Spiritualism
that was prepared by the author for students. He spent over 40 years
in its preparation. It involved studying comparative religion, science,
philosophy, ethics, logic and political economy. The result, which he
rightly regarded as the crown of his life's work, is a comprehensive
study of Spiritualism in all its manifold aspects. The author was one
of London's pioneer Spiritualists. He devoted practically all his time
to writing and lecturing on Spiritualism and became one of its most
knowledgeable exponents. He read every worthwhile book dealing with
psychic matters. He witnessed every phase of psychic phenomena.
Moreover, being married to a brilliant medium, he had many unique
opportunities of first-hand investigations into psychic happenings,
especially, when at their most intriguing and impressive occasions, they
came spontaneously. The final result is a fascinating work from a
lucid exposition, ably qualified to be the "Head" of the University of
Spiritualism. |
|
First edition 1947 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
830 |
John Butler |
EXPLORING THE PSYCHIC WORLD |
|
"If you have lost a child or
parent, if you are mourning husband or sweetheart with an ache that can
find no relief, then read on and learn that scientists of the highest
renown give you their word as scientists that the loved one you mourn
still lives on, not in some abstract heaven or in some state of glory
that is foreign to you both, but lives on in a world that is all about
you, a world as natural as the world you still inhabit, a world
separated from your own by no more than a wavelength .." This book
outlines in a language easily understood just what Spiritualism is and
how it works, and how ordinary people may investigate it for themselves. |
|
First edition 1949 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
831 |
Brian Rice |
Grey Bear Volumes |
|
"In 1966 I met John Brooks, a
well known medium who used to work on the Isle of Wight particularly the
Southern area. Through him I came to know and appreciate his guide,
Grey Bear. John always said Grey Bear would speak through me, and in
November 1989 I was privileged to be used as a channel for his
teachings. Over the years, all who have sat in my Circle have
benefitted from Grey Bear's philosophy. He can be very serious but has a
good sense of humour to balance his sterner side. My hope is that by
putting his philosophies into books, more people will be reached, and
his teachings will inspire and encourage all who read them. John
unfortunately suffered a stroke and is at present in a Nursing Home on
his beloved Island. Grey Bear is still a constant companion and guide
to him. It gives me great satisfaction to dedicate these books to John
Brooks, a man who has given the spiritual movement great service over
the years, and to Grey bear, wise teacher, guide and friend." |
|
First edition |
Volume 1 Grey Bear Communicates C |
———————————————————————————— |
832 |
|
THE SPIRITUALIST GAZETTE - BACK ISSUES |
|
A monthly non-profit newspaper
published by The Spiritualist Association of Great Britain, dealing
mainly with spiritual philosophy, book reviews, advertisments and
announcements. |
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available …. a few issues fr |
1 issue B |
———————————————————————————— |
833 |
Pen Friend News |
PEN FRIEND NEWS - BACK ISSUES |
|
A Quarterly sponsored spiritual
magazine bringing people together in friendship. As well as being
packed with news and views, poetry, recipes, jokes and advertising, to
name but a few this magazine also hosts a pen-friend club putting people
in touch with each other.
Details can be obtained from: Susan Chetwynd, Friends are Forever pen
pal club, 103 Watling Street, Grendon, Atherstone, Warks. CV9 2PH
Tel: 01827 718318
|
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available …. a few issues fr |
1 issue C |
———————————————————————————— |
834 |
|
NEWS AND VIEWS - BACK ISSUES |
|
The Jewish Association of
Spiritual healers.
A Quarterly Magazine of a non-denominational Healing Organisation for
people of all faiths.
Help and advice to healers and would-be healers is given along with
news and views, articles and information, stories and inspirational
verse. Information can be obtained on their website:
www.jashhealing@hotmail.com
|
|
First edition Back Issues Currently Available … a few issues fro |
1 issue B |
———————————————————————————— |
835 |
Colin Fry |
6IXTH SENSE |
|
VIDEO
Groundbreaking Video from the Paranormal Living TV Channell.
"The series does exactly what I had hoped it would, and much
more. It shows how a crucial message from a loved one can console, heal
and in many cases ease the grieving process". Colin Fry
|
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
836 |
Derek Acorah |
THE THREE MEDIUMS |
|
VIDEO RECORDING
A personal home video of three of the countries top mediums who come
together on one show from the Paranormal Living TV Channell. Derek
Acorah, Colin Fry and Tony Stockwell bring evidence to a live studio
audience of proof that their loved ones in the afterlife continue to
exist.
Derek Acorah, Colin Fry and Tony Stockwell |
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
837 |
Colin Fry |
NEARER THE LIGHT |
|
VIDEO
An enlightening and at times emotional rollercoster of a ride through
the answers to life's great questions. Acutely challenging and often
controversial, Colin Fry's spirit guide Magnus reveals to the open mind
the true nature of the human individual, whilst filling in the gaps and
rewriting some of the history of spirit as man on this planet. Keeping a
brisk pace from subject to subject, Magnus calls on the accumulated
knowledge of the "Diamond", to respond to a great diversity of
enquiries. The thought-provoking revelations of the Aberfan disaster,
the emotional return of a young woman through direct voice and the World
Trade Centre tribute are some of the different themes, sensitively
covered. |
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
838 |
Tania Busbridge |
JUST MY THINGS |
|
"It was a daunting experience
to be the editors of these verses by Tania Busbridge. Far from our
pencil slashing through the jungle of a new author's tangled flights of
fancy, every "if" and "but" has been fought over with passion. In the
end we retreated exhausted, as the one argument we could not counter was
"That’s the way it has to be …" This from a housewife and mother who
had written nothing more than a shopping list for the first fifty years
of her life. Yet, discovering herself to be a strongly spiritual
person, she has felt impelled to write these verses. Maybe the reality
is that she has been inspired. So the occasional quirkiness of ordinary
language remains, but the overall effect is an amazing range of
thoughts and observations and a crystal-sharp insight into the spirit
world as well as into our present-day human life. You are invited to
find all manner of riches within these verses". Ashwater Press |
|
First edition 2000 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
839 |
Tania Busbridge |
THE JOURNEY |
|
Whether you have been touched
by bereavement, or are caring for someone who is ill, or wondering about
your own reason for living, this book may help. These simple verses,
written by an ordinary housewife, display an amazing grasp of our world
as well as the spiritual world - uplifting words that offer hope and
meaning. The book deals with approaching death, the day of death, the
closeness to us of those who have passed, the memories that keep them
alive for us, and how death of a loved one changes us. Those who die
are always with us. They never leave us. |
|
First edition 2002 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
840 |
Tania Busbridge |
FOREVER ALIVE |
|
At the age of 56 the last thing
Tania Busbridge expected was to become a published author. But after a
car accident, and whilst recovering from her injuries, she asked for
pen and paper and began to write, never having had any inclination to do
so before. "We live for ever. Our human bodies die, but the real
us, the spirit within us, lives on for ever. This earth life is only a
part of our everlasting life. Now I could relate to a God, a source of
creation, but in my own simplistic way. I was a unique human being,
just the same as you are. No wonder no one had understood the real me
or had the same thoughts and feelings as I had. We are all different
and need to find our own answers for life and death, and our own God in
our own way. What is right for me is not necessary right for you, but
we all need to listen to each other, try to understand each other's
point of view. By doing this we help ourselves to find our own way, our
own reason for life. My dream is for all the people of the world to
accept that we are all spiritual beings, not defined by the name of a
particular religion. Perhaps then we would see an end to all religious
wars. An end to "My God is right and yours is wrong." This book
follows my spiritual progress over a period of almost twenty years.
From my strange encounter with a man at an airport coffee bar to the day
when I had actual proof that we live forever". |
|
First edition 2002 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
841 |
Mia Dolan |
THE GIFT |
|
Mia Dolan was twenty-two when
she first heard the voice of her spirit guide. Brought up in an
ordinary working-class community on the Isle of Sheppey, she had always
been down-to-earth and certainly never believed in "psychic" phenomena.
Now that the voice had spoken to Mia, strange things began to happen:
she "left" her body and walked through the house, she "saw" a plane
crash in horrific detail, only to hear it reported on the news that
evening. She thought she was going insane. Finally, Mia accepted that
she had a rare psychic gift and learned how to control and use it. A
few years later, Mia's courage was tested when she tragically foresaw
the murder of her own brother and had to endure the loss of her young
son. This book is the compelling story of an ordinary woman's
extraordinary gift. |
|
First edition 2003 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
842 |
John Edward |
WHAT IF GOD WERE THE SUN? |
|
In his first novel, psychic
medium John Edward weaves a deeply moving and poignant story about a
close-knit family and their way of dealing with life, love, and death
over the generations. John draws upon his spiritual experiences with
people throughout the world and their loved ones who have "crossed over"
to create a true-to-life drama that will touch your heart and soul
immensely. The richly drawn characters in this book - Tim, Grandma
Rosie, Rachel, Uncle Clyde, Chester the dog, and more - will truly
become a part of your life as you follow their triumphs and sorrows.
They are living examples of the power of familial love, and the need to
bond together during times of grief. The healing messages that are
brought forth in this incomparable work are timeless reminders that life
and death are part of the same unending circle, and that our loved ones
are never really "lost" to us. |
|
First edition 2000 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
843 |
Derek Acorah |
THE PSYCHIC WORLD OF DEREK ACORAH |
|
Have you ever had a dream that
came true? Or had a sense of someone present when no one was physically
there? Or found you were able to read a friend's mind? In this
fascinating book, Britain's top psychic Derek Acorah reveals that we all
have psychic potential. Sharing his own amazing story of mediumship,
Derek reveals how you to can harness your powers and make contact with
the world beyond our own. Derek takes you step-by-step through the
stages of psychic development, from building psychic awareness through
meditation, to developing telepathy skills and divination techniques. |
|
First edition 1999 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
844 |
Emma Heathcote-James |
SEEING ANGELS |
|
"…. before she could take
another step, a hand from behind grabbed the shoulder of her coat and
lifted her back onto the pavement. That same instant, a car which was
travelling very fast and that she had neither seen nor heard, swept over
the exact spot she had reached." This is just one of the amazing
stories that are featured in this book. For the past 3 years, the
author has been analysing over 800 such accounts, for her PhD into
Contemporary Experiences of Angels. Hundreds of people have claimed to
have experienced visions of angels. These people are not crazy new-age
loonies, but ordinary people from all walks of life, from professionals
to prisoners to children. The weight of the evidence may well lead you
to adjust the way you have previously considered the supernatural. |
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
845 |
Emma Heathcote-James |
AFTER-DEATH COMMUNICATIONS |
|
Hundreds of true stories from
the UK of people who have communicated with their loved ones.
Emma Heathcote-Jones has spent over a year researching the fascinating
phenomenon of After-Death Communications. She has spoken to people from
a vast variety of backgrounds, from doctors to soldiers to housewives.
The result is a powerful, poignant and moving collection of first-hand
accounts from those who have actually been contacted by their loved ones
from beyond (not via a medium). This is a remarkable book, full of
experiences so dramatic that they have changed people's lives. It is
objectively written and is essential reading for anyone with an interest
in the supernatural or for those who, like so many of us, want to know
more about what lies on the other side …
|
|
First edition 2003 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
846 |
Anne Puryear |
STEPHEN LIVES |
|
Stephen was only fifteen when
he took his own life. The thousands of letters his mother, Anne
Puryear, has received from readers all over her country since Stephen
Lives was published are a testament to the power and compassion of the
deeply moving story of her cherished teenage son. In the suicide notes
discovered in a spiral notebook in his pocket, Stephen promised to
explain his actions to his mother at some later date. As Anne looked
for ways to cope and comprehend, something remarkable happened: she
found a way to communicate with Stephen beyond the grave, beginning a
series of astonishing conversations in which Stephen answers her many
questions while reaching out through her to help others in crisis.
Describing the circumstances of his suicide, Stephen offers lifesaving
advice for kids and parents that will prevent others from committing
this tragic, irreversible act. This book is a journey of faith and
hope, revealing universal truths of life, death, and afterlife that
comfort and inspire all who journey with them. |
|
First edition 1992 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
847 |
Helen Greaves |
TESTIMONY OF LIGHT |
|
Telepathy between the living is
now generally accepted, but Telepathy between the living and the
so-called "dead" is both more doubtful and less common. The highest
level of communication between the minds of two close friends on either
side of the veil. Those who have known both Helen Greaves and the late
Frances Banks - and their respective writings are impressed by the
authenticity of these scripts. Their phrasing and contents are typical
of Miss Banks as they are completely unlike the style of writing shown
by the "author" in her previous books and articles. Frances Banks'
message - that the death of the body is but a gentle passing to a much
freer and fuller life - presents itself with great clarity and
conviction. |
|
First edition 1969 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
848 |
Dr Brenda Davies |
JOURNEY OF THE SOUL |
|
We are each on a journey
through life, but what many of us don't contemplate is that while the
journey may end for our body, our soul endures through birth, life,
death and beyond in an endless cycle. In this life-changing book, Dr
Brenda Davies explains this most mysterious cycle, illuminating the
soul's experience from its integration with the physical world, to its
release into the afterlife. |
|
First edition 2002 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
849 |
Philip Solomon |
BEYOND DEATH |
|
Conditions in the Afterlife.
Is there life after death? Do our souls keep on living in some other
way? And just what do the dead do with all that "time"? What if you
could just interview the dead to find out? A seasoned parapsychologist
and a compelling psychic have teamed up to do just that. While many
claim to speak with the dead, British psychic Philip Solomon is "one of
the best trance mediums of our time, consistently providing accurate
names, situations, and details without any previous knowledge of the
people concerned," says veteran parapsychologist Hans Holzer.
"The Other Side and ours are always in contact, one way or another,"
says Holzer, who provided Solomon with detailed questions to ask the
spirits. In Beyond Death, Holzer and Solomon report their psychic
conversations with the dead: some famous, a few infamous; the rest,
ordinary humans with remarkable insight into their condition on the
other Side. Its not like Earth anymore, though those who have "crossed
over" seem no more or less "human" than before they died. So they may
not be wiser, but they do have direct knowledge of their own continuing
existence and the new world they live in.
Philip Solomon and Prof. Hans Holzer, Ph.D
|
|
First edition 2001 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
850 |
Ivy Northage |
LIGHT OF THE WORLD |
|
Medium Ivy Northage has served
the Spiritualist Movement for decades. Equally as well-known and
well-loved is her trance guide Chan. Light of the World is a unique
collection of trance teachings delivered by Chan at the Spiritualist
Association of Great Britain's headquarters in Belgrave Square, SW
London. The ever-wise spirit teacher comments on a range of subjects
concerning life here and in the spiritual realms. |
|
First edition 1999 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
851 |
Silver Birch |
TEACHINGS OF SILVER BIRCH |
|
A fine collection of the
teachings and descriptions of the afterlife given by Silver Birch
through the trance mediumship of Maurice Barbanell, the late founder
editor of the Psychic News.
"Your world is in beauty now. You see all around you the
manifestations of the Great Spirit, as the dawn of life sweeps over your
surroundings again in its cycle, and you marvel at the beauty of the
blossom and the fragrance of the flowers, and you say, 'How great is the
handiwork of the Great Spirit'. And yet, that which you see is but a
very, very pale reflection of the beauties that we have in our world of
spirit. We have flowers such as you have never seen, we have colours
such as your eye has never beheld, we have scenes and forests, we have
birds and plants, we have streams and mountains. You have nothing to
compare them with. And you will be able to enjoy them, for, even though
you will be ghosts, you will be real ones."
edited by A.W. Austin
|
|
First edition 1938 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
852 |
Silver Birch |
SILVER BIRCH COMPANION |
|
"If you are wedded to ancient
fable, to old belief, or if you have reached the summit of spiritual
knowledge, do not read this book. But if you recognise that life is an
adventure, that the soul constantly searches for new fields to traverse,
new avenues to explore, then here you will find those fundamental
truths of the spirit which are behind all the religions of the world.
There is naught here contrary to that which was taught by the founders
of all religions. Here is contained the truth concerning life on earth
and life hereafter. If you are ready to receive it, you will find it
will illumine your mind and enrich your soul. There is nothing here
that will make your reason revolt or will insult your intelligence, for
all is presented in the spirit of love and the desire to serve. Silver
Birch
edited by Tony Ortzen |
|
First edition 1986 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
853 |
J. Aelwyn Roberts |
YESTERDAY'S PEOPLE |
|
A Parson's Search for the
Answers to Life After Death.
Challenging traditional Christian teaching on the after-life, J Aelwyn
Roberts invites us to accompany him on an eye-opening journey into the
mysterious world that awaits us when we die. Taking us from Canterbury
to Rome, from Mecca to the depths of Mongolia, the search for the
answers to life and death brings him back again and again to those who
really know - yesterday's people. Writing in the inimitable style of
his earlier book, Holy Ghostbuster, the author presents a unique blend
of entertaining stories of ghostly encounters, words of comfort on
mourning and bereavement, and wise advice on the art of dying. He also
offers us insights into less conventional areas such as reincarnation,
the phenomenon of past lives and the tunnel of light.
|
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
854 |
Noel Langley |
EDGAR CAYCE ON REINCARNATION |
|
Edgar Cayce on Reincarnation
explores the many startling facets of the concept of man having more
than one life. Here are the mysterious accounts of people who have
lived before and remarkable evidence of a unifying force that pervades
the universe. Provocative and revealing, Edgar Cayce shows how you can
expand your spiritual and mental boundaries and how modern man may
achieve immortality. The late Edgar Cayce's groundbreaking psychic
perception in the areas of healing, dreams, ESP, nutrition, health,
religion - and reincarnation - have made him the most respected
clairvoyant of our time. This book was edited by his son Hugh Lynn
Cayce, former director of the Association for Research and
Enlightenment, an organisation dedicated to the practical employment of
his father's psychic findings.
edited by Hugh Lynn Cayce |
|
First edition 1989 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
855 |
Sue Carpenter |
PAST LIVES |
|
Today many thousands of people
are convinced that they have lived a former life. Those who believe in
reincarnation come from every class, culture and creed. Past Lives
tells the remarkable stories of some of these men and women. Probing
each one's beliefs and examining the methods by which they explore their
previous existences, these case histories give an invaluable insight
into a fascinating and little-documented subject. |
|
First edition No Date |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
856 |
Nora I Moor |
PARTNERSHIP OF SOULS |
|
The life and times of a living
pioneer. Nora Moor was born in 1905 into a blacksmiths family at South
Kilverton, near Thirsk in North Yorkshire. She served as a housekeeper
to a Methodist minister before she was drawn to the Greater World
Spiritualist movement. Unexpectedly, in 1943, she was appointed Matron
of the Greater World Shelter for the homeless women and children in
Leeds. She took in thousands of homeless and troubled women over a
period of 36 years. She was elected National President of the Greater
World Association in 1983, serving for five years. She continues to be
President of the Greater World Church in Clarendon Road, Leeds, where
she is still active in her caring work and received the Woman of
Achievement for Charity award in 1992. This book tells of a love story
and of 50 years of achievement. |
|
First edition 1993 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
857 |
Mick Avery |
THE SPIRIT WITHIN |
|
This is the story of Gregory
Haye, a young Norfolk labourer who met his physical "death" as the
result of being run over by a coach and horses in the dark, aged only
eighteen and a half years old in 1723. Gregory was buried in the
grounds of Castle Acre Priory. Since his physical passing Gregory has
chosen to "serve" and one way he does this within the spirit realms is
to help those who have recently passed over onto the next step of their
journey. Another part of this service is to communicate via the
wonderful deep trance mediumship of Mick Avery, in order to share the
knowledge and wisdom that he has gained in the spirit realms.
Gregory Haye through the trance mediumship if Mick Avery |
|
First edition 2001 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
858 |
Mabel Telford |
STRINGS FOR A BROKEN LUTE |
|
The author's husband, Dr Lyle
Telford, was a prominent medico, and for a time Mayor of Vancouver.
Their idyllic married life was shattered when he suffered a severe
stroke leaving him paralysed and speechless. Both shared an interest in
psychic research. After months of touching patience, Mrs Telford
established a high degree of telepathic communication with her husband,
even to the point of typing letters at his mental dictation. After his
death, Dr Telford succeeded in communicating with his wife by a series
of brilliant cross-correspondence tests through the world-famous Eileen
Garrett and other mediums. The latter part of this remarkable book
comprises some brilliant observations of spirit life given by Dr Telford
through his wife. |
|
First edition 1971 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
859 |
Ramus Branch |
HARRY EDWARDS |
|
The life story of the great
healer. Harry Edwards was acknowledged to be the greatest healer the
world has seen since the time of Christ, and his passing in 1976 at the
age of 83 saw the earthly end of a colourful and exciting career of one
of the best loved men of our time. For over 40 years he devoted his
life to the healing of the sick in body and mind, easing pain,
correcting deformities, overcoming ill-conditions and generally bringing
about restoration of health and happiness to countless thousands of
sufferers the world over, from the humblest of citizens to royalty.
Much has been recorded of the healing "miracles" achieved through the
man who was truly "born to heal", and understandably regarded by those
to whom he restored to health as a living saint; but what of the man
behind the miracles … Here then, is the full story of Henry James
(Harry) Edwards as told by his close friend and associate healer, Ray
Branch, who during their many years together, was able to observe Harry
Edwards closely both at work and at play. From his birth to his final
hours, the fascinating story of this truly great man is told with a rare
insight into his remarkable, complex character. |
|
First edition 1982 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
860 |
The Reverend John A Findlay, C.S. Min |
THIS LIFE AND OTHERS |
|
This is the remarkable story of
how one man's search for the true values and meaning of life began with
his upbringing in the Catholic faith and culminated in his becoming
ordained as a Minister of The Christian Spiritualist Church. He makes
some intriguing observations on the life of Jesus outside of the
accepted gospel stories. He devotes an entire chapter on meditation,
through which he takes the reader along his own gentle pathways of
pictorial tranquility, and the book is interspersed with inspirational
verse and quotations which serve to bind the whole narrative together to
provide a work of tremendous interest upon a variety of subjects,
observed by a keen student of the human kaleidoscope. Ray Branch |
|
First edition 1990 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
861 |
Ronald Wright |
HAFED A PRINCE OF PERSIA |
|
Every December Christians
celebrate the birth of Jesus and remember the "The Wise Men" who paid
homage to the infant and presented him with gifts. The Bible also
refers to these men as "Kings" and Cologne Cathedral actually claims to
be in possession of their "crowns". But who in fact were these men and
where did they really come from? For nearly 2000 years these questions
were to remain a mystery, but in 1869 a group of researchers
investigating psychic phenomena conducted a séance with Glasgow medium
David Duguid, and what resulted was to be one of the most dramatic and
important spirit communications since the days of the Old Testament. An
entity claiming to be leader of the legendary "three" spoke to the
group and wished to impart so much information that a total of one
hundred "sittings" over the next four years was required. Notes of all
the spirit said were carefully taken down in shorthand and published as a
book in 1875. Several editions were subsequently produced, but copies
of all these have now virtually disappeared. A spirit "voice" told
healer-author Ronald Wright to revive the writings although at that time
he was completely unaware of their existence. It is a fascinating
glimpse of life in ancient times, and reveals aspects of Christ's early
life not previously known - astonishing knowledge quite beyond the
capacity of either David Duguid or anyone present at his seances. This
book has to rank as a classic of its kind. |
|
First edition 1987 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
862 |
Ronald Wright |
HAFED & HERMES |
|
Hafed A Prince Of Persia… Part Two |
|
First edition 1988 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
863 |
Ronald Wright |
JESUS THE WHOLE STORY |
|
There have been countless books
about the life of Christ. But this one is different in that it
accounts for those "unknown" years before his ministry began, which,
blended with a single narrative of the four Gospels, gives a more
complete picture of Christ's life than has ever been attempted
previously. The source of the "unknown" years was Hafed, Arch Magi of
persia, one of the legendary three wisemen who paid homage to Jesus
shortly after His birth in Bethlehem. |
|
First edition 1988 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
864 |
Ronald Wright |
INVISIBLE REALITIES |
|
At long last science has
discovered something which spirit mediums have know since the beginning
of time - that 90% of the universe is invisible. This little book
explains what we are, why we are here, and where we go once we have
"died", the nature of the cosmos and our relationship with it. Jesus
attempted to explain these things to man, but was completely
misunderstood, so that what he taught, and more importantly, tried to
demonstrate, was given the wrong interpretation. For example, His
message was for all humanity, not just "Christians". God has no
religion. Religions only divide humanity. Today the world cries out
for freedom from wars, poverty, hunger and fear, and stands at the very
brink of self destruction. There is only one solution, and that is to
live as God intended that we should - in harmony with Mother Nature, not
seeking to abuse and exploit her. Religions cannot save humanity, only
an awareness of Truth. What is Truth? It is the key that unlocks the
door to all understanding of the earth and the cosmos, of man himself,
and his relationship with his Creator. As a woman suffers to bring
forth new life into the world, so shall mankind around 2012 when the
universe is transformed from a substance of the third dimension, into
one of the fifth dimension. Then shall a new Golden Age begin. |
|
First edition 2002 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
865 |
Adrian G Gilbert |
THE MAYAN PROPHECIES |
|
The present world will end on
22 December 2012. So prophesied the Maya 5,000 years ago - the
mysterious people whose ruined pyramids and temples in the depths of the
Central American rainforests are alive with inscriptions that baffled
scholars for centuries. Who were the Maya? Where did they come from
and why did they suddenly disappear? Will we suffer floods, volcanic
eruptions and chaos in 2012. In this thrilling and controversial book,
Maurice Cotterell and Adrian Gilbert, co-author of the world bestseller
The Orion Mystery, offer controversial answers the establishment
"experts" refuse to accept. Decoding the complex Mayan astrological
prophecies, they tell of the catastrophes to come in and after 2012.
Adrian G Gilbert and Maurice M Cottell |
|
First edition 1995 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
866 |
Murray Hope |
THE ANCIENT WISDOM OF ATLANTIS |
|
Atlantis is the legendary place
where long ago civilization flourished and rose to a peak of
achievement before being overwhelmed by catastrophe. Scholars over the
ages have dismissed it as pure fantasy, yet a core of believers have
always maintained the truth behind the myths, and today evidence to
support the reality of Atlantis is stronger than ever. This book guides
us through the mystical, psychological and psychic evidence
demonstrating the existence of Atlantis and all that it stood for within
the collective unconscious of mankind. Combining science and
psychology with psychic sensitivity, Murray Hope sheds new light on
ancient Atlantean culture and shows how adopting their practices today
can help us reach our own pinnacles of achievement. |
|
First edition 1991 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
867 |
Rudolf Steiner |
EGYPTIAN MYTHS AND MYSTERIES |
|
In this series of lectures
given in September 1908, Rudolf Steiner emphasizes the astonishing and
special relationship that exists between our own time and that of
ancient Egypt - how, in the natural rhythm of the ages, the so-called
third Post-Atlantean (Egyptian) epoch is mirrored by the fifth (present)
epoch. In this sense, it is particularly relevant to look today with
fresh eyes at ancient Egypt. Steiner discusses experiences of Egyptian
initiations, esoteric anatomy and physiology, the stages of evolution of
the human form, and much more. The final lecture is on the Chrisy
impulse as the conqueror of matter. |
|
First edition 1971 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
868 |
Rudolf Steiner |
UNIVERSE EARTH AND MAN |
|
Another series of lectures
given in August 1908 by Rudolf Steiner in their relationship to Egyptian
myths and modern civilization. |
|
First edition 1987 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
869 |
Barrie Anson |
ANCIENT WISDOM PRESENT DAY HEALING |
|
"Death is a taboo subject in
this day and age - people have always feared it, or rather, the unknown.
In the modern world the two professions of doctor and priest have been
sharply segregated. The doctor treats his patient's body but stops
short of discussing spiritual matters, especially death, which tends to
be regarded as a medical failure. The priest may, eventually, be
summoned but, probably rather late in the day! Barrie Anson suggests
that the Ancient Wisdom teachings, which are to be found in the
scriptures of all religions and in the collective unconscious of the
human race, offer great comfort to us all. He gently explains that it
is impossible to die and that so called death is simply a change of
state - something to be welcomed rather than feared. Profond subjects
are touched upon in a simple and straightforward way and the reader is
left with a magically increased awareness of the love, or light, in
himself, in his fellow men and women. This book is uplifting, lucid,
simple and a pleasure to read. It will be welcomed by seekers and
sufferers alike - that is by all of us".
From the Foreward by Dr Ronald Livingston MBBS London, MFHom.
|
|
First edition 1999 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
870 |
Brid Fitzpatrick |
GREAT GRANDFATHER SPIRIT |
|
Great Grandfather Spirit is a
journey to the heart of the Energy Source and the ancient ways of Native
American spirituality. Wa-Na-Nee-Che (One Who Is Needed By The People)
and Brad Fitzpatrick skilfully weave together fireside tales with
wisdom teachings on ceremony and ritual. The Native American tradition
has long been the most popular and accessible of the earth wisdoms
teachings, but there are few books which describe practical ways of
conducting the ritual and healing practices. As many of the important
sources become lost or changed beyond recognition, Wa-Na-Nee-Che brings
the people back to the true ways, using the voice of a spiritual guide,
Great Grandfather Spirit, to share ancient knowledge which has been
passed down through generations of medicine men and women. As well as
stories and visions inspired by wisdom teachings on the sweat lodge,
smoking the peace pipe, vision questing and animal totems, this
illustrated guide includes little known facts about Shape Shifters, Skin
Walkers and rites of Birth and Passing Away ceremonies.
Wa-Na-Nee-Che and Brid Fitzpatrick |
|
First edition 2000 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
871 |
Sonya Fitzpatrick |
WHAT THE ANIMALS TELL ME |
|
Born with the extraordinary
natural ability to communicate telepathically with animals, Sonya
Fitzpatrick has worked with thousands of pets and their owners to solve
problems, cure diseases, find strays and help humans come to a deeper
understanding of their pets' needs - and vice versa. Sonya's
captivating book not only tells her life story but offers a fascinating
insight into animal psychology, with step-by-step instructions on how
anyone can communicate with their own pet. |
|
First edition 1998 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
872 |
James Webster |
LIFE IS FOREVER |
|
From an early age, James
Webster has been fascinated by the mysteries of life and has spent
nearly fifty years in research, enquiry and discovery from much personal
experience. Being born in what would be recognised as a "haunted"
house, paranormal phenomena was soon experienced. He later turned to
practising the skills of conjuring and with membership to The Magic
Circle he spent some years as a professional artiste touring the
Theatres and Clubs and appearing on Television shows with his magic act.
This was a valuable asset when he came to investigate the paranormal
in more depth and segregate the "true" from the "false". James had read
and studied the sciences, philosophy, psychology, parapsychology and
many paranormal subjects, with the jackpot question always in mind: What
happens when we die? And what reliable evidence do we have to answer
this profound question involving every person on Earth? Survival of the
individual consciousness after physical death is at the centre of this
question and is the principle factor in the author's main interest with
spiritual science. Debunkers and gullible fools he cannot suffer!
James Webster is a full member of the Scientific and Medical Network and
an administrator of The Abu Trust. He has written many articles and
papers and now presents this book which he hopes will have a general
appeal as being an interesting read, as well as a reference work - but
more importantly to offer enlightenment to many. |
|
First edition 2000 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
873 |
John and Anne Spencer |
WILL YOU SURVIVE AFTER DEATH? |
|
The one thing certain about
every human life is that it must come to an end. And after that … …
what? Since earliest times, many people have refused to believe that
death is the end. They see it rather as a door leading to another form
of existence. The well-known researchers, John and Anne Spencer, review
the evidence for survival after death including the results of some of
their own investigations. They examine reports of many kinds of
paranormal activity, ranging from ghostly presences to spirit messages,
out-of-body experiences and reincarnation. They strip away wishful
thinking, delusion and fraud to reveal a solid residue of data for which
they conclude that survival of the spirit after death is by far the
most likely explanation. |
|
First edition 1995 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
874 |
Jane Sherwood |
POST-MORTEM JOURNAL |
|
There is probably no stranger
nor more controversial book than Jane Sherwood's report, through
automatic writing, of the identity of a communicator from the other side
of the grave who chose to call himself "Scott". After many years of
enforced silence, as a result of a solemn promise given to Scott, Jane
Sherwood reveals his true identity, namely, Colonel T.E.Lawrence
(Lawrence of Arabia). Post-Mortem Journal opens at the moment of
Lawrence's death when he finds himself lying at the roadside by his
shattered motorbike, unaware that he is actually "dead". It continues
over the years and shows us the development and salvation of a tortured
and guilty man who, for the first time, is forced into admitting his
weaknesses and vanities during his earthly life and is only now able to
come to terms with himself. Such revelations are both harrowing and
magnificent. |
|
First edition 1964 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
875 |
Peter H Robinson |
GHOSTS |
|
Enthusiastic authors Peter
Robinson and Peter Hesp have researched and brought together a
fascinating collection of ghost stories from the Beverley and East
riding area. The Foreword is by The Rev. Tom Willis, Vicar of Holy
Trinity, Bridlington, and St. John's, Sewerby.
Researched by Peter H. Robinson and Paul Hesp |
|
First edition 1987 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
876 |
Major J. H Webster |
THROUGH CLOUDS OF DOUBT |
|
"About five years ago, when my
wife and I were beginning to recover from the first shock of our son's
passing, Margaret discovered that she possessed what is known as the
psychic faculty. I remember standing by the boy's grave and his mother
saying: "I wonder if Leslie knows we are here." "No, of course not,"
was my reply. Heartless and unkind perhaps, and indicative of my
attitude at that time to the problem of death and to religious sentiment
generally; for, though brought up in a religious atmosphere, the
teachings of Christianity were to me so vague and unsatisfying that I
had no patience with what I regarded as superstitious beliefs. At that
time, too, I regarded myself as the last person in the world to become
associated with Spiritualism, so certain was I that it was all
imagination and fraud. Frankly, I confess that my scepticism would have
held fast to this day if it had not been for Margaret's mediumship,
which brought the matter home to my doorstep, so to speak."
So begins this wonderful book of the evidence that Major Webster
unfolded to break down the walls of his doubt.
Foreword by Sir Oliver Lodge at the request of Mrs Gladys Osborne
Leonard
|
|
First edition 1939 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
877 |
John Scott |
AS ONE GHOST TO ANOTHER |
|
This is the story of John Scott
and how he discovered his gift of automatic writing. Through the
writings which came at great speed, questions were answered even before
the questions had been formed properly in his mind. And, through these
answers he was able to gain knowledge and insight into the spirit world
to pass on to the reader in this fascinating early spiritual book. |
|
First edition 1948 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
878 |
Geraldine Cummins |
THEY SURVIVE |
|
Evidence from the scrips of
Geraldine Cummins
"Do we live in another world after death, or is death the end? Numbers
of people may now be asking this question. The reply to those who
earnestly seek to answer this problem is that patiently conducted
research has provided much evidence which seems to indicate that human
personality does survive the grave. But a point can only be enforced by
accumulated proof. So it has seemed worthwhile presenting in this
small volume, some additional evidence of survival of human personality,
obtained in these automatic writings of Miss Geraldine Cummins."
|
|
First edition 1946 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
879 |
Hannen Swaffer |
MY GREATEST STORY |
|
The reputation of Hannen
Swaffer as one of the great journalists of Fleet Street, giving him the
name the "Pope of Fleet Street" was put to the test as he put all his
skills into operation to uncover the truth about Spiritualism.
This is an insight into the fascinating story of how he came to discover
that the death of the human body does not necessarily mean the death of
the human mind and soul.
|
|
First edition 1945 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
880 |
Alice A Bailey |
THE SOUL AND ITS MECHANISM |
|
The soul works through the
mechanism of the threefold personality. The method by which the soul
and the personality vehicles interact and function together is presented
in this volume: and also the way the human constitution, as a whole and
its component parts, responds to the impact of an evolving
consciousness. |
|
First edition 1930 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
881 |
Gladys Osborne Leonard |
THE LAST CROSSING |
|
Gladys Osborne Leonard was one
of the most celebrated trance mediums of her time, respected by many
and at one point very much instigational in the evidence that was given
to Sir Oliver Lodge in his search for the continuing survival of his son
Raymond.
After the death of her husband Mrs Leonard is prompted to write another
book which follows on from her widely acclaimed previous book My Life in
Two Worlds giving evidence once more that the human spirit never dies.
Since my husband's passing, which took place two years ago, I have had
more personal incentive to investigation of the etheric world, and I
feel that I have had sufficient personal evidence of the existence and
powers of the etheric body to justify me in setting forth my experiences
in this book. The incentive that spurs me on to do this is the feeling
that once we accept the evidence of the existence of this second body,
we are well on the way to an understanding that we possess a vehicle
through which our minds can functionafter death
|
|
First edition 1937 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
882 |
David Clements |
A JOURNEY INTO SPIRITUAL HEALING AND KIRLIAN PHOTO |
|
"This book has been written in a
down-to-earth way, making it easy to understand for people who are
attracted to spiritual healing in the course of their personal spiritual
journey. I believe that everybody has the ability to become a healer.
This book will help you to develop your ability to its highest
potential.
Kirlian photography has also been used to great effect in this book to
show how our life force energy patterns can change after healing has
been received. "Before and after" photographs bring an exciting new
dimension to healing, enabling us to visualise the life force energy and
observe changes that take place during healing".
|
|
First edition 1997 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
883 |
Steven Harrison |
BEING ONE |
|
The best-selling author of
Doing Nothing turns his attention to relationships, and offers us a path
through pain to the love that is already ours. After describing how so
many of us suffer as we flail about looking for love, Harrison reminds
us that we exist in a sea of love but have forgotten that we're buoyant
and able to float. We are already in relationship with everyone and
everything, just as every drop in the sea is part of the whole. Our
problem is that we are separate and we spend our lives looking for
something that is in front of our eyes. To realize our oneness is to
find ourselves, and our Self, in relationship here and now. |
|
First edition 1999 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
884 |
Eckhart Tolle |
THE POWER OF NOW |
|
To make the journey into The
Power of Now we will need to leave our analytical mind and ego behind.
From the first chapter we move into a significantly higher altitude
where one breathes the air of the spiritual. Although the journey is
challenging, the author offers simple language and a question and answer
format to guide us. For many of us there are new discoveries to be
made along the way. We are not our mind; we can find our way out of
psychological pain; authentic human power is found by surrendering to
the Now. We also find out that the body is one of the keys to entering
inner peace, as are the silence and space all around us. If we are able
to be fully present and take each step in the Now; if we are able to
feel the reality of such things as the inner-body, surrender,
forgiveness, and the unmanifested, we will be opening ourselves to the
transforming experience of The Power of Now. |
|
First edition 1999 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
885 |
Robert A Monroe |
ULTIMATE JOURNEY |
|
Ultimate Journey charts the
area that lies "over the edge," beyond the limits of the physical world.
It presents a map of the "interstate" - the route that opens to us
when we leave our physical lives, with its entry and exit ramps,
signposts and hazards. It tells how Robert Monroe found the route and
travelled it, and uncovered the reason and the purpose of this
pioneering expedition. It is a journey that reveals basic truths about
the meaning and purpose of life - and of what lies beyond. |
|
First edition 1994 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
886 |
Dr. Maurice Rawlings |
BEYOND DEATH'S DOOR |
|
All through recorded history,
people have predicted life after death. But only now with modern
resuscitation methods are we beginning to see Beyond Death's Door. "I
was resuscitating a terrified patient who told me he was actually in
hell. He begged me to get him out of it and not to let him die. When I
fully realised how genuinly and extremely frightened he was, I too
became frightened." This encounter spurred Dr Maurice Rawlings, a
specialist in cardiovascular disease, to investigate the startling
accounts of people who have survived clinical death and returned to tell
us about it. By talking to patients immediately after successful
resuscitations, he became convinced of an immediate after-life. For
some it was unspeakable and terrifying, for others, so beautiful and
reassuring that they no longer fear their eventual final death. Dr
Rawlings' dramatic experiences have caused him to make a spiritual
about-face. Formerly, he considered religion "all hocus-pocus", but now
he has turned to Christianity. |
|
First edition 1978 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
887 |
Margot Grey |
RETURN FROM DEATH |
|
For those who have been close
to death, even survived "clinical death", a remarkable experience occurs
which has become known as the Near-Death Experience. Margot Grey
describes how people close to death undergo a sense of euphoria and
floating out of one's body, entering a dark tunnel and emerging to
encounter a brilliant light and experiencing a panoramic life review.
The Near-Death Experience often has a profound effect on the person who
experiences it and can lead to spiritual awakening and psychic
development. The fear of death tends to diminish and in many cases a
total personality transformation occurs. |
|
First edition 1985 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
888 |
P.M.H Atwater, Lh.D |
COMING BACK TO LIFE |
|
The After-Effects of Near-Death
Experiences In 1977, P.M.H. Atwater had an experience that changed her
life: she died. Or rather, she almost died. Like millions of other
people around the world, she had survived a Near-Death Experience (NDE).
Compelled to share this experience with others, she wrote Coming Back
To Life, an account that became an instant sensation, and is now
considered a classic on the subject of NDE. But the story didn't end
there. What followed after her NDE was as profound as the experience
itself and would send her on an exploration of mind and heart. She
learned that, like her, many survivors of NDE had experienced
after-effects that were often life-altering, and sometimes frightening.
In this fully updated book, Atwater shares her extraordinary story, and
those of other survivors, including fascinating accounts of what
happened in the months and even years, that followed their NDE. Since
Coming Back To Life was first published in 1988, she has interviewed
thousands of survivors about their personal, and often remarkable
transformations. Many had increased psychic ability, enhanced intellect
and creativity, heightened senses and spirituality, as well as
confusion and depression. All of them had the desire to change their
lives in some way. |
|
First edition 1998 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
889 |
Jess Stearn |
SOUL MATES |
|
Jess Stearn, a world-renowned
authority on spirituality and reincarnation, is the bestselling author
of many books, including Edgar Cayce: The Sleeping Prophet and Yoga,
Youth and Reincarnation. In Soulmates he reveals how love and
spirituality can merge beyond the limits of space and time, of life and
death to create a perfect union of body and soul. He opens the door to a
series of romantic adventures about real people from all walks of life
with a common denominator - they have sought and found their soulmates.
He investigates and illuminates these provocative and moving stories of
lovers past and present, lost and found. He shows that life is
stranger than fiction and that love and the human spirit are our most
enduring gifts. |
|
First edition 1984 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
890 |
White Eagle Lodge |
A CIRCLE OF LIGHT - video |
|
This video invites you to share
in the life and work of the White Eagle Lodge. It brings the viewer
into the quiet intimacy of some of their spiritual activities such as
the absent and contact healing. You are invited to be behind one of
the many faces at the times of Summer festivities or pre-Christmas Fair;
and it gives you a fascinating glimpse into some of the teaching and
training offered by the Lodge. |
|
First edition 1996 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
891 |
Bill Cox |
A GLIMPSE INTO THE WORLD OF SPIRIT |
|
Brother Joseph explained in his
first book From Earth to Eternity that initially, life might not be
very different from that which you had on the earthplane, but as you
become accustomed to your new circumstances, there is much for you to
learn and much to enjoy. Also, you will be shown some of the mistakes
which you made on earth, and you will be instructed how you can remit
them. Eventually you will be given work to do which will benefit others
who will make their way to Spirit. Brother Joseph has taken a very
small part in this book because he wants you to discover the truth of
what he says from people who have left the earth, some quite recently,
some quite a long time ago. The people you will read about all had
their difficulties on earth. Some had their doubts about the future
life, but in the end, all were able to accept willingly the way the
Spirit world operates. Bill and Brother Joseph hope this book will
encourage you to read others concerning the Spirit world, and that you
will look forward to the future with confidence when it is your time to
pass from Earth. |
|
First edition 2003 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
892 |
Roy Wilkinson |
THE SPIRITUAL BASIS OF STEINER EDUCATION |
|
Education is one of the most
hotly debated subjects of the day. But while politicians and sundry
"experts" argue continually over methods, few seem to have fresh ideas.
This book points to the unique approach of the philosopher and
educationalist Rudolf Steiner, whose spiritual thought has provided
practical new insight. The first school founded on his indications, the
"Waldorf" school, opened in 1919. The movement for Steiner education
has since become international, with literally hundreds of schools in
operation. In this clear and concise work Roy Wilkinson gives an
overview of Steiner education and its spiritual background, showing how
the development of the whole human being is its aim, rather than simply
the dispensing of knowledge. He demonstrates how the inner needs of the
child can be nourished through a choice of subjects and a method of
presentation which accords with the objective development stages of the
human being. |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
893 |
Roy Wilkinson |
RUDOLF STEINER ON EDUCATION - A COMPENDIUM |
|
Rudolf Steiner education
respects the spiritual integrity of each student. It offers creative
opportunities for learning to support the development of the whole
child. Rudolf Steiner was an inspiring teacher, philosopher and
scientist who founded the first Waldorf School in Stuttgart, Germany, in
1919 for workers' children from the Waldorf Astoria cigarette factory.
He pioneered a holistic approach to education for children of all ages.
Today, Steiner schools are found in different cultures throughout the
world. This Compendium re-printed in 2001 to celebrate Roy Wilkinson's
ninetieth birthday is for parents and teachers needing a handy guide to
what Steiner said about education. |
|
First edition 1993 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
894 |
Roy Wilkinson |
RUDOLF STEINER: ASPECTS OF HIS SPIRITUAL WORLD VIE |
|
Roy Wilkinson has been
connected with the work of Rudolf Steiner for over 60 years; first as a
student, then after excursions into the business world, medicine and
agriculture a teacher, lecturer and writer. He has visited schools
worldwide in an advisory capacity, and has had many books published,
several of which have been translated into other languages. His
practical guides for teachers have become standard reference material in
Steiner schools all over the world. These are some of the booklets he
has written:
897-1 Bio-Dynamic Agriculture 897-2 Death and After
897-3 Education
897-4 Christ's Teachings 897-5 The Social Question
897-6 The Human Being and the Animal World 897-7
Anthroposophical Medicine
897-8 Thoughts on the Christmas Festival 897-9
Good and Evil
897-10 On Growing Old
897-11 Speech and Language
|
|
First edition 2001 |
A |
———————————————————————————— |
895 |
Peter Roberts |
THE ASTROLOGY OF TIME TWINS |
|
This scientific study of the
phenomenon of "time twins" explores in fascinating detail the striking
coincidence of two people being born at the same time possessing similar
lives. |
|
First edition 1994 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
896 |
Adam Crabtree |
MULTIPLE MAN |
|
Until now possession and
multiple personality have been seen as the frightening experiences of a
few unfortunate victims. Working from new clinical data, this
fascinating study reveals that possession may be much more common than
has been believed, and that multiple personality may simply be an
unusual form of experiences that are common to us all. |
|
First edition 1985 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
897 |
Colin Wilson |
ALIEN DAWN |
|
An Investigation into the
Contact Experience.
In the 1940's, George Adamski claimed to have been taken to Venus in a
flying saucer. In the 1990's, hundreds of people claim to have been
taken from their beds by little gray-skinned aliens with huge black
eyes, transported aboard a UFO, and subjected to medical examinations.
Alien Dawn is Colin Wilson's encyclopedic attempt to shed light on this
phenomenon. He has writen extensively on philosophy, literature, and the
occult, and he brings an interesting perspective to this field of
study. His primary areas of interest are alienation and the expansion
of consciousness. Throughout all of his work he has maintained that
mankind is on the verge of the next step in the evolution of
consciouness. Ted Brown
|
|
First edition 1998 |
L |
———————————————————————————— |
898 |
John E Mack |
ABDUCTION |
|
After investigating more than
eighty cases of alien abduction and conducting thousands of interviews
and treatment, Dr Mack, professor of psychiatry at Harvard Medical
School, is convinced that these men, women and children are not making
up their stories, but reporting authentic experiences. They tell
remarkably consistent tales of encounters with small grey beings with
huge dark eyes who transport their immobilized subjects to a spacecraft
where captives are probed in a battery of tests that appear to relate to
sexual and reproductive experiments. The details Dr Mack provides will
give food for thought to every reader with an open mind that these
accounts are not hallucinations, not dreams, but real experiences. |
|
First edition 1994 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
899 |
Paul Mckenna |
THE PARANORMAL WORLD OF PAUL MCKENNA |
|
Is it real because you believe
it, or do you believe it because it's real? Paul McKenna, television's
hypnotic genius, takes us on an extraordinary tour of the paranormal.
He investigates real life X Files, cases of UFOs, Extraterrestrials,
Ghosts, Psychokinesis, Telepathy, Psychic Detectives and Superhumans and
redraws the boundaries of what is scientifically "impossible". The
phenomena explored in this book will challenge the way you think. But
then, most scientific achievements also defied the conventional wisdom
of their time. After all, paranormal phenomena are simply those things
that science cannot explain - yet! |
|
First edition 1997 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
900 |
Percy Johnson |
PSYCHIC EXPERIENCES AND MEMOIRS OF MY LIFE |
|
"In April, 1933, a book was
written by Ernest Child Meads called The White Lotus. This book
contained some of the experiences which the Author and I shared during
many years of friendship and in the investigation of Spiritualism. On
several occasions I suggested he should continue the subject in a
further book, as there was so much left unsaid that could be told, and
he was so well qualified for the task. I feel he would have done so had
his life been spared, but he was suddenly called to the Higher Life on
the 25th January, 1937. At the time, I felt that a great many incidents
that could be helpful to many would be lost, and more than one medium
told me to pick up the threads of his life, and to carry on with the
work, but in view of my limited experience I thought it might be more
than I could accomplish. However, asking for help from the many unseen
friends, I took up my pen and wrote a little booklet called Looking
Back, in which I gave many experiences that I had had with Ernest Meads
and which I knew he would have liked to have given to the world had he
lived. Soon after its publication it was suggested by many kind friends
that I should put on record my own private spiritual experiences, so
now I endeavour to give a brief outline of my life, showing some of the
psychic and spiritual events that have come by the wayside." |
|
First edition 1940 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
901 |
Tracey Britton |
TOMORROW IS ANOTHER DAY |
|
Autobiography of a spiritual
counselor
This book explores the various spiritual encounters Tracey Britton has
experienced since childhood, how she learned to make sense of them and
how to incorporate them into improving not only her own life but she
also teaches others to concentrate on the difficult areas in their lives
and how to make the necessary changes to improve and overcome the
problems. The book also focuses upon people who have, like Tracey,
experienced unexplained phenomena and perhaps do not know who to turn to
for fear of ridicule. She encourages readers to follow the meditations
to develop their own spiritual gifts and to use them wisely. Our minds
are 90% untapped so Tracey will explain how, through meditation, how to
dust down the subconscious minds and put them to work for you, creating
the lifestyle that you wish to lead.
|
|
First edition 2003 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
902 |
Tony Stockwell |
SPIRITED |
|
Born in the east end of London
in 1969, Tony Stockwell, even as a child, knew he was different from
those around him and he often told his mother that he felt he had been
born to do something special with his life. His first out-of-body
experience was when he was a baby and, having been aware of spirits and
their voices since early childhood, he met his first spirit person when
he was eight. One of his first messages to his young schoolfriends was
that we cannot die, that death is only a horizon, that we are eternal.
He has been working as a medium for seventeen years and, thanks to his
hugely successful television series, Street Psychic on Living TV, he has
become one of the top psychic mediums in the country. |
|
First edition 2004 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
903 |
Edith Jane Hands |
GLIMPSES OF TRUTH |
|
The autobiography of a gifted
and unusual woman, written as fiction only because she felt that some of
the personalities concerned, or their relatives, might be offended if
their true identities were revealed. She relates her introduction to
spiritualist beliefs by her grandfather as a child, and her slow
awakening to her own remarkable psychic abilities. The author describes
a few remarkable seances held by such well-known mediums such as Helen
Duncan and Leslie Flint, in which she and her husband participated, And
during which they received wonderful proof of the survival of their
loved ones. She also includes an astonishing account of a psychic
operation carried out to remove a malignant cancer by a doctor from the
world of spirit, who operated after earthly surgeons had diagnosed her
incurable, and could offer her only a few months of painful life. This
is a book which will fascinate believers and unbelievers alike, and
provide much material for speculation and debate. |
|
First edition 1988 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
904 |
Anthony Borgia |
MORE ABOUT LIFE IN THE WORLD UNSEEN |
|
Life in the World Unseen gives
one of the most comprehensive accounts ever of what it is like to reside
in the spirit realms. It was received through the clairvoyant
mediumship of Anthony Borgia. The communicator was an old friend,
Monsignor Robert Hugh Benson, the son of a former Archbishop of
Canterbury who, when on earth, wrote an anti-Spiritualist volume, much
to his regret. It was to try and set matters straight that he provided a
series of compelling spirit teachings through Anthony Borgia. More
About Life in the World Unseen is the sequel, though can be read in its
own right. Once again, Monsignor Benson provides a compelling look at
the spirit spheres, covering countless aspects. |
|
First edition 1956 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
905 |
Air Chief Marshal Lord Dowding |
MANY MANSIONS |
|
Hugh Caswell Tremenheere
Dowding, 1st Baron Dowding, 1882-1970, was a British officer in the
Royal Air Force becoming commander of RAF Fighter Command during the
Battle of Britain.
In his retirement Lord Dowding became actively interested in
spiritualism, both as a writer and speaker. His first book Many
Mansions written in 1943 has become one of the greatest classics,
written primarily to bring comfort to the many bereaved in time of war.
|
|
First edition 1943 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
906 |
Myriam Audran |
THE FACE ON THE KITCHEN CUPBOARD |
|
Myrian Audran was born in Sete,
on the Mediterranean coast of France, and has lived in the South of
France all her life. Her journey through life, from a child who did not
suspect that she was different from others, to becoming a clairvoyant,
medium and exorcist with an international clientele, has been arduous at
some moments, exhilarating at others, but never dull. She has had to
open many doors, unravel many secrets and acquire many skills to get
where she is today - and, as she puts it, "the journey has not ended
yet". This book tells all, her joys and fears, her successes and
failures, her hopes and disappointments. It details some of the unusual
situations she's been in and some of the remarkable people she's met.
It is the story of a woman who was open-minded and brave enough to fully
accept the unusual trick life played on her and to assume full
responsibility for her talent. |
|
First edition 2003 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
907 |
R. W. Cresswell |
MY PSYCHIC QUEST |
|
"This book is a resume of my
long, and at times, painstaking search for proof of life after death.
It highlights the particular aspects that have convinced me that
spiritualism, while it will not provide all the answers to man's
problems, furnishes some by proving life after death. I have attempted
to point out some of the many complications and pitfalls that may be
encountered in these investigations. It is hoped that these "Memories
and Milestones" outlining some of my experiences along the way may
strike a chord, and be of some help and guidance to those engaged on a
similar quest. |
|
First edition 1999 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
908 |
W. R. Cross |
FACTS NOT FICTION |
|
A strange story perhaps, but as
it became a part of my life, it was intriguing, enlightening, and
normal. I relocated from Leeds to serve in Buckinghamshire County Fire
Service, and met another active member, George Chapman, who had recently
acquired trance mediumship. Through him a deceased surgeon, William
Lang, healed the sick, sometimes by surgical operations. I had no
knowledge of such matters but my question was "Could he save my wife's
eyesight?" He did. The first time we met William Lang told me I could
have a Home Circle for the development of the psychic abilities of its
members, and I could write a book on the subject. Everything he said
came true. This is the book, on my friendship of nearly thirty years
with George Chapman and William Lang, the intimate personal story of how
they work together, the many conversations with William Lang, his
account of his healing service from the spirit side of life and views on
mediumship, religions, people, and life in general. |
|
First edition 1982 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
909 |
Jack Temple |
THE HEALER |
|
Jack Temple is a dowsing healer
who has been in practise for over twenty years. Many well-known public
figures have consulted him, including Diana, Princess of Wales; Sarah,
Duchess of York and Jerry Hall. He identifies the existence of toxins
by dowsing with a silver pendulum, clearing the magnetic energy field
around the body and applying homeopathic remedies to balance the
patient's energies and encourage natural healing. A veteran contributor
to Here's Health magazine, he runs a successful clinic in Surrey,
England. His mission is to pass on his knowledge and techniques to a
new generation of practitioners.
With a foreword by Sarah Ferguson, Duchess of York
|
|
First edition 1998 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
910 |
Carol Adrienne |
THE PURPOSE OF YOUR LIFE |
|
This book is packed with
illuminating anecdotes and profiles of fascinating people - from artists
to urban planners to Zen masters - who describe how they found their
true purposes. There are practical exercises throughout, along with
charts, self-questionaires, and other tools that help you understand
yourself and your deepest aspirations. As you learn to recognize and
trust the voices of intuition and uncommon sense, you will find new
doors opening and new possibilities everywhere. This book will help you
uncover the unsuspected, untapped power of synchronicity and intuition,
and set you on the road to success, satisfaction, and a firm sense of
the work you were put on Earth to accomplish. |
|
First edition 1998 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
911 |
Katie Coutts |
THE GHOST WHISPERER |
|
Katie Coutts was born in
Glasgow in 1965 and began to have her first psychic experiences as a
child around the age of six. According to Katie, there are ghosts
everywhere just itching to make themselves known. And she should know:
becoming a renowned healer and "ghostbuster" with her own psychic
practice, she has met up with more than her fair share of spirits. In
this book Katie introduces us to the spirits that she has personally
known; she tells us of the ghostly experiences that she has shared with
her clients and from her newspaper column in the Scottish Sun she
recounts the best selection of real ghost stories that she has received
from her readers. Katie also gives her own interpretation of many
well-known historical ghost stories, from headless horsemen to Bonny
Prince Charlie. |
|
First edition 2003 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
912 |
Colin Wilson |
GHOST SIGHTINGS |
|
Ghost stories are as old as the
question "What happens when we die?" From meetings with dead relatives
to visions of Roman soldiers, there are too many stories for ghosts to
be dismissed as superstitious nonsense. So what are they? There are
stories of animal ghosts, even ghosts of vehicles such as phantom ships
and coaches. Could it be that they are recordings of the past, somehow
preserved to be played in the present? This remarkable book examines
the evidence and the theories. What is the truth behind "poltergeists"
or noisy ghosts, spirits that hurl glasses and move furniture? What
earned Borley Rectory the title "the most haunted house in England"?
Consider for yourself the question "Do the dead live among us?" |
|
First edition 1997 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
913 |
Edie Devers PH.D. |
AFTER-DEATH COMMUNICATIONS |
|
The concept of after-death
communication has been present for most of human history, but it is an
area that scientists have only just begun to explore seriously. in her
groundbreaking new book, After-death Communications, Edie Devers, one of
the field's pre-eminent researchers, takes this extraordinary yet
misunderstood occurence out of the shadows and brings it into the light.
After-death communication (ADC) is, quite simply, an instance of a
living person having contact with someone who has passed away - usually a
loved one. Although it has a profound effect on the bereaved, the
person involved does not often experience all the beneficial aspects of
ADC because of widespread scepticism surrounding the phenomenon. Devers
examines every perspective of ADC, including the stigma associated with
it, and the ways in which survivors reconcile their private experiences
of ADC with the public presentation of it. This book provides a keen
insight into the nature of ADC's and explores how its benefits should be
acknowledged and integrated into our lives. |
|
First edition 1997 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
914 |
Dr Harmon H Bro |
A SEER OUT OF SEASON |
|
Gifted since childhood with the
ability to enter into trance-like states of consciousness, Edgar Cayce
could diagnose illnesses he had never studied, cure ailing people he had
never met and prescribe successful treatment with no formal medical
training. His powers of prophecy and his ground-breaking psychic
perceptions stunned a sceptical world over four decades. Harmon
Hartzell Bro, a leading scholar of Edgar Cayce, draws on hundreds of
interviews with relatives, associates and even sceptics, to create this
fascinating biography. Viewing the whole of Cayce's life through his
journals, dreams, lectures, case studies and accounts of his
reincarnated lives, this definitive work highlights the amazing
contribution of one man to the spiritual growth and health of humanity.
This book shows Edgar Cayce not merely as a medium or a mystic, but as a
modern-day seer, isolated by his burdensome gifts and by the awe he
inspired in others. Yet in a world that now possesses the terrifying
ability to destroy itself, Cayce's timeless ideas of faith, healing and
peace may have finally found their season. |
|
First edition 1990 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
915 |
Norman Maclean |
DEATH CANNOT SEVER |
|
Norman Maclean, the Minister of
St Cuthbert's parish church in Edinburgh examines the possibility of
life continuing after death in relation to what is taught in the Bible. |
|
First edition 1932 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
916 |
Howard Storm |
MY DESCENT INTO DEATH |
|
My Descent into Death is Howard
Storm's full story: from his sometimes frightening near death
experience in Paris to his full recovery back home in the United States,
and the subsequent transformation of his life. Storm also communicates
what he learned in his conversations with heavenly spiritual beings,
revealing how the world will be in the future, the real meaning of life,
what happens when we die, the role of angels and much more. What he
has to say will challenge those who believe that human awareness ends
with death.
"For twenty years, I have been listening to and reading innumerable
accounts of near-death experiences, but I have rarely encountered one as
powerful as Howard Storm's"
Dr Kenneth Ring
|
|
First edition 2000 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
917 |
Richard Carlson |
DON’T SWEAT THE SMALL STUFF… AND IT'S ALL SMALL ST |
|
So many of us would like to
live our lives in a calmer and less stressful way, and be able to let go
of our problems. Don't Sweat the Small Stuff… shows you how to stop
letting the little things in life drive you crazy. In 136 short essays,
Dr Richard Carlson teaches us, in his gentle and encouraging style,
simple strategies for living a more fulfilled and peaceful life. We can
all learn to put things in perspective by making the small daily
changes he suggests. With these thoughtful and supportive suggestions,
he reveals ways to make your actions more peaceful and caring, and
encourages you to trust your intuitions so that you live each day as if
it might be your last. |
|
First edition 1997 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
918 |
Miss Elizabeth Baxandall |
POEMS FROM AFAR |
|
The poems in this book are
received by Miss Baxandall through automatic writing - that is - the pen
held by Miss Baxandall is lifted up and used by the Spirit to write, in
their own handwriting - either poems or philosophy. The writers of
these beautiful poems have given no names. It is hoped they will bring
both enjoyment and be thought-provoking.
Copies of this book can be obtained by writing to Miss Baxandall at 98
Fairfield Road, Morecambe, Lancs. LA3 1JP The price of this non-profit
making booklet is £2.50 inc postage.
She is trying to raise funds for her next publication
|
|
First edition 2003 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
919 |
Leo Gough |
MEDIUMSHIP - A BEGINNER'S GUIDE |
|
Mediumship has been practised
in all cultures throughout history. We all have mediumistic power, and
while not everyone can become a working medium, we can all benefit from a
better understanding of this fascinating art. This book is a
straightforward introduction to exploring your own mediumistic
abilities, working with practising mediums, channelling and healing. It
looks at spiritual systems, how to find the system that is right for
you, and why religions forbid spiritual communication. Whether you want
to become a medium yourself, or simply understand what mediumship is
about, this book will give you the grounding you need to undertake a
journey of discovery into the spirit realms. |
|
First edition 1997 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
920 |
Rita Rogers |
LEARNING TO LIVE AGAIN |
|
Grief is one of the strongest
emotions that we can face, arising as it does from the deep wells of
love, affection and habit that tie us to one another. It is difficult
to articulate the painful and often conflicting feelings that emerge
from the various natural stages of grieving. But Rita Rogers, with her
extraordinary gift for dealing with loss, can shine a light into that
darkness, revealing that the people with whom we have shared love and
friendship in this life can live, albeit in another dimension, looking
out for us and leading the way.
With compassion and understanding, Rita is our companion throughout the
grieving process, reassuring us that even our most destructive and
isolated feelings are part of a natural reaction. Addressing particular
losses of young and older children, of siblings, parents, soul mates
and those lost by suicide or in tragedies, Rita reaches across the
divide of death, bringing the energy, the joy and the memories of those
lost lives back into our broken hearts, and helping us all to learn to
live again.
|
|
First edition 2003 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
921 |
John Ivimy |
PSYCHO-ELECTRICS |
|
The theory propounded in
Psycho-Electrics was developed over a long period of time. It began at
the end of World War II, when "flying saucers" or UFO's kept appearing
in the skies over Europe and America. Descriptions of their
extraordinary performances and capabilities as reported by many reliable
witnesses showed that these objects could not be solid, nor could they
be propelled by any known material force. That left the possibility
that they might be some kind of electro-magnetic phenomenon spinning
freely in the air. The extraordinary triad of air disasters which
occurred near New York in the winter of 1951/1952 indicated the presence
of strange electric currents in the neighbourhood of crashed aircraft.
This added a new, psychic, dimension to the mystery. A theory of
"psycho-electricity" began to take shape. But there was no room for any
such theory within the strict confines of conventional physics. That,
and the fact that top scientists were all baffled by these mysteries,
suggested that there might be something missing from the basic elements
of their philosophy. The author, a Classical scholar, compares the
Aristotelian mathematics of modern science with the earlier, digital
view of Pythagoras and Plato. He finds the latter more logical. It is
also able to accommodate the force of Life through its mathematical and
moral doctrine of reincarnation. The theory was substantiated first by a
second trial of air disasters, and then by the worldwide Crop Circle
phenomenon. Other phenomenon for which the theory offers rational
explanations are ghosts and hauntings, and spontaneous human combustion.
The book ends with chapters on the two greatest artists and thinkers
of the Italian Rennaissance five hundred years ago, Leonardo da Vinci
and Raphael Sanzio, their adoption of the mathematical philosophy of
Pythagoras and Plato, and their predictions of the Second Coming of
Jesus Christ. |
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
922 |
Stephen O'Brien |
THE SPIRITUAL KEYS TO THE KINGDOM |
|
Through his gift of mediumship
Stepen O'Brien has delivered to thousands of seekers irrefutable
evidence of the survival of the souls of their loved ones after death.
Through his books, educational recordings, media broadcasts, and via the
Internet, his spiritual teachings have circled the planet and have
enriched millions of lives. This book comprises a treasury of timeless
inspirational guidance that he has received over a number of years from
wise discarnate souls and together with his own thoughts, it contains
some passages of great poetic beauty and simplicity. |
|
First edition 2002 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
923 |
James Van Praagh |
HEAVEN AND EARTH |
|
Millions of readers have been
enthralled and had their lives changed by James Van Praagh's
extraordinary ability as a psychic medium to communicate with the world
beyond. In this book he combines inspiring accounts of his amazing
communications with spirit beings with a practical programme for
expanding our own innate pychic abilities and intuition. He explains
that the spirits can serve us as teachers, companions, creative
inspirers and protectors. Heaven and Earth are the two poles of our
consciousness. This extraordinary work will show you how to connect the
two within yourself and transform your understanding of life. |
|
First edition 2001 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
924 |
Dalai Lama |
THE DELAI LAMA'S BOOK OF WISDOM |
|
Inspirational words from one of
the leading spiritual figures of our time.
His Holiness the Delai Lama, the exiled spiritual leader of the
Tibetan people, offers simple advice to all those who want to bring more
wisdom, understanding and compassion into their lives. With humour and
a down-to-earth approach, this book is an indispensable guide to life.
|
|
First edition 1995 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
925 |
Ursula Roberts |
WISE STORIES FOR CHILDREN |
|
This book is for children of
all ages from seven to ninety-seven. The stories are fun, easy to read,
and deceptively simple and they contain a wealth of spiritual insight
and wisdom. The stories follow the timeless tradition of all good fairy
tales which the reader can enjoy at many levels. Not only are they
entertaining, they are indeed "wise stories" containing spiritual wisdom
that is universal in its appeal. |
|
First edition 1947 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
926 |
Edited by Ivan Cooke |
THE RETURN OF ARTHUR CONAN DOYLE |
|
In the year 1931 a certain
occult brotherhood in France, well known for its good and charitable
work in Paris, received a mysterious message by means of a unique and
secret method. This communication, which did not proceed by means of
telepathy or mediumship, came from a Brotherhood of Adepts living in the
Himalayas, who were working ceaselessly for the spiritual illumination
of mankind. "Since his recent death", the message ran, "Sir Arthur
Conan Doyle has awakened to a life on the other side and has been
greatly surprised at the real conditions prevailing there. He now
urgently desires, with the Sages' help, to give to the world a
restatement of the earlier beliefs once held by him both as a confirmed
Spiritualist and as a champion of that movement. This restatement is to
prove a new revelation about the life after death, which he is now
enabled to desribe from his actual experience. This revelation forms
the true core of religion for those who seek it, for it gives an
essentially reasonable explanation of the compassionate law governing
life, death, and the life hereafter. |
|
First edition 1933 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
927 |
Jeannie H Judd |
BEYOND THE RAINBOW CLOUD |
|
In this account of
life-altering experiences, of joyful reunion and a mutually shared
journey of discovery, much-missed TV gardening presenter Geoff Hamilton,
an apparent non-believer in most matters esoteric while incarnare,
returns to share with readers glimpses of his etheric life now, and
pesonally created "bit of heaven" gardens. Through Jeannie, Geoff also
channels his thoughts on many confusing aspects of physical life,
gleaned from knowledge he has gained since passing. In the hope his
truth will help liberate those struggling with various problems, Geoff
has chosen to come back and help guide us all in ways of living our
physical lives joyfully to the full, free from controlling misconceptios
and fear, demonstrating the natural continuance from life to the life
beyond death. |
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
928 |
B Abdy Collins |
DEATH IS "NOT" THE END |
|
The great majority of those who
consider that survival is proved and call themselves spirtitualists,
base their conviction on some personal experience or experiences. Few
have the time or inclination to study the evidence as a whole. Intimate
personal experiences convince those who are fortunate enough to meet
with them but do nothing to help those who are so unlucky as not to have
them and will never break down the opposition of the inveterate sceptic
and the scientific and religious world. The real case for survival
rests on the great mass of evidence which has been recorded mainly in
the last eighty years or so. Numerous books have been written
purporting to deal with the whole question, but they are either
incomplete or else so voluminous that the ordinary person cannot or will
not acquant himself with their contents. The object of this little
book is to give a summary or outline of the case for survival in such a
form that anyone can comprhend it and with such brevity that anyone
interested in the subject can find leisure to read it. At the same time
references are given under each heading to some of the best books or
records so that any particular line of inquiry may be followed further. |
|
First edition 1939 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
929 |
Harry Edwards |
SPIRIT HEALING |
|
In another excellent book,
Harry Edwards explains how the gift of healing manifests itself, how it
can be developed, and what the healer feels while the healing is taking
place. |
|
First edition 1960 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
930 |
Harry Edwards |
THE POWER OF SPIRITUAL HEALING |
|
"This book is not so much a
scientific appreciation of spiritual healing as an effort to present the
healing story in a simple way to enable everyone to have a measure of
understandng of its powers, processes and purpose and how all who are in
need can benefit from it. Its scope takes into account the healing
activities in the churches and other healing movements, outlining the
common denominators that link them together on the premise that
spiritual healing is God's gift to all His children, irrespective of
race or creed. Its main purpose is to show how healing can help all who
are sick, no matter what the affliction may be, and from my experiences
and stories written by those who have been healed from "incurable"
diseases to illustrate the manner which recoveries take place" Harry
Edwards |
|
First edition 1963 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
931 |
Robert A. Monroe |
JOURNEYS OUT OF THE BODY |
|
When, unpredictably and against
his will, Robert Monrow began to have out-of-body experiences, he was
frightened and disbelieving. He found that he could leave his physical
body to places far removed from the material and spiritual realities of
life on earth. He came to inhabit a world unbounded by death or time.
As Robert met many other people who have had similar experiences and
read the literature of the East that documents the long history of this
phenomenon his fears were alleviated. His journeys became more frequent
and began to change his life. This classic, first-hand account of
out-of-body experiences challenges us to revise our ideas about life and
death. His step-by-step instructions invite the reader to initiate
their own out-of-body experiences. Robert Monroe is the founder of the
internationally renowned Monroe Institute for Applied Sciences, known
for its work on the effects of sound wave forms on human behaviour, and
the Mind Research Institute, which undertakes extensive psychological
and psychic research. |
|
First edition 1972 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
932 |
Robert A. Monroe |
FAR JOURNEYS |
|
In his second book Robert
Monroe introduces readers to his remarkable excursions out-of-body and
into outer consciousness. Now, after more than a decade of in-depth
psychological and psychic research, he presents an all-new, all-true
mesmerizing odyssey that takes you even further beyond the known
dimensions of the physical universe. Written with great insight and
wit, Far Journeys offers a new awareness of the untapped resources and
limitless possibilities of the human mind. |
|
First edition 1985 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
933 |
Colin Wilson |
BEYOND THE OCCULT |
|
Colin Wilson has been exploring
the field of the paranormal ever since he began the research for his
first highly successful book, The Occult. Now, after twenty years of
further research, he examines the whole spectrum of the mystical and
paranormal, producing a general occult theory that is at least as
convincing and powerful as the evidence for the existence of atomic
particles. Linking fascinating glimpses into the universe of the
paranormal with the latest scientific thinking on the nature of
"psychic" reality, he begins with the usually unseen powers of the human
mind: ESP, precognition, clairvoyance, psychokinesis, psychometry,
dowsing. From there he moves on to the profoundly mysterious:
poltergeists, spirit possession, reincarnation - that have convinced him
of the reality of disembodied spirits. In Beyond the Occult Colin
Wilson puts forward a powerful case that our so-called "normal"
experience may in fact be subnormal, and that evolution may have brought
us near the edge of a quantum leap into a hugely expanded human
consciousness. |
|
First edition 1988 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
934 |
J Dover Wellman |
A PRIEST'S PSYCHIC DIARY |
|
Are psychic experiences
contrary to the accepted revelations of Christian faith? J. Dover
Wellman thinks not, and this story of his ministry describes the many
acts of healing and exorcism which he has performed through a specially
manifested power. Some people call this telepathy or second sight, but
he is conscious only of its divine origin. Reflecting on his
experiences, he argues that extra-sensory perceptions have combined with
the traditional Christian dimension to shed light on such questions as
the relation of life to death and of the soul to the body, and suggests
that the Church needs to take account of psychic faculties so that they
may be used for good. |
|
First edition 1977 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
935 |
J Dover Wellman |
A PRIEST AND THE PARANORMAL |
|
Paranormal experiences may be
simple, gentle and re-assuring, sometimes categorised as coincidence.
Others can be complex, disturbing and even frightening. In this book
the author describes some examples of them occurring in his early years,
and some in which he has been involved during his forty years ministry
as a priest of the Church of England. He views them as re-inforcing
faith in the lordship of Jesus Christ over the spiritual realm, and the
reality of His healing Presence. He believes, therefore, that the
Church should ernestly consider, and be concerned with the paranormal. |
|
First edition 1988 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
936 |
May Clark |
TEACHING OF INFINITE WISDOM |
|
"My training for mediuship
began five years ago, under the leadership of St Leonards based
international medium and lecturer Teresa Doherty, who's encouragement I
have found invaluable helping me to bring forward spirit guides who's
teachings hold much wisdom, those who have listened to them have asked
that they might be published, which has now been made possible. I hope
all who read this book may find help, guidance, comfort and a greater
awareness from the truth they bring". May Clark |
|
First edition 1994 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
937 |
Sophia Williams |
YOU ARE PSYCHIC |
|
"Sophia Williams is one of
Americas most well known mediums. Born in Kansas City, she lived for
ten years in Chicago, and finished growing up in New York. At 16 she
went into vaudeville as a dancer. When her mother passed away her
father attended a Spiritualist meeting and received a message that
convinced him of the reality of survival. The author began to study
psychic phenomena and metaphysical philosophy and with her father,
sister and son (now a colonel in the U.S. Air Force), she began to sit
every night. There were loud raps on the very first occasion, and a
code was established. After four years of development work, Mrs
Williams began to hear a high frequency sound in her apartment. This
soon distilled into intelligible words. The phenomenon occurred in
bright light, and continued throughout her mediumship. Mrs Williams
also developed clairvoyance and clairaudience and from her immense
expertise, the valuable lessons in this book were derived." |
|
First edition 1946 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
938 |
Christine Wicker |
THE SPIRITS OF LILY DALE |
|
Twenty thousand visitors a year
travel to Lily Dale, the birthplace of Spiritualism and the oldest and
largest community of Spiritualists in the world. They come to this
little Victorian village in upstate New York to consult the town's
mediums, who can pull dead relatives from the beyond, predict the
future, and provide healing and solace. This book delights, entertains
and pulls at the heart strings, as Christine Wicker, who came prepared
to scoff, stays to learn her own lessons about the limits and
possibilities of what humans can know. Through the extraordinary
stories of men and women in search of hope and peace, as well as her own
discoveries, Christine has woven a gripping tale. Sometimes
laugh-out-loud funny, often tender, and ultimately profound, The Spirits
of Lily Dale is a moving portrait of love, loss and belief. |
|
First edition 2003 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
939 |
Dore Deverell |
LIGHT BEYOND THE DARKNESS |
|
Dore Deverell's son Richard had
led a difficult life, plagued by physical and mental illness and
depression. When he committed suicide at the age of 36, Dore was
naturally devastated, suffering the intense anguish of a mother's loss.
But she was determined to search for healing and reconciliation. This
book is the first-hand account of how Dore Deverell made contact with
Richard after his death. |
|
First edition 1996 |
E |
———————————————————————————— |
940 |
Gregory Haye through the trance mediumship of Mick Avery |
SPIRIT WALKS WITH GREGORY |
|
This second book by Gregory
Haye continues the stance of greater thought enabling the reader to
understand the connection between their spirit and the world on which
they live. Individuals sometimes tend to believe that only those who
are aware of their gifts of insight can understand such subjects and so
fail to identify their right of access to their true pathway. This
tendancy is extended to the perception of how any one may bring about
real change for themselves through this, or any other like doorway, and
this itself creates a vacuum in front of it. Knowledge is to share, and
this book serves to show how self-improvement can change our thoughts
and perspectives into something real and positive, for the good of all.
With setting the path of right thought, giving everyone a way to see
and put aside the pain and fear they carry within, it shows how they may
embrace a better vision of life - not just for themselves but for those
to follow. |
|
First edition 2003 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
941 |
James Christie |
THE LIGHT IN THE DARKNESS |
|
The incredible true story of
Stephen Holbrook and his contact with the world of spirit.
Stephen Holbrook has been described as "Britain's Most Accurate Medium".
Author James Christie, who has had more than thirty years experience
working in the realm of the paranormal, has written a highly revealing
and illuminating biography that not only gives deep insight into the
every day life of a modern clairvoyant, but also provides a valuable
introduction to the world of spiritualism.
|
|
First edition 2000 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
942 |
James Christie |
OUT OF THIS WORLD |
|
Stephen offers compelling
evidence for life after death. In so doing he brings reassurance and
comfort to hundreds of people night after night, acting as a "telephone
exchange" between this world and the next. This book provides a more
detailed account of Stephen's work, and also gives a more intimate view
of his character. In this volume not only do we get a clearer vision of
Stephen's gifts of clairvoyance we also meet the family man and the
reconteur and the reader is allowed a glimpse of his remarkable sense of
humour! Since the publication of part one of this ongoing biography,
many people have wished to share the messages they have received from
Stephen during his demonstarations. These are touchingly recountered,
providing personal proof that their loved ones have indeed survived
death. |
|
First edition 2002 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
943 |
Dolores Cannon |
BETWEEN DEATH AND LIFE |
|
What happens at the point of
death? Where do we go afterwards? Does one's personality survive after
death? How are the good and the bad experiences for life accounted
for? What is the purpose of life?
These are questions everybody asks. No one is better qualified to
provide reasonable answers than Dolores Cannon. During fifteen years of
detailed research, this widely-experienced, well-respected, past-life
regression therapist has accumulated a mass of credible information
about the death experience and what lies beyond. While reliving their
dying experiences, hundreds of subjects reported the same memories. The
similarity and sincerity of their recollections are too convincing to
be ignored. This book is a good introduction to the death experience,
to guides and guardian angels, to ghosts and walk-ins. It examines
different levels of existence in the spirit realms; the healing places
for the damaged; the schools where we integrate lessons learned on Earth
and where we discover the laws of the Universe; how we plan our next
incarnation, the lessons to be learned and future karmic relations
before birth.
|
|
First edition 1993 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
944 |
Barbro Karlen |
AND THE WOLVES HOWLED |
|
For as long as she can
remember, Barbro Karlen has harboured terrible memories of a previous
existence on earth as the Jewish girl Anne Frank, author of the famous
Diary. Until recently, she had kept this knowledge private. Now,
prompted by a series of events which culminated in a struggle for her
survival, she is ready to tell her story. "An extraordinary book…
deserves to be take seriously" International Herald Tribune |
|
First edition 1997 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
945 |
Arielle Ford |
HOT CHOCOLATE FOR THE MYSTICAL SOUL |
|
101 true stories of miracles,
angels and healing.
Like a cup of hot chocolate on a cold night, the inspiring collection of
stories in this volume will nourish and soothe your soul. Storytellers
from all walks of life reveal the mystical things that have happened in
their lives. Doctors, lawyers, actors, teachers, postmen, musicians,
amongst others, describe experiences that have deeply affected their
view of the world. These include miracles, near-death experiences,
encounters with holy men and women, divine interventions and amazing
coincidences - there is such a wonderful variety that each reader will
find many that touch them personally. Hot Chocolate for the Mystical
Soul includes contributions from many leading figures of the
spirituality movement, including Neale Donald Walsch and Joan Borysenko.
It is the perfect book for anyone who loves magic and mystery, and who
believes that an unseen, loving presence is watching over us.
|
|
First edition 1998 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
946 |
Carolyn de la Hey |
LIFELINE |
|
This book is extremely
practical in supplying answers to the perennial questions which arise in
man's mind about immortality, good and evil, suffering, and why we are
here on Earth at all. Carolyn de la Hey became interested in psychic
research as a result of her own and other people's experiences. Her
investigations into the subject have left her well qualified to record
the teachings relayed through Elizabeth Bedford from the Spirit World.
It is to this Spirit World that we shall all go when our time and our
work on Earth are completed. Elizabeth Bedford is a highly respected
and gifted trance medium with a reputation second to none. She has over
forty years experience behind her, and her views on the faculty of
mediumship are enlightening. |
|
First edition 1978 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
947 |
Margery Eyre |
THE REVEALING LIGHT |
|
Whilst carrying on the active
exterior life demanded of the wife of a member of parliament, and with a
growing famly, Margery Eyre developed the receptivity which enabled her
to listen to the voice of her inner spiritual teacher, finding him a
being very close to her. In this way she obtained the spiritual lessons
recorded in this diary. These, though personal to her, have also
proved invaluable over the years to many leading an often lonely life
and facing difficult spiritual problems, but without the direct and
kindly spiritual advice she received. Advice pointing gently to a way
forward - rewarding though disiplined. |
|
First edition 1962 |
D |
———————————————————————————— |
948 |
Margery Eyre |
THE SEEKER AND THE FINDING |
|
Many who have enjoyed in life a
close and loving companionship nevertheless feel that this somehow
never reaches the ultimate in closeness. Still more have found their
life deprived of any worthwhile relationships. Is this persistent sense
in human beings of the possibility of ever-growing companionship no
more than an illusion, born of emotional starvation? Or is it true and
real, capable of being satisfied, although in terms not at first
expected or understood? Is it possible to reach such companionship with
one now beyond the veil of death, who has never been known in this
earth at all? This book - a sequel to The Revealing Light - tells how
such a close companionship came about. The price to be paid for it was
one of continual inner discipline and often of sacrifice. It involved
constant hard work in eliminating weaknesses and difficulties in the
author's own character. On the way, she was called upon to throw away
many of her personal spiritual treasures, and hard though this was, in
the end the loss was turned to gain. The reader of this enthralling
spiritual pilgrimage will find how worthwhile this inner journey proved
to be, and the subtle and unexpected rewards it brought. |
|
First edition 1974 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
949 |
Iris Gunner |
CHOICES |
|
The Story of a Psychic. "A
medium or psychic is no different to anyone else, all without exception
have the "6th Sense," we are but forerunners of our future progression,
i.e.. learning of the spirit world and how to "tune in with it," and we
are only instruments, a link, to help I feel, our fellow people. The
animals of the earth as Saint Francis of Assisi says are among Gods very
special creatures, they help us work, carry us, guard our homes, but
most of all they bring us joy and laughter. The biggest lesson on my
own particular path has been to teach me respect for all life forms and
life itself."
In this enlightening book Iris shares with us the spiritual
experiences that she has had on her own unusual journey.
|
|
First edition 1999 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
950 |
Sonia Choquette |
DIARY OF A PSYCHIC |
|
Shattering the myth that being
psychic is weird, sinister,or at best reserved for the special or
strange, Sonia lends proof to the truth that the sixth sense is our
natural God-given inner compass - without it, we'll lose our way. With
disarming candor and humor, she shares her own psychic journey,
including all of the struggles she's encountered along the way. Sonia
who grew up in a large Catholic family in Denver, not only sees the
future (as well as past lives), but she can see a person's soul plan and
purpose in life. |
|
First edition 2003 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
951 |
Jess Stearn |
THE DOOR TO THE FUTURE |
|
Jess Stearn investigates the
startling truth about the men and women who can see into the future,
whose strange predictions have baffled science for centuries. One lady
he spoke to about a prediction she had been given early in life told
him the following:
"You know," the actress said, When I was still unknown in New York,
having a difficult time getting even bit parts, a woman named Rava told
me I was going to become a world-famous star." She seemed rather amused
that the prediction had materialized. "That would have been a pretty
good guess for anyone looking like you," I said dubiously. "Perhaps,"
she said, "but she was rather definite about what I was going to do." I
shrugged as she went on..
"But she was certainly wrong about one thing." She laughed. "She said
I was going to become a princess." I was not to think about this again,
at least not for another year or so, when the Philadelphia-born beauty
met Prince Ranier and they shortly thereafter became Prince and Princess
of Monaco.
|
|
First edition 1963 |
J |
———————————————————————————— |
952 |
channelled by Irene Bays |
ENTWINING LIVES |
|
This book is the first venture
of The Eastbourne Christian Spiritualist Church into the publication of
works of importance to Spiritualists and others who are seeking the
Truth of Life and the Hereafter. It represents a verbatim record of the
messages received through a trance medium, sitting with a group of like
minded people over a period of some two years. This book will, by its
teachings, help you to help others - especially in the field of healing.
It also contains many prophesies, some of which have already taken
place. |
|
First edition 1994 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
953 |
J. E. Best |
LINK AND COMMUNIQUE |
|
This book takes a far-reaching
look at phychical events. It does so in the context of a narrative of
exploration. The narrative starts at a time of acute personal crisis
for the author - in fact the story is virtually compelled by this
crisis. A motor accident was responsible for the sudden death of his
fiancee, Marjorie. He and she had discovered - it seemed remarkably -
that, mutually, they could operate certain forms of access to one
another at will and regardless of separation by distance. The fact of
this ability and of its continuation after her death convinced the
author that Marjorie still existed as her own self. From that point
there emerged a fascinating line of progress: the author's inevitable
quest for understanding was met by a series of developments, some
totally unexpected and puzzling - themselves adding to his motivation.
What sort of world do we live in if it assures the survival of human
personality beyond death? How does one properly think of that life
beyond? How do the answers fit in with the important growth of ideas of
these present times? Marjorie, from a standpoint which could resolve
such momentous questions, was anxious to offer enlightenment. Her
response was given in an ongoing communication; and harnessing many
resources to its progressive expansion. The expansion took the quest
far past the possibilities of the initiating and out-of-the-ordinary
link-up established in Marjorie's lifetime. It pieces together
far-ranging psychical issues and relates them to existing knowledge.
And in a field which is essentially human it does much to support the
deeper aspirations of the human spirit. |
|
First edition 1991 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
954 |
Michael Grosso, Ph.D. |
EXPERIENCING THE NEXT WORLD |
|
From the scientific underground
of psychic research comes a stunning report on the evidence for life
after death. But all the proof in the world is nothing when compared to
actual experience with the place beyond. This book takes the reader to
the next level - and offers a more personal kind of journey. If there
is a "next world," it must be nearby, and the path leads through the
gateways of our own minds. Philosopher Michael Grosso shows us how to
open these passages - or at least peek through a keyhole - and glimpse
what may lie beyond. |
|
First edition 2004 |
G |
———————————————————————————— |
955 |
LaserLight Videos |
SÉANCE |
|
Is there another level of
existence awaiting us after death? Mediums, claiming to be called by
spirits, conduct Seances with the dead. Through these psychically
gifted people, departed loved ones send messages of comfort. |
|
First edition 1996 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
956 |
John Holland |
BORN KNOWING |
|
In Born Knowng, psychic John
Holland explains in his open and candid way how he dealt with his
conflict by coming to terms, and finally accepting, his rare abilities
as a spirit messenger who helps people connect with those who have
passed on. Born in the tough suburbs of Boston, John coped with a
difficult childhood, where he was ridiculed by his family and society,
leaving him feeling isolated because of his psychic abilities. He
refused to acknowledge his gift until a near-fatal automobile accident
amplified his skills to the point that he had to learn how to control
what was once pushed away. Drawn by the history and knowledge of
spiritualism in England, John went on a two-year journey throughout
Great Britain. He tells the story of his training in the British
spiritualist organizations and his time at Arthur Findlay College, an
institution for psychic studies that John refers to humorously as
"Spirit Boot Camp." He goes on to explain how he gained acceptance and
respect within this tightly knit, often-conservative community.
Throughout the book, John presents real-life case studies where he
discusses his readings with clients, the effect on their lives, and the
sense of closure people feel, knowing that their loved ones who have
passed on are still with them. |
|
First edition 2003 |
H |
———————————————————————————— |
957 |
Gary E. Schwartz, Ph.D. |
THE AFTERLIFE EXPERIMENTS |
|
John Edward, Suzane Northrup
and George Anderson are just a few of the prominent American mediums who
have been accused of being frauds. But what if a respected scientist
challenged them to make contact with the beyond under controlled
laborotory conditions? What if the results not only stunned a skeptical
scientist but also offered astonishing answers to a timeless question:
Is there life after death? Risking his academic reputation, Dr Gary E.
Schwartz asked well-known mediums to become part of a series of
experiments to prove, or disprove, the existence of an afterlife. This
riveting narrative, with electrifying transcripts, documents stringently
monitored experiments in which mediums attempted to contact dead
friends and relatives of "sitters" who were masked from view and never
spoke, depriving the mediums of any clues. In this book are the results
that awed sitters and researchers alike. |
|
First edition 2001 |
I |
———————————————————————————— |
958 |
The Lynwood Fellowship |
THE LYNWOOD FELLOWSHIP NEWSLETTER |
|
The Lynwood Fellowship for
Spiritual and Metaphysical Studies was founded in 1983 by Medium and
Author Don Galloway and a group of well experienced people in the fields
of study of the Paranormal, including all aspects of Psychical Research
and every aspect of Holistic Healing. Residential seminars are held in
Derby, Castleton and Scarborough giving a warm, friendly welcome both to
residents and none residents alike who are keen to spend a few days in
the company of like minded individuals. The week long seminars offer a
wonderful programme of events that include evidence of survival from
highly gifted regular and visiting mediums, enlightening philosophical
talks, awareness workshops and group meditation. The Quarterly
Newsletter gives members the opportunity to share moving stories,
experiences and poems..etc, and informs of future events and seminars.
Back Issues: www.jhardaker.plus.com 2 Issues |
|
First edition No Date |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
959 |
The Abu Trust |
THE ABU TRUST |
|
AUDIO CD ( AUDIO TAPE-959T ) The Abu Trust was formed in 1990 to promote the profound spiritual teachings of Abu. Many others also communicated from the spirit planes through the fine mediumship of W.F. Rickard, to the Norman Hunt Circles over many years. The "Circle" led by Norman Hunt sat at Tunbridge Wells, Kent for 15 years. Approximately 12 dedicated members met regularly at least twice a week and tape recordings were made during the sittings. This CD has been produced to provide the listener with some background information about the Abu Trust and the informative spiritual teachings, science and philosophy available through audios and books. Audio CD www.abutrust.co.uk |
|
First edition No Date |
|
———————————————————————————— |
960 |
Vicki Wells |
THE HIGHLAND POSTAL LENDING LIBRARY |
|
THE HIGHLAND POSTAL LENDING
LIBRARY
Another Free Postal Lending Library now exists in the Highlands of
Scotland. Details can be obtained by contacting Vicki Wells at The
Highland Postal Lending Library, "Strathyre", 30 Sutors View, Nairn,
IV12 5BT. Tel: 01667 451863.
e-mail: vicki@wills4528.freeserve.co.uk
www.thpll.co.uk
|
|
First edition No Date |
|
———————————————————————————— |
961 |
David Hodges |
DO WE SURVIVE DEATH |
|
A descriptive bibliography and
discussion on the evidence supporting survival. Although the modern,
mainstream, view is that death is the end of everything, historically
most people have believed in some form of survival and recent surveys
suggest that this remains a widely-held belief. But is there any real
evidence supporting a continuation of life after death, or is it a
belief based on the fear of eventual oblivion? In the form of a
detailed descriptive bibliography and discussion, Do We Survive Death?
surveys a wide range of research and investigation published over 150
years. It covers many of the readily-accessible books and reports which
describe the evidence supporting the concept of survival. It concludes
that the weight of available evidence, much of which is of a sound
scientific nature, strongly supports survival. |
|
First edition 2004 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
962 |
Derek Acorah |
THE PSYCHIC ADVENTURES OF DEREK ACORAH |
|
Star of TV's Most HauntedDerek
Acorah first noticed his psychic gifts as a child and shortly after his
early football career with Liverpool FC, quickly became in demand as a
medium. He is now the UK's number one TV psychic, appearing regularly
on LIVING tv's hugely successful Most Haunted, as well as Celebrity Most
Haunted and Psychic Live. From his hugely popular and personal readings
to his hit televised explorations, Derek has dealt with some of
Britain's most notorious spirits and conducted countless haunting
investigations. The sceptics are being silenced. Believers are being
blinded by the light. What will YOU find when you enter the psychic
adventures of Derek Acorah ? |
|
First edition 2004 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
963 |
Derek Acorah |
GHOST HUNTING WITH DEREK ACORAH |
|
Star of TV's Most HauntedDerek
Acorah first noticed his psychic gifts as a child and shortly after his
early football career with Liverpool FC, quickly became in demand as a
medium. He is now the UK's number one TV psychic, appearing regularly
on LIVING tv's hugely successful Most Haunted, as well as Celebrity Most
Haunted and Psychic Live. From his hugely popular and personal readings
to his hit televised explorations, Derek has dealt with some of
Britain's most notorious spirits and conducted countless haunting
investigations. The sceptics are being silenced. Believers are being
blinded by the light. What will YOU find when you enter the psychic
adventures of Derek Acorah ? |
|
First edition 2005 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
964 |
Archie E. Roy |
THE ARCHIVES OF YOUR MIND |
|
Professor Emeritus of Astronomy
in the University of Glasgow, Archie E. Roy is a Fellow of the Royal
Society of Edinburgh, the Royal Astronomical Society, the Institute of
Physics and the British Interplanetary Society. He is also a member and
previous President of the Society for Psychical Research and Founder
President of the Scottish Society for Psychical Research. In this book
his choice of well authenticated cases spanning three continents,
investigated sometimes over many years by some of the world’s most
respected psychologists, physicists and psychical researchers provides
weighty evidence that the paranormal exists. |
|
First edition 2005 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
965 |
Ada Mckay |
WHY I AM A SPIRITUALIST |
|
This book is intended to be a
very simple introduction to the Spiritulist faith containing a very
personal statement of Ada McKay’s beliefs and why she believes in it, as
apposed to the teachings of the established Christian Churches. A very
interesting perspective on what Spiritulism means, providing sufficient
interest for those to follow on and explore Spiritulism for themselves. |
|
First edition 2007 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
966 |
Stan A. Ballard Rodger Green |
THE SILVER BIRCH BOOK OF QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS |
|
Why are we here? What happens
when we die? Do we reincarnate on earth? ... and hundreds of other
questions which been put to the spirit guide Silver Birch over the
years. The answers provided by this great spiritual teacher are the
essence of simplicity and his words are imbued with compassion, love and
understanding. They will comfort the bereaved, inspire the seeker and
encourage everyone who reads them to review their life and its purpose. |
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
967 |
Allison Dubois |
DON'T KISS THEM GOODBYE |
|
Allison Dubois is a gifted
psychic medium. Her instincts have helped find missing people, she has
predicted future events and can sense ones thoughts. These are some of
the extrodinary gifts that define this remarkable medium. A wife and
mother whose life is the inspiration for the TV show Medium. If you have
ever questioned whether there is an afterlife, this book will help you
see that there is a living energy beyond death. |
|
First edition |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
968 |
Aurthur Findlay |
THE UNFOLDING UNIVERSE |
|
This book completes completes
Aurthur Findlay’s much acclaimed triology, the two previous books being
“On the edge of the Etheric” and “The Rock of Truth.” Mr Findlay writes
of a “new era.” The days of faith are passing and the day of of
knowledge has arrived. Consequently creeds, dogmas, ceremonials and
rites must fade away in the light of the new knowledge, which must in
time be accepted by all mankind, not by faith but from experience.
Spiritualism is the name he gives to this new knowledge. He consistently
appeals to facts and not to faith and never departs from the scientific
method. His philosophy and psychic experiences satisfies all human
desires as to life, conduct on earth, and our destiny after death. |
|
First edition 1988 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
969 |
Susan Phoenix |
OUT OF THE SHADOWS |
|
Having suffered the loss of her
husband in a helicopter crash, then losing both her parents soon after,
it wasn’t until three years later she was able to come to terms with
what had happened. With the power of her angel guides and with the help
of clairvoyants Susan became to understand that her husband was, as she
suspected, still very much part of her life. This is a unique testimony
of the inspirational help available to all of us from the spirit world. A
story of a journey back from grief with warmth, humour, candour and
faith, to inspire us all. |
|
First edition 2005 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
970 |
Emma Hardinge Britten |
AUTOBIOGRAPHY |
|
The extraordinary life of Emma
Hardinge Britten has been a source of inspiration to many Spiritualists
throughout the past one hundred and fifty years. She was the founder and
editor of “Two Worlds” and journeyed throughout the world publicising
her own experience and philosophy of Spiritualism. This autobiographical
account of Emma’s life is both astonishing, interesting and
electrifying to say the least. The power of the Spirit world did not
only manifest itself in her life, but expressed itself positively,
through her, bringing about The National Federation of Spiritualists
which later changed its name to the Spiritualists’ National Union. |
|
First edition |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
971 |
Tony Orizen |
MORE PHILOSOPHY OF SILVER BIRCH |
|
This book contains a compendium
of Silver Birch’s philosophy and teachings as they relate to personal,
national and even international affairs. They contain his views as
recorded verbatim during seven years sittings of Hannen Swaffer’s home
circle. The subjects chosen are deliberately diverse. He welcomes the
thorny questions from which many would prefer to shy away from. In
simple but profound language he paints a vocal masterpiece with an
economy of words skilfully used to their full potential. |
|
First edition 1988 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
972 |
Sir William Crookes |
CROOKES AND THE SPIRIT WORLD |
|
Sir William Crookes was one of
the most renowned scientists of the 19th century. This book documents
the scientific experiments carried out by Crookes to test and prove the
reality of the well authenticated medium Daniel Douglas Home. Home’s
mediumship was genuine and appeared to transcend the laws of nature.
Convinced though he was that there was a “psychic” force in the world
unaccounted for by orthodox science, he maintained a rather guarded
attitude to the purported spirits assumed by his Spiritulaist
contempories to lie behind the paranormal phenomena. His shifting views
on survival and spirit entities are among the curious features examined
in some detail in this book. |
|
First edition 1972 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
973 |
George G. Ritchie |
ORDERED TO RETURN |
|
In December, 1943, 20 Year old
Army private George Ritchie died of pneumonia. Nine minutes later he
came back profoundly changed. What happened to him while his dead body
lay under a sheet would change his life, and that of his family, friends
and patients. He briefly recounts the strange experience in his first
book Return from Tomorrow and then tells what happed later, including
the real miracles that he has seen in his years of practice as a
physician and psychiatrist. What’s more he offers penetrating insights
into what is wrong with American Life today and how it can be set right. |
|
First edition 1998 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
974 |
Lyn G De Swarte |
SPIRITUALISM |
|
Spiritualism is concerned with
communication with spirits, but is also a religion, a philosophy and a
way of life. At its heart is the belief that spirit exists distinct from
matter; that not only is life eternal but that this can be proved
through mediumship. This introductory guide explains the history of
Spiritualism, clairvoyance, clairsentience, clairaudience and
inspiration, the difference between psychics and mediums, spirit
possession, Spiritualist healing, psychic surgery and Spiritualism in
the 21st century. |
|
First edition 1999 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
975 |
Stephen Turoff |
PSYCHIC SURGEON |
|
Every day an average of fifty
people make their way to Stephen Turoff’s clinic. Patients from all over
the world travel to see him. Some critics call him a fake but for many
people who have been healed from life threatening conditions he is a
miracle worker. This is the story of Stephen’s life and healing work and
describes how his surgical techniques have developed over the last
twenty years. Twenty four years ago he encounted Sai Baba, the Indian
mystic, who influenced his work in fascinating ways. Those who meet him
are intrigued by this ordinary working man who speaks with the wisdom of
an Indian sage. |
|
First edition 1997 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
976 |
Sir Oliver Lodge |
MAKING OF MAN |
|
In this book Sir Oliver Lodge
gives some reason for his optimistic attitude to life and the universe.
He seeks to prove that evolution is a reality leading to a real increase
of value; and that the history of mankind provides sufficient grounds
for a reasoned hope of almost infinite progress. It is marked not only
by his intellectual sincerity and precision but also by the reverence
with which Sir Oliver always approaches the deep problems of life. He
has not only the sense of proportion but that rarer quality, the sense
of eternity. |
|
First edition 1938 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
977 |
Deepack Chopra |
LIFE AFTER DEATH |
|
With warmth, logic and
understanding Dr Chopra explores the theory that death is an illusion of
the senses and that the soul survives in an ongoing spiral of
refinement that ends in enlightenment. Drawing upon his personal
experience, the wisdom of ancient Vedic philosophy and state-of the-art
particle physics. Chopra helps us to overcome our fears and to consider
all the remarkable possibilities that may await us in the afterlife.
Thought provoking exercises offer a first hand experience of these and
other ideas, encouraging spirtitual growth and readiness without
requiring anyone to abandon their beliefs. |
|
First edition 2006 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
978 |
Mary T. Browne |
THE POWER OF KARMA |
|
Karma is the powereful ancient
law of cosmic cause and effect; your actions in past lifetimes can
determine what happens to you ..... today! Put simply what goes round
comes round, but you do have the power to control destiny, no matter
what your past karma. Renowned psychic Mary T. Browne brings
fascinating real life stories from her clients who have transformed
their lives by changing their karma. With indispensable tips and
powerful affirmations she teaches you how to do the same, so you can
find greater health, love, security and balance in your life. |
|
First edition 2003 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
979 |
Gordan Smith |
THE UNBELIEVABLE TRUTH |
|
The internationlly respected
medium Gordan Smith astounds people with the messages he brings from
the other side. For many years he has encountered what has been termed
the paranormal world - a world which challenges our collective
understanding of what is real. Gordan guides us through this unseen
world and explains in his own down to earth style, what happens when we
die, what the afterlife is like, reincarnation, memories of past lives,
out of body experiences, the truth about ghosts, poltergeists and
hauntings and many other subjects. |
|
First edition 2004 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
980 |
Richard Webster |
SPIRIT GUIDES AND ANGEL GAURDIANS |
|
A workbook for spiritual
contacts is at once a gripping series of firsthand accounts. A well
organised source of historical information, and a straigthtforward
how-to book. This book shows you step by step exactly how to contact
your own invisible helpers, and how to find out, or achieve, anything
you wish. |
|
First edition 2002 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
981 |
Joan Hodgeson |
WHY ON EARTH |
|
The commonest form of suffering
is the ignorance that man is spirit in a mortal body, and that spirit
is free, deathless, and is divine and living as its origin. This is the
central principle of White Eagles teaching and is the essence of all
religion. This book was written to provide young people with an
introduction to White Eagles teaching. |
|
First edition 1995 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
982 |
Jacky Newcomb |
ANGELS WATCHING OVER ME |
|
An account of many miraculous
and uplifting stories of real-life contact from our loved ones and
angels on the “other side” of life, as well as a fascinating
investigation into the secrets of afterlife communication. Learn simple
and safe ways to reach out to your family of heavenly angels. These
messages will bring comfort and healing to anyone who has lost someone. |
|
First edition 2007 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
983 |
Gordan Smith |
LIFE CHANGING MESSAGES |
|
This entertaining and
enthralling book by the UK’s most highly repected medium, Gordan Smith,
will inspire and move you. He allows people to describe their
experiences of his messages in their own words and talks about how he
brings these messages to people, how they impact on him and what he
understands about the nature of the other side. |
|
First edition 2007 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
984 |
Lama Surya Das |
LETTING GO OF THE PERSON YOU USED TO BE |
|
For many people, recent years
have been characterised by profound changes, whether they relate to
financial upheavals, political shifts or massive losses of life to
diease and violence. Even on a personal level, each person must confront
the curves life throws his or her way. One of todays most respected
spiritual teachers has crafted a fulfilling and important path to
understanding and healing ourselves in this troubled world. Through his
reflections, use of personal stories, anecdotes, practical execises and
guided meditation, he addresses lifes most universal difficulties in a
profound way that is accessible to all. |
|
First edition 2004 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
985 |
Doris Forster |
PEARLS OF WISDOM |
|
This book is a collection of
teachings which will appeal to all, to those simply seeking answers to
lifes questions and to serious students already on the path of learning.
It covers questions asked by all of us who seek explanations and
enlightment, and covers topics such as relationships. reincarnation,
healing, religion and clairvoyance, with truths and observations that
are both simple and thought provoking. |
|
First edition 1991 |
B |
———————————————————————————— |
986 |
Linda Williamson |
MEDIUMS AND THEIR WORK |
|
A fresh insight and
straightforward explanation of the fascinating but much misunderstood
subject of mediumship. Still associsted in many peoples’s minds with
table turning and disembodied voices, modern mediums employ a very
different style to that of their Victorian forbears. Focusing on some of
the most famous mediums in the country, with whom many the author has
worked. She explores the mechanics of mediumship in simple terms amd
offers advice for the readers who wish to investigate the subject
further. Finally she explains how the potential for mediumship can be
safely developed. |
|
First edition 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
987 |
Justine Picardie |
IF THE SPIRIT MOVES YOU |
|
Justine’s sister died of cancer
and this book tells the story of her life a year after her sisters
death. A search for the afterlife in the age of reason, of scepticism,
of science. It tells of a yearning for a voice amongst the silence that
appears when someone dies; or how the space fills itself. Filled with
significant characters from Justine’s life as well as the spiritualists
she encounters, its a poignant and sad book as well as brave and
uplifting. |
|
First edition 2001 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
988 |
Dr Brian Weiss |
SAME SOUL, MANY BODIES |
|
Dr Brian Weiss reveals how
future lives can transform us in the present. We have all lived past
lives. All of us will live future ones. What we do in this life will
influence our lives to come as we evolve towards immortality. Using
dozens of case histories, Dr Weiss demonstrates the therapeutic benefits
of progression therapy to bring patients more peace, joy and healing,
just as he has shown that the journeys into our past lives can cure
physical or emotional wounds in the present. |
|
First edition 2004 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
989 |
Sylvia Browne |
VISITS FROM THE AFTERLIFE |
|
An internationally renowened
psychics view of ghosts, spirits and hauntings. Sylivia Browne’s
describes her personal encounters with ghosts and explains their
appearences. In visiting haunted homes, ships and other locations, she
comes face to face with the troubled spirits who are still unaware of
their own fate. A journey through the afterlife providing an
unprecedented look at how the spirit world influences our daily lives. |
|
First edition 2004 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
990 |
Ray & Gillian Brown |
A MERE GRAIN OF SAND |
|
Ray Brown is a trance medium
and for up to seven hours each working day he allows his body to be
occupied by a remarkable “spiritual surgeon”, Paul of Tarsus. Ray has in
the past thirty seven years healed thousands of people when
conventional medicine could not help in Britain, Africa, Europe and
Asia. Employing advanced medical science techniques, he says Paul has
returned not only to to heal and ease suffering but to teach non
Christian spirituality and answer that age old question: do we really
survive physical death. |
|
First edition 2004 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
991 |
Robert Brown |
WE ARE ETERNAL |
|
Recounting his amazing life and
work. Robert Brown vivdly recreates real-life encounters with spirits
and their urgent messages for those still here – revealing what they
tell him about life on the otherside and the universe we live in. He
explains what authentic mediums can do and how to spot a fraud. How we
can turn our own gifts with his expert guidance in developing
clairvoyance, psychometry – even the ability to communicate with the
spirit world. This book illustrates the power of love to transcend even
death and presents a moving testimony to the fact that we are eternal. |
|
First edition 2003 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
992 |
Sally Morgan |
MY PSYCHIC LIFE |
|
At the age of four Sally saw
her first ghost. Since then she has been speaking to spirits and passing
on their messages, hopes and fears with astonishing accuracy. It took
first hand experiences of intense conflict and personal turmoil, as well
as a particular disaster in her life to help understand how to take
control of the mysteries of the spirirt world and become a professional
medium. Star of the popular ITV series Star Psychic this is Sally’s
remarkable story. |
|
First edition 2008 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
993 |
Dr Sam Parnia |
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN YOU DIE |
|
Working in hospitals Dr Sam
Parnia faces life and death issues every day. Through his work in
critical care, he became interested in some of his patients accounts of
the experiences that they had while clinically at the point of death.
After collecting these stories and gathering the latest research on the
subject he set about his own series of experiments which has culminated
in this book. His ground breaking study explores the answer to the
ultimate question: what really happens when we die. |
|
First edition 2005 |
K |
———————————————————————————— |
994 |
Aruthur Conan Doyle |
BOOK OF THE BEYOND |
|
This book contains a remarkable
series of messages from Sir Arthur during the eighteen months after his
passing in 1930 through the medium Grace Cooke. They paint a vivid
picture of the afterlife describing the planes of consciousness through
which man evolves and which Sir Aurthur claims man can actually
experience in this life. An inspiring testament which offers the reader a
huge amount of hope and faith in the world of spirit, as well as a
deeper knowledge of his or her own potential. |
|
First edition 1994 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
995 |
Dr Brian Weiss |
MESSAGES FROM THE MASTERS |
|
A spiritual guidebook that
shows you how to capture the healing energy of love. Dr Brian Weiss
reflects on dozens of cases from his files and draws on the wisdom of
the spirit guides known as The Masters to explore a range of topics
including immortality, reincarnation, destiny, inner peace, health,
happiness, our own past lives and how to uncover them. |
|
First edition 2000 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
996 |
E.G. Fricke |
GOD IS MY WITNESS |
|
His diagnoses are uncanny. His
achievements miraculous. There are no other words for it says actor
Chrisopher Lee one of the many celebrities who have experienced the
healing powers of Ted Fricker. An interesting insight into the
fascinating life story of a man with extrodinary healing powers who
describes himself as having a foot in both worlds, who offers hope to
those who see nothing but the extinction of mind and body when they die.
|
|
First edition 1977 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
997 |
John Edward |
AFTER LIFE |
|
Internationmally acclaimed
psychic medium John Edward presents a follow up to his first book “One
Last Time” demonstrating again that grief, healing and hope are
eternally intertwined and universal. John answers the most often asked
questions about how the mediumship process works on the other side. He
takes you inside his personal life as a husband and new father
demonstrating through his own personal losses that your never to late to
forgive – and never to far away to love. |
|
First edition 2004 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
998 |
M.Scott Peck |
IN HEAVEN AS ON EARTH |
|
Dr M Scott Peck author of
several non fiction books including “The Road Less Travelled”, gives us
his single vision of what we can expect when life as we know it, ends.We
follow the travels of Daniel, a writer and psychiatrist like Dr Peck
himself, through the realm of the afterlife meeting with the guides who
help him on his journey in a place of both wonder and familiarity. A
profound book about the self – a book in which Dr Peck’s vision of how
to thrive in the afterlife can teach us important things about living
our own lives here on earth. |
|
First edition 1996 |
F |
———————————————————————————— |
999 |
Margaret Le Grange |
THE SCENT OF ANGELS |
|
Battlefield memories. True
stories received in clairvoyance from servicemen and women serving
during the Great War, World War 11, Korea, Japan and the Pacific,
service men and women who never had a head stone or proper grave who
were reported “missing presumed dead”. They made contact by using words,
sounds and smells often when the author was in her garden, car or
during her healing circles. |
|
First edition 2005 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |
1000 |
Jacky Newcomb |
AN ANGEL SAVED MY LIFE |
|
An inspiring collection of true
stories from the other side, revealing how our Gaurdian Angels
intervene in our lives, often in our darkest hour of need. The author
recounts her own experiences of exploring her own spirituality and
boundries, recounts experiences of others in different parts of the
world and then looks at the mysteries of the afterlife and contacts
through the veils of heaven. |
|
First edition 2006 |
C |
———————————————————————————— |